Home

WMS Reference Manual

1. Figure 3 23 Grid Created from Feature Objects Importing Feature Points Feature points can be imported from two different sources Digital Line Graph DLG files and digitized points Imported points which are not connected together to form arcs become points They can later be connected together using the Create Arc E tool to form arcs Deleting Feature Objects Feature objects can be deleted by selecting the feature object s to be deleted and hitting the DELETE or BACKSPACE or by selecting the Delete command from the Edit menu If the Confirm Deletions option in the Edit menu is active you will be prompted to confirm each deletion This is helpful in 3 36 WMS preventing accidental deletions The confirm deletions flag can be toggled by selecting the Confirm Deletions item Changing Feature Points Nodes Vertices Positions Two methods of editing feature points nodes vertices positions and z values are available To manipulate positions and z values the appropriate select tool points nodes or vertices tool must be selected e A feature point node vertex can be moved to a new position by clicking on it and holding down the mouse button while dragging it to the desired position e The feature point node vertex position can also be modified by selecting the point and changing the xy values that appear in the x and y edit boxes Updating Basin Data When the drainage coverage feature objects are used to c
2. 7 13 converting to feature polygonN 6 23 CONVEX ML cta 6 17 creating from DEMS cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 33 creating from feature objects 3 33 ercatins trance susan it 6 3 creatine VOTES unta 6 2 delineating watershedS oooooonnnnnnncncnnnnnnnnns 1 15 display PLN cdi 6 4 displaying boundary ccccccccccncnnononononnnnnnnnoss 6 5 A O A 6 23 7 1 Index 1 13 editing automatically cccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 6 18 i E ENE A NE ET ee 2 8 20 3 A Gio cioets ema shaaess 6 21 NENS agan 6 20 from 2D CHIC a ai 17 8 Importing from GIS esseseessseeeeeeeees 1 23 A seas 6 15 TOG a as o iieza 1 23 6 1 Sn 6 14 6 20 storage capacity CUIVES oooooonccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 7 9 subdividing triangles occcccccnncccnnnnnnnnm 6 14 N lla 6 10 tool CASC2D dynamic palette o ooo 19 2 CLEA ALC VEN EX iain 3 8 5 3 create CUS SE ma as 3 39 CRE ALG MG us ase 3 39 CTC ALG DOM riiniec vase a 3 8 5 3 ercate FeClaNn Cressy idos 3 39 create te Cueca ds 3 39 create aN CIES aida 6 3 Crealo VECES dia 6 2 create Xy series polni csod 21 5 DEM contour labels rasa ntanerncanvees 4 2 DEM dynamic palette oooooooooooonnnnnnnnos 4 drawing objects palette oooooooonnnnnoos 3 39 dynamic Palete oi 2 5 feature objects paletltio naaa inic n 3 7 TOW Palin in 5 2 6 4 A Woeuesdtexeameeeneaten 2 3 DAA ao 2 4 pla
3. xn x ly1 Y coord of cell boundaries y2 Yny DELEV_ el Default elevation for grid Figure 20 9 2D Grid File Format GRID2D ID 5758 TYPE 1 DELEV 0 000000000000000e 00 IJ y X DIM 4 4 10 000000000000000e 00 3 333333333333334e 01 16 666666666666667e 01 11 000000000000000e 02 10 000000000000000e 00 13 333333333333334e 01 16 666666666666667e 01 1 000000000000000e 02 Figure 20 10 Sample 2D Grid File The card types used in the 2D grid file format are as follows os File Formats 20 9 Card Type GRID2D Description File type identifier Must be on first line of file No fields Required _ YES Cad type Description Defines the type of grid as either cell or mesh centered Required YES Format E i S Sample E 0 Field Variable Value Description 1 1 0 1 The type code i 0 for mesh centered i 1 for cell centered Card Type W Description Defines the orientation of the i j indices Required YES Format TS sidir Ajdir Sample tS ey Field Variable Value Description Cid 1 OE EX y ds direction corresponding to an increasing i D tdia x ty The direction corresponding to an increasing index CardTypee oM S O OE Description Defines the dimensions of the grid Cd Required YES O OSOS Format DIM nx ny x 42 xnX Y1 y2 Yny Sample EE YY
4. SCAT2D BEGSET NAME gages ID 8493 DELEV 0 00000000000e 00 IXY 25 1 1 47000000000e 02 3 90000000000e 02 2 8 82000000000e 02 9 49000000000e 02 i 24 1 73000000000e 02 7 01000000000e 02 25 5 39000000000e 02 8 98000000000e 02 ENDSET Figure 20 12 Sample 2D Scatter Point File The cards used in the 2D scatter point file are as follows Card Type SCAT2D Description File type identifier Must be on first line of file No fields Required YES Card Type BEGSET Description Identifies the beginning of a scatter point set No fields Required NO File Formats 20 11 Card Type NAME Description Defines the name for the following scatter pointset Required NO Y Format NAME name o O Sample NAME wells O OSOS Field Variable Value Description The name for the following scatter points Remains as default until new NAME card is encountered Card Type ID Description Defines the ID for the scatter point set o oo Required YES O OE Format A Sample 11949098 Field Variable Value Description 1d The ID for the following scatter point set Card Type DELEV Description Defines the default elevation for the scatter point set Required NO Format Sample DEUEN A A SS Field Variable Value Description 1 el The default elevation for the following scatter
5. Define Basins The Define Basins command assigns each triangle in the TIN to a drainage basin This is accomplished by initiating a flow path from the centroid of each triangle and flowing down until an outlet point is encountered The triangle is then assigned the appropriate basin ID The boundaries may appear rough or jagged because each triangle is assigned according to the flow from its centroid when in fact the triangle may actually straddle basin boundaries Boundaries may be corrected by issuing the Refine Boundaries command The drainage basin boundaries option in the Drainage Display Options dialog is automatically set when defining basins Refine Boundaries After the initial definition of drainage basins many of the boundaries are rough or irregular Triangles straddling true basin boundaries can be split using the Refine Boundaries command This process is accomplished by tracing paths of maximum upward gradient along boundaries splitting triangles when the path crosses over them and then reassigning all affected triangles to their new basins The process is displayed graphically 7 7 3 7 7 4 7 7 9 7 7 6 1 1 1 Drainage TINS 7 11 Correct Split Flow Vertices Split flow vertices can usually be corrected by finding a channel edge leading into the split flow vertex and swapping it This edge swapping can be done automatically using the Correct Split Flow command from the Drainage menu If the edge cannot
6. oooooonnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnns 6 18 O sas eet A 2 6 Edit HEC 1 Parameters caidas 10 9 Edit TR 20 Paramete Siaina 11 4 edit window feature points nodes Vertices ooocccccccnnnnoc 3 36 Clear dada 16 4 background Map ccccccccccnnnnnnnnnnoonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 3 33 DEV ocn 4 8 A 17 5 Mappia its 16 6 A e PT Go o O O 6 20 TESTO TIN io 6 21 A E ETE EE 6 6 6 9 Walter SUMaC Edo tenes teas telen Secunia 8 4 Index 1 5 SlEV ALON ZONES tada dais 7 13 EMRL TRG I ETE EEEE T E AEA TEE TE EA 1 PRON aid idolo 1 enabling WM oooooooooccccccnnnnnnnnnnnononononnananccnnnnnos 2 26 enero DIAS cd icaid 10 21 enais DUN ooa aloe ease 10 4 SNNAN CIS TE DONS oLar a s 3 39 equation IM ATMS o ia 15 34 A i sunaaeaseeaoectaes 15 35 equations combining from ALCS occccccncncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 15 32 custom defined for NFF ooocccccccncncccnnnnnnnnnn 14 5 FHWA sa ON 15 28 Maricopa Coun din 15 30 open channel flow oocccccccccccnnnnnnommmo 15 27 shallow concentrated flow 15 27 SHEGE TOW A II A 15 26 SP deems 15 26 Usera nd 15 31 equations for time of concentration 15 25 ESC key erecatno EAM CIES tas 6 3 LAW ING Siria oi 2 34 select DY DOLY ON iorsin ins 2 27 selecting vertex strings occccccccccononnnnnoncnnnnnnss 6 2 E AE A A AE A TAA T T A 2 26 exponentalidlOsSS neea 10 16 EPOR oia a O 2 20 ARC INFO Grid sos 2 21 ARC INFO point generate file 2 21 ARC INFO
7. Figure 16 7 Gage Plot Manager Dialog The Curves Dialog The set of curves displayed in each plot can be edited by selecting the Curves button in the Gage Plot Manager This button activates the Curves dialog shown in Figure 16 8 Two lists of curves are displayed in the dialog One of the curves is always highlighted in each list The list on the left represents the curves which are available for plotting The list on the right represents the curves which are being displayed in the selected plot Initially the list on the right contains one curve for each data set These curves represent the values of the data set interpolated to the gage locations The list also contains one curve for each of the measured curves imported with a gage file Curves in the available lists are moved to the list of plotted curves using the Selected gt and All gt buttons The Selected gt button moves the highlighted curve and the All gt button moves all of the curves Likewise curves can be moved from the plotted curves list to the available curves list using the lt Selected and lt All buttons The display options for the highlighted curve in the plotted curves list can be edited using the group of controls at the bottom of the Curves dialog The curves can be plotted by displaying a symbol at each point on the curve or by displaying a line through the points or with a combination of points and lines The symbol line thickness and line style ca
8. The Select Basins tool 1s used to select basins for operations such as assigning loss unit hydrograph precipitation and other basin data as well as deletion It can be used to select basins from either the TIN or Tree representation of the watershed and behaves identically to the Select Basin tools from the TIN module Al Select Diversion The Select Diversions tool is used to select diversions for entering editing diversion data or deletion Diversions are displayed on the topologic tree only el Select Hydrographs The Select Hydrographs tool is used to select hydrographs which can then be displayed in the Hydrograph Window Multi selection operations are available with this tool so that hydrographs from different locations can be overlaid Tree Display Options The Hydrologic Modeling tab in the Display Options dialog Figure 9 1 allows you to control the appearance of items displayed on the topologic tree A drop down menu allows you to select when you want the tree to appear on your model 1 Only when in the Hydrologic Modeling model 2 Always the tree will always be displayed in the Graphics Window 3 Never the display of the tree is turned off Variables can be set to control whether or not the names and icons of the outlet points and basins are displayed 9 3 1 9 3 2 Topological Trees 9 3 Display Options Ei TIN Drainage Flood DEM Map Hydrologic Modeling 2Gid Scatter Point _ Hydrograph i
9. meandering drainage paths Maximum roughness Rough land surfaces Mountains 0 030 0 20 with torturous flow paths Surface runoff is Some wetlands concentrated in numerous short flow paths C Moderately high roughness Land surfaces Hillslopes 0 025 0 15 that are oblique to the main flow direction Conversion of watershed area between sq miles and acres may be required in order for this equation to compute the proper time of concentration Because the appropriate rainfall intensity value is a function of t you will need to define an IDF curve equation The ZDF Curves dialog used as part of the rational method is used to set up equations relating i to t See section 13 3 3 for more information on developing IDF curves User Defined Because it would be impossible to contain all possible equations used for computing travel times a user defined equation may be defined for any arc segment When user defined is selected for the arc type the Modify Equation button in the Time Computation Attributes dialog Figure 15 6 is active By selecting this button you can use the Modify Equation dialog see Figure 15 7 to create modify a suitable equation User defined equations can be created by typing in the equation edit field using the following rules for precedence 1 Parts of the equation in parentheses have the highest precedence 15 32 WMS 2 Multiplication and division have higher precedence than addition
10. n Mannings 0 50 P fur 24h rainfall 2 350 in 5 Slope 0 039 ttt L Length 7346 146 ft Hydraulic Radius Ealeulatei Time of Concentration has units of hours Cancel Variable value o on0 OF Figure 3 10 Time Computation Arc Attributes Dialog Time of concentration or lag time for a basin is determined by summing the travel times of all time computation arcs within a basin A summary of how this is automated within WMS and further information on defining equations and computing travel times for time computation arcs is given in the hydrologic calculators chapter in section 15 3 There are no point node or polygon attributes in Time Computation coverages MODRAT Coverages FO601 is a modified rational method program developed by Los Angeles County and is only useful for hydrologic analysis in LA County There are three different coverage types that have been implemented in WMS to aid in the mapping of important F0601 parameters from GIS coverages These coverages include rainfall zone debris production zones DPA zones and time of concentration data Further variations within the soil type and land use zones are also used with FO601 data Use of these coverage types is described in a separate manual delivered to users of the FO601 model Cross Section Coverage The Cross Section coverage type can be used to view the cross section of any polyline on a TIN or DEM WMS does not include an interface to
11. points Remains as default until new DELEV card is encountered Card Type IXY Description Defines a scatter point set Required YES Format IXY np idi X1 Y1 1d2 x2 Y2 idnp Xnp Ynp Sample IXY 4 LA BAS A DADAS ba Dll ea LT Bons A Fiela Variable Value Description i np The number of scatter points in the scatter point A OS 2 id The ids of the points 3 4 Xy Y The coordinates of the points Repeat fields 2 4 np times Card Type ENDSET Description Identifies the end of a scatter point set No fields Required NO 20 12 WMS 20 8 ASCII Data Set Files Data sets can be stored to either ASCII or binary files Multiple data sets can be stored in a single file and both scalar and vector data sets can be saved to the same file The file format is identical for 2D and 3D data sets The ASCII data set format is shown in Figure 20 13 A sample data set file 1s shown in Figure 20 14 For scalar data set files one value is listed per vertex cell node or scatter point For vector data set files one set of XYZ vector components is listed per vertex cell node or scatter point If necessary a set of status flags can be included in the file If the status flag is false O the corresponding item node cell etc is inactive If status flags are not included in the file it is assumed that all items are active vx1 Vy Lo yz NES Vy2 Vz2 E I
12. 0 0100 0 0000 0 3800 2 silt 1 0000e 00 0 0000 0 1500 3 Clay 1 0000e 00 0 0000 0 0900 Reclassify aa Figure 19 5 Reclassification Dialog A set of typical parameters for common soil types is distributed with WMS and can be used by importing the file soils tbl Once a set of typical parameters are defined they can be saved to a file for later recall using the export button The format of the soil table file can be found in section 20 12 19 9 Overland Flow Properties The CASC2D maps are divided into three separate categories overland flow infiltration and evapotranspiration The maps related to overland flow are discussed in this section and those related to infiltration and evapotranspiration in the next two Viewing editing of maps is done using the Edit Map dialog as described in the previous section CASC2D Interface 19 13 The overland flow options include elevation surface roughness interception coefficient and storage capacity initial depth retention depth and area reduction depth The elevation and surface roughness maps must be defined for all CASC2D models All other maps represent optional parameters which can be used and are turned on or off for a given simulation using the toggle boxes which appear below the text window of the Edit Map dialog Both the interception coefficient and storage capacity maps are activated when the interception option is toggled on e Elevation This map is always
13. 17 Ya AT E Fr PL TF TE he ql te eet etal oa ae Figure 1 15 Redistribution of Arc Vertices 5 Create TIN TIN creation builds on the previous four steps The outer polygon is used to define the limits or extents of the TIN TIN vertices are created inside this polygon at a density proportional to the spacing of vertices on the nearest arc After the TIN is created the stream and other interior arcs are forced as breaklines so that they are honored in the TIN as triangle edges and the elevations for the vertices are interpolated from the background elevation map see page 3 33 6 Edit TIN Even though the newly created TIN conforms to the topographic features defined by feature arcs there are inevitably some anomalies that must be corrected in order to use the TIN for basin delineation These include flat triangles flat edges and pits WMS contains several tools for both automatic section 6 9 and manual user interaction sections 6 2 7 1 elimination of these anomalies Introduction 1 19 7 Complete Stream Network and Outlet Definitions By default there may only be a single outlet point for the watershed defined or perhaps only a portion of the stream network WMS can be used to add additional outlet points representing sub basin outlets culverts etc section 7 4 2 and stream branches section 7 5 1 after the TIN has been created from the feature objects see Figure 1 16 Even after
14. 2 The Show All and Hide All buttons can be used to make all coverages either visible or hidden 3 2 9 Map Module 3 7 Each coverage has an associated attribute set The attribute set determines which types of attributes can be associated with the points nodes arcs and polygons of the coverage The different attribute sets are discussed in the next section The coverage name is changed by first selecting the coverage and then changing the name in the name edit field The default elevation is used when displaying the coverage in an oblique view All objects in a coverage are assigned the same elevation Feature Object Tools The following feature object tools are in the dynamic portion of the Tool Palette when the Map module is activated These tools relate only to the feature objects The remaining tools in the dynamic portion of the tool palette are discussed in the section on Drawing Objects Only one tool is active at any given time The action that takes place when you click in the Graphics Window with the cursor depends on the current tool Tools are used to either create feature objects define attributes for a selected object using the type dialogs described in the previous section or operate on selected objects using one of the commands described in a later section fel Select Points Nodes The Select Points Nodes tool is used to select existing points or nodes A selected point node can be deleted moved to a new location
15. If a TIN has been used to define the watershed a storage capacity curve can be generated and the information used to set up the volume elevation SV SE or area elevation SA SE data See section 7 6 1 for more information 10 28 WMS The available methods for outflow include Known outflow Define a known outflow SQ record using the XY Series Editor Computed Weir Spillway A combination of data records are used to define spillway characteristics SL SS ST Parameter description for these different records are as follows Low Level Outlet SL ELEVL Center line elevation of downstream end of low level outlet CAREA Cross sectional area in square feet square m in the low level outlet orifice equation COQL Discharge coefficient in orifice outlet equation EXPL Exponent of head in orifice equation Spillway Characteristics SS CREL Spillway crest elevation This value must be less than the highest elevation on the SE card for HEC to run properly SPWID Spillway length COQW Discharge coefficient in the spillway weir flow equation EXPW Exponent of head in the weir spillway flow equation usually equals 1 5 Dam Overtopping ST TOPEL Elevation of the top of the dam at which overtopping begins DAMWID Length of the top of dam which is actively being overtopped COQD Discharge coefficient in the weir equation EXPD Exponent of head in the weir equation 10 11 5 Straddler
16. If you choose to define all the data manually using the Soil Type Mapping dialog you will want to export the data to a file so that you will not need to reenter the data for future models using the same soil type parameter definitions Once the soil type parameters have been defined soil type ID s can be assigned to polygons by first selecting the desired polygon s and then choosing the Attributes command from the Feature Object menu or by double clicking on the polygon and choosing the appropriate ID from the WMS soil ID text window 3 18 WMS Once soil type IDs have been assigned to polygons and parameters linked to the soil type IDs model parameters can be computed using the Compute Composite Runoff Coeff CN command from the Calculators menu in the Hydrologic Modeling module see section 15 2 Runoff Coefficient Coverage The Runoff Coefficient coverage is used in the same was as the land use coverage except that rather than defining a land use type a floating point runoff coefficient can be entered for each polygon Composite runoff coefficients used in rational method simulations can then be computed using the Composite Runoff Coeff CN command in the Calculators menu of the Hydrologic Modeling module Time Computation Coverage The Time Computation coverage type allows you to define equations along arcs for computing flow path travel times within a basin In this way times of concentration or lag times can be determin
17. Method Subtract from precipitation Subtract from runoff Ratios A iY 0 750 m poo m jasoo la foco M foo E ion _j aco m oon M 0000 Figure 10 3 Multi Flood Storm Dialog Method Input ratios can be specified using either precipitation or runoff Ratios Up to nine different storm ratios can be specified by toggling on the appropriate check box All hydrograph or precipitation ordinates are multiplied by the specified value Each storm is analyzed during execution of HEC and the resulting TAPE22 file will contain as many hydrographs for each station as there are ratios defined Display of different storm ratios can be toggled on and off in the Hydrologic Modeling tab of the Display Options dialog Unit Graph and Loss Rate Optimization OU Select this option if you want to optimize unit hydrograph and loss rate parameters in this HEC simulation so the calculated hydrograph will match the observed hydrograph Routing Optimization OR Select this option if you want to optimize routing parameters using observed inflow and outflow hydrographs and a pattern lateral inflow hydrograph for the routing reach HEC 1 Interface 10 9 10 4 Entering Editing HEC1 Parameters Attributes or parameters for all HEC hydrograph stations are defined and or later edited using the Edit HEC 1 Parameters dialog This dialog is accessed by selecting the Edit HEC 1 Parameters command from the HEC menu or by double clicking on
18. RQ5 No Data RQ10 No Data RQ25 No Data ROQ50 No Data RQ100 No Data RQ500 78 4A P 11 standard error 82 7 equivalent years of record Variables Drainage area A minimum 0 10 sq mi maximum 4000 sq mi Mean annual precip P minimum 12 0 in maximum 30 0 in CUSTOMNFF STATE WY Wyoming REGIONS 1 BEGREGION Eastern_Region 13 NUMVARIABLES 2 A Drainage_Area 0 10 4000 0 1 0 P Mean_Annual_Precip 12 0 30 0 2 101 EQUATION 2 STANDARDERROR 100 0 EQUIVALENTYEARS 0 0 REGRESSIONCONSTANT 0 03 NUMCOMPONENTS 2 i Oe 00247 O O ONE O 10 260 Z i Os sO 29S O OO OO EQUATION 5 STANDARDERROR 0 0 EQUIVALENTYEARS 0 0 REGRESSIONCONSTANT 0 0 NUMCOMPONENTS 0 EQUATION 500 STANDARDERROR 82 0 EQUIVALENTYEARS 7 0 REGRESSIONCONSTANT 78 4 NUMCOMPONENTS 2 O O lt a 0G 2 20 0 0 0 0 2 ISO DO Md O OOOO ENDREGION Figure 20 48 Sample Custom NFF Equation File The cards used in Custom NFF Equation file are as follows Card Type CUSTOMNFF Description File type identifier Must be on first line of file No fields Required YES Card Type STATE gt gt gt Description State for which equations will be defined Required YES S O Format STATE id name 20 36 WMS Sample STATE WY Wyoming __ Field Variable Value Description sd Pot str State abbreviation 2 name str State name Card Type REGIONS
19. Variable Value Description 1 np The number of points in the curve 2 name str The name of the curve If curves of the same type 3 t The time value for a point on the curve 4 v The scalar value for a point on the curve Fields 3 4 should be repeated np times Card Type ENDGAG Description Marks the end of a group of cards describing a gage There should be a corresponding BEGGAG card at a previous point in the file No fields Required YES 20 14 Digitized Stream Files Digitized streams can be used to create feature objects in WMS A stream file contains several x y coordinates for stream nodes Z values can be present but are not required A stream file could be created using any digitizing program but the format of the file must be converted to the format outlined in Figure 20 23 and an actual sample in Figure 20 24 STREAM Beginning of polygon stream file xi yr 27 Z values are optional x2 y2 22 Xnp Ynp 2Znp Figure 20 23 Stream File Format STREAM O O a 20r 0 1240 20 26 WMS Figure 20 24 Sample Stream File The format of the STREAM card is as follows Card Type STREAM Description Defines a set of digitized points to be converted to feature points Required YES Format STREAM x1 y1 21 x2 Y2 22 Sample STREAM O20 200 LOO Ses 30 10 0 Field Variable Value
20. Watershed Modeling System REFERENCE MANUAL WMS 6 0 Copyright 1999 Brigham Young University Environmental Modeling Research Laboratory All Rights Reserved Unauthorized duplication of the WMS software or user s manual is strictly prohibited THE BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY ENVIRONMENTAL MODELING RESEARCH LABORATORY MAKES NO WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REGARDING THE PROGRAM WMS AND ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR THE VALIDITY OF THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS USER S MANUAL The software WMS is a product of the Environmental Modeling Research Laboratory of Brigham Young University TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUC TION iscssscactocasscissesessdsdiseswiessncascuevanionssesactsudvsessiessecstssevensceseenesvesdsssisbedessassseseatessactsedsstomioseees 1 1 LE MOWER VIEW aer eee 1 1 TALE dinning WMS for the First Tine x cccie acess E ace peat iat eae a 1 1 hhe DiertalLerrainMod ein SA Aid 1 2 1 2 FUNDAMENTAL WMS MODELING CONCEPTS 00 sesseseeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 3 1 2 1 Guidelines for Using Feature Object GIS Vector DAta oooonnnnnnccnnononnnnananannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnos 1 3 EDD Guidelines or USE DEMI ad Seen Odo 1 6 L29 Gmdelines fOr SIS TIN DAA adan 1 I5 1 2 4 Guidelines for Using ARC INFO O and ArcView Formatted Data iccccccccccsscccccccceceenseeessecseeeans 1 21 0 MODULE o torso oie uated area ta ea tesco ana ete a a eo ice 1 23 1 3 1 T
21. data prior to performing an analysis It reports errors such as zero area undefined losses etc These errors should be corrected by returning to previous steps before actually trying to run HEC 1 10 1 5 Run HEC 1 WMS creates HEC files compatible with any version of HEC 1 However a Windows X Windows on UNIX and MS Windows on PC s compiled version of HEC is distributed with WMS so that it can be run without leaving the WMS environment This command is explained in more detail later in this chapter 10 1 6 View Hydrographs Once an HEC simulation has been run you can view resulting hydrographs using the commands described in the previous chapter After viewing the hydrographs you may wish to repeat the previous steps in order to calibrate a model or look at different scenarios The remainder of this chapter describes how data for creating an HEC is entered using WMS For an in depth description of the HEC runoff model itself refer to the HEC User s Manual 10 2 Tool Palette The tools used for selecting outlets basins and diversions are defined in the other modules Hydrologic Modeling Map DEM and TINs When entering HEC 1 data for basins or outlets defined parameters will be assigned to all currently selected basins or outlets HEC 1 Interface 10 3 10 3 Job Control 10 3 1 The Job Control dialog Figure 10 1 is used to define general information about the HEC model Selecting the Job Control comma
22. flow into a region of lower elevations This option determines how many DEM points can be adjusted in order to create a breach from a depression to lower elevation DEM point Output Options Specifies which files will be saved as a result of the DEDNM execution CHAPTER 6 A TINS 6 1 Introduction One of the basic modules in WMS is the Triangulated Irregular Network TIN module The tools and commands in the TIN module provide the basic operations for terrain modeling and basin delineation TINs are formed by connecting a set of xyz points scattered or gridded with edges to form a network of triangles The surface is assumed to vary in a linear fashion across each triangle 6 2 Tool Palette 6 2 1 The following tools are in the dynamic portion of the Tool Palette These tools are available when the TIN module is activated Only one tool is active at any given time The action that takes place when the user clicks in the Graphics Window with the cursor depends on the current tool The tools are for selection and interactive editing of TINs select Vertices The Select Vertices tool is used to select vertices for operations such as deletion or to drag a vertex to a new location The coordinates of selected vertices can also be edited using the Edit Window This same tool allows for selection of outlet points on the TIN 6 2 WMS 6 2 2 6 2 3 6 2 4 6 2 5 a Select Triangles The Select Triangles tool is us
23. 2 A check is made to see if any arcs intersect If so a node is created at the intersection and the arcs are split 3 A check is made for dangling arcs arcs with one end not connected to another arc with a minimum length If any are found they are deleted All objects of the active coverage will be cleaned Alternatively a check is made to see if any arcs vertices nodes or points are selected in the active coverage If any intersecting arcs are selected you have the option of intersecting only the selected arcs If any points nodes or vertices are selected you snap the selected points nodes and vertices to a snapping point that is selected after the Clean Options dialog is closed Translating Points Vertices The Translate command can be used to translate all selected feature points vertices a given x and y distance Sometimes points imported from DLG files or digitized stream files do not overlay the background elevation map as they should this can usually be discerned by displaying contours of the DEM or TIN serving as the background elevation map In such cases the points vertices may be adjusted by first selecting points or vertices to be panned using the appropriate tool and then specifying an x and y translation value Locate Streams Ridges The Locate Streams Ridges command can be used to automatically move the xy position of the nodes and vertices of ridge and stream arcs so that it overlays the lowest elevation nea
24. AN AAA ROS 10 13 POG PRECIPITATION ai ra 10 13 10 7 1 INO CCIE AI OM sites ceca a E Sa ett aad e mea aS 10 14 10 7 2 BOSIN AV CVO LE I D A a 10 14 10 7 3 in Gad O ca ETW T T Seer a Te oe eer ee ESET OMT O A 10 14 10 7 4 FLV DOUELIC GL Storms T H yas cs aa E hac ic ene oa A oon se 10 15 TOS LOSS ME lid 10 15 10 8 1 ONO MALO Td dica 10 16 10 8 2 A A eerste EC Maen RET EE E Sener O ee nee 10 16 10 8 3 IEN AINE EGS la 10 16 10 8 4 HONORES a A A ted eaes Maataley 10 17 10 8 5 SOS MI e o Re ee ae 10 17 109 UNITE EH YDROGRAPO METHODS tias 10 18 10 9 1 COV II Cy apices ate a asst sd cee Be ah i cs a O cs etal at a et ie Parades 10 18 10 9 2 NA A eesti ae a oan SA Rs MO 10 19 10 9 3 SES DIMEAsS TONES OD A IA E N 10 20 10 9 4 ven e ae dede E 10 20 10 9 5 kinema e Wave A AAA GCS 10 20 LAO NOME iS 10 21 LODO Blevation Lone Duld MA iS A Aids 10 22 TOOL Temperature Lime Series MTI AAA AAA E 10 23 10 10 3 Dew Point MD Shortwave Radiation MS and Wind Speed MW SeTieS cccccceeeeees 10 23 EO TOA AsOSSES IM es tetas Scaled had socios 10 23 LOTT ROUTING DATA osa 10 23 POSTE Ouer Names URSS A eR A 10 24 HOLTZ NO ROUCO LON AE ARA RA 10 24 IE SI OSA ASA A N 10 25 LOFIA MOCE MS TN SAA a 10 25 TOALLA STO ddler OSEA ios 10 28 10 11 6 Kinematic Wave RK and Muskingum Cunge RD ooonciccnnnnnconnnncccnnnnnnnonncncnnnnnonononocinnnnos 10 29 LOIL hannel Loss eS RT a aa aaa 10 29 IUko DIrectinput dro tapas OM SAN do 10
25. ASCII Grid File Format ncols 128 nrows 136 xllcorner 422415 yllcorner 4515405 cellsize 30 NODATA_value 9999 1287 1286 1286 1288 us 1288 1288 9999 1289 1282 9999 1283 1284 Figure 20 19 Sample ARC INFO 9 ASCII Grid File The card types used in the ARC INFO grid file format are self explanatory 20 12 CASC2D Soils Table File A soils table file is used to reclassify CASC2D grid cell soil parameters from a look up table comparing soil types with typical values for the desired soil properties The are created in WMS from the Reclassification dialog accessible when editing CASC2D maps The first portion of the file contains the property types defined in the table Following the initial definitions there is one record for each soil in the table The number and order of the values following the id and description of each soil is determined by the number and order of the property definitions defined in the first section The example shown in Figure 20 20 demonstrates a file where all property values are present dl descripriont hel chi pseyl pil rsi mel srl ici sel idi reti art lidz deseription hez ch psty2 oi 1s mez 512 102 502 Ad ret ar SOLLSTABLE Soils table file identifier HYDRAULIC_CONDUCTIVITY Hydraulic conductivity in first field CAPILLARY Capillary pressure head in second field POROSITY Porosity in third field PORE_INDEX Pore index in fo
26. BEGVEC VECTYPE 0 OBJID 27211 IND 8 INC 8 NAME velocity ITS 1 5 00000000e 00 0 0 0 11 1 1 1 0 1 60000000e 01 1 60000000e 01 3 20000000e 01 16 40000000e 01 6 40000000e 01 1 28000000e 02 1 44000000e 02 1 44000000e 02 2 88000000e 02 1 96000000e 02 1 96000000e 02 3 92000000e 02 12 25000000e 02 2 25000000e 02 4 50000000e 02 9 21600000e 03 9 21600000e 03 1 84320000e 04 19 60400000e 03 9 60400000e 03 1 92080000e 04 9 80100000e 03 9 80100000e 03 1 96020000e 04 ENDDS Figure 20 14 Sample ASCII Data Set File The card types used in the scalar data set file format are as follows Card Type DATASET Description File type identifier Must be on first line of file No fields Required YES Card Type OBJTYPE Description Identifies the type of objects that the data sets in the file are associated with Required YES lf card does not exist the file can only be read through the Data Browser The data sets would then be assigned to the objects corresponding to the active module Format OBJTYPE type Sample OBO TYPE tin 20 14 WMS mesh2d 2D meshes grid2d 2D grids scat2d 2D scatter points mesh3d 3D meshes grid3d 3D grids Card Type BEGSCL Description Scalar data set file identifier Marks beginning of scalar data set No fields Required YES Card Type BEGVEC Description Vector data set file identifier Marks beginnin
27. CASC la 3 24 CVE ANTS da 3 13 polygons creatin Siron AOS traia 3 33 TE ALUMS ODEO S uao 3 5 POIS srl 6 16 POS iio 2 22 POSES cp taco 2 25 precipitation A A 11 4 PECCIPILAL Ossa see rainfall CASC Daa saan enmausenaeiuet 19 8 POU scat Sees acces ecg hate eacae sles eines 2 22 display OPLONS soda 2 22 2 24 PATS PIOUS 2653 are a ss 16 12 MY ODO OSTADIS PPRLROOOA O i 9 7 pase ayon iea 2 23 AAA OO 2 25 POSIMOM OW PA onig 2 23 POSCIE enia a a 2 22 SEET a EP T E OA E E E T T 2 22 SUAS EEA E E E E ETA 2 23 UND Sisa 2 25 privileges WM o 16 3 A EATE 2 26 PP EE T 10 13 IDAS INAV ETAL ni E 10 14 CUA ada 21 5 ANA ties 21 5 hypothetical Sto ia 10 15 TNC RE mental 21 5 O 10 14 Thiessen melodia lai n ade 10 32 PES ndo 10 6 rational method computing TO WS tesi cia 13 4 editing basin dt 13 4 edine Oueb CALA nds 13 5 equation parameters oocccccccccnnnonocnncnnnnnnnnnnnnos 13 2 Hydrosta pis aa a 13 9 SAVIN Oct A o 13 16 Rational Method nep 13 1 REACH a o ree E 11 9 read TROTE iia 11 16 FECIAS SILI CAN is 19 11 FECORCING Aide 10 34 redistributing VertiCesS occccccccccnnnnnnnnnnm 3 28 3 33 redistribution Ms tedaaaacaens 3 29 nto dildos 3 29 A adc wicees twuioventeues 21 1 refined basin boundaries oooccccccnncncncnnnnnnnnnnn 7 10 TCI e N 2 34 refreshing the display ooccccccccncnccnnnnnomo 2 35 region activate with polygomn ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 17 7 regional regression equatlONS cccc
28. CHAPTER 4 4 1 4 2 DEMs Introduction Because of the widespread availability of elevation data in gridded format several tools have been implemented in WMS so that gridded elevation data can be used for automated watershed delineation and hydrologic analysis The United States Geological Survey USGS provides 1 250 000 scale digital elevation models DEMs for the entire U S and has 1 24 000 scale DEMs for most areas This data can be downloaded by using Netscape Internet Explorer or any other browser from the USGS web site at the following URL http edcwww cr usgs gov doc edchome ndcdb ndcdb html In addition to USGS DEMs grids processed from ARC INFO or GRASS can also be imported DEM s can be contoured and used as a guide for the placement of boundary stream and ridge lines This chapter focuses on the general uses of DEMs including display and editing prior to use for basin delineation The next chapter focuses on the use of DEMs for automated basin delineation and hydrologic parameter calculation Tool Palette The following tools are in the dynamic portion of the Tool Palette These tools are available when the DEM module is activated Only one tool is active at any given time The action that takes place when you click in the Graphics 4 2 4 3 WMS 4 2 1 4 2 2 Window with the cursor depends on the current tool There are several other tools intended for use when doing drainage analysis with DEMs
29. Enter textstring to be mapped Cancel Figure 3 25 Text Attributes Dialog Rectangle and Oval Attributes Rectangle and oval attributes include whether or not it is filled a fill color a fill style and a line border color style and width These attributes can be edited with the Rectangle Oval Attributes dialog box shown below 3 3 3 3 3 4 Map Module 3 41 Rectangle 7 Oval Attributes fi Line width Fill pattern Line color Fill color Style Solid O Dashed C No Fill Cancel Figure 3 26 Rectangle and Oval Attributes Dialog Line Attributes Line attributes include a color style and width as well as whether or not the beginning ending or both of the line contain arrowheads These attributes are edited with the Line Attributes dialog shown below Line Attributes Ea Arrowheads Width fi 25 Length Style Solid fi 2 i C Dashed Tel Arrowheads Colo i A Cancel Figure 3 27 Line Attributes Dialog Drawing Depth The drawing depth of drawing objects can make them seem closer or farther away in relation to other visible objects of your model By default drawing objects are drawn at the average depth z value of visible objects in your model However an explicit z value can be set using the Drawing Depth command In plan view the drawing depth will have no effect on the overall appearance of the objects Drawing Order The order in which drawing obje
30. Field Variable Value Description Card Type NUMCOMPONENTS ee Gives the number of components excluding constant in the regression equation Required YES Format NUMCOMPONENTS nc index modifier multiplier exp expindex exp_modifier exp_exp 20 38 WMS Sample NUMCOMPONENTS 2 0 OO ois Oc O50 00 00 2 lie ta O 29370 0200 0 Field Variable Value Description 1 ne int The number of components in the regression equation 0 0 is entered if no data exists 2 index int Base variable index The index of the base variable within the list of name and descriptors entered above Example 1 0 0 is entered if no variable exists 3 modifier Modifier added to base variable before the multiplier is applied 0 0 is default 4 multiplier i Value by which base variable is multiplied 1 0 is the default value 5 exp The exponent constant for the base variable 1 0 is the default 6 expindex int The index of the variable which appears in the base variable exponent 0 0 is the default 7 exp_modifier Modifier added to exponent variable 0 0 is default Card Type ENDREGION Description _ Marks the end of a region definition Required YES The units codes are given in the following table Code English Units SI units Conversion Factor
31. Next each equation is defined specifically The following cards must be included for all 7 equations Q2 Q500 of a region whether they are defined of not Suppose that in this region the Q500 equation is not defined The equations would be listed in the file as follows EQUATION 2 Recurrence interval STANDARDERROR 45 0 EQUIVALENTYEARS 0 0 REGRESSIONCONSTANT 66 2 NUMCOMPONENTS 3 Number of variables Under the NUMCOMPONENTS card the coefficients and exponents of each variable is defined Each variable is defined by index modifier multiplier exponent exponent index exponent modifier exponent exponent for an explanation of each of these see the NUMCOMPONENTS card table above For the majority of NFF equations only the index and exponent of each variable is different The rest of these fields are O except the modifier which is 1 0 For the above Q2 equation the file lines are 0 0 1 0 0 88 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 51 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 0 0 0 0 All these cards must be repeated for all 7 intervals if the equation of a certain interval doesnt exist such as Q500 in this case the cards are as follows EQUATION 500 Recurrence interval STANDARDERROR 0 0 EQUIVALENTYEARS 0 0 REGRESSIONCONSTANT 0 0 File Formats 20 41 NUMCOMPONENTS 0 Number of variables Component definition cards are not needed since the number of components is 0 e The region definition is then ended by ENDREGION f This p
32. Reading Hydrographs Hydrographs can be read into WMS from a results files using the Open command in the Hydrographs menu Hydrographs are generated for each basin and outlet point when running one of the hydrologic models Two hydrographs may be generated for the outlet points one representing the combination of upstream hydrographs and one representing a hydrograph which has been routed to the next downstream outlet point If multiple storms or multiple ratios of a given storm are analyzed in the same run of AEC 1 then multiple hydrographs for each basin and outlet point will computed If multiple storms have been defined using the JD card the index numbers of hydrographs to be read must be specified All indices or particular numbers can be specified If multiple ratios of the same storm exist defined on JR records all ratios will be read The display of a given ratio is 9 8 WMS 9 6 3 9 6 4 controlled from within the Hydrologic Modeling tab in the Display Options dialog Currently multi plan storm hydrographs are not read Each storm index becomes a separate hydrograph set Hydrograph sets are named by appending the index number to the file from which it is read While it may be convenient to read all indices each time it may produce an overwhelming number of hydrographs and make the display too cluttered for comparisons It is often useful to read a hydrograph not computed by HEC or one of the other hydrologic model
33. Reservoirs The Reservoirs options can be used to display triangles defined as reservoirs If basin data has been computed then the area labels for each reservoir can be displayed Gages When gages are defined for HEC models icons displaying the location of the gage and a Thiessen network defined by the gages can be displayed by setting the Storm gages options These gages can also be created using the Rain gage coverage type Temporal distribution gages are used to define gages that contain temporal information about a storm as well as rainfall 7 4 WMS 7 3 7 7 3 8 7 3 9 7 3 10 7 3 11 7 3 12 depths They are not triangulated as part of the Thiessen network unless they are also defined as storm total gages Thiessen Polygons When a set of gages have been defined this toggle can be turned on to show the accompanying thiessen polygon network Basin Centroids If the Basin Centroids option is set all basin centroids will be displayed The basin centroid is also used as the initial location for displaying labels and hydrograph icons Drainage Basin Boundaries If the Basin Boundaries option is set all basin boundaries will be displayed Basin boundaries are computed using the Define Basins command from the Drainage menu Fill Drainage Basins If the Fill Drainage Basins option is set all basins will be displayed using a different color and or pattern This provides a better graphical image than simply di
34. The color corresponds to the default contour color However different coloring schemes may be chosen using the Contour Options dialog accessed from within the Display menu Boundaries If the TIN Boundary item in the TIN Display Options dialog is set the boundary of the TIN will be displayed each time the Graphics Window is 6 6 WMS 6 3 5 6 3 6 6 3 7 6 3 8 6 3 9 6 3 10 6 3 11 refreshed This feature is often used in conjunction with contours in order to display the TIN boundary without cluttering the screen by displaying each triangle Circumcircles If the Circumcircles item in the TIN Display Options dialog is set the circumcircle enclosing the three vertices for each triangle will be drawn when the display is refreshed Circumcircles provide the basis of a Delauney triangulation since the Delauney criterion is satisfied by ensuring that no circumcircle encloses a vertex Displaying circumcircles can aid in the understanding of the triangulation process Vertex Triangle Numbers Displays the ID s of the triangles and triangle vertices Vectors If a data set used primarily with the two dimensional runoff models such as CASC2D has vector data associated with it then the display of a vector representing direction for each element can be toggled on The Vector Opts button allows you to adjust the display quality options of the vectors Elevations If the Vertex Elevations item in the TIN Display Opti
35. and the display will need to be refreshed by selecting the Refresh command from the Display menu The Refresh command has a macro in the tool palette NOTE The process of redrawing can be aborted in many cases by pressing the ESC key Shading The default display mode for a TIN or grid in the Graphics Window 1s a wire frame image Color shading and hidden surface removal can be applied to either TINs or grids in order to generate a realistic image Hill shaded images of DEMs can also be created using the shade command with a DEM present Light Angle The Smooth Shading option in the Shading Options dialog brought up using the Shading Algorithms command in the Display menu uses a light source defined by a lighting angle The direction of the lighting angle can be set using the Light Angle command in the Display menu This command brings up a dialog containing a diagram of a sphere The sphere is shaded according to the current setting for the light angle The light angle can be changed simply by clicking on the sphere with the cursor at the location where a direct ray from the light source to the center of the sphere would strike the sphere The sphere shading is updated instantaneously to reflect the chosen light angle Shading Options The Shading Options command in the Display menu can be used to change the technique used to shade the image in the Graphics Window when the Shade command is selected The three available options are h
36. encountered instead of stopping at the next downstream branching node Coverage Type Currently WMS supports the HEC 1 TR 20 TR 55 NFF MODRAT Rational Method and CASC2D hydrologic models and in the future other models will be supported Since each model requires different input options the capability to define the model specific options for feature object data must exist In WMS this is accomplished by setting a type for each coverage that corresponds to the type of analysis being performed There are five different options for coverage types drainage land use soil type CASC2D runoff coefficient time computation Rainfall Zones DPA Zones TC Xmodel cross section and general Attributes for the different feature objects are defined in one of two ways 1 By selecting the feature object point node arc polygon and then choosing the Attributes command from the Feature Objects menu 2 By double clicking on the feature object 3 10 WMS The dialog that appears depends on the currently selected object and the active coverage Remember that the only feature objects which can be selected edited are the feature objects of the active coverage The active coverage can be changed from the edit window using the drop down combo box or from the Coverages dialog shown in Figure 3 3 The feature object attributes and dialogs used to set them for the different coverage types are explained in the following sections Drainage Covera
37. general stream attribute defined must exist 3 A polygon coverage containing watershed boundaries must exist 4 There cannot be any overlapping arcs 5 Stream arcs must be created from the downstream to the upstream node for all stream arcs If a data value in the shapefile corresponds to a WMS variable but it is not defined with the appropriate keyword it can be mapped manually using the Attribute Mapping dialog shown in Figure 2 6 One item from the database fields window is selected and the corresponding coverage attribute field is also identified Finally the Map button is selected to define a new mapped attribute The Unmap button can be used to remove a pair of mapped fields 2 14 WMS Map Shapefile Attributes Database fields Coverage attributes Basin s centroid Basin ycentroid Basin name MESHELEY Basin lag time PRECIP Basin time of concentrati Ww COMPCH Basin curve number HrDGAPH Basin average copa Urnmap Mapped field gt coverage attribute DAAIN TYPE gt Polygon type BASINAAREA gt Basin area PERIMETER gt Basin perimeter BASINID gt Basin id Figure 2 6 Map Shapefile Attributes Dialog ArcView WMS Superfile Besides the tools in WMS for editing data imported from shapefiles a special extension for ArcView has been created which allows you to create the outlets streams and basins themes reorder streams rename attributes and then export to a WMS ArcView super file which will allow yo
38. str Station basin or outlet name KK in HEC 1 2 starttime Military time 0 2400 at the start of the event gt interval Interval in minutes between hydrograph ordinates _ 4 numordinates The number of hydrograph ordinates Hydrograph ordinates Each of fields 1 5 n are repeated for each station in the file The hydrograph file is considered to be free field when read by WMS so any number of spaces can be used to separated the different parameters Figure 20 40 shows a sample file where there are 25 ordinates with a time interval of 30 minutes 20 20 Tabular Data File 20 20 1 A tabular data file can be used to import scattered points and their accompanying data sets These files are imported using the Import command in the File menu There are two slightly different formats which allow you to import a set of scatter points with either multiple data sets or a single transient data set The format of these files is given below Tabular Data with Multiple Data Sets 20 20 2 Weal Wy ye namel name name3 ae id xy vall valo val Figure 20 41 File Format for Tabular Data with Multiple Data Sets vi gr Ny yo N2 year 10 year 50 year a 1 3243 48976 18 LS 2505 2 3896 45782 265 Mis Lays 3 2439 46346 02 Tes Dral 4 2944 Aglas 572 1 57 273 Figure 20 42 Sample Tabular Data File with Multiple Data Sets Tabular Data with Tra
39. the flow simply leaves the system at the diverted outlet point and never returns The diversion data is defined in the TR 20 Diversion Data dialog Figure 11 8 TH 20 Diversion Data Diversion Name RADI Divert constant discharge Discharge 300 00 8 Use cross section for main channel W Define outflow cross section Fed 10 E Define Cross Section __Detine Cross section Enter drainage traction ooo Use structure for main channel Divide flow between two rating curves Y z A El Meine Eross Section Mene Structure Enter drainage fraction o o Selected diversion cross section Diversion Output Control Divert Cancel Figure 11 8 TR 20 Diversion Data Dialog Name The diversion name is used to associate resulting hydrographs with the appropriate diversion when reading a hydrograph file after a TR 20 run The name should be unique and no longer than six characters Diversion Inflow Parameters The inflow for the diversion can be determined in one of two ways either by using a cross section for the main channel or by using a structure for the main channel Cross sections are defined using the same dialog as for reaches as described in the earlier section on channel routing Structures are defined in the same way as structures for reservoir routing The total amount of flow diverted can be defined in one of two ways Diversion Outflow Parameters The outflow for a diversion can be specified in
40. 1 16 2 2 Data Sets 16 3 File I O Previously defined data sets can be input to WMS by selecting the Import button in the Data Browser This will bring up the file browser or a dialog with a list of file type options The file types that can be imported to WMS as data sets are as follows e WMS ASCII Data Set Files e WMS Binary Data Set Files e ARC INFO ASCII Grid Files e GRASS Grid Files Additional formats will be added as new computational models are supported The format for the WMS data set files is described in Chapter 20 Once one of the file type options has been chosen a file browser dialog appears and the user must select a file corresponding to the type selected Data sets can be exported from WMS to files by selecting the Export button in the Data Browser Data sets can be saved as either binary or ASCII data set files Scatter point files can also be saved from the 2D scatter point module When a data set is imported to WMS a copy of the data set is written to a temporary file on disk in binary form If the imported data set is already in the form of a WMS binary data set file a copy of the file is not made When part of the data set is needed it is loaded from the hard disk into internal memory Only one time step of one scalar data set is read into internal memory at any given time This method of file manipulation reduces the amount of RAM required but it requires extra hard disk space It also requires that write
41. 1 0 Difference Data Set Information 8 Number of contours 25 Specified interval Color and Label Display Legend _ Bold every la rd _ Label evem 3 rd C Specified values Minimum value 2575 0000 Maximum value 4775 0000 Figure 2 14 Contour Display Options Dialog General Tools 2 31 Contours The values shown in the upper left corner of the Contours tab see Figure 2 14 correspond to the maximum and minimum values for the elevations of the active module 1 e max and min DEM elevations when the DEM module is active These values can be useful when choosing an appropriate contour interval The contour interval can be specified either by specifying a contour interval a total number of contours from which the contour interval is computed or a set of explicit contour values If the Values button is selected a Contour Values dialog is displayed Up to ten specific contour values can be typed into the dialog A logarithmic scale can be set up in this way by specifying powers of ten as the set of values to be contoured The Set Log Scale button in the Values dialog automatically defines powers of ten from 001 to 100 Regardless of which of these options is selected a maximum and a minimum contour value can be specified to restrict to the range of values contoured Contours at selected intervals can be automatically labeled and displayed with a thicker line width using the labeling op
42. 1 and Windows for Workgroups 3 11 Part of the WMS installation installs WIN32s onto your hard drive If you already have WIN32s properly installed this procedure will automatically be skipped For more information on WIN32s please contact Microsoft The sections below describe some possible solutions if problems are encountered when installing WIN32s WMS Installation Guide Potential WIN32s Error Messages File Error Cannot find OLECLI DLL WIN32S Error Improper installation WIN32s requires WIN32 EXE and WIN32S16 DLL to run Reinstall WIN32s WIN32s Error Improper installation Windows requires W32s 486 in order to run Reinstall WIN32s Recommended Solutions If you are having video problems check to see if you have an S3 video card Certain S3 drivers do not work with WIN32s Use either the generic drivers shipped with Windows or contact your video card manufacturer for an updated driver For additional information on the S3 driver and WIN32s please see the following article s in the Microsoft Knowledge Base ARTICLE ID Q117153 Title PRB Display problems with WIN32s and the S3 driver Make sure the following line is in your SYSTEM INI file DEVICE VMCPD If you have a printer driver by Lasermaster delete it or comment it out as it interferes with installing WIN32s Once WIN323s is installed you can then re enable the printer driver Try reinstalling WIN32s Make sure paging is enabled From the
43. 13 6 13 3 4 Computing Hydrographs with the Rational Method ooooonoonnccnnnnnnnnonncnnnnnnnnnrcnnnnnnnnnanocnnnns 13 9 13 4 SAVING AND RESTORING A SIMULATION cccccccsssscccceessecccceeescceceeeescceseeeeseeesseeesceesaeeeecesseaeseeeas 13 16 ES MODA da ia 13 17 13 6 2 YEAR 5 MINUTE PRECIPITATION HYDRO 359 ooocccnncncnncccnnoccnnnccnnnoconnnccnnaccnnnocnnnarcnnarononicanancnnnos 13 18 13 7 2 YEAR 15 MINUTE PRECIPITATION HY DRO 35 ocoocccnncccnncccnnnccnnnccnnnoccnnaccnnnccnnnorcnnnccnnaccnonicnnnss 13 19 13 8 2 YEAR 60 MINUTE PRECIPITATION HYDRO 359 oooocccnnccnnncccnnoccnonoccnncccnnnccnnnccnnnarnnnarononicnnnccnnnos 13 20 13 9 100 YEAR 5 MINUTE PRECIPITATION HYDRO 359 occcocccnnnccnnnccnnnoccnnnccnnacononoconnnccnnnccnnnoccnnaccnnanos 13 21 13 10 100 YEAR 15 MINUTE PRECIPITATION HYDRO 39 occoocccnncccnnnccnnnccnnnoccnnnccnnnocnnnccnnnarcnonicnnnocnnnss 13 22 13 11 100 YEAR 60 MINUTE PRECIPITATION HYDRO 359 occoocccnnccnnnoccnnncccnnoccnnaccnnnocnnncrnnnarononicnnnoccnnss 13 23 14 NATIONAL FLOOD FREQUENCY PROGRAM ssssssssssssseesssssssssssssosscccecscssssssssssosoosssesssssessessssss 14 1 Table of Contents Xi HL INTRODUC MON redacta 14 1 a2 INNER RUN SIMULATION DADOS os 14 2 14 2 1 BOSEN sados 14 3 14 2 2 SLU ARIRE PE ON PEE E pet ened A AA EEE E A TESE E E E EEN 14 3 14 2 3 Tolali Watershed ATCO AAA O a Os 14 3 14 2 4 Maximum ELO OIE GION ee RA AA AAA AA IT 14 3 14 2 5 Restonal
44. 14 5 A O O en sarsiana 14 2 SAVING sito dora ds 14 6 NODADA das 4 4 NOGAl TUNCHOM iaa 18 8 node ES 3 7 5 2 Po PA Con EA O EEEE TTN see grid node BOUE raa mS a CO AN rR SOA 3 4 converting to Vertice ii 3 26 A eae hates ace ounces 3 7 5 2 snapping together ooooooooooooccccnncnnnnnnnnnnos 3 27 Null Asin irane les nia iii 7 11 number Of OrdiNateS ooocccccccnnnnncncnnnonononnnnnnnnnss 10 4 A Seach R see viewing A 2 8 open Channel o Wi 15 27 O re te are 6 7 A E 7 6 creating for trees ooooooccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoss 9 4 GLC WAU Cs edad 7 6 NS etaceae OR 7 6 A eRe MER Cee eee ren 7 6 dele Une SOM UCES daria 9 5 CISA ASA Ye OOO PO O 66 a 7 3 IMSERSO EOS e tas 9 4 NaMe Sena sued 7 3 10 24 11 10 o ereen OT 9 2 E S ares A I NEE A AA ITOT T TS 9 1 overland O N 19 12 Overland flow distance oooooooooncccncnnnnnnnnnnnos 15 12 OVERVIEW esas 1 1 pase dao a 2 23 palette Module ea a a tawasauawanlen 2 3 Daen a a eG teR anal each ieee 2 4 patch ClousheT OCRCR nia a 18 13 PMS Ses aoe a 7 8 A A T eden 6 18 A S 6 7 editing automatically oooooonononcnnccnnnnnos 6 20 SA a muieas 6 20 PIC 16 6 PLAN VIS Went see viewing POLOP ONS uma io see gages point CCP A E T ET TETTE 3 7 5 2 point node type CASC Dea 3 22 A watt lcastnpieeieedrtonte 3 12 POS iia 3 4 CIC OSa E AO 3 32 E a E S ETE E A AE ONNE AE EENET 3 7 5 2 LA O 2 27 activate 1c SION nao 17 7 Tess cds 18 15 polygon type
45. 8 4 6 This command allows the user to know which stage values will be used in the calculation of the gradient planes at stream node locations This interpolation of stream node stage values occurs automatically each time the Delineate Flood command is issued Interpolated stage values are automatically displayed by use of the stage bars like those used to display the fixed or defined stage values Adding Stage Streams The Create Streams command found in the Streams menu allows the user to delineate flood plains from gradient planes calculated from the terrain surface without having to create an entire stream network This tool is useful for situations when a stream based gradient plane interpolation of the water surface is desired but the editing of the TIN required for WMS to create the stream is not needed Normal creation of stream networks for a TIN requires manual editing in order to topographically represent all necessary channel edges However if the only purpose for creating a stream network on a TIN is for flood delineation and the approximate location of the stream is known or can be surmised through visual inspection of the TIN itself the user can manually enter the stream To enter a stage stream the Select Strings tool must be the active tool see Select Strings rool and there must be at least one string selected The Create Streams command will create an outlet point at the first vertex of each string selected unless the
46. AA A i 7 12 PIA Draw WAVES HCO o dd ae AG ah hoon de cnn Stal Se 7 12 7 7 10 Compute BGS IDAS AAA 7 12 7 711 Computing Area Between Elevations ccccccccccsssssesscecceccnaaesseeceeceaaaasssecceesaaaaaasesecessaaaaassesees 7 13 7 8 CONVERTING DRAINAGE DATA TO FEATURE OBJECTS GIS DATA occooccnncconccnnocnnnccnnaconoccnnacanacananananos 7 13 FEOOD PLAIN ANA EY SID maena aa Eaa caddsasecsuncecece lees cebanelsastuasuceususicets 8 1 Sul INTRODUCTION cada dada 8 1 Or WOO PARE Te ias 8 2 Sa PEQOD PEAIN DISPLAY OPTIONS oireisiin aa horse vansgy sani tensive veav osens a soli Serene tear asen ler mesnareemane 8 2 Sd NA A Seen OT ON A en 8 3 A VEIS A II e a e 8 3 GoD ANECIA e VOUES coat ee E iarace aa i ee bettas aes AE ona ee moe E E E T 8 3 SIE AMEPOA SIAC C is 8 3 330 IMPIPDO MECA TOSE VINO dt A SA E E EE tas 8 3 C00 T1000 PlAMEBOUN At AAA AS 8 3 er Pood Flarn Color T NOAA AAA ATA A NA AT hee 5 4 ODO Blood Tla COn OUTS ARAS SAS s 8 4 Oe a PAGE ea E a a eee ees 8 4 A E E EE A ORE 8 4 A PUSATE ak rch eee ae A EENE A EN A E 8 5 OES RENOVE LIE A AAA a 8 5 SAR LIVIE IBER NAAA EET AREE 8 5 CAD AGAINS SIGE S GOL RARA AO O II A II 8 6 Table of Contents vii SAO o E Mar eet err eer ee ner re cree Ceeee rere ee 8 6 Sr FLOODPLAIN AN ee ee 8 7 Soul Mmm T looa Plain ValNera e aE EET E Sts ae 5 7 OO LOCO PUG TCV ii AA ia 5 8 8 5 3 Number of Nearest Vertices WII Ca 8 8 DR RE IMPORTE OPONE AA AR 8 6 A A Re eee re 8 8 CON IDE M
47. AE 11 3 interp laon rc 18 4 unit a dro Ta Nc 11 3 A O ON 10 16 Use Defined Cross Section cccccccccccnnnnnnnnoo 11 8 n t hydrographs ats ators 10 18 Use Defined RESSTVO arena cis 11 9 O A E 10 18 WIEN SALES psoe 11 16 CK AID PA ia 13 15 TR ge a a a aes 12 1 RA E a ENEA E E OE 10 20 DSN dal Taseen T 12 2 KIMEMALO WC 10 20 WY CEO SAPS sra o 12 5 AP O TTE 13 12 input requirements oooooooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnos 12 1 EE ES E eter erate T E ET 10 20 outlet Cala nnna id 12 2 SOVIET aeosataeaaseansons 10 19 time of concentration ccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnno 12 4 universal rational ooooooococcnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 13 14 time of concentration equations 15 26 used nai 13 16 transient IS 6 12 7 12 10 4 A divans cenmannosncaes 16 8 UNIX rans lating NOUES ui 3 27 o tad ei raced cecal teen evan 2 25 UAV SIS coos dadas 15 24 unlocked vertices oocooccoccoccnccnccnonnornnoos 6 11 6 20 travel times urban stream networks c cecescecescecescececeeces 7 7 iS A tne E ER O 4 1 6 20 vertex A A nates 6 2 6 8 A O 6 9 displaying sici n 6 5 A a 6 1 6 9 A ae ie tes 6 6 6 9 NOC K UNI OG AAA A tartare 6 11 JA e 6 8 6 10 remove duplicate in 6 12 EE E E E oat E A T T 6 1 SUMS aaun a 6 2 WIIG SUING in POE E 7 7 vertices converting tO MOdAES cccccccccncnccnnnnnnnnnnoncnnnnnnss 3 26 deney a 3 29 fed Ure ODIECS nad 3 4 reS DUON a 3 28 view QUOC E E A A 2 36 2 37 IDC ail nanon a ge ce
48. Arc El or Create Arc El tools are active the Feature Arc Type dialog comes up whereas 1f the Select Polygon Al tool is active the Feature Polygon Type dialog comes up When creating stream arcs the points vertices must be connected from downstream to upstream as the arc is entered Stream arcs are drawn with an 3 2 6 Map Module 3 9 arrow pointing in the downstream direction and can be reversed after creation using the Reverse Directions command Mlselect Polygon The Select Polygon tool is used to select previously created polygons for operations such as deletion assigning attributes etc A polygon is selected by clicking anywhere in the interior of the polygon Double clicking on a polygon with this tool brings up the Polygon Attributes dialog lsetect Branch The Select Branch tool can be used to automatically select all arcs of a branch without having to select each individually This is particularly useful when locally redistributing vertices along a stream branch A branch is selected by selecting any arc in the branch WMS searches down the stream from the selected arc until the next branching node is encountered and then adds all arcs upstream from that node to the list of selected arcs lsetect Network The Select Network tool can be used to select all arcs of a given network It works similarly to the Select Branch tool except that when an arc is selected WMS searches downstream until a node with no downstream arcs is
49. Basins When toggled on each basin is displayed with a unique color so that drainage boundaries are easily identified Display Basin Patterns WMS cycles between colors to display basin boundaries If a large number of basins are used then two may have the same color To avoid this problem you can turn on the Display basin patterns option so that in addition to cycling through colors the fill pattern is also changed Fill basin boundary only Filling basins with a color can be very time consuming In order to speed up the display you can turn on the Fill basin boundary only option so that only the DEM cells on the boundary of the basin are colored Basin Data Attributes All of the display options listed in the right column represent computed watershed modeling parameters They can be turned on or off for display once a watershed has been delineated and basin data parameters are computed The text for all basin data is the same and can be modified selecting the Data text color button Drainage DEMs 5 7 Flow Directions amp Accumulations A flow direction grid consists of a flow direction value for each DEM point The flow direction identifies which neighboring point has the lowest elevation A flow accumulation grid consists of an integer value for each DEM point that represents the number of upstream DEM points whose flow path passes through it High accumulation values indicate points in the stream whereas low values represe
50. Before actually entering the cross section the Manning coefficients for the channel left overbank and right overbank as well as the length and slope must be entered for the RC record From the dialog used to enter the RC record values the XY series editor can be invoked Unlike the other series both the X and Y values can be edited X values are used as the horizontal stations on the RX record and Y values define the vertical elevations on the RY record 21 10 Defining Diversion Data DI DQ Stream flow diversions are defined on DI DQ records where the DI record describes flow rates upstream of the diversion whereas the DQ record describes the corresponding diversion rates Both are defined using the XY series editor where the Y values represent the flow rates at a given level The Same number of flow rates should be defined on the DI and DQ records 21 11 Defining A Unit Hydrograph Ul One of HEC s unit hydrograph options is to simply provide a computed unit hydrograph Unit hydrographs are entered using the XY series where the X 21 8 WMS fields are fixed as time increments of the unit hydrograph as specified on the IT record defined using the Job Control command Y values represent the unit hydrograph ordinates Do not change the starting time and time intervals as with other series because the unit hydrograph time parameters should be identical to the computational time parameters The XY series editor is invoked from within t
51. Description Provides the number of regions for which equations are defined Required YES Format REGIONS nr Sample REGIONS 3 Field Variable Value Description 1 nr 1 17 The number of regions Note The maximum number of regions that can be defined in one file is 18 if definition for more that 17 regions is needed separate files must be made Lo and loaded separately Card Type BEGREGION Description Marks the beginning of a region definition and gives the name of the region Required YES Format BEGREGION name floodnum Sample BEGREGION Eastern_Region 13 Field Variable Value Description The name of the region If the region is urban the name must start with the character Card Type NUMVARIABLES Description Provides the number of variables in the region s equations Required _ YES Format NUMVARIABLES nv id name minval maxval units mappingflag J Sample NUMVARIABLES 2 A Drainage_Area 0 10 4000 0 1 0 P Mean_Annual_Precip 12 0 30 0 2 101 Field Variable Value Description l ny int The number of variables in the region s equation 2 id str The abbreviated name of the variable 3 name str The name of the variable 4 minval Minimum value of the variable gt maxval Maximum value of the variable The unit code defining the units used for the v
52. Extrapolate critical interior pointa __ Filter Regions with no critical interior points Cancel Figure 6 7 TIN Filter Options Dialog Number of Iterations During the filtering process the elevation of each unlocked vertex is redefined as the average of neighboring elevations The number of iterations or times a new elevation is computed for each vertex can be set with this option Because of the effects of the other options filtering a TIN n times with an iteration of 1 does not necessarily produce the same result as filtering a TIN 6 22 WMS once with an iteration of n Since elevations can be reset this number can be experimented with but typically you will want to start Maximum change in elevation This value determines what the maximum change in elevation can be during the filtering process For example in the case of USGS data where elevations have been rounded to the nearest meter an appropriate maximum change value would be 1 2 This would guarantee that even if the averaged elevation is greater than 1 2 meter the new elevation only changes by 1 2 This value can be set to an arbitrarily high value so that the average elevation everywhere results from filtering without putting a limit on the amount an elevation can change Filter Ratio The filter ratio softens the filtering effect by changing the elevation by a percentage of the difference in the current Z value of a vertex and the computed average during f
53. Figure 6 6 Breaklines can be very useful when trying to eliminate unwanted pits on the interior of a TIN Breaklines can be processed using the Add Breaklines command from the TINs menu Before selecting the command one or more sequences of vertices defining the breakline s should be selected using the Select Vertex Strings tool Al in the Tool Palette Breakline Options The Breakline Options option in the TINs menu brings up a dialog which allows you to specify either Add points and preserve Delauney triangulation options or the Swap edges option for processing breaklines When the Add points and preserve Delauney triangulation option is selected new vertices are added to the TIN at necessary locations to ensure that the edges of the triangles will conform to the breakline The elevations of the new vertices are based on a linear interpolation of the breakline segments The locations of the new vertices are determined in such a way that the Delauney criterion is satisfied see section above on triangulation When the Swap edges option is selected no new vertices are added to the TIN The edges that intersect the breakline are swapped with the breakline to form triangles The Delauney criterion is not checked or maintained TINS 6 17 Breakline Figure 6 6 a TIN and Breakline b TIN After the Breakline has been Processed 6 8 Boundary Triangles 6 8 1 The perimeter of the TIN resulting from the triangulation process corr
54. For CN the critical attribute is the hydrologic soil type O soil A 1 soil B 2 soil C 3 soil D whereas for runoff coefficients the critical attribute is a soil ID that can be related to a table of runoff coefficients Additional instructions for defining soil type coverages are given on page 3 16 Land Use The land use option determines whether a land use coverage or a land use grid will be used The critical attribute for land use is an ID that can be related to a table of parameters for curve numbers Green amp Ampt parameters or HSPF segments Additional instructions for defining land use coverages are given in section 3 14 Computation Step The computation step is only used when defining composite curve numbers or runoff coefficients for a drainage coverage If a TIN is used then individual basins are composed of several triangles and each triangle can be assigned a land use and or soil type However for a drainage coverage each basin is typically represented by a single polygon The computation step is used to divide each basin polygon into a number of square cells the computation step being the length of a side that are each assigned a land use and or soil type ID The smaller the step length the more accurate the composite number will be but the more time consuming the computation as well Mapping Table The mapping table is different depending on whether composite curve numbers or runoff coefficients are being computed A
55. GRASS O TOPAZ Figure 5 4 Import Flow Directions Dialog Once flow directions have been imported into WMS flow accumulations can either be computed or imported 1f you use TOPAZ to compute flow directions you will have already computed the flow accumulations as well and they will be in a file named UPAREA DAT Flow accumulations are computed by counting for each DEM point the number of DEM points whose flow paths Drainage DEMs 5 9 pass through the DEM point Streams will be identified by large accumulation values since the flow paths of many points pass through the stream points For example the outlet of a watershed should have the highest flow accumulation of any of the DEM points since the flow paths all points in the watershed will eventually pass through the outlet point Flow accumulations may also be imported as a result of using one of the other GIS programs previously mentioned The Flow Accumulations dialog is shown in Figure 5 5 Flow Accumulation Options Ea a Compute flow accumulations Read flow accumulation file ARC INFO GRASS TOPAZ Cancel Figure 5 5 Flow Accumulations Dialog Even though WMS can compute flow accumulations 1t may be more efficient to import a flow accumulation grid from TOPAZ ARC INFO or GRASS 5 5 Drainage Analysis 5 5 1 As stated in the introduction the elevation and flow direction values for each DEM point are the primary data required for performing basin delin
56. Hydraulic Calculators 15 31 POSADA A ERS E a 15 42 where L length of the flow path ft K representative watershed resistance coefficients Values are computed using the equation Kb m log A b where m and b are defined in Table 5 1 of the Maricopa County drainage manual shown below and A is the drainage area in acres S ground slope of the flow segment 1 rainfall intensity in hr ____ Parameters for Estimating Kb mlog A b in the Maricopa County Te Equation Type Description Typical Applications Parameters A EPA ES E A Minimal roughness Relatively smooth and or Commercial Industrial areas 0 00625 0 04 well graded and uniform land surfaces Residential area Parks and l Surface runoff is sheet flow golf courses B Moderately low roughness Land surfaces Agricultural fields 0 01375 0 08 have irregularly spaced roughness elements Pastures that protrude from the surface but the overall Desert rangelands character of the surface is relatively uniform Undeveloped urban land Surface runoff is predominately sheet flow around the roughness elements that have signigicant large to medium sized Brushy alluvial fans roughness elements and or poorly graded Hilly rangelands land surfaces that cause flow to be diverted Disturbed land mining etc around roughness elements Surface runoff is Forests with underbrush sheet flow for short distances draining into
57. In addition the color button to the left of the check box can be used to set the color and other appropriate attributes such as radius line thickness line style etc General purpose display options are documented in this chapter and the rest of the DEM display options are documented in the next chapter on drainage delineation with DEMs 4 3 1 4 3 2 DEMs 4 3 Display Options ki Hydrologic Modeling 2D Grid Scatter Poirt TIN Drainage Flood DEM Map wF Point display step Mo text color Min accumulation for display _ Basin ID s eo _ Basin names _ Basin CM s curve numbers IW Watershed pen M Stream M Show units T E _ Flow direction I Basin areas M Flow accumulation El Basin slopes _ Average overland flow Accumulation _ North South aspects W Color fill drainage basins _ Length _ Display basin patterns _ Perimeter i Fill basin boundary only _ Shape factor a Y Contours _ Sinuosity factor MN Points _ Mean basin elevation E L Flat DEM cells Max flow distance _ No data cells L Max flow slope _ Inactive cells Max stream length M Rainfall grid __ Max stream slope i Land use grids _ Distance from centroid to stream W Soil type grids _ Centroid stream distance Land use legend _ Centroid stream slope Soil ype legend _ Stream segment length _ Stream segment slope OF Lancel Apply Figure 4 1 DEM Display Options Dialog Points If
58. LI L L L ooo a a oo Sees ee Sem A A E E H A A H E H HH 515 CHAPTER 16 Data Sets 16 1 Introduction WMS was designed as a general purpose watershed modeling system One of the main purposes of WMS is to provide a consistent interface for a variety of models and grid types In order to accomplish this goal input data for models and solution data other than those models defined using topological trees are handled in a simple consistent fashion using data sets A data set is a set of values associated with each grid cell or scatter point A data set can be steady state one value per item or transient one value per item per time step The following objects in WMS each have a scalar data set list e 2D Grids e 2D Scatter Point Sets The commands for manipulating data sets are located in the Data menu The data menu is one of the standard menus and is available in each of these two modules Data sets are used for both pre and post processing of models For example a scalar data set associated with a 2D grid can represent starting values of surface depth or values of hydraulic conductivity for a runoff modeling problem Another data set associated with the same grid may represent computed depth values All data sets can be used to generate contours color 16 2 WMS fringes and animation sequences A detailed discussion of how data sets can be used in WMS is presented in this chapter One advantage of
59. Open channels Lined channels Conduit Material n Closed conduits Asbestos cement pipe 0 011 0 015 Brick 0 013 0 017 Cast iron pipe l Cement lined amp seal coated 0 011 0 015 Concrete monolithic 0 012 0 014 Concrete pipe 0 011 0 015 Corrugated metal pipe 5 2 5 inch corrugations Plain 0 022 0 026_ Paved invert 0 018 0 022 l Spun asphalt lined 0 011 0 015 Plastic pipe smooth 0 011 0 015 Vitrified clay Pipes 0 011 0 015 Liner plates 0 013 0 017_ Asphalt 0 013 0 017_ Brick 0 012 0 018 Concrete 0 011 0 020_ l Rubble or riprap 0 020 0 035 Vegetal 0 030 0 040 Excavated or dredged Earth straight and uniform 0 020 0 030 Earth winding fairly uniform 0 025 0 040 Rock 0 030 0 045 Unmaintained 0 050 0 14 Natural channels minor streams top width at __ flood stage lt 100 feet Fairly regular section 0 03 0 07 Irregular section with pools 0 04 0 10 The hydraulic radius may be computed using the channel calculator see section 15 4 In this case you will have to assume an approximate depth of flow or flow rate in order for the channel calculator to be able to compute the appropriate hydraulic radius Maricopa County The Maricopa County Arizona equation for computing time of concentration has also been included in WMS as a pre defined equation Hydrologic
60. RTIMP3 PCTEFFECTIVE3 Soil type description n XKSATn RTIMPn PCTEFFECTIVEn Figure 20 37 Green amp Ampt Soil Table File Format Gunsight Cipriano complex 1 7 Slope 0 63 50 0 0 0 Greyeagle Suncity Variant complex 1 7 Slope 0 23 50 0 0 0 Gachado Lomitas Rock outcrop complex 7 55 Slope 0 16 50 0 20 0 Lehmans Rock outcrop complex 8 65 Slope 0 09 50 0 30 20 Figure 20 38 Sample Green amp Ampt Soil Table File 20 19 Hydrograph Files When running HEC WMS reads the TAPE22 hydrograph results file However it is convenient to read measured hydrographs for comparison with computed hydrographs therefore a simplified hydrograph file format can be used The format is shown in Figure 20 39 with a sample file given in Figure 20 40 HYDROGRAPH Iname starttime interval numordinates flow 1 flow 2 flow 3 flow 10 lice ae ee hes flow n Figure 20 39 Hydrograph File Format HYDROGRAPH B1 10 0 19 5 3 3 O 30 25 1 0 4 0 9 O Li Bah Sa A Du T2 T28 Ow T32 T41 Oe Oe Paes os 40 Died ae aa Sirs Figure 20 40 Sample Hydrograph File Format HYDROGRAPH name starttime interval numordinates flow 1 flow 2 flow 3 mans ELow 10 flow n B1 730 45 12 Sa Or LAO 2 O 4050 O oO 35 0 500 A2000 Sample ERR 20 32 WMS B2 730 45 12 10 0 17 0 29 0 45 0 71 0 64 0 53 0 41 0 28 0 15 0 4 0 0 0 Field Variable Value Description OOOO O O 1 name
61. Required YES Card Type TNAM S O Description _ Provides a name to be associated with the TIN Required NO Format TNAM name Sample TNAM aspen Field Variable Value Description 1 name str The name of the TIN Card Type TCOL S Description Defines a default color for the triangles of the TIN Required NO ome TCOL color_red color_green color_blue Sample A Field Variable Value Description 1 color_red 0 255 The red color component of TIN triangles 2 color_green 0 255 The reen color component of TIN triangles 3 color_blue 0 255 The blue color component of TIN triangles Card Type VERT Description Lists the vertices in the TIN Required YES Format ME AY x1 Y1 21 1f 1 X2 Y2 22 1f2 Xnv Ynv Znv lf nv Sample VERT 4 e AO USO Ol 2 4 4 4 9 0 1 EPA ON Field Variable Value Description Y yo w ThenumberofverticesintheTIN_ 24 xywz Coords ofvertex gt 5 if 0 1 Locked unlocked flag for vertex optional O unlocked 1 locked Repeat fields 2 5 nv times Card Type TRE CT Description ListsthetrianglesintheTIN i i O Required NO a set of triangles can be generated from the vertices Format TRI nt vLE Pe de VAL TAS nt vnt2 vnt3 File Formats 20 5 Sample TRI 4 514 AA 2 A lb fo a 4 3 DA Field Variable Value Descrip
62. Saving the TR 20 file and running it will then create the THY file WMS will not read in 7R 20 files with more than one COMPUT record Only one COMPUT record will be read in and it will be the last COMPUT record in the file If you need to make more than one computation simply change the necessary input parameters in WMS save the file and run 7R 20 again WMS will not read in data from ALTER DELETE INSERT IPEAKS PEAKS or DURINC records WMS adds basin reservoir outlet reach and diversion names in columns 73 through 78 of TR 20 files These names are not necessary to run TR 20 or to read existing TR 20 files into WMS If you run into any other problems reading 7R 20 files please contact the distributor you purchased WMS from Introduction 1 27 1 6 Considerations for Reading Existing HSPF Files While WMS is capable of reading HSPF User s Control Input uci files created in other programs or manually some limitations exist Some of these limitations are permanent in WMS other are currently under development and will be resolved e WMS will only allow input from one WDM file and output to one OUT file If more WDM or OUT files are included in the FILES block of the uci file they will be ignored e WMS currently reads the SCHEMATIC and MASS LINK blocks to determine the structure and connectivity of the watershed The NETWORK block is not yet supported e If a particular land segment contributes to more th
63. Some of the inlet types have hydraulic improvement data that may specified and if an inlet depression exists it can also be defined HY Culvert Inlet Improved inlet data Face width Culvert width 7 e o00 Side Taper 4 17 to 6 1 fo o00 Face heh From to 7 eoon Fall Slope 2 1 to 3 1 0 000 Fall Fall available 7 Jo ono Mitered Face jo ona Crest lenothlif metered Upstream embankment slope fo o00 Downstream embankment slope jo ooo Select Improved Inlet Edge Select an inlet type Conventional C Side T apered Side T apered Circular O Side T apered Rectangular O Slope Tapered Select an Inlet Condition E dge Thin Edge Projecting _ Inlet depression exists Inlet depression Fall available 2 2 000 Crest width Culvert width 7 0 000 Fall slope 0 000 Not Applicable i Cancel Figure 15 18 HY8 Culvert Inlet Dialog HY8 Tailwater Data A tailwater rating curve is required as part of the culvert hydraulic computations in HY8 The rating curve can be defined explicitly if already Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 45 computed for the reach just below the culvert location or channel geometry exact or approximate can be entered and a tailwater rating curve computed using the HYS Tailwater Data dialog shown in Figure 15 19 HY8 Tailwater Data T ailiwater rating curve Channel Information Bottom width 20 000 Side slope H _ 1 ji O
64. This color box allows the specification of color used when drawing flow paths which are downhill and overland paths of maximum downward gradient Downhill Channel Color This color box allows the specification of color used when drawing flow paths which represent channel flow Uphill Overland Color This color box allows the specification of color used when drawing flow paths which are uphill and overland paths of maximum upward gradient Uphill Channel Color This color box allows the specification of color used when drawing flow paths which represent ridge flow Data Text Color This color box allows the specification of text color size and font used when displaying basin attributes No noticeable effect occurs until these basin labels are actually displayed It is especially useful after changing the color of the background 7 6 WMS 7 3 21 7 4 Outlets 7 4 1 7 4 2 7 4 3 7 4 4 Geometric Attributes A text string for any of the computed geometric attributes can be displayed by toggling the option on An outlet by definition in WMS is a point that defines a confluence It is the point where a sub basin ends and a routing reach begins Default outlets are local minima or pits on the interior and stream exit points on the exterior of the TIN Whenever an outlet point is added a drainage basin for that outlet is also created If the outlet corresponds to a stream branching point then a drainage basin for eac
65. Type RATIONALTABLE OOOO E y Description File type identifier Must be on first line of file No fields Required YES Card Type NUM_ORDS Description Defines the number of time flow values in the hydrograph table Required YES Format NUM_ORDS number values Samoe NUM_ORDS i23 SoS SSS SSS E Field Variable Value Description number values The number of time flow pairs in the table Card Type TIME seRES 3 OOO y yO Description Time values for Y Required YES Format TIME_SERIES time 1 time 2 time 3 time n sampe TIMELSERIES 01235810 Field Variable Value Description 20 34 WMS Card Type FLOWSERIES 3 3 3 Description Time values for t t Required YES Format FLOW_SERIES time 1 time 2 time 3 time n Sample FLOW_SERIES 0 0 25 67 1 0 8 4 0 0 Field Variable Value Description l n flow n ratio of flow to peak flow for time n Card Type ENDFILE Description End of file identifier Must be on last line of file No fields Required YES OOOO 20 22 Custom NFF Equations File Custom NFF equation files are used to defined equations for NFF simulation that are not in the current NFF database Thus the latest regression equation can be used in the simulation to ensure the most up to date results possible Each Custom NFF equation file must be manually crea
66. Ve isa 17 3 STC O O E ROA 17 3 CON TOUTE LADA a a ri aia 17 3 Fhe CLE GLC GO COS TOO A cel 17 3 NATA ATA SAA A 17 4 LAS DISPLAY OPTION So a NR 17 4 TES GRD GENERATION laa a is 17 5 175d EXC EN da 17 5 1776 ACTIVE INACTIVE CEEES ae 17 6 17 6 1 ACUVALE FOV COM TRC VO AA AT IES 17 7 Viel DATA TYPE CONVERSION iuris aan dev oras EL fac dea id A E fants 17 7 17 73 Gr gt Scaler DOS di it aa 17 7 T72 GHG TN aen ets ee ran a sees ren a eo ee 17 8 193 ZD SCATTER POIN I ccceccsinccscccslesecssisessectaecouaveevceseteacecnerdssessactascsweyeeuscoatsascosesteressavscecssestouswervssestauoass 18 1 Poel INTRODUCTION canai ea teat titan a a to eee o e ee ees See 18 1 132 SCATTER POINT SA to o 18 1 Sy INPUTIONGSCATIER ONE SETS A AA A ea Rika 18 2 4 SAVING SCATTER PONE SETS aia 18 2 LS TOCEPACETIE aa 18 2 SAS A iia 18 2 Dele CES CAE T OLN SCP is de ias 18 2 SiO DISPLAVOPLTIONS a EAEE E E E r A 18 3 Loar INTERPOLA ION OPTIONS A E E 18 4 18 7 1 linear ANTCT POlAU Ore r a A O A E N 18 5 18 7 2 Inverse Distance Werented Interpol ade 18 5 18 7 3 ClOUGI TOCNEFINTE DO AN SAA 18 13 18 7 4 Natural Nebot 18 14 Sor INTERPOLATION TO GRIDS is 18 19 18 9 INTERPOLATING RAINFALL TO BASIN CENTROIDS oocococccnnnoconnnnnconononccnnnonononnnccnonononnnnnnononnnccnnnaninonos 18 19 18 10 BOUNDING DD co dey tested ee ooo eso 18 19 19 CASCZD INTERFACES cua vet aa 19 1 Al lt TR OU TION rada seeiaseen taane acia 19 1 190 AEYPICAL STEPS TO
67. Y values representing precipitation These series are used to define Pl and PC cards from both the gage and precipitation dialogs e Hypothetical Storm Series Have fixed X values which correspond to the times for the pH card The Y values represent the rainfall accumulation at the specified time 21 2 WMS e Time Area Series Have fixed X values representing time and Y values representing area These series are used to define time area distribution curves for the UA card e Storage Routing Series Have fixed X values representing the consecutive number of each Y value The Y values can represent elevations areas flows or volumes depending on which options are selected e Cross Section Series Have X and Y values representing the cross section points of a channel e Diversion Series Have fixed X values and Y values representing flow rates for the corresponding DI and DQ records e Unit Hydrograph Series Have fixed values representing the time values as defined by the IT record Y values need to be entered and represent the unit hydrograph ordinates e Given Hydrograph Series Have fixed values representing the time values as defined by the IN card in the basin parameters dialog The XY Series Editor is shown in Figure B 1 Each component of the dialog is described below 21 2 XY Series List At the bottom of the dialog in the center there is a list of xy series One of the items in the list is active and highligh
68. YV R y N N KE N D N 2 RSS x N X x gt S RN SS N SS VSI VAN Y D X S 3 N N NR KANN S SDG an DAN Ay RS Y AS ISS NSS NY A AS NA INS NY NN NN AN Wan ROSY S NAN A Ay S S Y N IS X k N K Q V INA a XK N si Y Y N S S Ky IN S NN X N y ss NNSA Se R N RY KANY NNSS X NIS y Y 8 OK Soke BREE KY NIN N WAY NINNNAN NANA NS X Nex I S DNA SSN RAN NA N N Y N N Y O X S SAN NANA SOS BON S SN X AS Y e ea DA hw N y DEN IS NS NY SN K N Aik NAN A AD RUE SN BA NYISS N K RAY INN NNN AN ER a N N gt Dz NA KN KN N K NI S N N KN W L NOE RAR OG Arc Vertex Spacing Controls TIN Vertex Spacing Y DAK ANAL SE L S CALE AA ANANA LV PEA ARERR AAA ZR ASS SA SOCAL AAP Bie an era A AA o OMG LY a OQ ATATA TATA Y BAADA TE SOPAS NS DO SSS S RN 4 V Da Ss X N N y Y R Q N N Y N N S N SS N Y N IN NS N Ry D X 8 N KAN N vay K N VA X M Y A A VY NN NI N SS SN N NAKANS AN SN SS RSS ENS DEV WAG BA NN SOY NN NI N N LN DA AD VD L gt N NS ny N K y BRS S 5 N AZ YA X Ce A N NA NN vA NS NN Y gt SY AN Y NAN O WS AW SS N
69. a travel time can be computed The process of computing travel times for a selected basin from computed basin data involves the following two steps 1 Select an equation or create a new one 2 Follow the instructions provided in the Instructions Results text window until all of the necessary data are correctly defined you may also edit any of the variables computed by WMS The following sections detail these two steps as well as document the basin geometric parameters computed by WMS and the empirical equations that are available to choose from Assigning an Equation to a Basin The Basin Time Computation dialog Figure 15 3 allows you to select from one of several pre defined equations The Equation drop down box lists the available methods for computing lag time or time concentration and is controlled by setting the computation type combo box to the desired setting Once you have selected an equation the Instructions Results window will identify any variables with zero values and instruct you to define values for them Variables are assigned values by selecting the variable from the Variables text window and then assigning a value to it in the edit box to the right Once all variables are defined the Instructions Results window will display the computed lag time or time of concentration 15 8 WMS Basin Time Computation Instructions Results rou may have to scroll down The Time of Concentration is 1 01 hrs Basi
70. a TIFF image Since the real coordinates of the screen corners are already known the image 1s automatically registered as it is captured These images and registration points can be exported and read back into WMS at a later time 3 5 DXF Files 3 5 1 The Drawing Exchange Format DXF is a file format commonly used by CAD programs DXF files can be imported in WMS to provide a background map of rivers and other terrain features or to enhance the final output image of a modeling project Display Options The Display options dialog is shown in Figure 3 30 and includes options to make all objects visible hide all objects and delete all objects In addition individual objects can be selected or unselected by clicking on the object in the text window display An asterisk is placed to the left of all selected objects Colors and styles of objects in the selected layer may also be controlled by selecting the appropriate color box 3 48 WMS 3 5 2 3 5 3 3 5 4 Display Options El ES Hydrologic Modeling D Grid Scatter Font TIN Drainage Flood DEM Map DF Layers vO SSINFO_FRZ M Visible Show All Hide All w FENCE v UNDERGROLIND_ TANE Delete Use original DXF colors Points Text 53 M Lines Ba Inserts Eirce Pines Ares uN Faces BT Traces T Dimensions I Solids carcel toy Figure 3 30 DXF Display Options Dialog Importing DXF Files The Im
71. albedo e Wilting point water content e Vegetation height e Vegetation radiation coefficient e Canopy stomatal resistance A more complete discussion of the evapotranspiration parameters is given in the CASC2D reference manual 19 12 Editing Map Attributes In addition to using the Edit Map dialog all parameters for a set of selected cells can be edited using the Cell Properties command Cells can be selected CASC2D Interface 19 15 using any one of the methods for cell selection but at least one cell must be selected prior to specifying this option If multiple cells are selected then the edit field for each parameter is grayed out until the first mouse click in that field Only the fields which are not grayed are updated when the okay button is selected If a field is accidentally activated and you wish to deactivate it once again hold down the shift key while clicking in the field 19 13 Defining Channels CASC2D can be run with or without hydraulic channel routing methods coupled with the overland flow computations Channels are defined using feature arcs from the Map module A complete discussion of these options is given Chapter 3 When writing CASC2D files the feature objects are rasterized onto the computational grid with the grid cells inheriting the attributes of the feature arc overlaying it CASC2D uses a link and node map to identify which cells are in the channel 19 14 The CASC2D Model Checker The Model Checker
72. allows you to enter the following values depending on the data type specified e HYDRO 35 The 2 yr 5 15 and 60 minute rainfall values and the 100 yr 5 15 and 60 minute rainfall values The HYDRO 35 maps for determining the six required rainfall values have been included at the end of this chapter 13 8 WMS e NOAA Atlas 2 The 2 yr 6 and 24 hour rainfall values the 100 yr 6 and 24 hr rainfall values and the mean basin elevation e User Defined The recurrence interval and the 5 10 15 30 and 60 minute rainfall values With this option only a single curve for the recurrence interval will be generated Once the specified data has been entered the corresponding IDF curves will be generated and plotted in the graphics window of the IDF Computation dialog You can then specify the recurrence interval you want to use for analysis by selecting it in the text list window in the upper right portion of the dialog After selecting the recurrence interval the appropriate curve in the plot window will be displayed in red Finally an intensity value 1 is determined by specifying a time of concentration as outlined below and then clicking on the Intensity button When clicking on the Done button for the IDF Computation dialog the computed intensity value will automatically be updated in the edit field for 1 of the Rational Method dialog Computing the Time of Concentration A time of concentration value needs to be entered in order to d
73. also be saved in the super file All of the WMS files are ASCII text files The first item in each of these files is a keyword signifying the file type The formats for these files are described in Chapter 20 New The New command deletes all data associated with all data types and all modules This command should be selected when an entirely new modeling project is started Open The Open command is used to read in one or more of the WMS file types This command brings up a file browser from which a single file is selected The program reads the keyword at the beginning of the file to determine the type of file selected and the appropriate routine is used to input the file The 2 8 4 General Tools 2 9 default file extension will change i e tin dem map etc depending on the module you are in However you can change the filters and or open any WMS file type no matter which module you are currently in If a super file is selected all of the files listed in the super file will be read in Files other than the WMS file types can be read using the Import command discussed later in this chapter The Open command has a macro in the tool palette Save As The Save As command is used to save the WMS file types to disk This command brings up a dialog that contains a check box and a filename for each of the WMS file types See Figure 2 3 If a data type does not currently exist in memory the check box and filename for t
74. and subtraction 3 Equations are evaluated from left to right Besides typing in the equation you can also select one of the pre defined equations from the Sample equations drop down list and add it to the equation line as a starting point to create a new equation You may also use any of the variables that WMS can manage as part of the equation 1 e length slope rainfall intensity etc However you cannot add a new variable since there is no way for WMS to manage it If a variable that is not managed by WMS is used in your equation you must determine what the appropriate value for the selected arc would be and enter it as a constant in the user defined equation Variables are added to an equation by either typing the abbreviation or you may select the variable you want to use and click on the Add to Equation button In a similar fashion mathematical operators can either be typed or the corresponding button selected to add it to the equation Modify Equations Ea Sample equations TRES shallow conc egri Equation L36004 Variable Abbreviations Definitions Manning s r Length of Arc ft pr dr rainfall in slope Ft Basin rea acre s rainfall intensity inher hydraulic radius ft intercept coefficient velocity fly s sqrt s ee Inis logis roars 7 CELE Add Tic Equation Equation L 3600 y OF Cancel Figure 15 7 Create Modify Equations Dialog Combining Arc T
75. and ready for definition If the hypothetical storm record already has a series assigned to it that series will be the current or active series when the editor is invoked In this case fill in the rainfall accumulation for the specified times using the Y edit fields 21 7 Defining A Time Area Curve UA A time area curve must be defined when the time area method for hydrograph computation is selected in the Unit Hydrograph dialog If the XY Series Editor is invoked from this dialog any time area series already defined in this session will be displayed in the list box If it is the first time the editor has been used in this session or if a series has not been assigned to the given time area record an empty default series will be active and ready for definition If the time area record already has a series assigned to it that series will be the current or active series when the editor is invoked The X field represents the time and the Y field represents the percentage of the basin area contributing to runoff at the given time The starting time and interval is determined from the Job Control parameters and can be adjusted using the starting time and interval specified in the XY Options Up to 150 values can be assigned However not all of the area Y fields need to be defined WMS will only write out those fields for which a value has been specified The XY Series Editor 21 7 21 8 Defining A Storage Routing Curve RS Storage rout
76. associated object Required This card is required in the case of TINs 2D scatter points and 3D scatter points With each of these objects multiple objects may be defined at once Hence the id is necessary to relate the data set to the proper object Field Variable _ Size Vale Description 1 id 4 byte int The id of the object Card Type NUMDATA Card ID 170 Description The number of data values that will be listed per time step This number should correspond to the number of vertices nodes cell centers cell centered grid cell corners mesh centered grid maximum node id meshes or scatter points Required YES Field Variable Size Value Description The number of items At each timestep numdata are listed Card Type NUMCELLS Card ID 180 Description This number should correspond to the element id meshes or the number of cells grids Required MES A A A AAA O Field Variable _ Size Value Description i numcells 4 byte int The number of elements or cells Card Type NAME gt OO Card ID 190 File Formats 20 19 Field Variable Size Value Description 1 name 40 bytes str The name of the data set Use one character per byte Mark the end of the Po string with the O character Card Type E Card ID 200 Description Defines the set of scalar val
77. basins have been delineated from a terrain model can be useful in many of these equations These attributes can be viewed from within the Unit Hydrograph Method dialog by choosing the View Basin Geometrical Attributes button Time of concentration can be computed from one of several equations using these attributes or by using a time computation coverage These options are accessed from the Compute Parameters Basin Data and Compute Parameters Map Data buttons respectively see section 15 3 e R The Clark storage coefficient in hours e TIME AREA CURVE The time area curve defines the area of the watershed contributing runoff to the basin outlet as a function of time This curve is defined by selecting the check box and then activating the XY Series Editor with the adjacent button The time area curve can be computed automatically from a TIN this method will not work for watersheds delineated from DEMs or Feature Objects using the Compute Time Area Curves button 10 9 2 Snyder US Parameters for the Snyder unit hydrograph are as follows e TP Lag time in hours Several different equations have been published to determine the lag time of a basin Many of them use some of the geometric attributes computed automatically when a terrain model is present These attributes can be viewed by choosing the View Basin Geometrical Attributes button Lag time can be computed from one of several equations using these attributes or by usin
78. be computed and will automatically be updated in this field Curve Number The NRCS SCS Curve Number CN should be entered in this field CN is a function of hydrologic soil group and land use Composite CN s may be TR 55 Interface 12 5 computed for each basin and mapped to this field For more information on computing CN s from GIS data layers see section 15 2 12 3 5 Rainfall Both the total rainfall and a dimensionless mass distribution must be specified to define precipitation for a basin The total rainfall 1s entered in the rainfall edit field and the distribution type is specified by selecting one of the standard NRCS SCS rainfall distribution types from the drop down list The TR 55 reference manual shows a map Appendix B 2 of the TR 55 reference of distribution types for the US 12 3 6 Pond Swamp Factor The pond and swamp factor will affect the peak discharge The percentage of area for the selected basin that is made up of ponds lakes swamps etc should be entered in the appropriate edit field 12 3 7 Travel Time The travel time is the amount of time a flood wave takes to move from the outlet to the downstream most point of the watershed This is different than other models in WMS which has you enter the travel time from outlet to outlet Computed hydrographs at each basin and each outlet point represent the amount of the hydrograph at the outlet point contributed from each basin or each outlet point Thus
79. be performed following selection If some of the branching Drainage TINs 7 7 vertices should not be added as outlets they can be deselected by clicking on the vertex while holding the SHIFT key down If there are a large number of stream branches and only a small number are to be added they can be selected individually using multi selection techniques 7 5 Streams 7 9 1 Streams can be defined for a TIN by linking together consecutive channel edges Streams can be defined by manually connecting the edges Automatically delineating a stream network can only occur if all channel edges have been explicitly incorporated into the TIN This can be done using the TIN editing techniques described in the previous chapter along with breaklines swapping edges and point insertion You can verify that a continuous set of channel edges exist by toggling on the display of channel edges Stream networks are automatically delineated for each outlet point in the TIN Because TINs are created from a sparse set of points it is often difficult to explicitly define channel edges particularly in urban areas where well defined channels may not even exist For this reason a stream can also be created by manually selecting a set of vertices which defines a channel This method also allows a street or storm drain to be incorporated into the TIN and used as part of the stream network Create Streams When the Create Streams command is chosen a stream
80. be used to convert the new data set values back to the map array Values of hydraulic conductivity or any other map parameter could be contoured once the map is converted to a data set Creating a Map from a Data Set The Data set gt Array button can be used to convert a data set to a map for any of the available parameters This is particularly useful if scattered data for a particular parameter is available and you wish to interpolate from the scattered data to a data set for the grid The interpolated data set can then be used to create a map with this option For example if hydraulic conductivity is known by filed observation at several points then using a set of scattered points these values can be interpolated to the grid and then converted to a map for hydraulic conductivity This feature is also useful for reassigning a data set to a map after the data calculator has been used to perform a mathematical operation as described in the previous section Reclassification For most watersheds it will be difficult 1f not impossible to obtain cell by cell data for all of the parameters required to run a CASC2D model While interpolation of scattered data is one solution for setting up maps the reclassification method is often more practical and efficient Reclassification allows a material or soil property id to be assigned to each cell Then typical values of hydraulic conductivity porosity or any all of the required parameters can be def
81. be used to determine how many points your system is capable of reading For example each DEM point requires 5 bytes of memory so that if you read an entire 1 250 000 DEM with about 1 4 million points 1 4 meg 5 bytes 7 meg of memory would be required in addition to whatever other memory being used by WMS This means that you would need at least 8 meg of RAM or some type of virtual memory capabilities would be required to read in the entire DEM file This same dialog is used for all five types of DEMs supported in the WMS import options USGS ARC INFO GRASS DTED and SDTS 2 18 WMS DEMs in Different UTM Zones Occasionally two adjacent USGS DEM files will be read in but do not appear adjacent in the import dialog This occurs because while the two DEMs are adjacent they lie in different UTM zones X coordinates within UTM zones repeat and therefore the DEMs do not le adjacent to one another as they should WMS does not contain the utility functions necessary to transform a DEM from one UTM coordinate zone to another However ARC INFOS and possibly other GIS software can be used to convert from one zone to another Since WMS can import ARC INFO grids the DEMs can be merged projected to consistent zones and then exported as an ASCII grid file which can be imported into WMS Gridded Attributes gt WMS Attributes Besides an elevation DEM points may contain certain attributes such as a basin id flow direction flow accumula
82. can be exported to the ARC INFO ASCII TIN file format It can then be imported into ARC INFO or ArcView with 3D analyst 2D scatter points gt point generate file Export the active scatter point set as an ARC INFO point generate file Computed drainage data gt tabular data Drainage data such as areas stream lengths and slopes can be exported or saved to a file using the Export File command and choosing the drainage data file type This file is intended to be used in conjunction with a spreadsheet program and therefore the format can be specified as either comma space or tab delimited Only the data whose display boxes are set in the Geometric 2 22 WMS Attributes Options dialog accessed from within the Drainage Display Options are written to the file Drainage boundaries amp streams gt DLG A DLG or digital line graph is a generic file format which can be interpreted by most common GIS programs Only streams and polygonal boundaries representing drainage basins can be saved to a DLG file Careful attention must be paid to the referencing points written to the DLG file as they will have to be edited in order to reference this file to another coverage being used within the GIS program DXF file Export the current the geometry defined in the current WMS scene as a DXF file TIFF file Export the current data displayed in the WMS Graphics Window as a TIFF file The image can be exported as either a shaded i
83. can be generated at the proper location When a channel is present the outlet cell information is not required since the outlet cell is implicit from the channel network The slope at the outlet is the representative slope leading from the outlet off the model Channel Routing Parameters A CASC2D model can be run with or without the definition of stream channels Without them only the surface runoff computations are performed This is always the default option when initializing a CASC2D project However coupled hydraulic routing can be done using the Priessman option The other two options for channel routing exist only to initialize channel flows before actually running the runoff model These two methods include initialize by draining and initialize by backwater When either of the latter two options are specified execution of CASC2D will only cause channel flow 19 8 WMS files depth and discharge to be initialized Once the channels have been successfully initialized the channel option should be switched to Priessman routing for a full analysis to be done The total routing time routing time step and minimum flow values apply to the initialization of channels The total routing time is specified in minutes and the routing time step in seconds They are used along with the minimum flow value to determine convergence for the initialization problem The velocity correction factor friction slope weight and spatial derivative weigh
84. centers With mesh centered grids all visualization and computations are performed at the cell corners and no interpolation is necessary The CASC2D model requires the grid to be cell centered However if the purpose of the grid is for visualization of interpolated data only then it is preferable to use a mesh centered grid since the extra interpolation to the cell corners for contouring is not required 17 3 Tool Palette 17 3 1 The following tools are contained in the dynamic portion of the Tool Palette when the 2D Grid module is active Select Cell The Select Cell tool is used to select individual grid cells or grid nodes Multi selection can be performed by holding down the SHIFT key while selecting or by dragging a rectangle to enclose the cells to be selected The 1 indices of the selected cell are displayed in the Edit Window 17 3 2 17 3 3 17 3 4 17 3 5 2D Grids 17 3 If the grid is cell centered selected cells are highlighted by drawing small circles around the cell centers If the grid is mesh centered the grid nodes corners are selected and the circles are drawn around the grid nodes Only visible cells can be selected Cells which have been hidden cannot be selected Inactive cells can only be selected when they are being displayed by turning on the Inactive Cells item in the Display Options dialog see section below on active inactive cells Select i The Select i tool is used to select an entire r
85. concentration can be used in TR 20 watershed models By de selecting the Do not auto recompute parameters option unit hydrograph parameters will be automatically re calculated when the basin area is re computed or other basin parameters are changed See section 15 3 1 for more information about these equations Compute TC Map Data Times of concentration may also be computed using a time computation coverage The basin time of concentration dialog is accessed by selecting the Compute TC Map Data button See section 15 3 for more information about computing the time of concentration with a time computation coverage Use Defined Cross Section Select this option to use a defined cross section for your basin runoff computations By selecting the Define Cross Section button you can define a TR 20 Interface 11 9 cross section to use in the runoff computations To define a cross section the elevation discharge and end area must be defined for different intervals 11 6 9 Use Defined Reservoir Select this option to use a defined reservoir for your basin runoff computations By selecting the Define Reservoir button you can define a reservoir to use in the runoff computations To define a reservoir the elevation discharge and storage must be defined for different intervals 11 7 Routing Data REACH Outlet points are used to define locations where hydrographs are combined and then routed downstream The appropriate combined hyd
86. could then be used to create a grid from a feature polygon using the Create Grid command found in the Feature Objects menu 6 11 TIN gt Scatter Points The TIN gt Scatter Points command creates a 2D scatter point set from the TIN One data point is created for each of the vertices in the TIN A data set is made of each from the elevations of the TIN vertices This command can be used as part of the process to create smooth contours by subdividing the TIN and then interpolating from the newly created scatter points 6 12 TIN gt DEM You can convert a TIN to a DEM using the 7IN gt DEM command When converting a TIN to a DEM WMS estimates default values for the xy coordinates of the lower left corner of the DEM the DEM grid cell size and the number of rows and columns These parameters can be customized by editing the respective values in the Convert TIN to DEM dialog shown below DEM grid cell elevations are computed by interpolation from the TIN vertices using either a linear interpolation or an inverse distance weighted method Convert TIN to DEM X Interpolation Method ea a Options cell width fia ncols 302 fia 12 cell height lower left corner 1869 750 lower left corner tr 2423 150 cence AROS Figure 6 9 Convert TIN to DEM Dialog CHAPTER Drainage TINS 7 1 Introduction A TIN terrain model can be used in WMS to delineate stream networks and drainage basin boundaries Since the
87. delineation you can return to this step and redefine the locations where you would like sub basins created POPS Ta tl In i j Jj i k I ane LT ae at e sl i k y pl o er A A c on ATAS B F k Li i a Al ris T ah ion oar is mall Y a E tes e eet li FS tke E em et age er REN Figure 1 16 Addition of Outlet Points on the TIN to Define Sub basins 8 Delineate Basins A flow path is initiated from the centroid of each triangle and followed until the first outlet point section 7 7 1 The triangle is then assigned the basin ID corresponding to the branch of the stream the flow path entered from by default a separate basin is created for each upstream branch of an outlet as illustrated in Figure 1 17 where there are two basins for the outlet in the lower left corner Basins can be merged section 7 7 4 later providing they both belong to the same outlet point 1 20 WMS Y at i IA A ca A Figure 1 17 Delineated Sub basins from a TIN 9 Refine TIN During the basin delineation process in step eight some problems with divergent or splitting flow paths may occur Again WMS has tools which will allow you to correct these problems automatically section 7 7 3 and manually The automatic method will correct the problem about 90 of the time while in 10 of the cases you may need to swap edges or edit the TIN in some other way in order to eliminate the split flow vertices If there are no split flow vert
88. determined geometric properties important to hydrologic modeling area slopes runoff distances etc can be computed from the DEM data section 5 5 6 1 2 3 Introduction 1 15 Figure 1 12 Some of the Computed Basin Attributes 10 Define the Hydrologic Model At this point you will have the same model as described in the previous section where watersheds are defined strictly from the feature points lines arcs and polygons The computed data from step nine is automatically stored in the appropriate locations for hydrologic model definition and the remaining parameters for the desired hydrologic model can be entered using the appropriate interface dialogs Guidelines for Using TIN Data The third method which has been the traditional approach in WMS for defining watershed models is through the use of TINs Developing watersheds from TINs often involves the use of both feature objects and DEMs The following steps can be used as a guideline for watershed characterization with TINs 1 Obtain Background Elevation An elevation source is required for creating a TIN If you have an existing TIN whose triangle edges already conform to key drainage features such as streams then you can use the TIN and skip directly to step six however you must still define outlets and streams manually using the techniques described in section 7 5 1 Even if you already have a TIN data source we recommend that in most cases you use it as a bac
89. dois 2 4 ZOOMING iN XY SETICS cooooooonnncccnnnnnnnnncnnnnnonnnnos 21 5 Shortwave radiation ooooooooonncccncnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnos 10 23 Shuffle dOWN cccccccccccncnonooonnonoocncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 3 42 SO Mariola inicias 3 42 A A toate 15 12 SMOC S O Uo nO o O 6 14 A a E IN 4 6 DEIN Sica UE EE cecaetcin ee ientsntnos 6 20 smoothing CASC2D stream cells 3 37 BMAD O OUIG o 2 35 Snapping streams ridges cccssceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 27 O 10 21 A estore Sava hie ents 10 23 elevation ARA A 10 22 LOSS ear 10 23 shortwave radiation cccccccccccccnnnnnnononcnnnnnnss 10 23 temperato e E E 10 23 wina SPCC is 10 23 Snyder unit hydrograph ssecseeeeeeeeeeees 10 19 Y e A 4 4 A O 3 17 A ethan ee tee 2 31 3 29 split flow vertices COM COINS rr rio 7 11 CISD AVIAN O aera 6 7 Spread cla stacdatetea ea tou sien aeiaaans 16 12 Spreadsheet datar aaron 2 21 stage creating streams TO it lawns a 8 6 dennin o Esaa tdi eceunieet 8 4 delia 8 5 CIS PA VAIN iaa 8 3 A EN S E E T 8 5 A e E E PA E EE IE A E T T E 20 27 TAKS Cl ELE E TE A TT 8 3 POr crias 8 4 IN ETPOlAMON sssi 8 3 8 5 8 8 A 8 6 VAS da ai ia 8 3 standard deviatiOn cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 16 4 SAS a 11 3 storage capacity CURVES iii 7 9 Storage COCMICION raises doi 15 23 storage routing oooooooncnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononnnanononnnnnos 10 25 SONAS a2 indica AS 9 8 Storm total SACS da 10 34
90. entered in the frequency edit field Rainfall will be converted to an annual series for fifty twenty and ten percent storms No conversion is made for any other frequency storms A storm area to be used in computing reduction of point rainfall depths is entered in the area edit field If a O is entered for the area then the basin area or area from JD card for depth area storms will be used as a default 108 Loss Methods One of several different loss methods can be chosen when generating synthetic hydrographs A loss method is assigned to a basin by first selecting the basin and then choosing the Loss Method button in the Edit HEC 1 Parameters dialog As with other basin data the same parameters can be assigned to several basins by selecting multiple basins before accessing the Loss Method dialog HEC 1 Loss Methods C Uniform LU STATL o 0000 Exponential LE CAYHER 53 0 5 C Green ampt LG Y Holtan LH ATIMP 0 0000 505 curve number LS Lancel Figure 10 8 HEC 1 Losses Dialog 10 16 WMS When defining a kinematic wave model it may be necessary to define a separate set of loss parameters for the two different UK records generally corresponding to pervious and impervious area This second set of loss parameters is defined from within the Unit Hydrograph Method dialog The available loss methods along with a description of their important parameters is given below 10 8 1 Uniform LU This loss m
91. equal to XKSAT XKSAT Hydraulic conductivity at natural saturation in inches hour mm hour RTIMP Percentage of drainage basin that is impervious Using methods defined by the Maricopa County Flood Control District Green Ampt parameters can be determined from GIS data layers automatically in WMS See section 15 2 for information on how to do this 10 8 4 Holtan LH Parameters used to define the Holtan loss method FC Holtan s long term equilibrium loss rate in inches hour mm hour for rainfall losses on snow free ground GIA Infiltration rate in inches hour per inch BEXP mm hour per mm BEXP of available soil moisture storage capacity SAI Initial depth in inches mm of pore space in the surface layer of the soil which is available for storage of infiltrated water BEXP Exponent of available soil moisture storage RTIMP Percentage of drainage basin that is impervious 10 8 5 SCS LS The SCS curve number method uses the following parameters STRTL Initial rainfall abstraction in inches mm for snowfree ground If value is O then initial abstraction will be computed as 2 1000 10 CRVNBR CRVNBR CRVNBR SCS curve number for rainfall losses on snowfree ground Note Composite Curve Numbers can be computed automatically when this method for computing losses is chosen and a terrain model is present Refer to section 15 2 for more information on computing curve numbers 10 18 WMS 10 9
92. files are found in the tutorial directory you may need to set protections so that all users can read and use them Using WMS on Other Computers WMS is licensed on a single user basis This software can be installed on only one computer for use by one user at a time If this software is to be installed on multiple computers each computer requires a separate license You may purchase additional licenses for WMS by contacting BOSS International If it becomes necessary to move WMS from the currently registered computer to another contact BOSS International Technical Support for an updated password No additional fee will be charged provided WMS is only run on one computer at a time Technical Notes The following is a list of technical notes to assist you in the operation of WMS The WMS Resources Directory The default installation of WMS will place the resource files in the WMS directory along with the executable The resource files include the following COLORS BYU FONT INC WMS INI WMSPASS WMS Installation Guide If WMS will not be run from the installation directory it will be necessary to specify the path name to where the resource files are located Upon starting up WMS an argument may be added to specify the location of these files For example if the resource files are located in a directory named Resources paralleled to where WMS will be run you would enter the following WMS RESOURCES When WM
93. filtered For example prior to filtering you can manually adjust the value of a vertex and then lock it Filtered elevations will then be biased towards the elevation of the locked vertex TINS 6 21 Different filtering options as described below can be set to control how filtering proceeds They can be set in different combinations until a desired result is reached It is often useful to display contours and flat triangles to help guide the filtering process Filter TIN The Filter TIN command filters the TIN using the current set of filtering options as described below Restore Elevations The Restore Elevations command changes the elevations of the vertices back to the last stored values The first time a TIN is filtered the elevations are stored by default Thereafter if you wish to remember a set you must explicitly store them from inside the Filter Options dialog Once the filtering process is complete commands other than filtering are chosen the status of the stored elevations is no longer valid 1 e you cannot restore the elevations Filter Options Filter options control how a TIN is modified when issuing the Filter TIN command Different combinations of the settings produce somewhat different results TIN Filter Options x Number of iterations h Masimum change in elevations 0 500 Filter ratio 0 80 Store Present Elevations Minimum and masimum fat region options X Lock critical interior points x
94. flow Edges are then swapped to maintain the inferred flow regime e Smoothing Pits Pits may be the result of isolated depressions within a terrain surface They can be removed by swapping neighboring edges or slightly adjusting vertex elevations to simulate filling of the depression e TIN Filtering Typically large flat regions occur because of rounding errors in the calculation of the elevations and TIN filtering uses an averaging technique to appropriately adjust elevations relative to surrounding vertices If there are too many flat triangles grouped together such as is the case when a reservoir exists that has a constant surface elevation then you may need to delete several of the interior vertices before doing the filtering 6 9 1 6 9 2 TINs 6 19 The details and options available for each of these methods are discussed in the following sections Interpolating Flat Triangles When the Interpolate Flat Triangles command in the TIN menu is issued WMS computes the differences between the elevations of the flat triangles and the elevations of the surface defined by the IDW quadratic interpolation scheme This technique is used because of its ability to accurately infer important terrain features such as pits peaks streams and ridges The difference between the flat surface and the interpolated surface is referred to as the deviation of the flat triangles The deviation is computed at regularly spaced points on the int
95. flow under the hydrograph in inches depth acre feet and cfs hours e Constant base flow value Discharge Hydrograph Selecting this option will produce a discharge versus time hydrograph at the selected hydrograph station s Elevation of Hydrograph Selecting this option will produce an elevation versus time hydrograph in tabular form This table will be produced for the hydrograph station s selected Flow Duration Data Selecting this option will produce a table showing discharge versus duration of time that a discharge is equaled or exceeded This table will be produced for the hydrograph station s selected Save Results for Summary Tables This option puts the standard control operation results in summary tables 1 and 3 of the ECON2 URB generated files see TR 20 reference manual Only the largest peak discharge for each hydrograph is listed in these files Basin Data RUNOFF General information for each basin is entered by selecting a basin and choosing the Basin Data dialog If multiple basins are selected some fields will not be able to be edited Basin name and Area while others will be grayed out These other fields are in Multi select mode if you select and assign data to these fields this data is assigned to all the selected sub basins A description of the data entry fields in this dialog is given below 11 6 1 11 6 2 11 6 3 TR 20 Interface 11 7 TH 20 Basin Data Basin name JREDAI Use cr
96. from a file 8 2 Tool Palette Since the flood plain analysis options are found in the TINs module the tools are the same as defined in the 77Ns chapter 8 3 Flood Plain Display Options The display options dialog box accessed from the Flood menu allows control over the display of entities related to drainage analysis Display Options ki Hydrologic Modeling 2D Grid Scatter Point TIN Drainage Flood DEM Map Stage height F E _ Fixed stage Fixed stage values a _ Interpolated stage Po Interpolated stage values _ Flood plain boundary __ Flood plain color filled _ Flood plain contours OF Cancel Apply Figure 8 1 Flood Display Options Dialog 8 3 1 8 3 2 8 3 3 8 3 4 8 3 5 8 3 6 Flood Plain Analysis 8 3 Stage Height When fixed or interpolated stages are displayed they are represented as a vertical bar above the vertex The height of the bar can be controlled by changing the stage height value which is used as a multiplier Fixed Stage If the Fixed Stage option 1s set all vertices with fixed stage values will be marked by a colored bar drawn vertically from the vertex The height of the bar can be adjusted by changing the number of pixels per unit of stage in the Stage Height text field The color of the bar is shown in the color box and can be altered See the section titled Stage to learn more about fixed and interpolated stage values Fixed Stage Values
97. gages dialog is used to specify which gage is currently active for editing Clicking on the gage name within this window activates the gage and places its name and position in the edit fields Either inverse distance weighted interpolation or the Thiessen polygon method of interpolation can be used when computing the influence of the gages on individual grid cells 19 10 WMS 19 8 Editing CASC2D Maps 19 8 1 19 8 2 A CASC2D map refers to a file of values for any of the attributes which must be defined on a cell by cell basis This includes all of the overland flow and infiltration parameters WMS uses the same spreadsheet editor dialog for all such maps This section describes the general operations of the map editing dialog while the different maps which can be defined are discussed in the overland flow and infiltration properties sections The Map Edit dialog is shown in Figure 19 4 The text window on the left side of the dialog is used to select which map is currently active for editing Map choices are determined by the toggle box or radio group choices selected just below the text window Uren Flow Hana Dita Sel o Amey dam gt Ciao 0 013 ETI 0 013 ETI 0 013 ami E om ea om ea oma ema 0 013 ems oma ems om3 fi fomi fee om3 feo om3 003 0013 fema oma ema oma ema 0013 ems oma ams oma ema uma fem fomi fe fo em ama ema oma ema oma ema 0 013 fems oma ems
98. general coverage allows you to create edit points nodes arcs and polygons without defining attributes or worrying about special rules associated the different coverages and attributes For examples WMS requires that stream and time computation arcs be defined from downstream to upstream If you import data from another source you have no guarantee of the ordering and if you import them to a Drainage Coverage type it may cause problems Therefore you can import them to a general coverage make appropriate edits streams can be reordered by selecting the downstream most point and choosing the Reorder Streams command from the Feature Objects menu and then convert the coverage to a drainage type XMODEL Coverage The XMODEL coverage is used to define boundary conditions for the XMODEL finite element model that is under development through the USACEWES Until the model has been tested and is available for general use it will not be documented as part of this reference manual CASC2D Coverage The CASC2D coverage type is used when defining feature objects that are used to create grids see the Create Grid command later in this section for performing a rainfall runoff analysis with the CASC2D finite difference model Boundary conditions and model parameters can be assigned to the different feature objects and used in conjunction with the grid when saving CASC2D input files CASC2D Point Node Types CASC2D does not use Point attributes but t
99. in miles E length along the stream from the study point to a point along the stream adjacent to the centroid of the basin in miles S weighted average slope of the basin from the study point to the upstream limits of the basin in feet per foot The percent impervious 1 must already be defined in one of the Loss methods used for HEC 1 15 16 WMS This equation was developed for small urban watersheds less than 5 square miles with mild slopes The peaking coefficient can be computed from the percent impervious 1 using the following equations C 0 0037 1a 0 163 Os la S10 15 7 C 0 000023 7 0 00224 11a 0 146 lOS TAO cias 15 8 C 0 0000033 74 0 000801 7 0 12 40 lt la lt 100 oe 15 9 The Denver method used a peaking parameter P and the relationships below to compute the peaking coefficient C P 0 0024501 0 01204 2 16 OS E sents 15 10 P 0 00091 4 0 228 Ia 2 06 40 lt Ia 100 wu 15 11 A eter eah aes 15 12 where E coefficient as defined by equations 15 7 to 15 9 P peaking parameter A basin area in square miles Espey Lag Time Equation Espey s equations for Snyder s parameters were developed for a series of small watersheds in Texas Oklahoma and New Mexico Rather than defining the lag time Espey 1966 used the time to rise The difference is that the lag time is the time from the centroid of rainfall to the peak of the hydrograph whereas the time t
100. increment in x and a per cent change in X per increment Only the y values are explicitly listed XY3 id n xl incx pcx dx dy rep begc name XY Series vers 2 Ral Y values XY1l id n dx dy rep begc name XY Series vers 1 x1 y1 XY values X2 y2 le xn Yn XY2 id n dx dy rep begc name XY Series vers 2 x1 y1 XY values x2 Y2 xn Yn 20 42 WMS l Yn Figure 20 49 The XY Series File Format XY3 1 241 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 typel 24hour 0 00000 10 00174 1 0000 Figure 20 50 The Sample XY Series File The card types used in the XY series file format are as follows Card Type RA o Description Defines a curve with a list of XY values Any number of points and any x spacing between points may be used Required NO Format XY1 id n dx dy rep begc name x1 Y1 x2 Y2 Sample xy1 1 5 0O 0 0 O head 0 0 0 0 10 20 2 5 720 3 0 8 0 4 5 9 5 Field Variable Value Description id The id of the XY series n The number of point in the series 3 dx 0 1 A flag defining whether the x values listed are to be interpreted as incremental dx 1 or absolute Lo gt ao A dx 0 interpreted as incremental dy 1 or absolute 4 dy 0 1 A flag defining whether the y values listed are to be Po y 0 5 rep 0 1 A flag defining whether the xy series is to be PoC Cid interprete
101. interactively creating lines in WMS you should always create streams from downstream to upstream If you import a set of lines that has been previously created by another program you may discover that the order does not match what is required by WMS The Reorder Streams see page 3 28 command in the Feature Objects menu can be used to properly order the incoming lines so that they can be converted to streams 1 6 WMS 1 2 2 4 Define the Hydrologic Model Once the watershed model representation has been created data defining a specific hydrologic model can be entered through a series of user friendly dialogs Since WMS allows for all hydrologic modeling input to be defined separate from any digital terrain data it is not required that the watershed model developed with feature objects be to scale Area and length parameters can simply be manually defined using the model interface Figure 1 4 shows how a topologic model is automatically created from point line and polygon feature object data fe BAN Figure 1 4 Topologic Model Automatically Constructed from Feature Objects Guidelines for Using DEM Data The second method that can be used in WMS for defining watershed models and developing hydrologic data involves the use of digital elevation models or DEMs A DEM as defined in WMS is simply a two dimensional array of elevation points with a constant x and y spacing While a DEM results in data redundancy for surface definitio
102. is defined as the number of DEM points whose flow paths eventually pass through that point For example DEM points that are part of a stream have high flow accumulation values since the flow paths of all upstream points will pass through them Streams are easily identified by displaying all DEM points with a flow accumulation value greater than a user defined threshold as shown in Figure 1 7 Flow accumulations can be computed in WMS from the flow directions or read from ARC INFO GRASS or TOPAZ formatted files 1 10 WMS be an SS isa ON ALE L AS F a ip Re CA aK AI Y y ad e Fi A Figure 1 7 Flow Accumulation DEM Points Above a Defined Threshold 5 Identify the Watershed Outlet and Convert DEM Streams to Arcs With the aid of the flow accumulations the location of the watershed outlet needs to be determined and an outlet feature point created there section 5 2 5 A minimum threshold is then defined and all of the DEM points upstream from the defined outlet s are connected together to form a stream network of feature lines section 5 5 1 Introduction 1 11 Figure 1 8 Stream Vector Created from Flow Accumulation Grid at a Specified Outlet Location You should note that the stream feature arcs can be created in any fashion For example in an urban area the streams will not likely be well defined from the DEM elevations and flow directions The flow directions for the DEM are then used for basic
103. is the water surface elevation in feet that routing begins for the reservoir or structure 11 8 4 Defining Reservoir Data You can define reservoir data by pressing the Define reservoir data button This will bring up a dialog where you can define the elevation discharge storage relationship for the reservoir see Figure 11 7 You can enter up to 20 elevation discharge storage relationships for each reservoir To assign a particular set of data to a reservoir select the reservoir you want and select the OK button on the TR 20 Reservoir data dialog 11 8 5 Input Hydrograph One or more input hydrographs can be defined for a reservoir WMS will combine any input hydrographs with other input hydrographs to the reservoir The resulting hydrograph will then be routed through the reservoir This option is useful for defining measured stream flows into a reservoir 11 8 6 Output Control Control of the output files can be specified individually for each of the reservoirs Output control parameters for all hydrograph stations are identical and are discussed in an earlier section Diversions TR 20 allows flow to be diverted from an outlet or drainage basin This flow can be thought of as leaving the normal drainage system at that point It can 11 9 1 11 9 2 11 9 3 TR 20 Interface 11 15 be retrieved at a downstream outlet where the diverted flow then contributes to the flow at that outlet If no downstream retrieval outlet point is specified
104. is useful to delineate the active inactive regions in a grid using a polygon A region can be activated by selecting the Activate Polygon Region from the Grid menu A dialog appears prompting you to select either Read polygon from file or Select polygon interactively If the Read polygon from file option is selected WMS brings up the File Browser dialog and prompts the user to specify a polygon file If the Select polygon interactively option is selected WMS prompts the user to define the polygon by selecting at least three points and double clicking when done Once a polygon is entered each cell 1s compared to the polygon If the cell center is on the interior of the polygon it is made active Otherwise the cell is made inactive 17 7 Data Type Conversion 17 7 1 It is sometime useful to convert a 2D grid to a set of scattered data points or a TIN data structure Data for the grid can then be used to perform operations available for scattered points or TINs Grid gt Scatter Points The Grid gt Scatter Points command in the Grid menu is used to create a new scatter point set using the nodes or cells of a 2D grid A copy is made of each of the data sets associated with the grid and the data sets are associated with the new scatter point set This command is useful for comparing the solutions from two separate simulations from different grids For example if two simulations have been performed with slightly different grids base
105. land use coverages Initial abstractions and percent impervious are determined from a land use coverage while a soil coverage is used to define hydraulic conductivity soil moisture deficit and wetting front suction The parameters required to define these values must be entered for the appropriate coverages See section 3 2 6 to learn more about defining parameters for soil and land use coverages WMS allows you to define a hydrologic soil coverage or grid and land use coverage or grid that define boundaries for the different soil types and land uses Typically this information is imported from standard GIS formatted files see section 2 8 6 for more information on importing these files These data are then mapped to either drainage coverage polygons or TIN triangles depending on how you have created your watershed and sub basin boundaries and used in the computation of a composite curve number In summary the following data are used for computing composite CN s runoff coefficients or Green amp Ampt parameters e Basin boundaries can be defined with either TINs or feature objects remember that boundaries defined from a DEM are converted to feature objects e Land use IDs can be supplied from a land use coverage in the map module or as DEM a gridded attributes e Soil type IDs can be supplied from a soil type coverage in the map module or as DEM a gridded attributes e A user defined table relating land use IDs to the parameter
106. large 18 7 3 2D Scatter Points 18 13 Clough Tocher Interpolation The Clough Tocher interpolation technique is often referred to in the literature as a finite element method because it has origins in the finite element method of numerical analysis Before any points are interpolated the scatter points are first triangulated to form a temporary TIN A bivariate polynomial is defined over each triangle creating a surface made up of a series of triangular Clough Tocher surface patches The Clough Tocher patch is a cubic polynomial defined by twelve parameters shown in Figure 18 8 the function values f and the first derivatives fx amp fy at each vertex and the normal derivatives Of On at the midpoint of the three edges in the triangle Clough amp Tocher 1965 Lancaster amp Salkauskas 1986 The first derivatives at the vertices are estimated using the average slopes of the surrounding triangles The element is partitioned into three subelements along seams defined by the centroid and the vertices of the triangle A complete cubic polynomial of the form 3 1 O E E E ee aeeeee 18 24 j 0 is created over each subtriangle with slope continuity across the seams and across the boundaries of the triangle Second derivative continuity is not maintained across the seams of the triangle The form of equation 18 24 implemented in WMS is highly complex and is not included in this reference manual The complete set of equatio
107. latitude longitude pair into equivalent UTM coordinates Map Module 3 45 Register Image TIIRIN ATLET 24 03 A i i Figure 3 29 Register Image Dialog The Import World File button can be used to register the image from an ARC INFO world file The world file contains the same information as the WMS image registration file and can be used by WMS You will also note in the export option that you can also save a world file from WMS to register an image in ARC INFO or ArcView Register Point Tool The Select Register Point tool is used to select and drag register points to a location on the map for which real coordinates are known so that they can be entered in the corresponding xy edit fields iZoom Tool The Zoom Tool is used to zoom in a portion of the image for which coordinates are known and a registration point needs to be placed Pan Tool The Pan Tool is used to pan the image to a location for which coordinates are known and a registration point needs to be placed 3 46 WMS 3 4 4 3 4 5 3 4 6 The Frame Macro is used to automatically center the image within the drawing window of the dialog after panning and zooming in on a specific location Resampling Images When a TIFF file is imported the colors for each pixel are read into memory The image itself will often have a higher resolution than the computer screen you wish to display it on For example and image might be 1600x1600 pixels w
108. left right center top or bottom The unit of measure is the same as the paper size The image may also be positioned on the paper by clicking on the box representing the image and dragging it within the paper display Page Layout M Maintain aspect ratio Picture Size af eight feo SUN width fea Center hax Aspect _ Display Scale Legend 1 in 5834 760 inches centimeters Margins Left OxMid Right Ma O Top Mid 8 Bottom 1 15 Cancel Figure 2 12 Page Layout Dialog Print Display Options When the Print command is selected the current display options are used to control what is printed When an image is displayed in the Graphics Window it is by default displayed as a wire frame image A continuous shaded image is displayed only when the Shade command is issued The Print Display Options dialog allows you to specify whether the image will be printed as a 2 8 9 2 8 10 2 8 11 2 8 12 2 8 13 General Tools 2 25 wire frame shaded image or smoothed contours It also allows flow patterns to be displayed in addition to the selected display mode Printing Files UNIX Platforms Once the printing options are selected the current image in the Graphics Window is printed by selecting the OK button from the Print dialog With the UNIX version of WMS the image is not sent directly to a printer but is sent to a PostScript file This file can then be sent to a printer from
109. method was applied include the following e Areas from 22 to 7 5 square miles e L from to 7 miles e L from 3 to 3 miles e S from 6 to 20 ft mile e Impervious cover from 33 to 83 percent Putnam Lag Time Equation Putnam 1972 developed a lag equation for watersheds around the Wichita Kansas area as follows Trac 0 49 ce D I eee eee NN 15 23 where Tao lag time in hours L maximum flow length in miles S weighted slope along the maximum flow path in ft mile I Impervious cover as a fraction This equation was used for watersheds ranging in size from 3 to 150 sq miles impervious covers less than 3 and a ratio of L VS between 1 0 and 9 0 Taylor and Schwartz Lag Time Equation Taylor and Schwartz 1952 developed an equation for estimating Snyder unit hydrograph parameters that was used for 20 different watersheds in the northeastern region of the U S Their equations are as follows C ade TTT 15 24 TLAG Crk Lx Lea A A 15 25 where 15 20 WMS E coefficient of watershed topography based on watershed slope S weighted slope of maximum flow path in ft ft Tm the watershed lag time in hours L maximum flow length in miles L length to the centroid in miles Colorado State Lag Time Equation An equation used to compute lag time for watersheds in the Denver Colorado area was developed at Colorado State University This equation was primarily used for watersheds in which there was some a
110. module provides a suite of tools for defining watershed data in a GIS and then using the information to directly create a hydrologic model or as a support utility for hydrologic data development with either TINs or DEMs Other important tools of the map module include using drawing objects to enhance report documents importing and converting DXF files or mapping images to geo reference data on the display Tools in this chapter can be separated into four major components Feature Objects Images DXF Files and Drawing Objects Feature objects have been patterned after common GIS entities such as coverages groups of points nodes arcs lines and polygons and can be created by importing ArcView shapefiles An ARC INFO coverage can be converted to a shapefile with the ARCSHAPE command in ARC Feature objects are used to establish a conceptual model of a watershed 1 e arcs representing a stream network polygons for basin boundaries and points or nodes for watershed and sub basin outlets Hydrologic models can then be created using any of the supported model interfaces A rough boundary and stream network can also be used to generate a TIN or two dimensional finite difference grid that conforms precisely to streams and other important hydrologic features Feature objects can also be used to create polygonal boundaries of soil type or land use to aid in the computation of curve numbers for hydrologic analysis 3 2 WMS Images can be
111. network for the current selected string is created The vertex string is made by connecting points which are known to lie in a stream street or other drainage structure If the entered vertex string crosses triangle edges the user will be asked 1f he wishes to insert a breakline The breakline is inserted by creating new points where the line crosses a triangle edge The elevation of the new points 1s determined by linear interpolation along the edge Inserting the breakline in this fashion alters the topology without affecting the geometry Since flow through a stream network 1s defined strictly by the linked set of vertices a downstream vertex does not even have to be lower than the upstream vertex However care should be taken to ensure that the general direction of the stream is downhill The intent of creating streams in this fashion is to eliminate the need of defining a continuous set of channel edges with the TIN editing techniques described above This type of stream creation is particularly important when doing basin delineation for urban areas 7 8 WMS 7 5 2 Create Pipe When the Create Pipe command is chosen a pipe connecting stream nodes in the current selected string is created A pipe can be used to create a stream from any stream node to another without enforcing a continuous set of triangle edges between the two stream nodes Pipes differ from streams in that when a flow path intersects a stream it then continues do
112. of all RUNOFF REACH DIVERT ADDHYD and RESVOR records and GRAPHICS must be defined in columns 61 68 of the JOB record before output of TR 20 can be read back into WMS for display in the Hydrograph Window Existing files generated outside of WMS can be read it into WMS and a separate topological tree will automatically be generated for the watershed described in the file Since WMS does not yet support all possible TR 20 card types there may be some incomplete information However the basic structure of the watershed will be created and all possible data will be retained If multiple computations or runs of TR 20 are specified in a single file WMS will prompt you for which one you want to use With WMS only a single computation sequence may be defined If additional computations are desired the parameters can easily be changed within WMS and another run of TR 20 made 11 11 Running A 7R 20 Analysis The version of TR 20 distributed with WMS can be run directly from WMS by using the Run TR 20 command in the TR 20 menu Before running a TR 20 simulation you should run the model checker The model checker will help 11 11 1 11 11 2 TR 20 Interface 11 17 you identify serious and potential problems These problems should be corrected before a successful run of TR 20 can be made Model Check The Model Check command should be issued once you feel that all necessary TR 20 data has been defined It will report any possible errors incon
113. often used to design important hydraulic structures such as channels detention basins culverts etc This chapter describes some of the design analysis tools that can be used in combination with the runoff models supported by WMS Some of these functions curve number storage capacity curves are used to prepare input for the runoff models while others use results of the runoff models to design hydraulic structures such as curb and gutter flow weirs detention basins culverts etc 15 2 Computing SCS Curve Numbers Runoff Coefficients and Green amp Ampt Infiltration Parameters SCS curve numbers are typically determined by using a table relating land use to hydrologic soil type The hydrologic soil type can be either A B C or D where the infiltration capacity decreases from A to D The curve numbers for each soil group for a given land use are given in most books on hydrology A composite curve number for a basin can be computed by taking an area weighted average of the different curve numbers for the different regions soil type and land use combinations within a basin The same thing can be done to compute a composite runoff coefficient only in this case a table relating soul ID to runoff coefficient is used rather than a table for curve numbers Maricopa County Arizona and other regions often use the Green amp Ampt infiltration options within HEC 1 Green amp Ampt parameters may also be 15 2 WMS mapped from soil type and
114. oma ama uma em om3 em oma em a Figure 19 4 CASC2D Map Edit Dialog Importing a Map The Import button can be used to import either an ARC INFO or GRASS ASCII grid file The grid file should contain a single value for every cell However providing the imported grid covers the same aerial extent it can be of either higher or lower resolution Exporting a Map The Export button allows the currently active map to be saved as either an ARC INFO or GRASS ASCII grid file These files can be imported into either of these GIS s or read back into WMS at a later time 19 8 3 19 8 4 19 8 5 19 8 6 CASC2D Interface 19 11 Assigning a Constant to the Map The Constant gt Array button is used to set each value of the map to a constant value After selecting this button the user is prompted for a constant value and then the entire map is updated with this value Creating a Data Set from a Map The Array gt Dataset button can be used to create a data set out of the currently active map This is useful if you wish to contour any one of the parameters or for performing mathematical computations on the entire array using the data calculator For example CASC2D requires that all input parameters be entered in metric units so the data calculator could be used to convert values of hydraulic conductivity from ft sec to m sec Once the conversion operation is performed using the data calculator the Data set gt Array button can
115. or changing attributes Double clicking on an arc with this tool brings up the Arc Attribute dialog 5 2 9 5 2 6 5 2 7 5 2 8 5 2 9 5 2 10 Drainage DEMs 5 3 El Create Points The Create Points tool is used to interactively create new points using the cursor These new points could be defined at outlet locations for the DEM Create Arc Vertex The Create Arc Vertex tool is used to interactively create new vertices along an existing arc to add more detail Llcreate Arc The Create Arc tool is used to interactively create new arcs An arc is created by clicking once on the location where the arc is to begin clicking once to define the location of each of the vertices in the interior of the arc and double clicking at the location of the end node of the arc Arcs are used to define the channel network for a watershed or to add detail to an existing one When creating stream arcs the points vertices must be connected from downstream to upstream as the arc is entered Stream arcs are drawn with an arrow pointing in the downstream direction and can be reversed after creation using the Reverse Directions command Blselect Polygon The Select Polygon tool is used to select previously created sub basin polygons Double clicking on a polygon with this tool brings up the Polygon Attributes dialog and allows you to change the type of polygon to a basin polygon lsetect Branch The Select Branch tool can be used t
116. or operated on by one of the commands in the Feature Objects menu The coordinates of selected points nodes can also be edited using the Edit Window Double clicking on a point or node with this tool brings up the Point or Node Attribute dialog z Select Vertex The Select Arc Vertices tool is used to select vertices on an arc Once selected a vertex can be deleted moved to a new location or operated on by one of the commands in the Feature Objects menu The coordinates of selected vertex can also be edited using the Edit Window El Select Arc The Select Arc tool is used to select arcs for operations such as deletion redistribution of vertices or building polygons Double clicking on an arc with this tool brings up the Arc Attribute dialog 3 8 WMS ES Create Points The Create Points tool is used to interactively create new points using the cursor A new point is created for each location the cursor is clicked on in the Graphics Window A background drawing grid can be turned on using the Grid Options command in the Display menu to aid in the placement of points El Create Arc Vertex The Create Arc Vertex tool is used to interactively create new vertices along an existing arc to add more detail A new vertex is created for each location the cursor is clicked on in the Graphics Window that it is within 10 screen pixels of an existing arc Once the vertex is created it can be repositioned with the Select Vertex tool Llcr
117. overland flow whereas the stream vectors are used for conveyance channels Practically you can think of WMS modifying the flow directions of the DEM points underlying the stream vectors so that flow always follows the defined stream vectors 6 Define Interior Sub basin Outlet Points If you wish to further subdivide the watershed into sub basins then nodes along the stream feature arcs should be converted to outlet nodes by using the feature point node attributes dialog see page 3 25 As these nodes are converted the hydrologic modeling tree is automatically updated 1 12 WMS Figure 1 9 Interior Outlet Points Identified Along the Stream Arcs 7 Define Basins Using the outlets on the stream network and the flow directions the contributing DEM points for each outlet are assigned the proper basin id section 5 5 2 Introduction 1 13 a a a Ee Figure 1 10 Basins Defined Using the DEM Flow Direction Grid and Stream Vectors 8 Convert DEM Basins to Polygons Similar to how flow accumulations were converted to stream arcs the boundaries between DEM points with different basin ids can be converted to feature polygons section 5 5 3 Storing a basin as a single polygon rather than several hundreds or thousands of DEM cells is much more efficient 1 14 WMS Figure 1 11 Gridded DEM Basins Converted to Feature Polygons 9 Compute Basin Geometric Data Once the boundaries of the sub basins have been
118. plain value Subsequent flood plains are delineated for incremental water depths as specified by the flood plain interval until the maximum water depth is reached This creates the effect of flood plain contours since the multiple flood plain delineations indicate the contours of water depth in the flood plain If a single flood plain is desired enter a zero for the flood plain interval and only the flood plain for the minimum flood plain value will be delineated Only non negative numbers may be entered as flood plain intervals Number of Nearest Vertices with Stage As described earlier WMS delineates flood plains by means of gradient planes passed through each vertex where a stage value is defined When calculating the stage contributions of the nearest vertices WMS must know how many nearest vertices to use The default value is 20 but can be changed in this dialog Since an inverse distance weighted IDW function is used to calculate the relative contribution of vertices using large values here will not change the flood plain definition dramatically Vertices relatively close to the point in question affect the value of stage at that point much more than those vertices which are relatively far away As an alternative to specifying a fixed number of stage vertices a fixed radius of influence can be set Stage Import Options When importing stage values from a file WMS will find a TIN vertex with an identical xy value as the stag
119. printed by selecting the Print button The Plot Options button accesses the plot options dialog in order to allow for control in the overall appearance of the defined curves 15 38 WMS 15 6 1 15 6 2 Hydrograph A hydrograph can be computed from any of the supported hydrologic models or as imported from some other source The hydrograph should be selected prior to bringing up the detention basin calculator Storage Capacity Curve There are three different methods for defining storage capacity volume vs elevation area vs elevation or known geometry These data are defined through the Storage Capacity Input dialog shown in Figure 15 12 storage Capacity Input Fa Storage capacity Units English acre hi Known volume Known geometry F volume ENTE Length l Elevation Deine Width Depth Known area Side slope Area Denne Base elevation 0 000 T Elevation Define Figure 15 12 In all three cases a relationship between elevation and volume will be computed For the volume vs elevation option this is explicitly defined If area vs elevation is specified then a corresponding volume for each elevation is computed using the conic method The conic method is illustrated in Figure 15 13 15 6 3 Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 39 T SS a Figure 15 13 Conic Method for Volume Computations The volume between incremental areas A and A is computed using the following equation h AVi2 3 Ai A2
120. program first so that your computer can recognize the presence of a hardware lock Using the supplied CD ROM installation program from the Utilities Menu you can select to install the hardware lock driver The installation program will automatically install the appropriate hardware lock driver for the operating system your computer has You will also need to install a security server driver on the network file server The security server is responsible for keeping track of the number of users using WMS at any one time Using the supplied CD ROM installation program from the Utilities Menu you can select to install the security server driver The installation program will automatically install the appropriate driver for the operating system your network server has Although the network hardware locked version of WMS can be installed on any computer on your network we strongly suggest that it be installed on your network file server Bo WMS Installation Guide Troubleshooting Hint If you are experiencing difficulties you may wish to run the diagnostic program that is available from the CD ROM installation program s Troubleshooting Menu This program will check to see if the network server printer port has been located correctly and whether the network hardware lock is working properly When running this utility answer Y yes to all prompts The hardware lock is working properly if the program responds with the 9 l state
121. required and specifies the elevation of each grid cell This map is created automatically from a background elevation map when creating a new grid from a boundary polygon For imported grids or grids created using the Create Grid command of the Grid menu and elevation map must be imported e Surface Roughness This map is required for all models It represents the Manning s N roughness coefficient for each cell e Storage Capacity This map is optional however it must defined when the interception option is toggled on It represents the vegetative storage capacity e Interception Coefficient This map is optional and represents the vegetative interception coefficient e Initial Depth This is a map of the initial overland flow depth and is optional This map does not include lakes the initial depth of lakes are specified separately e Retention Depth This map is optional and specifies the retention depth e Area Reduction Depth This map is optional and represents the area reduction for each grid cell 19 10 Infiltration Properties The infiltration options include no infiltration Green Ampt and infiltration redistribution Specifying no infiltration means that none of the infiltration maps need be defined however infiltration will not be modeled by CASC2D Green Ampt infiltration requires the hydraulic conductivity capillary pressure head porosity and moisture content maps to be defined The infiltration redistributi
122. satudus 16 4 IMIG Ei 16 3 16 9 18 4 data type conversion 2D grid gt 2D scatter points cceeceeeees 17 7 2Drend gt LUN sah cect eset ci 17 8 TIN gt scatter points ccccccccccnccnnnononnnncnnnnnnss 6 24 A O aectedumaauaasinemnean 2 10 ONAL TA Coad 2 A EE eT Pe et 10 21 Delantera ala see triangulation li ocios acc erie 2 5 l 4 WMS OCA PEAT EEA E EEEE TTE 2 8 all data of a moduleren 2 27 BASINS TOM IOCS od 9 5 ci A a 2 26 CO eta 2 27 3 35 6 9 datr Se Ea a ematnnseducacsea 16 4 duplicate 6 12 teatre ODIOS as 3 35 Hood Pla is 8 10 T 1 SIET E A E O es 16 11 A R 9 8 A An 3 46 Inactive DEM points oooooonnnnnccncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonos 4 6 Quiet TOMC E Sea 9 5 TES A o a 7 10 reservoirs from trees ocooccoccnccnccnccnoncncos 9 5 9 6 A A E 7 8 mandle crannan a S 6 2 E E E EAE E EE N EEE aes 6 1 6 9 KY SEMCS E PEO Tr EE A T 21 3 DELETE key A a 2 26 select DY poly TOM wu sas cetiiaedosnies 2 27 delineate Nood Pla ads 8 8 DEM PCN ALE POS a icon 4 5 A A daedessohan 4 5 MIDI a 2 18 DAS IS AA A eee cesdnaeeean tata tactestaGes 5 10 basins tO polygoS ooooooonncccnccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 5 11 A A adel 2 17 computing flow directions ccccccccccncnnnnnm 5 12 converting streams to feature objects 5 9 Creating rd TOM eee eee 3 35 creatine TINS TOM ai 3 33 delete PORMOMS encino 4 6 display OPtiONs cooooooooooooocccccncnnnnnnnnnonnnonononos 5 4 displaying Contours oooooooooocc
123. scatter point increases Several options are available for inverse distance weighted interpolation The options are selected using the Inverse Distance Weighted Interpolation Options dialog Figure 18 3 20 ID Interpolation Options Nodal Function Constant Shepard s method Gradient plane C Quadratic Computation of Modal Function Coefficients Use subset of points Subset Use all points Computation of Interpolation Weights Use subset of points Siete Use all points O Use vertices of enclosing triangle no extrapolation Cancel Figure 18 3 Inverse Distance Weighted Interpolation Options Dialog Shepard s Method The simplest form of inverse distance weighted interpolation is sometimes called Shepard s method Shepard 1968 The equation used is as follows A nn o 18 7 1 1 where n is the number of scatter points in the set f are the prescribed function values at the scatter points e g the data set values and w are the weight functions assigned to each scatter point The classical form of the weight function is 2D Scatter Points 18 7 j where p is an arbitrary positive real number called the power parameter typically p 2 and h is the distance from the scatter point to the interpolation point or LA A 18 9 where x y are the coordinates of the interpolation point and x y are the coordinates of each scatter point The weight function varies fr
124. screen digitize the rough boundary and stream arcs 3 Use a registered image as a background for on screen digitizing section 3 4 3 4 Use a DEM to define flow accumulations and then convert to stream arcs as described in step five of the previous section 5 Use a hillshaded image as a background for on screen digitizing section 2 10 4 The Screen Capture command in the Images menu can be useful for saving a hillshaded DEM as an image file fl Ab E a LES i pes ped MLE ai NAT AAA ss Moa rita AY ee oe ie a pas F RSG NGS att E 7 da a je y i a 1 18 WMS 4 Redistribute Vertices The density of vertices in the TIN created from the conceptual model and background elevation data can be controlled by the spacing of arc vertices in the conceptual model WMS has tools to automatically increase or decrease arc vertex density see page 3 28 The density may vary along the arcs allowing for higher definition in some regions and lower in others its E dl A n oa tl E TA ies A o eit ae a i Sree cer E p Lee r A a al b ai i a LA PL E IA JA tet E Ao TE AA TA a Ta AP A i i i i f A Same aa sa J y H sn a a tS et Ed b ean a oe l A bie Apt ae s et ters i j a Le 1 o a i E cos Ti a mE he E f s Te i 4 ae y dd y pien 2 ae i tal el aH r ret T e a L A 3 1 1 dl E x ET ree can A ee E 43 gt EE i m vt E EN ip i Fie Fagan Ey Fate trae a qe TH A 7 al p
125. set is selected by selecting the icon for the set 2D Scatter Points 18 3 A selected scatter point set can be made the active set by double clicking on the icon for the set or by selecting the Make Active command from the Interpolate menu 18 6 Display Options A scatter point set is displayed by drawing a symbol for each of the scatter points The display options control the appearance of the symbol The display options can be set by selecting the Display Options command in the Display menu and then selecting the Scatter Point tab The scatter point display options are as follows The Scatter Point Symbols item is used to display a symbol at the location of each scatter point The button to the left of the item is used to bring up a dialog listing the available symbols The color of each of the scatter points in a set may be changed from this dialog also The Scatter Point Symbols option applies to the active scatter point set only To change the symbols for a scatter point set other than the active set the set must first be made active by double clicking on the set with the Select Scatter Point Set tool or by selecting the set and selecting the Make Active command from the Interpolation menu prior to bringing up the Display Options dialog e The Scatter Point Numbers item is used to display the scatter point D number next to each scatter point e The Scatter Point Values item is used to display the vertex value of the active data set n
126. sets can be created by converting from other data types TINs or grids For example if a 2D grid is converted to a scatter point set each of the nodes in the grid become a scatter point and each of the scalar data sets associated with the grid are copied to the data set list for the new scatter point set Scatter point sets can also be input from a text file The file formats for scatter point sets are described in Chapter 20 Saving Scatter Point Sets Scatter point sets may be saved to a text file using the Save As command in the File Menu When a scatter point file 1s saved you must specify in the Save As dialog whether the data sets will also be saved If the data sets are saved as part of the super file then they can be read back in subsequent sessions using the Open command in File menu Tool Palette 18 5 1 18 5 2 The following tools are active in the dynamic portion of the Tool Palette whenever the 2D Scatter Point module is active ae Select Scatter Point The Select Scatter Point tool is used to select individual scatter points for displaying the coordinates and current function value of individual scatter points in the Edit Window zk Select Scatter Point Set The Select Scatter Point Set tool is used to select entire scatter point sets for deletion or to designate the active scatter point set When this tool is active an icon appears at the centroid of the set for each of the scatter point sets A scatter point
127. shows the dialog used to launch TOPAZ for computing flow direction and flow accumulation grids The result of this command is that WMS will create two TOPAZ input files DEDNM INP DEM elevations used by TOPAZ and DNMCNT INP a 5 8 WMS control file After creating these two files WMS starts the TOPAZ module DEDNM which produces as output a pre processed elevation file RELIEF DAT a flow direction file FLOVEC DAT a flow accumulation file UPAREA DAT and a report file DEDNM RPT You can choose which files DEDNM saves as output but 1f you wish to perform basin delineation with DEMs in WMS then as a minimum you must choose the flow direction file Topaz Run Options X Topaz input output file directory Caprio tutorial Topaz output files M Elevations CAMS tutorial relief dat iM Flow directions CAMS tutorial uparea dat i MS tutorial fowec dat M Flow accumulations m Reportfile CMS tutorial dednm rpt Cancel Figure 5 3 Flow Directions Dialog Besides TOPAZ flow directions and accumulations may also be computed by ARC INFOO ArcView or GRASS No matter which program you use to create flow directions you will need to import them using the Flow Directions command The Import Flow Directions dialog see Figure 5 4 allows you to specify the file format of the flow direction grid and then prompts you for the file name Import Flow Directions E File type ARCANFO C
128. storm Be sure that these values are consistent with the time parameters entered on the IT card Gage PG PT PW PR Gages can be used with or without a terrain model If drainage basins have been defined using a TIN the appropriate gage weights using the Thiessen polygon method for each basin are automatically computed when the Compute or Update Basin Data command is executed If the HEC model is defined using only the tree or to change any of the computed values the gage weights can be changed assigned by clicking on the gage weights button in the Precipitation dialog The gage weights dialog will display a list of all defined gages and their station type Choose from this list when defining gage HEC 1 Interface 10 15 weights to the selected basin Storm total stations are written on PT PW records whereas recording stations are written on PR PW records You must have at least one PR PW record combination for each basin When using a terrain model DEM TIN or Feature Objects a rain gage coverage can be defined and used to establish the positions of gages by using the graphical creation selection tools available in the Map module For more information see page 3 21 10 7 4 Hypothetical Storms PH A hypothetical storm may also be used to define the precipitation pattern for the runoff simulation The XY Series Editor is used to define the necessary rainfall values for the appropriate times The storm frequency in percent is
129. teens 15 1 displasia 7 5 FAG ASG salas 3 16 SOLID E a 3 17 color ARCS EIIE da 3 25 DACKSTO UN a id 2 4 Dasi at DUC iaa 7 5 CCl EE INET E E O 17 5 DEM cad 4 2 5 4 HOW palas diss is easnneutdemnin a 6 4 23 CG nod casi 17 4 EA a E eo ER E T E T 2 32 inten S e E tome misee 2 32 TALIM a A EEEIEE EO hein EA RETE EEEE S 16 5 Nair 6 4 Wales da T 7 5 combined hydrograpbs 10 10 10 23 comments in HEC lerah 10 10 composite curve number table 15 5 COMPULALION SLED sisiccass snes savsetassarneeasseoetestaceewsss 15 4 compute time of concentration ooooooonnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnoss 15 24 compute basin attributes 5 11 7 12 computing Sim ad 15 5 time of concentration oooooooonnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 15 5 computing flow directiONS occcccccnnnccnnnnnnnnm 5 12 computing gage WelghtS oooooonnnnccccnnnnnnnnnns 10 14 contr ICONS oii ia 2 27 COMMIT valle idas 6 10 contluences sonar dodo 7 6 COM da desc 2 30 16 5 O A a a ead scent asa tes 17 5 annal ON as ats eer A A 16 8 COS 2 32 GIS op 24 0 PAE PAE PE Poo a ESA 6 5 Hood PLANAS o a 8 8 labels a 2 33 labe Sunnara 2 33 4 2 6 3 17 3 O ere ert 2 31 logarithinic scale id 2 31 MA a 2 31 MI tad 2 31 ODU ONS APA e A A 2 31 A en arr rR earn Ce meee te ee 2 31 A O 6 14 Vallecano dnda 2 31 converting DEM basins to polygons 5 11 convexo Los ea do 6 13 6 17 CODINA E 2 7 DALY CEM
130. the data set list approach for managing information is that it facilitates transfer of information between different types of models or models with differing resolution This is accomplished through scatter point sets and interpolation TINs and grids can both be converted to a 2D scatter point set When an object is converted to a scatter point set all data sets or elevations in the case of TINs associated with the object are copied to the new scatter point set The data sets can then be transferred from the scatter point set group to other objects of any type using one of the supported interpolation schemes 16 2 Data Browser Most of the interaction with data sets 1s accomplished with the Data Browser Figure 16 1 The Data Browser is activated by selecting the Data Browser command in the Data menu The list box in the browser contain the lists of scalar data sets for the current object In the case of the 2D Scatter Point module the data sets shown in the browser correspond to the active scatter point set In the case of grids there is only one grid per model and the data sets correspond to the grid associated with the current model 0 Scatter Point Data Browser test2_xyf Scalar Data Sets Vector Data Sets Info Inii Interp Inte Import Imparte Erpat Esnat Delete Delete Time Step Display Relative Absolute ENEE Eontadie VECS Iso Surfaces Figure 16 1 Data Browser Dialog 16 2
131. the file Check that the file WMSPASS TXT exists in the Windows System directory of the Windows program currently in use WMS must be run from the same Windows program and hard drive that the program was originally registered for If the WMSPASS TXT file has been deleted or you intend to use WMS on another computer or hard drive contact our technical support staff for an updated password No additional fee will be charged provided that WMS will be run on only one computer at a time Passwords for additional computers will be subject to additional licensing fees The application continues to run as an Evaluation Copy Windows 3 1 or Windows 95 only If the application starts up as an Evaluation Copy even after running EVMOVE you may need to load the driver AZMEMORY DRV located in the WMS directory on your computer to reserve a small amount of DOS conventional memory when Windows is run To install the AZMEMORY DRV driver complete the following steps 1 Copy the AZMEMORY DRV file from your WMS directory to your WINDOWS SYSTEM subdirectory WMS Installation Guide 11 2 Edit your SYSTEM INI file located in your WINDOWS directory to add the following entries In the boot section of SYSTEM INI edit the drivers line to include AZMEMORY DRV If there are other entries on this line the AZMEMORY driver should be first This will make sure the driver is loaded first After editing the line it should look som
132. the regional equation can be moved back again using the button with an arrow pointing 14 4 WMS to the left after selecting the region in the Regions overlapped by watershed window The USGS Report has a description and applicable maps for each state These maps can be used to identify which regions are overlapped by your study watershed State and National Urban Equations The regional equations for each state correspond to analysis for rural watersheds However each state includes the national urban equation in its list of regions The national urban equation preceded by a character contains additional parameter values and must be used in conjunction with the appropriate regional rural equation In addition some states include regional urban equations preceded by a character which are used separately from the rural equations The list of available regression equations changes according to which equations have already been selected For example if a regional urban equation is selected all other equations disappear since it must be used by itself Further if a regional rural equation is selected any regional urban equations are removed since they cannot be combined Assigning Percentage of Overlapped Area in Each Region Most watersheds will likely fall within a single region In such cases you will not need to worry about assigning percentages since the area parameter for the selected region will receive 100 of the total
133. the x fields are dynamic can be edited a new point can be created at the end of the series by moving the cursor to the last field and hitting the TAB key EN E A E E Ye lO FA A re ee Pal Tas Ech Tail haa r Tarea Crap te Y Pal E Aii AO re Figure 21 1 The XY Series Editor The buttons below the xy edit fields are used to manipulate the values in the edit fields The buttons are as follows Delete The Delete button blanks clears the edit field that the cursor is located in If the x field is static only the y field is cleared Otherwise both fields are blanked 21 4 WMS 21 4 21 3 2 21 3 3 21 3 4 21 3 5 Interpolate The Interpolate button causes any blank fields in the xy series to be filled in by linear interpolation between the closest non blank fields above and below the blank fields Update The Update button redraws the xy series curve in the plot window using the current values in the edit fields Insert The Insert button adds a new point to the xy series by adding a pair of blank fields just above the field containing the cursor Compress The Compress button reduces the length of the xy series by removing all points whose edit fields are blank XY Series Plot 21 4 1 The window in the upper right hand corner of the XY Series Editor is used to plot the curve corresponding to the xy values in the edit fields As each value in the edit fields is ed
134. to change this value but occasionally it becomes the only way to work around sticky numerical problems Yertex Options El Y Retriangulate after deleting M Adjust boundary to include exterior vertices M Confirm zvalue M interpolate for default z on interior M Extrapolate for default z on exterior Default z value 0 00 ay Tolerance 0 010000 Figure 6 2 Vertex Options Dialog Lock Unlock Vertices Since it is possible to accidentally drag points selected vertices can be locked to prevent them from being dragged or edited using the Edit Window by selecting the Lock Vertices command from the T Ns menu Any number of combinations of vertices can be locked or unlocked Locking and unlocking vertices provides a differentiation between points that are hard measured data and points that may be soft interpolated or estimated data Selected vertices can be unlocked by selecting the Unlock Vertices command from the TINs menu The status of each vertex locked or unlocked is preserved in the TIN file when TINs are saved to disk Display options can be changed so that a distinction between ulocked and locked vertices is easily visible 6 12 WMS 6 5 6 6 5 7 Scaling Vertices The Scale Vertices command can be used to scale the x y or z values of the TIN vertices This can be used to convert from one set of units to another However if your units are already in either feet or meters then units of computed geometr
135. used to provide a background display of a region or draped over a TIN or grid as a texture map They can be imported from TIFF files or created from within WMS by capturing the screen DXF files can be imported into and displayed with data created in WMS DXF data can be used to create feature objects or to enhance final project reports Drawing objects include text lines rectangles and ovals These objects can be used for annotation and for providing more detail to displays created in WMS for project reports A section with descriptions of the tools and commands is given for each component of the map module 3 2 Feature Objects 3 2 1 Feature objects in WMS have been patterned after Geographic Information Systems GIS objects and include points nodes arcs and polygons Feature objects can be grouped together into coverages each coverage defining a particular set of information The use of feature objects is determined by the coverage or attribute set to which they belong but can be separated into three important categories 1 As a means of defining basin polygons and stream networks of pre delineated watersheds typically this data would be imported as a shapefile from ArcView or ArcInfo where the basin delineation and attribution has already taken place 2 To define a conceptual model or layout of features in the watershed such as its rough boundaries and streams This conceptual model is then used to aid in the construc
136. your DEM data See the description of importing DEMs on page 2 15 4 5 DEM Point Status 4 5 1 4 5 2 4 5 3 A DEM Point can have one of three different status Active Inactive or NO DATA An active DEM point is one with a valid elevation and is fully functional An inactive DEM point is one with a valid elevation but is temporarily disabled While disabled it will not be used for contouring shading or other functions involving the use of DEM points A NO DATA DEM point is within the rectangular bounds of the DEM but does not contain a valid elevation A series of commands can be used to set the status of the DEM points Set Active Region The Set Active Region command is used to activate the currently selected DEM points and inactivate all DEM points not in the selected rectangle You should use this command whenever you wish to isolate a sub region of a DEM for watershed analysis Activate Selected Activates all DEM points within the selected rectangle Of course there has to be valid elevation in order for the DEM point to become active 1 e you can not activate a NO DATA DEM point Activate All Activate all DEM points with valid elevations 4 6 WMS 4 5 4 4 5 5 4 5 6 Inactivate Selected Inactivate DEM points within the selected rectangle DEM points will become inactive but can still be viewed and later selected and reactivated Inactivate All Inactivate all DEM points Delete Inactive Inac
137. 0 30 Character of surface Runoff CoefficientC Pavement Asphaltic and concrete 0 70 0 95 Brick 0 70 0 85 Roofs 0 75 0 95 Lawns sandy soil Flat 2 percent 0 05 0 10 Average 2 7 percent 0 10 0 15 Steep 7 percent 0 15 0 20 Lawns heavy soil Flat 2 percent 0 13 0 17 Average 2 7 percent 0 18 0 22 Steep 7 percent 0 25 0 35 13 2 1 Rational Method 13 3 Equation 13 1 was developed from a simplified analysis of runoff using isochrones or lines of equal travel time with areas in acres between them as illustrated in Figure 13 1 The method assumes no temporary storage in the basin and so the ratio between the peak runoff and the rainfall intensity is then the same as the ratio of the volumes of runoff and rainfall If a constant rainfall intensity in hr begins at time t 0 and has a duration of the time of concentration t for the basin the hydrograph will reach an instantaneous peak at Ci The t of the basin can be thought of as the time after rainfall excess begins to when all portions of the watershed are contributing to the peak flow at the outlet If the duration is longer than t the hydrograph will remain constant after reaching a value of Ci for a time period equal to the difference of the rainfall duration and t In either case the time of rise and time of recession are equal to t Figure 13 1 Basin Model Used to Develop Rational Method Formula Wi
138. 00 Channel slope 005 Channel invert elev 39 000 Manning s r 0 028 Const tailwater eley fo 000 33 00 Rectangular channel Trapezoidal channel O Triangualar channel C regular channel l Culvert invert elevation C Rating curve O Constant tailwater elevation Hating CUTIVE Ilmeqular channelt Cancel Figure 15 19 HY8 Tailwater Data Dialog 15 7 4 HY8 Roadway Data The roadway data defined using the HYS Roadway Data dialog shown in Figure 15 20 includes information about the profile crest and surface of the road for which the culvert is being analyzed HY8 allows you to enter a constant elevation the elevation should be referenced to the culvert invert elevation defined as part of the culvert data or an irregular shape using from three to fifteen coordinates The crest information in conjunction with the surface condition weir coefficient completes the information needed by HY8 to perform the weir calculations when water overtops the roadway surface 15 46 WMS 15 7 5 15 7 6 Hr8 Roadway Data Profile Constant roadway elevation Irregular 3 to 15 coordinates Humber of coordinates la Crest Data Length 200 000 Elevation 10 000 Roadway top width 25 00 Profile Roadway Surface Weir Coefficient O Paved roadway surface Ci User defined coefficient Coefficient of discharge 2 500 Cancel Figure 15 20 HY8 Roadway Data Dialog Saving th
139. 1 7 3 2 7 3 3 7 3 4 7 3 9 7 3 6 Drainage TINs 7 3 Outlets If the Outlets option is set all outlet vertices will be displayed Outlet vertices correspond to points on the TIN where a watershed or sub basin outlet exists When issuing the Find Default Outlets command from the Streams menu all pits and points on the exterior of the TIN where channel edges exit are stored as outlets After generating stream networks additional outlets may be added at branches or other points in the stream such as gaging stations Outlet Names The names assigned to the outlets can be displayed next to the outlet by toggling this option on The default name for an outlet is the ID number Names are only important when creating HEC analysis files They are used to identify hydrographs which are combined or routed Stream Networks If the Stream Networks option is set all stream networks will be displayed Stream networks are stored as consecutive channel edges and can be displayed each time the display is refreshed Pipe Color When a stream segment is defined between two vertices that belong to the same triangle edge it is considered to be an open channel However underground channels or pipes can be defined by creating a stream between two vertices which belong to separate triangles In such cases overland flow passes over the stream segment since it acts as a pipe The Pipe color can be set to display segments of this type
140. 1 0 2 0 4 0 10 0 L220 14 0 16 0 18 0 A A O 2 O A Field Variable Value Description l na The number of cell boundaries in the x direction 2 ny The number of cell boundaries in the y direction 3 to x17Xnx The coordinates of the x boundaries nx 3 to Yi Y ny The coordinates of the y boundaries nx ny 2 20 10 WMS Card Type DELEV oO O Description Defines a default elevation for the grid Required NO SE Format EAN Sample DELEV 100 0 Field Variable Value Description el The default elevation 20 7 2D Scatter Point Files Two dimensional scatter point sets are stored in 2D scatter point files Multiple scatter point sets can be stored in a single file Each point in a scatter point set is defined by a pair of xy coordinates The format of the 2D scatter file is shown in Figure 20 11 and a sample file in Figure 20 12 SCAT2D File type identifier BEGSET Beginning of cards for scatter point set NAME name Name of scatter point set ID id ID Of scatter point set DELEV elevl Default elevation IXY np Number of points in set begin point listing id1 xT YI Point id and coordinatess one per line x2 y2 idnp Xnp Ynp ENDSET End of cards for scatter point set Repeat point set cards as many times as necessary Figure 20 11 2D Scatter Point File Format
141. 1 100 year 60 minute Precipitation HYDRO 35 SEET 3 e i Gan HAN SE et Y wei KEY WEST FLORIDA VALUE REPRESENTATIVE FOR FLORIDA KEYS PESAS CASAR 5 Yo NEAR i avis OSS Me oY gt 2 3 nate NAN RNN Oa NDS i PR UR AN T y Dg Sa eS t AT E R N e Come aaa pe a A IONN 2 SA N CA SEAT RISE UNS NIE A E s Li TON SO SEOANE NASA MESE oa gt yat SQL o AOS LAN ES A y ee N O AO aie meee Abas 6 o AA RS ATOR RISE LA o 5 ave A err ASS e aon Xe ite iE IAS A at TEAR ALS Cet OR PEL ASS p A x SA A A e oo a ir Co a a noo NS btd A H x LS e AA a a A o Bes if Lf ms A a Ho di DAA E FAN ue F M pR E py E 4 mae et Da he YT was TA eens Saath ine Be gees e Paria TAE AO EEE la A a la ERE AE AS y FAY z TEK E T PN cae HL A HARF CHAPTER 14 National Flood Frequency Program 14 1 Introduction WMS includes an interface to the National Flood Frequency Program NFF The NFF program is a compilation of all the current as of September 1993 statewide and metropolitan area regression equations The regression equations are a result of years of effort by the United States Geological Survey USGS to develop regional regression equations for estimating flood magnitude and frequency of ungaged watersheds The USGS in cooperation with the Federal Highway Administration and the Federal Emergency Management Agency compiled
142. 1 only allows inflow to be defined at outlet points 9 5 10 Delete Diversion The Delete Diversion command can be used to delete a selected diversion The Select Diversions tool should be active to select a diversion icon 9 6 Viewing Hydrographs Hydrographs can be read into WMS and displayed in icon form at the appropriate basin or outlet For an HEC analysis a TAPE22 file can be read into WMS Any number of hydrograph sets TAPE22 files may be read into WMS and displayed in the Hydrograph window The name of the TAPE22 file is given as the solution file when running HEC from the HEC menu For a TR 20 analysis the GRAPHICS file which stores discharge hydrographs can be read into WMS This options is only available when running the version of TR 20 distributed with WMS This file is specified as part of the all other files prefix when running 7R 20 from within WMS and always has the three letter extension of THY For the NFF and rational analysis programs hydrographs can be computed from dimensionless unit hydrographs applied to the computed peak discharges These hydrographs are automatically stored and displayed Hydrographs are displayed in the Hydrograph Window by using the Select Hydrograph tool and choosing the desired hydrographs Multiple hydrographs may be selected and overlaid in the window at the same time and several 9 6 1 9 6 2 Topological Trees 9 7 different display options can be used while examinin
143. 15 26 1000 eE 0 eet enc E N E E eC eee eee 15 28 CN Y Watershed slope in percent 15 22 WMS CN SCS curve number for the watershed as defined by the loss method Kerby Time of Concentration Equation Kerby 1959 developed an equation for computing the time of concentration for overland flow distances of less than 500 feet and greater than 300 feet _ 0 67 n Lo E where t time of concentration in minutes S overland slope in ft ft n roughness coefficient L length of overland flow in feet A table of recommended values for n is given in table 15 1 F Table 15 1 Recommended surface roughness values Smooth impervious surface 0 02 Smooth packed bare soil 0 1 Poor grass cultivated row crops of moderately rough bare soil 0 2 Pasture or average grass Cd Deciduous timberland 0 6 Timberland with deep forest litter or dense grass 0 8 Kirpich Time of Concentration Equation Kirpich s equation 1940 was developed for small agricultural watersheds It was derived by examining the required time for the stream to rise from low to maximum stage during a storm The time of concentration was then assumed equal to that time B 0 000132 o gt INES Coc rece ere cence reece eee cree e esse esse esse esse sess rro rro rro rro rro rr 0 000 where t time of concentration in hours L length of the overland flow in feet S average overland slope in ft ft Hydrologic Hydraulic Calc
144. 15 5 for more information on using time computation arcs to compute time of concentration and lag time You can investigate where the arc s will be created using the flow path tool lif and selecting points on the TIN or DEM since the same functions for flow are used to create the arcs The process requires the following three steps 1 Create a feature points at locations where the flow path segments should begin 2 Make sure any feature points you wish to use to create time computation arcs are selected 3 Choose the Node gt Flow Arcs command You will be asked if you want to create one continuous arc or multiple arcs If you respond with one continuous arc it will create an arc representing the flow path from the selected feature point to the next downstream outlet If you choose to create multiple arcs it will break the arc into separate arcs if the flow path encounters a stream Converting Stream Arcs to Time Computation Arcs When using the Node gt Flow Arcs command as described above only the portions of the stream that are part of the flow path from the selected point to the outlet get converted to time computation arcs If you wish to compute the lag time between consecutive outlet points then you will need to convert the remaining stream portions to time computation arcs This is the purpose of the Streams gt Flow Arcs command Not all streams are converted when using this command only those stream segments that connect outl
145. 17 2 2D Grid Display Options Dialog The grid display options are as follows e The Nodes item is used to display grid nodes If the grid is cell centered a dot is displayed at the cell centers If the grid is mesh centered a dot is displayed on the cell corners 2D Grids 17 5 e The Cells item is used to display the edges of active grid cells The cells are drawn using the specified grid cell color e The Grid Boundary item is used to display a solid line around the perimeter of the grid Displaying the boundary is useful when contours are being displayed with the cell edges turned off e The ZJ Indices item is used to display the 1 indices of each cell or node e Ifthe Inactive Cells item is used to display cells which are inactive If this option is turned off inactive cells are not displayed Inactive cells must be displayed before they can be selected e The Elevations item is used to display the z coordinate of each node or cell e The Fringes item is used to display color fringes on the grid when the grid is shaded The active scalar data set is used to display the fringes e The Contours item is used to display contours computed using the active scalar data set 17 5 Grid Generation 17 5 1 Three different methods are available for creating grids Create Grid Specify the dimensions and starting location of the grid Import a GIS Grid Read a grid from either an ARC INFO ASCII or GRASS grid using the Import co
146. 2 E 4 5 M oes a a 3 10 11 my on aaa 72355 3981 922 334 502 E 3497 623 2251 104 E 4007 382 251 0 666 4024 308 2933882 4061 016 Save station edits Import mm a 2 Cancel Figure 3 11 Cross Section Editor Dialog The Cross Section Editor shows the station and elevation of each of the vertices on the arc The station values are determined by starting from 0 0 and then computing the distance between each vertex from their xy coordinates Elevations are determined by interpolating from either a TIN or DEM If both a TIN and a DEM are present then the TIN will take precedence over the DEM Manning s n values can be defined for each segment of the cross section and are used when computing normal depth in the channel calculator see section 15 4 The interpolated elevations can always be edited either by changing the value in the appropriate edit field or by selecting the point and dragging up and down in the plot window Stations can only be edited if the Save station edits is toggled on However once you start editing the stations Map Module 3 21 they it will remove the detail in the xy plane since a cross section only has x and z values In other words the stations will appear as a straight line on the DEM the elevations will remain the same as when they were originally interpolated and stations not edited will remain unaffected In general it is better to edit stations by adding d
147. 30 10119 Observed Aydrocrapn DO 10 30 Table of Contents Ix HOTTA Patern Hydrogeraph OP Aa 10 30 10412 RESERVO Si O A AS AAA AAA 10 30 IAS DIVERSIONS cesi a A A Ai 10 30 IWAS Eann Dwers on Data DI SA AA E 10 31 TOFA GAGES PO E A E ato adasaniaracaaaaitecamtonenides 10 32 TOJA DE EAN CABOS Wi AAA AA AAA A eo eee 10 32 HOMES Ahe Gage FONON AAA E A A O A a tas Ae a 10 33 ARENA TECCET POSTET Nas 10 34 10 19 READING AND WRITING AE C47 FLES tia 10 34 TOEO RUNNING AN EE Cod ANALYSIS esau ocean Ea 10 34 WOO A Model Eneas 10 35 IO LO 2 gt Ruit TAT La E A A dba 10 35 IOR WMS AND FIV S ai E 10 36 TR20 INTERFACE a 11 1 IE INTRODUC TI N e a A E EA a NEE 11 1 11 1 1 Crede d Topolo ri TCE a dad 11 1 11 1 2 Define Job Control POTTS ida 11 1 11 1 3 Edit Basin Outlet Reservoir Diversion Data occcocononoonnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnonnnnnncnn nono nnnnnaccnnnnnnnnnns 11 1 11 1 4 MOI SNE AA don 11 2 11 1 5 A A A A E O a an 11 2 11 1 6 View Hya LO TOPIS E E a eel tate AA A re ale Ra al N 11 2 ES TOOL PAED ME a a ant eeeb wie 11 2 S TOB CONTROL int ei a A E a E OE a e a E O E 11 2 11 3 1 A A O A A EA O II T A A 11 3 11 3 2 MAR LAME AN CY COCCI rahe ci E ee 11 3 11 3 3 SNE AMES is 11 3 11 3 4 Umir Hydron raph II CIAO AAA AE AAA A aad ead setae 11 3 11 3 5 FEC PU A A A EE 11 4 11 3 6 BASE LT LOW UAT A AA AAN AA NENEN ERA 11 4 1 4 ENTERING EDITING ER 20 PARAMETERS sinsabores 11 4 MES OUTPUT CONTROL ase 11 5 11 5 1 Peak D
148. 6hrs behind GMT Telephone 608 258 9910 24 hours 7days a week Fax 608 258 9943 BBS 608 238 5266 Email support bossintl com WWW Site http www bossintl com System Requirements This program requires the following to functionally operate e A system running Microsoft Windows NT Windows 95 Windows for Workgroups 3 11 or Windows 3 1 e A 486 or larger micro processor 486sx processors are not supported e 16 MB of extended memory minimum However 32 MB is recommended Program Installation WMS is installed onto your PC using an easy to use installation program This section discusses how the installation program installs WMS application onto your computer s hard drive Once the program installation is completed the program license must be installed The program license can either be installed automatically using the installation program as discussed in this section or manually as discussed in a following section titled Manually Licensing WMS How to install this software 1 Insert the supplied CD ROM into your computer CD ROM drive WMS Installation Guide 2 If you are running Windows 95 or NT 4 0 or newer operating system the installation program should startup automatically when this CD ROM is inserted If you are running Windows 3 x Windows NT 3 5 or 3 51 then using File Manager double click on the SETUP EXE file contained in the root directory of the CD ROM disk 3 Select a product to inst
149. 75158799e 01 2 700000000000000e 03 File Formats 20 23 3 000000000000000e 03 6 702960411182080e 01 ENDGAG Figure 20 22 Sample Gage File The card types used in the gage file format are as follows Card Type GAGE Description File type identifier Must be on first line of file No fields Required YES Card Type BEGGAG Description Marks the beginning of a group of cards describing a gage There should be a corresponding ENDGAG card at a latter point in the file No fields Required YES 20 24 WMS Format NAM name Sample NAM Gage F23B Field Variable Value Description S O Tame str The name of the gage Format LOC x y z Sample LOC 348 23 623 36 93 20 Field Variable Value Description i LES XxX yr 2 The coordinates of the gage Defines the positive direction vector for the gage This vector is used to determine the sign or when plotting vector curves Format DIR VX VY VZ lSample DIR 0 45 0 85 0 0 SSS Field Variable Value Description S O Format COL id red green blue Sample COL 124 67 2450 S Field Variable Value Description red 0 255 The value of the red component of the color green 0 255 The value of the green component of the color File Formats 20 25 Format SCA np name Elo YI t2 V2 AR AA S S 00 00 00 043 299 593 1 0 99 14 1 5 98 64 2083 Field
150. 9 2 8 14 2 8 15 Register The Register command is used for enabling WMS For information on how to register your copy of WMS consult your WMS installation guide or distributor Exit The Exit command is used to exit the program Edit Menu 2 9 1 The Edit menu is one of the standard menus and is available in all of the modules The commands in the Edit menu are used to select objects and delete objects Deletion Commands The different ways to delete data in WMS makes it very easy to eliminate any portion or all of the data associated with a given model One important thing to remember is that deleting in WMS does not cause the data to be permanently removed or erased from the hard drive but rather eliminates it from core memory for a specific run of WMS For example if you read a TIN in from a file and then delete the TIN it will no longer appear in WMS but the file that was read in is not deleted from the hard disk The methods that can be used to delete data from WMS include 1 Deleting all data and starting over with the New command in the File menu 2 Deleting selected items vertices triangles arcs etc with the Delete command in the Edit menu 3 Deleting all data associated with a given module 1 e all TIN data in the TINs module using the Delete All command in the Edit menu 4 Deleting object specific data such as all feature objects drawing objects or DXF data with the Delete command found in indiv
151. ARA 2 10 2003 AMPOULE Cras eect a eee 2 10 LOL LIPOL RR IR CES RSA ct eee 2 20 200 ETINI Desecration A aes a ass 2 22 269 ME eS UNI PLATOS AA A 2 25 WMS 2 8 10 Prine Files PCPA OTIS cias 2 25 2 8 11 Viewin e LES AA SA A AA AAA AER AAA AAA AA 2 25 2 8 12 AAA e e A 2 25 2 0 13 DEMO VEIS ON 2d NA A NS EE 2 25 2 8 14 TRC CUS et hae Sth BN i ea Nee 2 ehh ae ee erik ae eae A 2 26 2 8 15 AN 2 26 2 OIE io 2 26 DADP Deleon Commands orni O a aa 2 26 DZ Sela On COMMANA isa 2 27 LD CONFINED tada 2 27 294 Gopyto Chphoard PE Platforms Ossa 2 27 ZA DISPLAY MENUS nadadora 2 28 2 10 1 ISA A110 rere tent tee Cen Co leo edo 2 28 2 10 2 COMI OUT O tds 2 30 2 10 3 RETOS acess ictal es i alec A A eh os 2 34 2 10 4 SNOU E oats eater dt ao ia 2 34 2 10 5 Diaw SADO asses 2 35 2 10 6 AUS Mannal OR 2 35 2 10 7 Hide Show Ear Md a A 2 36 ZE VEWMENU cat ls dis ia 2 36 2 11 1 NON LEE CLL ee RCP ERR COTO ee EET PECTIN NERC TOO YS MRE STA A ERE Ne Poet a ava RE PST Tee eee 2 36 Zalda SCE Window Bounds ores tanna A E do 2 36 2 11 3 Z Maen anlo AAA ie ree el a a ted k ts 2 36 2 11 4 CHANGING THE VIEWING AN OS A A 2 36 MAF MODULE aiii iia 3 1 Sel INTRODUCTION cursor E T E acta 3 1 Ie RR TREC Ie CI corner PI E o An re 3 2 32A Creating Watershed Models DirectiIy tl 3 2 322 Creatine TINS Or Finite DI Terence GUAS irr Ee ELENOR AARNEN EER 3 3 3 2 3 Mapping Curve Numbers and Other Analysis Parameters oooonncccnnnninnonnncnnnnnnnnnnanoncnnnna
152. AS A cae E banetd came E 7 4 LS DEAN CE Bast DB OUNAE ri 7 4 7 3 10 PU TIVO CO BIS MS aida 7 4 7 3 11 ROSIE TIS spre tke Postel dolia a 7 4 7 3 12 BOSIN ONE S AAA Aa 7 4 7 3 13 BOSTE IN S erata ios 7 5 7 3 14 INUINDET of Iriart les F TOWA tt dt ita 7 5 vi WMS LLO VUELA e eo o receso e 7 5 7 3 16 DOWN l Overland COMA A E T 7 5 7 3 17 DOWN CANNEL C OON EE E OS 7 5 7 3 18 Com OVETION GC OLOT e EEE SA ds 7 5 7 3 19 Dail Channel Color nc EEEE EE OO es 7 5 7 3 20 Pula T A C 6 OE AAA AA OA S O AT EEN 7 5 7 3 21 Geome mi ADUTE T iS i et oh Sd ohio oe cs ah a Bald hala ads Pag ihe el ols ei 7 6 ki OUTES ear gage daats is seas cae is 7 6 TIN PUG WCQ OU CDs Susa 7 6 TI Ma 7 6 TE cd O DAD A A A 7 6 TAS SCICCUBIGICIING IN OS AAA 7 6 A NIV S n See sieas Seats N E Rad cmacei tenes ina O a 7 7 POA EROTICOS A a AR 7 7 lede CUE TIC AAA A E N 7 8 MIS DEl te TECOS MES E TA AA E daa 7 8 Lat DOE te IS TECOS A ass 7 8 LID ADDESDIGV SUN CAINE OPUS aca EA case cose Nee nO 7 8 TO RESERVO Ss io cocos 7 8 7 0 1 Reservors and storage CApaciiy CUIVES A id A A Ms 7 9 TO Welenne Reservoirs nests ae oa T O a TO 7 10 lr DRAINAGE sects in eG ee E 7 10 tlle Pe ne RA A A A A 7 10 TTD REMOS OU TECNICOS lt lt A ae a date a ean don 7 10 Tel iS NCOTTECD SPUIlTAOW VCC ES as 7 11 DAA MIDE BAS D vss E iS E teas 7 11 A IDE E Ia eal es ete 7 11 TAO Delete Al BIIEN NA 7 11 Piel Delete Null Basin Me e e i ead oh dee e dla e aed tte 7 11 PAS OWE OWT OU CIS A
153. B C and D 2 Mapping of Green amp Ampt parameters for the Maricopa County method 3 Mapping of CASC2D attributes Descriptions and examples of each are given below Land use tables with corresponding curve numbers for different hydrologic soul groups vary from one text to another or from one agency to another For this reason WMS supports user defined tables Users can create tables with the currently required data The format of the table is shown in Figure 20 29 and a sample file in Figure 20 30 ID1 Land use description 1 CNA1 CNB1 CNC1 CND1 File Formats 20 29 ID2 Land use description 2 CNA2 CNBZ CNC2 CNDZ ID3 hand use description 3 CNA3 CNB3 CNC3 ENDS IDn Land use description n CNAn CNBn CNCn CNDn Figure 20 29 Curver Number Land Use File Format 1 Fully developed urban areas Poor Condtion 68 79 86 89 Paved parking lots roofs driveways etc 98 98 98 98 3 Residential 1 8 acre lots 65 impervious 77 85 90 92 4 Residential 1 3 acre lots 30 impervious 57 72 81 86 Figure 20 30 Sample Curve Number Land Use File No specific card types are required in this file but a description of each of the six fields required for each land use definition is given below Each field must be separated by a comma and the description string must be enclosed by double quotes Field Variable Value Description 1 id ID number of land use descrip
154. COPE O A A 10 14 PE lio 21 5 A anna dane ei eatcees 10 14 10 32 A Godiva deuintad aa aacumaieiadates 10 15 21 6 PI 21 5 A A ett teed 10 14 A A O 10 14 Pisani aiii cia 10 14 QNo 13 10 30 21 8 O nT 10 13 10 30 OOP shies canna O nagar 10 30 RE adi d nenas 21 7 A A 10 29 l 8 WMS A E E S 10 25 10 29 RN arent T E 10 24 Rora eT ee eee 10 25 21 7 A a tase lea ete iase 10 28 10 29 RA irate ates ht E E A 21 7 RI e tet eae ace rt teeactesAcaen ate eas 21 7 O 10 27 an 10 27 21 7 tio ATE 10 28 A 10 27 10 28 21 7 S Aelia eons tang desaeioneeiaiaee 10 28 iria cre apenas 10 28 N a A A coca ada 10 27 21 7 Er EEE T O E E T O 21 6 A EPS EE E 10 18 DD E E E T 10 20 UI10 20 21 7 NTRS as scares O 10 20 A ie eee acres 10 19 COMME Susini dido 10 10 creating without TlN oooooonnnnnnccnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnno 9 4 defining Cross SECTIONS ooooooooonnnccnnnncnnnnnnnnnos 21 7 depth area Storms sunina aa 10 5 ANECA 10 30 CULM N PA O PO a 10 9 examining Tesla 2 25 T E E O N 10 32 geperal parameters endoso 10 3 locating problems ooooooccccccnnnccncnnnnonm 10 35 ide 10 15 malano CUE iantecein etiewtaaiss 9 4 multiple Storms cian 10 7 number Of ordinates ooooooonnnnccncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnno 10 4 LULT DAEA A E E 10 4 PICCIPILANOMs a ae 10 14 A incom tede 10 10 Pani O PP snes ee Sings Seeaa tes tae vesanagratanseseaameaes 10 6 Reading Exist lid 1 25 A A esbahies 10 34 O 10 23 UA bin 10 34 SNOW Elia cast a 7 13 Steps to def
155. Control Panel select the 386 Enhanced icon choose Virtual Memory then choose Change Verify that the drive type is NOT set to none The drive type may be set to either temporary or permanent Permanent is recommended WMS Installation Guide Disabling Microsoft WIN32s It should not be necessary to disable WIN32s The WIN32s DLLs will only be loaded when a WIN32s application is executed The WIN32s VxD is loaded when Windows starts but has little memory overhead If you must disable WIN32s or wish to do a clean reinstallation of WIN32s take the following actions 1 Remove the WIN32s VxD line from Windows SYSTEM INI files in the ENH386 section DEVICE C WINDOWS SYSTEM AWIN328S 386 2 Delete the W32SYS DLL and the WIN32S16 DLL files from the lt WINDOWS gt SYSTEM directory and all files in the lt WINDOWS gt 1SYSTEMXWIN325 subdirectory Note that lt WINDOWS gt is the Windows installation directory such as C WINDOWS 3 Restart Windows Manually Licensing WMS The installation program copies WMS and various other files related to application onto your hard drive However without enabling the program license using either the software license diskette password license a hardware lock or a network hardware lock the software will only operate in demo mode not allowing you to print or save The following sections discuss how to manually install the program license Software License If you
156. Crass Section Data Seres A Hew Delete Duplicate Figure 11 5 TR 20 Cross Section Data Dialog Bankfull Elevation If you enter the bank full elevation here it will trigger a warning message in the TR 20 output file if less than two cross section data points are below bank full Entering the bankfull elevation is optional Zero Damage Elevation This is used with the 7R 20 flow duration analysis to flag results at this elevation Entering the zero damage elevation is optional Low Ground Elevation The low ground elevation is the lowest flood plain elevation in a cross section The low ground elevation which is optional must not be higher than the bankfull elevation Flow Units The flow can be entered in cubic feet per second per square mile csm or cubic feet per second cfs To select one of these flows simply select the type of flow you want by selecting the appropriate radio button in the Define 11 12 WMS Cross Section dialog If flow is defined in csm you must define the drainage area of the basin in square miles Defining Cross Sections Once across section has been defined in TR 20 this cross section can be used in other locations in the TR 20 model A cross section defined for an earlier outlet can be used later by another outlet simply by selecting the name from the text window or the drop down box in the TR 20 Routing Data dialog Kinematic Wave Method The kinematic wave method uses two different r
157. Cs a ac 18 11 o ree ee RT A 16 11 17 3 NOG AN O E teusecevensan tc 18 16 shappa toa Gid aos 2 35 A AAEE TA diadaces 6 1 BW SELIG EE E ETE 21 1 COD Vorne ea a a ieeas seem seeabiee 2 27 COPY ASE ar A 1 coverage CS OD austin 3 22 CTOSS SECU Onea E 3 19 drainage Per tias 3 11 L I E P TE NA 3 22 land Ue ee a A 3 14 Index l 3 MODRA T recare src licita 3 19 TUNGID coeca as 3 18 A 3 16 LiMesCOMIPULALI ida 3 18 O nat Reser pean eee ner 3 9 VEST OU isi A Owain aa acea ae at 3 6 COVELAIS DOK sates a nie ee citeo ayes 2 6 EAS CAINS A ad 7 7 creating watershed models in WMGS 1 3 critical interior points ccocococnonnnnoccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 6 22 CTOSS SCCUOMCCILOR cdi 3 20 CTOSS SECHOMS rra lado 21 7 CTRL key Selecting triangles ooccccccccncnnnnmo 6 2 6 17 cumulative tanta 21 5 CUNY 6 DUNE 11 7 custom nff equation A ENO 20 34 A a 5 7 data calcula r n 16 4 data set pid Bie es als ieee eee ar AN 20 15 IA e 20 15 AUN IEA ones oases tae 16 3 18 4 ATM ALON et 16 6 16 9 DOW SET scxocusciaweivamnaataesaa wer ammencnstecsueumtuenadens 16 2 calla cada 16 4 16 5 A A 16 5 A nn ney Ste annnretr tere are 16 4 Elvas 16 4 A ea ites 16 3 Mi aca E N E E E T 16 3 MEASC lin 20 12 Hle DMA N a 20 16 O 16 5 IMPOR runa 16 3 ET O E EEA TEE O en ETET 16 4 NS STNG EE E E T EEATT 2 31 MAA OS 16 4 MEM naa 16 4 TUTTI eieaa a Dotersaonancessnehs 16 4 IVAN sista cases ooo A 16 4 standard deviation iii 16 4 o ted
158. DEM drainage display options e Map module Map e Hydrologic Modeling module Hydrologic Modeling includes tree display options and hydrograph display options e 2D Grid module 2D Grid e Scatter Point module Scatter Point 2 30 WMS 2 10 2 The display options for each tab are discussed separately in the chapters describing the specifics of each module The Display Options command has a macro in the tool palette S Contouring TINs DEMs and grids can be contoured in WMS by turning on the contour option in their respective Display Options dialog tabs When a TIN or DEM is contoured elevations are used to generate the contours When a grid is contoured the active data set is used to define contour values See Chapter 11 for more information on how data sets are used The options used to generate contours can be edited by selecting the Contour Options command in the Display menu The Contour Options dialog is shown in Figure 2 14 and contains three different tabs Contours Color Ramp and Labels The display options controlled under each tab are described in the following sections Contour Options ul Contours Color Ramp Contour Label Options Contour Method Normal linear contours Data Set Information Data Sek the name of the data set Miniroum value 3575 0000 Maximum value 475 0000 1200 0000 O Color fill between contours Cubic splines contours E Tension
159. DEM points until a point which has already been assigned a basin id is intersected The result is that each DEM point gets assigned the id of the sub basin it belongs to 5 5 3 5 5 4 5 5 5 5 5 6 Drainage DEMs 5 11 Additional outlet points can be created by changing the attribute of existing arc nodes to outlets or by converting arc vertices to nodes and then changing the attribute to outlet The Node lt gt QOutlet command can be used to accomplish this Any selected node or vertex will automatically be converted to an outlet node when using this command Any selected outlet node will automatically be converted to a generic node type when using this command The Define Basins command can be used any number of times to redefine basins after the addition deletion of outlet nodes Inactivate Null Basin The Inactivate Null Basin command is used to inactivate all DEM points which are not currently assigned a basin id The inactive DEM points can then be eliminated altogether freeing up valuable memory resources by choosing the Delete Inactive command from the DEMs menu DEM Basins Boundaries to Polygons Once the desired sub basin delineation from the DEM points has been defined the basin boundaries can be converted to feature polygons This is done by tracing the boundaries between sub basins to generate arcs After all of the boundaries have been defined the arcs are converted to polygons and the polygons assigned the appropri
160. Data Drainage area fo 40 Rainfall 2 600 Curve number 28 0 TR 55 help window for the current basin in CFS The equation used to compute this value iz Op Qu Am G Fp Fond and swamp area 0 000 Travel time Rainfall distribution Type Copy to clipboard Compute hydragraph s Data window display options Done Eompute travel lime Figure 12 1 TR 55 Dialog The Data window display options button allows you to control which information are displayed in the data window when the peak discharge is computed The primary purpose for including the different display options shown in Figure 12 2 is so that all results can be copied to the clipboard and then pasted into a report document TR 55 Data Window Display Options M Basin name _ Initial abstraction Curve number _ Initial abstraction Precip _ Area _ Unit peak discharge _ Rainfall _ Fond and swamp factor _ Potential maximum retention M Peak discharge Runoff e Waning _ Time of concentration All or Display peak discharge and name All off Cancel 12 4 WMS 12 3 1 12 3 2 12 3 3 12 3 4 Figure 12 2 TR 55 Data Window Display Options Dialog The input fields required to run a TR 55 simulation are defined in the next several sections Basin Name The basin name is used to identify individual basins within a larger watershed As with all basins created automatically in WMS th
161. Data with Multiple Data Ss 20 32 20 20 2 Tabular Data with Transient Data Set cccccccccccccccccccucccccccuccscscuscucuscusceccececescescscusescuscesencs 20 32 XIV WMS 20 21 USER DEFINED RATIONAL METHOD DIMENSIONLESS HYDROGRAPH FILES cccccceesceesseesseees 20 33 20 22 CUSTOM NEF EOUATIONS ELE A oe ae 20 34 20 22 1 Simplified explanation of creating a custom equation file ooooncccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 20 39 2027 DEY SE RIBS PIES aida 20 41 Zi SE AX SERIES EDIL Ruina ii a iia 21 1 Die INTRODUCTION ni aio 21 1 4 AS E 12124 A A O O CERRO RE OW SRR eR UR 21 2 PVE A A 21 3 213 1 Pelee iea E TEATE OE E EAT ele OUA 21 3 21 3 2 AG SAO ENE E N 21 4 21 3 3 ENa ARATA ERN as o A td aes ala ex 21 4 21 3 4 TASOT ets est O E AR AR O A 21 4 21 3 5 COMPUESTA AAA AAA AAN ince ou len tances E 21 4 Die XY SERIES PLOT ir A arco 21 4 21 4 1 EA AAA NN A A 21 4 21 4 2 TC FO MITOS sa 21 5 20 gt DEFINING A RAINFALE SERIES PUP a a S eN 21 5 21 6 DEFINING A HYPOTHETICAL STORM SERIES PH cccccccecccsscceseccescceeseccesscceuecseecsseneceesssseeceees 21 6 21 7 DEFINING A TIME AREA CURVE UA cccccceccccseccceecceeccceuccceeceeecsucucseesessessseeecsueesesenessenesseueseues 21 6 21 8 DEFINING A STORAGE ROUTING CURVE RS oocccocccncccnoccnnccnnoconoccnncconaconorcnnccnnocnnnaronorcnnaconacenanannnos 21 7 29 DEFINING A CROSS SECTION RA RY a a ai 21 7 21 10 DEFINING DIVERSION DATA DI DO oooccccnc
162. Description Only feature points are created from a stream file so the order of stream points in the file is not 25 X Y Z Stream coordinates Repeat for each stream point po important S E 20 15 AutoCAD Stream File Format Some vendors of AutoCAD provide a utility for saving breakline files This file format has been adopted in WMS so that arcs can be created from feature points as they are read in The format is essentially the same as the digitized stream file except that there is no header card and there is an extra space in front of all points This space is empty except for those points where a new stream segment begins in which case an S should be present When reading these files a snapping tolerance can be defined so that all points preceded with the S can be snapped into the network Remember that points should be defined from down to upstream The file format is show in Figure 20 25 and a sample file in Figure 20 26 STREAM Beginning of polygon stream file Sx11 y11 Zz11 First point in first stream segment atia vio 2110 es la X1Inp Yinp 21np S X21 Y21 2971 First point in first stream segment Ha 2901 la i x2np Y2np 22np Figure 20 25 AutoCAD Stream File Format S0 0 0 0 10055 8 0 10 0 File Formats 20 27 ETEA Figure 20 26 Sample AutoCAD Stream File Format SX Y1 21 ES A EA A SA Sample sSs0 0 0 0 TOO 5 5 620 107 0 E e A Field V
163. E A A asses erwateases 15 12 average overland flow distance 15 12 distance from centroid to stream 15 13 maximum flow path 15 12 maximum stream length 15 13 OPE ease ceroman sees 15 12 Steal LOWS MIS iii 15 13 O a 15 13 Cend OPA OPE OPE E PECES 7 4 computing attributes ooccccccc 5 11 7 12 CLEANS A a N 9 5 ACUDIMOS ox sods a alates aoc encneen cance teactes 7 10 derno OL senesne a a a 7 10 A nina sueeerem eee 7 11 delete rom een 9 5 deleting triangles outside Of oooo omm 7 11 A di Gracshduias tes N 7 4 exporting attributes ooooonnnnnnncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnono 2 21 geometric parameters coooooooonnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 6 3 id 7 4 A Ea 6 3 O E EE E 7 11 A onshstudeens esi eaeuta aude ioaaeate 7 4 A A laren ms 7 4 refined boundaries ooooooonnnncncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 7 10 So nee i nee eran E TAA E 9 2 SPH CHING soi tect ite wa eens 7 11 CRS a O 9 1 ING III APN vilN0e ES A Ron a 2 36 DESINNING TM a 10 4 A ea tend ee aca nedeaaeat 17 6 boundary OL VIN Sandia no 6 5 DEAN ed as 7 7 OPUS o 6 16 IN tata eul antennas Giese hoent haart eal aa 6 2 6 16 calculator channel calculati0OnDsS ccccccocnnnmmmmmo 15 34 A a caueiemnan tama eamanawanee 15 40 detention DASING anene svete 15 36 WEIS adoos 15 35 CAMDEN odds ta 9 8 16 9 A aa 20 1 CASC2D MONDE taa 3 23 AV ALAIN A 1 2 Channel RoutaS ii 19 7 COVERAGES ii 3 22 CPC ALIN uds ad
164. E EERE RE ee A eee Ce 15 17 T A epee E EE enon entice 15 18 640 where At is the computational time interval as define in the HEC 1 Job Control dialog by default it is 15 minutes 15 18 WMS Riverside County Lag Time Equations The Riverside County Flood Control and Water Conservancy District developed three different lag equations corresponding to mountainous foothill and valley areas near Riverside County California Anonymous 1963 0 38 Lx Lea A Trac 1 20 Ts Mountainous cccccccnnnnnnnnnnnninionicinanonoss 15 19 TOS Trac 0 72 Js Foothills ooocccccccncnnnnnnnnnnnnnncs 15 20 OS Trac 0 38 Ts Walle ys aos 15 21 where Tix the lag time in hours L maximum flow length in miles L length to the centroid in miles S weighted slope along the maximum flow path length in ft mile The typical characteristics of watersheds for which the Riverside County equations were used include the following e Areas from 2 to 650 square miles Eagleson Lag Time Equation Eagleson s method 1962 for computing lag time in completely storm sewered watersheds is given in equation 15 22 Trac 03 a IM roots B22 JS where Tao the lag time in hours L maximum flow length in miles L the length to the centroid in miles ca Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 19 S weighted average slope of the maximum flow path in ft mile The typical characteristics of watersheds for which the Eagleson
165. E IDOL a ae Oi ene eee 5 9 0 02 EXPOTTAS tod GIS COVA ts AOE OR TT 5 9 A ADAC A OOU A 1 1 RRO NE OPERA ENS ia 5 10 9 TOPOEOGICAL TREES di 9 1 delo INTRODUCTION uta at ote cadena 9 1 OD TOOK PA TETERA as 9 2 Select OUES AS A a T a a E a 9 2 AER A II ER 9 2 a A ed asec squib osmat E EE same ouput EE EE EEE 9 2 SECANO TAN ato ee a ee 9 2 0 3 TREF OISPIA YY OPTIONS di oia 9 2 ISET DAME TICO AA A A A A EE ee ds a 9 3 D352 Colapse INE Tolo LIO LOC AA A A NA 9 3 04 DEPAUET MODE E A A A A AEE 9 4 I CREATING TREES ui a las 9 4 IL ACA A E AA A A AETA 9 4 A LAT A E A sed dimen saeahesaadasteguaiebbe ried a sie aesmuschak cores 9 4 933 Delete OM Cie ii ees ce ti ee ee eon see 9 5 934 ADA ches E ise ouslevsseiee tex O E E iiatenssiasabodtgussscwivats 9 5 DD MDCT CTC OS Irate telcos OP UI tla ESENE ESIE EEES 9 5 DDO VO RESCIVO A A A at 9 5 DIS DELE ROS CIVERA ASES A EA AT AN adi CRA 9 5 DIS gt Adad DIV CISION A AAA AS AA A a 9 5 IO RETREAT A A EOT 9 6 9 5 10 Delta DC TO id ss 9 6 90 VIEWING HY DROGRAPHS a aid 9 6 DOJ DISPLAS OPU ONS AA 9 7 902 Readint Hydro CUO DING a AA A EENE O AE EA 9 7 SO Dele ina FNA OTAPI S SSA EAS A AA ANA 9 8 TOA List H VAFO TAPIN A A io 9 8 97 WMS TREE FTE acia 9 9 TO HECLINTEREACE ani cios 10 1 PORE INTRODUCTION caos 10 1 10 1 1 Creal GT OP OlOCTC IFC dE AA A 10 1 10 1 2 Define Job Control Parametets aR ROR ea OR 10 1 10 1 3 Edit Basin Outlet Reservoir Diversion Data ccccccccccccccccsscccc
166. E TIN IDEM SITE DEM MAP SITE MAP DXF C WMS DATA SITE DXF Figure 20 2 Sample Super File 20 3 TIN Files TIN files are used for storing triangulated irregular networks The TIN file format is shown in Figure 20 3 and a sample file is shown in Figure 20 4 The TIN file format can be used to import a simple set of XYZ coordinates since the triangle information beginning with the TRI card does not need to be present If you have a file of xyz coordinates you only need to add the TIN BEGT and VERT nv cards to the top of the file and the ENDT card at the end TIN File type identifier BEGT Beginning of TIN group TNAM name Name of TIN TCOL id TIN material id VERT nv Beg of vertices x1 lle ale EL Vertex coords xD yo Zo LED IXnv Ynv Znv lfnv TRI nt Beg of triangles V11 V12 v13 Triangle vertices DL 00 98 Vnt1 Vnt2 Ynt3 ENDT End of TIN group Figure 20 3 TIN File Format TIN BEGT TNAM Aspen TCO 255 255 255 Figure 20 4 Sample TIN File The cards used in the TIN file are as follows Card Type TIN 22 Description File type identifier Must be on first line of file No fields Required YES 20 4 WMS Card Type BEGT O s s s s gt 2 Description Marks the beginning of a group of cards describing a TIN There should be a corresponding ENDT card at a latter point in the file No fields
167. E on o units 1 0000 E o 1 mi km 2 589988 2 inches mm 25 400 3 Fahrenheit Celcius Formula E ee km 0 30480 I 2 il EE METE m m 0 000189 wie km 1 609344 7 feet meter 0 304800 8 in hr mm hr 2 54000 9 mi mi km km 1 0000 METAN gt 1 0000 11 Tare arc 1 0000 12 area ratio arearatio 1 0000 13 decimal decimal 1 0000 fraction fraction 14 cfs m s 0 028317 15 inches WI mm wh _ 25 400 Pe J ie 1 0000 18 mm yr 0 386102 19 strm mi gtrm km 0 386102 21 person mi person km 0 386102 22 decimal decimal 1 0000 23 mi mi kmYkm 1 0000 Unit Codes Table 20 22 1 File Formats 20 39 Mapping codes for variables are given in the following table Code Variable 0 Area 1 Shape factor 2 Elevation 3 Channel slope 4 Channel length 5 Altitude index 6 Relief 7 Effective Drainage 8 Drainage area below 8000 ft elevation 9 Sinuosity 10 Basin above 6000 ft elevation 100 Any other variable not included in z 10 Mapping Codes Table Simplified explanation of creating a custom equation file The majority of NFF equations have only a handful of basic components many of the values in the above cards are 0 or 1 Commonly an equation will have simply a constant of regressio
168. I E SP 5 S A NV NI S y X A SS NNN NN N SN NI N IN NNN NN 7 AS 9 N A AN ral AY D IX IN Y WN N NV A N N VAVA V SN N KEY ID WN N XS N SS RSE o N K S IN Y NV V V SAAANA AAA VILLADA OA NS SSA X JY N INS Da Y WAN y WA b gt Q Y NS N A NA A N KI y D Y AY y Ya YI Y YY K Fi Di s A LO aM 1 O i va A A ADA Ni y N K mat N OS NS aN RN ON SN a A N K XI S is S S S N S S gt N SKN Y VW A Y Ys A D gt Ky DS X K S S R N N N N N X N Q N o Q KJ N NY OS 2 A gt a al awe WN Ax SER So S SRR SER SANS ASS NNN N QDD SRRSSN NN SNS ON SSS NN NM SRR K RES oN A NN RAN EVA DS A NS Figure 3 5 Example Drainage Coverage Used as a Conceptual Model for Creating a TIN In either case the same set of attributes can be defined but are used for a different purpose The following sections outline the different attributes available for points arcs and polygons in the drainage coverage and describe the differences when used to create hydrologic models or TINs Drainage Point Node Types Drainage points can have either generic or outlet attributes Generic points have no attributes and can be used for drawing purposes Outlet points are directly linked to the t
169. I Compute snow melt runoff Degree day method Elevation zone data MA Base Elevation of one 1 4230 0000 Elevation ranges trom 4230 00 to 4775 00 one elevation interval 545 0000 Define Ma Data Snow melt coefficients MC Temp lapzeszone 3 000 Snow melt coeff 0 070 Freezing temp 32 00 Temperature time series MT Detine MT IN record values Month fio Year EE _ Energy Budget Method Dew point time seres MD Meine Mo IN record values Month f Year ss Shortwave radiation time senes M5 Wefie WE IM record values Bart fi ear ss Wind speed time seres bmw Define IN record values al Month fi Year ss IY Snow mel losses LM STRES 2 000 ATIOR 0 200 Figure 10 10 HEC 1 Snow Melt Data Dialog 10 10 1 Elevation Zone Data MA Snow computations are accomplished in HEC using separate equally incremented elevation zones within each basin The number of elevation zones for which data must be defined is determined by specifying the base elevation of zone 1 and zone interval in the appropriate edit fields The default values correspond to the lowest elevation and the range between the highest and lowest elevation 1 e one elevation zone More zones can be created by decreasing the interval or lower elevations can be excluded from calculations by increasing the base elevation Once the base elevation and interval are set elevation zone data is defined by choosing the Define MA Data butto
170. INTYPE gt Drainage Arc ty LENGTH gt Stream length el CAMA 5 tutornalhasparcel hp SLOPE gt Stream slope Attribute mapping IY Polygons MEANELEY gt Basin mear ae LAGTIME gt Basin lag time CMS Stutornalyasppoly shp CN gt Basin curve number PRECIP gt Basin average p Attribute mapping Import Arcview generated watershed shapefile Cancel Figure 1 19 Import Shapefile Data Dialog Ideally you will have three data layers when importing watershed related shapefiles 1 a polygon layer representing basin boundaries 2 a line arc layer representing the stream network and 3 a point layer representing the outlet points these should be the intersection points of the basin polygons and stream network layers If you have these three layers properly defined you should be able to import them and automatically create the topologic model used for hydrologic modeling in WMS If one or more of these layers are not present you will need to either create it in ArcView or ARC INFO or define it in WMS after importing what is available For example if you only have a layer defining basin boundaries then you will need to construct a network using feature objects in WMS which properly connects the basin polygons together This stream network may or may not actually represent the conveyance channel in the actual watershed but must be present at least to the point that connectivity between sub basins i
171. If the Fixed Stage Values option is set the numerical values of all vertices with fixed stage values will be displayed The values are displayed above each vertex or above the stage value bars if they are also displayed Interpolated Stage If the Interpolated Stage option is set all vertices with interpolated stage values will be marked by a colored bar determined by the color box to the left of the item and drawn vertically from the vertex The height of the bar is determined by the value in the Stage Height text field where the number of pixels per unit of stage can be specified See the section on stage to learn more about interpolated stage values Interpolated Stage Values If the Interpolated Stage Values option is set the numerical values of all vertices with interpolated stage values will be displayed The values are displayed above each vertex or above the stage value bars if they are also displayed Flood Plain Boundary If the Flood Plain Boundary option 1s set the current flood plain boundary is displayed for the TIN The color of the flood plain is determined by the color box to the left of the Flood plain boundary item 8 4 8 4 WMS 8 3 7 8 3 8 Stage 8 4 1 Flood Plain Color Filled This option allows you to display the flood plain as a filled polygon Flood Plain Contours If the Flood plain contours option is set the flooded region will be contoured according to the depth of the flood The Contour
172. Losses are used in conjunction with the uniform LU or exponential LE loss methods The parameter descriptions are as follows e STRKS The starting value of the loss coefficient on the exponential recession curve for losses in in hour mm hour when used with the exponential loss rate LE or the uniform melt water loss rate in hour when used with the uniform loss rate LU e RTIOK Rate of change of the loss rate parameter computed as the ratio of STRKS to a value of STRKS after ten inches of accumulated loss when used with the exponential loss rate or not used when using the uniform loss rate 10 11 Routing Data Outlet points are used to define locations where hydrographs are combined and then routed downstream The appropriate combined hydrograph HC cards stations are generated automatically when writing a HEC file However 10 24 WMS 10 11 1 10 11 2 routing data must be entered in order to simulate the movement of a flood wave through the river reaches or reservoirs The effects of storage and flow resistance are accounted for in the shape and timing of the flood wave In addition to these changes volume may be lost due to channel infiltration Most of the routing methods available in HEC are based on the continuity equation and some relationship between flow and storage or stage Routing data is entered by selecting an outlet and then selecting the Routing Data button from the Edit HEC 1 Parameters dialog The dif
173. MAI 2 6 Manning s equation ccccccccccnnnnnnnnoonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 15 34 manual TOUT AW 5 Sesh cio 2 35 map A lec cuncetos ti E 2 8 MOM ias 1 24 map module A EN 3 1 MAPP isa sii see elevation Maricopa County travel time compuations cseeeeeeees 15 30 Maa 16 4 menu Da pci 2 7 O ee ga 16 1 O tardieman 2 28 A O A II 2 26 mieno a 18 4 A neat tnan ey at odeeasapeataaesnee 2 36 MEC UNMIS daa 10 4 l 10 WMS MOJE kE DECK aens dans 10 35 NA A ON 11 17 model checker CASCO riadas 19 15 MODRA T tooodo 13 17 A a T 1 23 DEM aa 1 24 deS EOT eenaa E races 2 1 ITE Cl A e 1 25 TET NEEE EA E EOE 1 24 Scatter POOL ii 1 25 Selecta a We topa 2 3 AD Bia OPC E rer rerery arr vee 1 23 6 1 Wa 1 24 mosaic USGS Ale transita di 4 1 MOVE to DICC 3 42 MOVE LO ATOM ao 3 42 MS Windows A A IN 2 25 multiple selection ccooooooooooooooonccnnnnnnnnnnnonoss 2 6 MO a cs oo 3 9 5 3 Muskingum routing cccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnns 10 25 Muskingum Cunge routing cccceeeeees 10 29 National Flood Frequency sssseeeeeeees 14 1 natural neighbor ccccccccccnnnnmmm 18 14 18 19 bounding window ooooooccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononenoss 18 18 extrapolar cata 18 18 local COOrdiNatesS oooooooonnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 18 16 A a ina tunes 18 17 LEA EEE A 2 8 NP ni da 14 1 computing peak discharge cccccoconmmmmm 14 5 defining your OWN equation ooccccccccnnnnnc
174. MAN UAL S US E R ECE UN Gu Y Z gt 2 eee D ZUND OA FOR lt L f SUN 252 095 2 O U WMS Installation Guide for Personal Computers This section describes the system requirements installation procedures and start up of WMS for Microsoft Windows 3 x Microsoft Windows for Workgroups 3 11 Microsoft Windows 95 and Microsoft Windows NT on a personal computer Inventory If you downloaded the software from the internet then the following inventory section does not apply However if you received the shipment from BOSS International then included with your distribution of WMS should be the following items e CD ROM containing the WMS executable and resource files as well as the various modules that you may have purchased These modules include Map TIN DEM HEC 1 TR20 TR55 Rational NFF and other interface modules e WMS License Diskette Serial Numbered Diskette e WMS Hardware Lock if a hardware locked version was purchased e WMS User Manual e This installation guide e Technical documentation for any model interfaces you may have ordered optional If you are missing any of the above items please contact us WMS Installation Guide How to Contact BOSS International SSS ee ee 2 A A _ _ BOSS International can be reached at BOSS International 6612 Mineral Point Road Madison WI 53705 USA Monday through Friday 8 00am to 5 00pm CST
175. MS supports reading and writing of TIFF images for the purposes of draping on a TIN or grid or displaying in the background when performing on screen digitization of feature objects or TIN vertices Images must be registered to the TIN grid or background by defining real world coordinates to positions on the image This establishes a mapping between real world coordinates and the pixels of the image The most important part of using an image in WMS is to properly register it The image itself consists of a two dimensional array of screen pixel colors However the image does not contain information about the real world coordinates which correspond to the extents of the image For this reason the xy pixel locations of the image must be mapped to user specified real world coordinates For example if an image of a 7 5 minute quad sheet is scanned and you wish to use 3 4 1 3 4 2 Map Module 3 43 it in WMS as a background map for digitizing then the xy coordinates of the quad corners must be registered to the xy pixel limits of the TIFF image If this is not done correctly then any points created by on screen digitizing using the background image as a guide will have incorrect coordinates Once an image has been imported and registered the image file name and registration points can be saved as part of the super file and read back in with the model An image file with the name of the TIFF file and the registration points can also be exporte
176. NCHES _ O NK KEY WEST FLORIDA VALUE f qe iy E Ty TA Bas EAS TRA v Rational Method 13 19 2 year 15 minute Precipitation HYDRO 35 13 7 Si m MOJLIIFOWA vaut 77Ada owady Eeri a p SSS ae A TI w ZL et Ke g NS Se 7 A ROK Ko An TY VaR PS A y CHE Ge os ASAS PE da ASAS e AZ a A a a o NES A Eh d nwa van as OT Seg Co TAT ee saHOND fee or e JA das ASC a Yt 0 __ NOLLVLIdID3td JANNIW SL WVIAZ EESE EEA was AER OA y E A eT UG AA AN a oo EA PROBES e So Rao y a LI A HRA abe me co oe Yt iNT f fo At rte nC er EN ATTE poet ORD y Kd Jalen EA A RARA SAA A SA AS E a gt a pas et TD PF ESL EIB ir E a Ed e NE a O EA AA SST Y ORI ROSES GRATO AH is i ee EA Or Sa eS er Dr jx 4 06 4 E o BR q Ml PSA AAA ES Tee ces e 9 ES A ANG TAH A y PTA TWO LTT T va p S Ol HA ELLEELLE A eee Gy RT aia wali W N IRE o EE lt i CD eH bees E sa Y He tation HYDRO 35 ipi te Prec RN DNS et We 2 N ATT Neos lt 8 SAIN VAINOT HOF INMAVINISINATU INVA WEtHOTd LSIM AIA gt AO g SIHINI IEA NOILVLIdIDI8A SLANIW 09 YVIAZ IA spuebey S AS ARO NE Et CAS A y AN ine SK TP KA REGA AAA i SALADA Ne Orhan s E E A S AA PESTE E 45 CANAS e hb 13 20 WMS MINU 2 year 60 13 8 Rational Method 13 21 100
177. NTENT SURFACE_ROUGHNESS NUMSOILS 4 1 Loamy 0 001000 0 010000 0 100000 0 250000 0 100000 1 000000 0 200000 12 Sandy 0 002000 0 010000 0 100000 0 250000 0 100000 1 000000 0 100000 13 silty 0 003000 0 010000 0 100000 0 250000 0 100000 1 000000 0 050000 4 Clay 0 004000 0 010000 0 100000 0 250000 0 100000 1 000000 0 030000 Figure 20 34 Sample CASC2D Attribute Mapping File 20 18 Soil Type Runoff Coefficient Files Like land use soil type coverages grids can be used to map model parameters Tables with corresponding runoff coefficients Green amp Ampt parameters or CASC2D values for different can be mapped The CASC2D tables are the same as defined in the land use section above Runoff coefficient table definitions and examples are given in Figure 20 35 and Figure 20 36 ID1 Soil type description 1 RC1 7 y 7 ID2 Soil type description 2 RC2 IDo Soa type description 3 RCS IDn Soil type description n RCn Figure 20 35 Soil Type Runoff Coefficient File Format 1 Highly impervious 1 0 2 Siiontly pervious 9 13 Moderately pervious 75 4 Highly pervious 45 Figure 20 36 Sample Soil Type Runoff Coefficient File File Formats 20 31 Green amp Ampt mapping file definitions and an example are given in Figure 20 37 and Figure 20 38 Soil type description 1 XKSAT1 RTIMP1 PCTEFFECTIVEl1 Soil type description 2 XKSAT2 RTIMP2 PCTEFFECTIVE2 Soil type description 3 XKSAT3
178. NUMDATA 4 byte integer The number of data values that will be listed per N 0 W PD 00 time step This number should correspond to the number of vertices nodes cell centers cell centered grid cell corners mesh centered grid or Wee A nn scatter points 180 NUMCELLS 4 byte integer This number should correspond to the number of elements meshes or the number of cells mesh centered grids Value is ignored for other object types 190 NAME 40 bytes The name of the dataset Use one character per byte Mark the end of the string with the O Po arate ISTAT SFLG integer 0 or 1 Indicates whether or not status flags will be included in the file File Formats 20 17 statflag1 SFLG integer Status flag 0 or 1 for node 1 statflag2 SFLG integer Status flag 0 or 1 for node 2 Figure 20 15 The Binary Scalar or Vector Data Set File Format The cards in the binary data set file are as follows Card Type VERSION Card ID 3000 Description File type identifier Nofields Required YES eee Card Type OBJTYPE Card ID 100 Description Identifies the type of objects that the data sets in the file are associated with Required YES If card does not exist the file can only be read through the Data Browser The data sets would then be assigned to the objects corresponding to the active Field Variable Size Value Descrip
179. OCK VOTU OS FE o o E T T OO 6 11 030 Sean VETOES ai E T A E ue eee 6 12 dz Remove Duplicate Seni dos a le elo da do lo 6 12 00 TRIANGULA TON a SA A AA E racket amae 6 12 OOT Eto CS AA LU II 6 13 OO TNO UL OTC earn se essa tah ea Sooth seh ces ates sank Aa og Ao 6 14 0053 UVA TTI icc asin 6 14 OOA MEEME TUNS lt SNS A AA wee ueena bil A EEE E 6 15 7 TRE AIRINGS vis iia coloca 6 16 ODA BLE Me OT ONS lt A A A A aida 6 16 00 BOUNDARY TRIANGLES e a AE 6 17 OO DENE DB ON ATAR EOS DAA A ENE 6 17 OZ LCP AO i n 6 18 69 AUTOMATED TEN EDING irr ara E os 6 18 O91 Intermpolauna Plat IIS dad De bad 6 19 O92 AMONIO IAN CIO dd AAA A ORAR 6 19 OLI A a Ne is Ah ie tesa ee eee heels inate 6 20 ODA TECNA TIN O nae A Oe aed RR 6 20 RI LATE MAPEO eal tnt ete stadia Ak Nal ti aan do 6 23 G10 DEN BOUNDARY gt BOLY GONG Bis E erases ie IAS 6 23 Gol EN eS SCATIER POINTS Susto part 6 24 AZ TENDEDERO 6 24 DRAINAGE TINS ciao a ae a a e eaa Sae EE Ea EE 7 1 Tel INIRODUCTION dadas 7 1 T2 OOP ALLEL UD 0 NS 7 2 71 DRAINAGE DISPLAY OPTIONS 0 boven vancay sani tacbsbiveveav osens aa ara aaa 7 2 O A A II E 7 3 PEI OTN ee ee O A A EOS CN REET NTE St ar eee ae ere 7 3 MES OFCA IN CLWOTKS A A e od O 7 3 Te APEC OE is 7 3 POT OS CIV OI I ccc create sree Netto oe acct ates eluate aa te lee esos ps ote pk oe nce cca een mE pe Rola aR 7 3 IET O01 PERM Re CARER ERE AOE MTN A db MTs 7 3 LIE AMESU T ONEONE AAA AS AA AA A A A NEN di 7 4 IO BaS EC CHITOU
180. Options in the Display menu can be used to control how the contours look 1 e color filled isolines etc Stage is defined as the depth of water at a given location on a TIN Depths are represented numerically as absolute values above the present Z value of any vertex on a TIN For example a stage value of 3 30 would indicate that the water level would be found 3 30 feet above the elevation of that point However when reading stage values from a file or writing them to a file it is possible to represent the stage values as water surface elevations Water surface elevations are the numerical sum of the elevation and the stage value at a TIN vertex By default all vertices have a stage value that is equivalent to unknown rather than a value of zero which is a valid stage Stage values are classified by WMS as either fixed or interpolated Fixed stage values are those read from a stage data file or entered interactively by the user Interpolated stage values are those that are calculated between fixed stage values along stream segments Read Stage When this command is selected from the Flood menu a file browser is available to find and retrieve the desired flood stage file The selected file will be opened and read by WMS If the specified file is not a stage file WMS will display an error message The format of the stage file 1s defined in Appendix A Stage values are preserved if multiple stage files are read in Only those vertice
181. Other operations such as drainage data computation require that the active coverage be the drainage coverage Whenever you select a coverage from the combo box it becomes active and is equivalent to opening the Coverages dialog from the Feature Objects menu and setting one of the available coverages to be active The Data set selection combo box allows you to change the currently active data sets In the current version of WMS data sets are applicable only for scatter points and grids Coordinate Edit Boxes The coordinate edit boxes are on the bottom of the Edit Window The first three edit fields are used to edit the coordinates of a selected TIN vertex feature point or scatter point Coordinates are changed by typing in new values and hitting the ENTER or TAB key The fourth edit box is used to edit dataset values of selected scatter points Help Strip The Help Strip is at the bottom of the WMS application window and is used for user prompts and to display context sensitive help messages Some commands require selection in the middle of execution at these times WMS rings a bell General Tools 2 7 and a prompt appears in the Help Strip with specific instructions Once the instructions have been completed the prompt message is removed Context sensitive help messages appear in the Help Strip as the cursor is moved over tools macros menu items or dialog items The column of numbers that appear at the end of the Help Strip are use
182. PF landuse table cos SCS landuze table Figure 2 3 Save Files Dialog 2 10 WMS 2 8 5 2 8 6 Save Current Settings The Save Current Settings command is used to save the current display settings of the program display options defaults etc to a default settings file WMS opens the default settings file each time it is launched and initializes the settings to the defaults stored in the file A local copy specific to a project of these settings can be saved and then opened within a super file as well Import File Several different file types can be imported into WMS for use in creation of feature objects grids and TINs These files not native to WMS can be opened using the Import command in the File menu The dialog shown in Figure 2 4 is used to specify which file is to be imported and the following paragraphs give a brief description of the different files and what they can be used for Import File Shape file Feature objects a Shape file gt Feature objects cl ArcView MS Superfile gt WMS Data USGS DEM DEM 4rc lnto grid gt DEM GRASS grid DEM DTELR grid DEM T Figure 2 4 Import Dialog ARC INFO Arc View Shape Files ARC INFO or ArcView shape files provide the easiest method to import GIS data into WMS Unfortunately the shape file format is extremely redundant meaning that points or lines that are shared by lines or polygons are multiply defined Therefor
183. RIAL INLET E MANNING INLET n TYPE EF _ ELEVATIG HABLE E Figure 15 22 Computations for Minimizing Culvert Width Multiple Culvert Analysis and Overtopping HY8 will also allow you to compute the hydraulics of multiple culverts When choosing the Compute button with this option specified HY8 determines the amount of discharge through each of the culverts as well as the discharge overtopping the roadway When computing with the multiple culvert option you will see the DOS window shown in Figure 15 23 In order for the balance exe program to finish its computations you must select the Enter key Once balance completes the computations you can view the full report on the screen or sent to a text file or the printer by selecting the R key as directed by the menu at the bottom of the calculations DOS window You can also get to the report after dismissing the balance DOS window by selecting the View Report button from the main dialog Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 49 18 3 HY8 VERSION 6 8 3 4 88 4 46 4 48 4 48 4 48 4 88 4 88 4 48 4 48 4 48 4 48 i PRESS lt P gt PLOT RATING CURUES 437 SELECT CULUERTS TO PLOT lt R gt PRINT REPORT lt ENTER gt DISPLAY QUERTOPPING lt ESC gt RETURN TO OPTIONS MENU lt H gt DISPLAY Ho AND OPTIONS 4 5 6 Figure 15 23 HY8 Balance Run Report Dialog DISCHARGE ROADWAY 14 59 148 157 2 A H H H H A A H H H See eee See A A A A E L L L L L L
184. Regression EQUATIONS eiii 14 3 14 2 6 Gunea Custom DEIN CO EQUINA AE 14 5 14 2 7 Computne Peak DISCHOTOCS as 14 5 AS SAVING AND RESTORING A SIMULATION oc 14 6 t44 MAXIMUM PEQOD REGION BOUNDARIES mireasa honnie eea eA E tetdgameedshapsaule cane nchaneatudcnaue 14 6 15 HYDROLOGIC HYDRAULIC CALCULATORS e eeseeccccsssssseccccceccccccccssosssescccccceccccssssssssssececeecosso 15 1 ISLE INIRODUCTON id da E akers ences aoe 15 1 15 2 COMPUTING SCS CURVE NUMBERS RUNOFF COEFFICIENTS AND GREEN amp AMPT INFILTRATION PARAME ELR IA EEE wa ese sete oa A A E E E 15 1 TA COMPO ONM CLOG rana irae T EE EE OET 15 3 L522 A PR nA a aE Eee i ee Pe ee Pe 15 4 15 2 3 LOME U SO EEEE AE O 15 4 15 2 4 COMPUT ALLO OP Er AAA A N eae ow ee dat alas Ain 15 4 15 235 MAPLE ASA AAA 15 4 15 3 COMPUTING TRAVEL TIMES LAG AND TIME OF CONCENTRATION cocccccnnccnnonoccnnonaccnnnnanononiccnnonanoss 15 5 15 3 1 Computing Travel Times from Basin Data occccoonnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonanoncnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnos 15 6 15 3 2 Computing Travel Times from Map DatQ ooocccocnnnnnonannncnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnn nn nn nnnnancnnnnnnnnnns 15 24 ISA A cappio on aione oaa aio ain otai 15 34 5r WERS escore a ee eae e a E eanies 15 35 150 DETENTION BASIN Sernam a ae e A a a a A 15 36 15 6 1 NOTO SLOAN A ANA A AAA AAA A 15 38 15 6 2 UA O CIID AA o O A 15 38 15 6 3 Elevation Discharge RECTORA aida 15 39 157 CUELVERTANAL SIS TT oa 15 40 1D fo HYS General Specifi
185. S PERCRT Percolation rate cfs acre cu m sec acre for wetted surface area of channel This option is used in conjunction with storage routing and requires SA or SV SE records to be defined 10 30 WMS e ELVINV Average invert elevation of channel L used to compute flow surface area for PERCRT 10 11 8 Direct Input Hydrographs QI Hydrographs can be input directly using the QI record and then routed downstream using the different routing options To do this select the Direct Input Hydrograph option and define the QI record using the XY Series Editor 10 11 9 Observed Hydrograph QO This record is used to input an observed hydrograph for an optimization job OR record A QO hydrograph can be used in conjunction with a QI and QP hydrograph to optimize routing parameters This hydrograph can be input by selecting the check box and then defining the hydrograph using the XY Series Editor 10 11 10 Pattern Hydrograph QP This option is used to input a pattern hydrograph for an optimization job OR record A QP hydrograph can be used in conjunction with a QI and QO hydrograph to optimize routing parameters This hydrograph can be input by selecting the check box and then defining the hydrograph using the XY Series Editor 10 12 Reservoirs Reservoirs in HEC 1 can be defined in few different ways depending on the storage routing techniques that need to be modeled The first tutorial on creating topologic trees outlines the di
186. S starts up it will first look for the resource files in the specified resources directory If they are not found there it will look for them in the current working directory If the resource files still are not located WMS will use the default values for the information contained in the resource files Installation Note If the wMSPASS file is not found WMS will start up as an Evaluation Copy The WMS Soript FG It is often more convenient to use the file to launch the program than to type the path name to the WMS executable and resources directory The script file contains the exact command line that you would use to launch the program For example the WMS executable and resource files may be located in a directory named APPS WMS To create a script file to launch the WMS application in that directory you would do the following e Create a file in the directory that you intend to run WMS from or in the path specified in your CSHRC file using a text editor The name of the file will be the command you will use to launch WMS The following line would be entered in the file APPS WMS WMS APPS WMS e The file APPS WMS WMS is the WMS executable and the path APPS WMS represents the path name to the resources directory In this case both WMS and the resources are located in the same directory e After saving the file execute privileges will need to be given to the script file If the file name is WMS you would enter this n
187. S will use default colors and fonts To utilize the fonts and colors specified in the WMS resource files the path name to where these files are located should be used as the second argument when launching the program You may want to refer to the section titled The WMS Resources Directory You should also ensure that the user has read privileges on the resource files contained in the resources directory and that the path specified in the script file is the correct path to the directory e WMS comes up as an Evaluation Copy even though you have registered WMS for this computer WMS will come up as an Evaluation Copy only if the WMS password file does not exist or an incorrect password is defined in the file Check that the file WMSPASS exists in either the directory you started WMS from the current working directory or the resources directory You may want to refer to the section titled The WMS Resources Directory WMS Installation Guide You should also ensure that the WMSPASS file has read privileges for the user that is running WMS WMS must be run from the same computer that the program was originally registered for If the WMSPASS file has been deleted or you intend to use WMS on another computer please contact BOSS International for an updated password No additional fee will be charged provided WMS will be run on only one computer at a time Passwords for additional computers will be subject to additional licensing fees
188. SETUPA E ASC2D MODEL caccssansaseleocendessnasanata A EAA S NONA 19 1 TOS OOO PA LETTER E 19 2 19 4 READING AND WRITING CASC2D PROJECT FILES oooocccnnnoccnnnonccnnnnncnnnnnconononccnnnnnonnnnnrononnnccnnnanononnnos 19 2 19 4 1 DIVINE GO CAS C ZDT TOET rra E AAA AAA AA AA AE 19 3 19 4 2 Reddit CAS CLIO OE AE A E tla tea A eden keaeotalees 19 4 19 5 CREATING A GRD ie ais e e ld scene io e ewe 19 4 Table of Contents xiii 19 5 1 Manually Creatine Cd c 19 5 19 5 2 Creating ACTA from Teatre DOCS a da 19 5 19 5 3 IMPOTNREACOLS Based A adenda 19 6 196 JOB CONTROL PARAMETERS rn nidos 19 6 19 6 1 mitalin CASC2D DGG a setae hee ta ae io 19 7 19 6 2 COMPUTO TIMES RAE ARAS AA N 19 7 19 6 3 AA E A Nase Nhe A O A ae EEE 19 7 19 6 4 Outlet Cela ORTO cages cite Dev cabia Reena bia sea anea tate a teens 19 7 19 6 5 Channel Romine POTRERO 19 7 19 6 6 A A O 19 8 LEE ERECTA TON correo T 19 8 19 7 1 VOUT AO Maa 19 9 19 7 2 COA E T T T aaa ee 19 9 19 5 EDITINGCASCZO MAPS a a ae ee 19 10 19 8 1 INP SG MOP EE liste eater eget eee o 19 10 19 8 2 TOV ETON IVI ected DA A a Tes eens ea 19 10 19 8 3 ASS ONIN d Constant to the MOD AAA 19 1 19 8 4 Creatine a Dala rn MM Gesu dans A REG A Cea 19 11 19 8 5 Creating GMap roma Dot 19 11 19 8 6 IROCIOSS TUCO ION cas ad AS A AA AER 19 11 19 9 TOVERLAND REOWPROPER TES naa 19 12 19 00 INHETRATION PROPERTIES O aida 19 13 AL lt BAPOTRAN SORA ON a de a E a OS 19 14 19 12 EDITING MAP ATIRBUTES a iy aehes on
189. Stagger RT Parameters used to define the Straddler Stagger or Tatum routing method are defined below HEC 1 Interface 10 29 NSTPS Should be one for Straddler Stagger method or integer number of routing steps to be used for Tatum method NSTDL Integer number of intervals hydrograph is to be lagged in the Straddler Stagger method or 0 if using Tatum method LAG Integer number of ordinates to be averaged in the Straddler Stagger method or 2 if using Tatum method 10 11 6 Kinematic Wave RK and Muskingum Cunge RD 10 11 7 The Kinematic wave and Muskingum Cunge are defined with essentially the same parameters A brief description follows L Channel length S Channel slope N Manning s roughness Shape Characteristic channel shape WD Base width of the channel Z Side slope of channel If the Muskingum Cunge method is selected define the channel geometry using an eight point cross section by specifying the appropriate radio button and selecting the Define RC Record button Channel Losses RT Constant channel losses may be defined by defining values for the RL record These parameters include the following QLOSS Constant channel loss in entire routing in cfs cms This value is subtracted from every ordinate of the inflow hydrograph CLOSS Ratio of remaining flow after QLOSS which is lost for entire routing After subtracting QLOSS each inflow hydrograph ordinate is multiplied by 1 CLOS
190. Straddler Stagger rOUtIN8 ooooooonnnncncnnnnnnnnnnns 10 28 streams PLACA idad 7 6 ARA otesiceaeiee ieetelosanees 7 8 creano OD ATC Screg 3 33 creating from triangle edges ooooocommm 7 7 CEM MILL Es A st Weincdd aeons 7 7 delete alla 7 8 A Adteea oachcs 7 8 CIS PA VANS onsa a Ea 7 3 displayine prole 7 8 O O 7 8 Maida 20 25 importing digitized oocooccnnncccccoonnnnanaaannnnnnns 2 14 e e po 15 13 node locat OM as oi 3 27 TOORCCE AICS sahacei a 3 28 A A 15 13 BOG OA PE O notdaneates aa Garcuaeeinas 8 6 A 7 7 string A PEET T EE N E 6 2 SUDNI d Cerna E 6 14 SU WGI V1STOM o 6 14 subdivision TACO 6 19 super file MA es aetect eaten eae 2 8 2 9 20 2 A A N 16 9 swap edge correcting split flow vertices c ooo mmmmmoo 7 11 SWAP dee nia 6 3 AUCOMIALICA Ly a 6 23 symbol 2D SCAtler DOM ados 18 3 table OL COMER sosai 1 tabular datada Oi 2 19 LAPE2Z Ma aa 9 6 20 31 EOD U aa 10 23 Thiessen polygon cccseceeeeeeeeeees 10 32 18 15 TIFF EDOT nia a mane eesesu 2 22 MADON sessa dd 2 20 Umage Sna taacacalden demo stecaacoeaas 3 42 CME ANCHO ment ii 11 3 24 COMPU E iana a 15 5 Fort Bend County equation 15 23 Kerby equations 15 22 Kirpich equal Md 15 22 Ramser equation ccccccccccnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 15 23 N 10 4 A aA 6 1 IBOUNG ALY sacs tada riandt 6 10 6 17 A ana E EEA 6 16 converting to DEM e 6 24 converting to feature Objects
191. T carcel Figure 19 2 CASC2D Job Control Dialog 19 6 1 19 6 2 19 6 3 19 6 4 19 6 5 CASC2D Interface 19 7 Initializing CASC2D Data Because of the numerous parameters available for each grid cell the amount of memory for a large grid can become large For this reason and because grids have multiple uses within WMS computer memory for CASC2D parameters is not created until a CASC2D simulation is initialized This is done by selecting the Initialize CASC2D button at the top of the Job Control dialog The Delete CASC2D Data button can be used to free up the memory required for setting up CASC2D parameters Until CASC2D data is initialized all other options and menus are dimmed Computation Time The total time and time step for the model computation can be specified from this dialog The total time should be specified in minutes and the time step in seconds Units The units flag is used to specify whether the grid size and elevations are in metric or SI units CASC2D requires that all data be entered in metric units The one exception is the grid origin and cell size values and the elevations If the English units toggle box is checked the grid size and elevation values are converted from feet to meters No scaling is done for the other input parameters of CASC2D Outlet Cell Information In the absence of a stream channel the outlet grid cell must be identified by it s I and J index so that a runoff hydrograph
192. TIN usuarias tucan 2 21 Dasin ALEIDULES corporacions 2 21 ALANS EL aer dhe sosseososateuine ea 16 3 DEG APS tere erin AN 2 22 A 2 22 L AS AEE AE AAAS S AE eaten 16 10 HECH Tile oauan a a 10 34 St A A E EA 8 6 MME a E 2 22 TPR ZO e saai 11 16 NS aeosensaneceanete 16 12 AY SOTOS asaan ai aa a 21 2 extrapola oO Hisor E 18 5 deraut Vale sirra r 18 5 inverse distance weighted cccccceeees 18 6 natural neighbor a 18 18 Talse dI e eE 6 23 feature objects Ai C n a os eae cos ose 3 4 OVS AM E E E E EA E ET 3 27 COMMMANG S vorranno aE 3 26 l 6 WMS COV TIO OS upara 3 5 CLE ANS Oaa A O N 3 8 5 3 creating finite difference gridS 3 3 Creatine TIN Suns 3 3 creating watershed modelSs oooo oo 3 2 A A A 3 2 AAA lai Sante alate heats 3 35 display ODIOS 3 25 PP O E E 3 4 POS e naan nena eae onenan eeeedanes 3 4 O 3 5 WY DCS suistantsa dea cunscerncwdes ETE TT 3 3 A O teateee 3 4 feature points A tiented natant 3 35 feature points nodes Vvertices OU DE AA OO O en 3 36 FHWA travel time equations oocccccccnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnno 15 28 feld dati neriie 16 9 file PADES ae PEEN E EA E E ar 20 8 2D scatter pOlMt oooccccnncnnn 16 3 18 2 20 10 ARGINFO ST die is 20 20 AutoCad stream oooooooooooocccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnos 20 26 A A lu wesiaveemengereceeta aes 16 3 cio 20 1 CASC DMAP zesinn 20 20 CASC2D Projet aseado 19 2 CASC2D soils table o ooommmmmmmm
193. The Plot Macros The buttons to the lower left of the plot window in the XY Series Editor are used to pan the view in plot window up down left or right After altering the view using either the Pan buttons or the Zoom tool the curve can be centered in the plot window by selecting the Frame button beneath the plot window The buttons to the upper right of the plot window are to quickly create curves using analytic functions Each button brings up a dialog that allows the parameters of a function ex sine curve to be specified from which a series of xy points are created 21 5 Defining A Rainfall Series PI PC As mentioned previously PI and PC cards are defined from the gage and precipitation dialogs If the XY Series Editor is invoked from either of these dialogs any rainfall series already defined in this session will be displayed in the list box If itis the first time the editor has been used in this session or if a series has not been assigned to the given gage precipitation record an empty default series will be active and ready for definition If the gage precipitation record already has a series assigned to it that series will be the current or active series when the editor is invoked For all rainfall series the X field represents time and will be fixed The starting time and interval can be set using the XY options as described above The Y field represents either the incremental or the cumulative rainfall for the PI or PC ca
194. The enclosing triangle methods are faster than the convex hull method but the convex hull method is the most robust The enclosing triangle methods may not triangulate all of the points if the points are grouped in a long thin line or row The triangulation method can be specified by selecting Triangulation Options from the TINs menu This dialog also allows the display of the triangulation process to be turned off and on It is often informative to display the triangulation process as it proceeds However there is a significant increase in the overall time to complete the triangulation when the display is on 6 14 WMS 6 6 2 6 6 3 Triangulate Vertices can be triangulated using the currently selected triangulation algorithm by selecting the Triangulate command from the TINs menu It is important to recognize that the Delauney triangulation is not necessarily the best for performing drainage delineation because it does not insure that important linear features such as streams and ridges will be honored in the TIN as triangle edges For this reason you should always use a TIN triangulated in this fashion as a background elevation source for creating a new TIN from a conceptual model of feature objects as described in section 3 2 8 Subdivide TIN The density of a TIN can be increased using the Uniformly Subdivide TIN command in the TIN menu You will be prompted for a subdivision factor This factor is then used to uniformly subdivid
195. Vnumdata Vnumdata Ynumdata Repeat TS card for each time step ENDDS End of data set Repeat BEGSCL and BEGVEC sequences for each data set DATASET File type identifier OBJTYPE type Type of object data set is associated with BEGSCL Beginning of scalar data set OBJID id Object id IND numdata Number of data values INC numcells Number of cells or elements NAME name Data set name ITS istat time Time step of the following data Stati Status flags stat P E statnumcells val Scalar data values valo fia Ivalnumdata Repeat TS card for each time step ENDDS End of data set BEGVEC Beginning of vector dataset VECTYPE type Vector at node gridnode or element cell OBJID id ObBJece id y IND numdata Number of data values INC numcells Number of cells or elements NAME name Data set name ITS istat time Time step of the following data stati Status flags stat statnumcells Figure 20 13 ASCII Data Set File Format File Formats 20 13 DATASET OBJTYPE grid2d BEGSCL OBJID 27211 IND 8 INC 8 NAME trichloroethylene TS 1 1 00000000e 00 10 00000000e 00 10 00000000e 00 10 00000000e 00 13 24000000e 00 4 39000000e 00 2 96000000e 00 17 48000000e 00 10 00000000e 00 ENDDS
196. WED Tha pal Tarti EMED PPG PHAT Precip asas 5551 LULE LO LH LS 211 Merhod Jaca anaa ad Dern MEL Cane dd CAE HD ba Sra Had Dita DT IMOGOA EM ED HEC Fis Uupa gt eked bo oc _ Cinta Job Corni Cane Dapy ba Cipin Figure 10 4 Edit HEC 1 Parameters Dialog 10 10 WMS The remaining sections in this chapter cover the attributes which can be edited from each of the buttons in the Edit HEC 1 Parameters Dialog 10 5 Output Control KO 10 5 1 10 5 2 For each hydrograph station basin hydrographs combined hydrographs and routed hydrographs different output controls can be specified This dialog is accessed by selecting the Output Control dialog button from the Edit HEC Parameters dialog Entries which can be defined in this dialog are described below HEC 1 Output Control Upper Confluence Hew Delete Upper Confluence Output Control K0 Plotting Scale field 3 othng scale he Print Control feld 1 Hidrograph Control field E Use 10 record 0 jo o00 TAPEZ2 file 22 Plot Control field 2 Unit 7 Control field 4 Use IO record 0 No C Yes Figure 10 5 HEC 1 Output Control Dialog Routed and Combined Hydrographs at Outlets In WMS an outlet point is used to represent locations where hydrographs are both combined and then routed Therefore if an outlet is selected before choosing the Output Control dialog a radio group at the top of the dialog appears so that you
197. a 9 7 ATMA DCS PEPE A A EEN E E 3 43 PEDONE cineal musa secnaraetees 2 22 2 24 A E E E 6 4 O 9 2 A cui AA 6 10 displaying TOW Paths versidad lcd 7 5 diversion CRC AUING seres Sissies A tana 10 30 detininno TREO erase 11 14 E EE 10 31 O 9 2 diversions addins to ess io 9 5 TELS VINO papada 9 6 DEGC sa errr seer 2 14 dragging LOSEIECE MANO LES nd 6 17 drainage BIC OY De A o O RO POE 3 12 display Options stas 7 2 point NOdG LV Pe icine une 3 12 POLY SOM PES aida 3 13 drainage analysis with DEMS 0cceeees 5 9 drainage distancia 6 4 dramase OPE 6 4 drawino del td cdi 3 41 drawing grid creating DOTES Sd 3 8 drawine Ob ect ata ido 3 39 Greate GUipSe chins EAS 3 39 eroate ME ic 3 39 create TEClANG enean 3 39 A LOX Lasse sa yiaca eacen teen tate aa arama eeeene ee 3 39 drawing dept da 3 41 A A A 3 40 line AU OULES Vat ad 3 41 move to Dark cda 3 42 MOVE LO TOM dos 3 42 TNO MVS ai 3 40 rectangle and oval attributes o 3 41 SA RO nr 3 40 SIUC HAO WA saos is 3 42 SMUG UD aaa aa 3 42 tex att DUTOS iunea ads 3 40 AN 3 39 duplicate Venice did 6 12 DXF A 2 22 A A a 2 20 O ene larnodatd eased sewascesdats 3 47 converting to feature Objects 3 48 converting to TINS ceessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 3 49 deletine OD ec 3 48 display OPUS di 3 47 ADONIS ii 3 48 edit ANCONS 10 31 a e E EE EE E TEE E AE ET ET 10 32 A E E 8 5 A O 6 3 TINS automatically
198. a Set Files Data sets can be stored to either ASCII or binary files Compared to ASCII files binary files require less memory and can be imported to WMS more quickly The disadvantages of binary files are that they are not as portable and they cannot be viewed with a text editor The binary data set file format is shown in Figure 20 15 The binary format is patterned after the ASCII format in that the data are grouped into cards However the cards are identified by a number rather than a card title version 4 byte integer The GMS binary data set file format version Po tue 30002 100 objecttype 4 byte integer Identifies the type of objects that the data sets in the file are associated with Options are as follows 1 TINs Boreholes 2D meshes 2D grids 2D scatter points 3D meshes 3D grids 3D scatter points 110 SFLT 4 byte integer The number of bytes that will be used in the remainder of the file for each floating point value 4 8 or 16 The number of bytes that will be used in the remainder of the file for status flags Marks the beginning of a set of cards defining a 140 BEGVEC scalar or vector data set 150 VECTYPE 4 byte integer 0 or 1 In the case of vector data set files indicates whether the vectors will be applied at the nodes gridnodes or the elements cells 160 OBJID 4 byte integer The id of the associated object Value is ignored for grids and meshes 170
199. a button accesses the dialog that allows you to combine arcs within the currently selected basin to compute a time of concentration A description of the time computation coverage can be found in section 3 2 6 and it s use is described in more detail in section 15 3 4 Finally the kinematic wave equation can be used from within the IDF curves dialog See section 13 3 3 below for more information on this equation and how it is used in WMS Editing Outlet Data Some of the information for outlet points is automatically determined from the contributing area upstream while other parameters are entered separately The 13 6 WMS 13 3 3 area is determined by summing the area of all upstream sub basins The runoff coefficient 1s computed from the upstream basins using the area weighted equation shown below CouTLET a is nos arate 13 2 where Cooner The runoff coefficient for the outlet Cm The runoff coefficient for the i upstream basin Ai The area of the i upstream basin A The total upstream area at the outlet confluence The time of concentration is determined by computing the longest combination of upstream time of concentration and channel travel time to the given outlet point For example if a given outlet point had two contributing sub basins the time of concentration for the outlet would be the longest time of concentration of the two upstream sub basins If there were other outlets upstream of the given outlet the
200. a hydraulic model such as WSPRO or HEC RAS but cross sections can be used to compute normal depth for a given flowrate or flowrate for a given depth in the channel calculator see section 15 4 They can also be exported into a space delimited file and then viewed in a spreadsheet application or copied 3 20 WMS into a hydraulic model file While the primary use of the cross section coverage is to develop cross sections they can be used to view the profile of any polyline i e stream ridge etc on a TIN or DEM Cross section coverages are made up of only arcs nodal and polygonal attributes cannot be defined However the placement of vertices along the arc is important since WMS will interpolate an elevation for the cross section at each vertex If you want to add more detail to the cross section after it has been created you can use the add vertex tool Z to place new vertices on the cross section at locations that you wish to interpolate an elevation Once the cross section is created you can view the station elevation information along with a profile plot in the Cross Section Editor see Figure 3 11 by selecting the arc and choosing the Attributes command from the Feature Objects menu or by double clicking on the arc when the select arc tool is active Cross Section Editor Cross section name Xsection A 23 2 Ed eel pay 10 Station Elevation frio2 faost1e3 panenn a 643 420 4022 616 DU 392130 4014 608 oe
201. a lot of detail for a part of your project such as a roadway profile and wish to combine that with a TIN derived from a DEM of the surrounding area To do this you would first make sure that the TIN representing the background or surrounding area 1s the active TIN Next you would select the TIN derived from the detailed survey or other data You then choose the Merge to Active command Figure 6 5 illustrates this process ADEIT AP Nal ve eet IRIS HAS KT SNE Figure 6 5 TIN Merge Results DOIEN 6 16 WMS The following rules are adhered to when merging a selected TIN to the active TIN e The selected TIN is always merged into the active TIN and overwrites any overlapping data In other words triangles and vertices in the active TIN that are overlapped by the selected TIN are deleted e All triangle edges in the selected TIN are preserved when merged into the active TIN e If the selected TIN overlaps any stream vertices on the active TIN the stream will be split The stream will be cutoff wherever it enters the TIN selected for merging and begin again upstream where it exits e Drainage data in the selected TIN that overlaps the active TIN will be lost 6 7 Breaklines 6 7 1 A breakline is a feature line or polyline representing a stream channel ridge or some other feature that you wish to preserve in a TIN In other words a breakline is a series of edges that the triangles should conform to as shown in
202. a of flow by the top width of the water surface Besides the ability to analyze the hydraulic properties of channels results can be used to perform basic flood plain delineation If you have computed flowrates from one of the supported hydrologic models you can estimate stage or water surface elevation using the channel calculator These values can then be defined at stream node locations and used as part of the flood plain delineation tools found in chapter 8 Of course most studies would require a more complete hydraulic analysis using either a 1D or 2D modeling approach such as can be done in the Surface water Modeling System SMS Head or flow over a weir can be determined using the Weir Calculations dialog Figure 15 10 If flow is to be calculated then head over the weir must be entered as an input If head is to be computed then a flow rate must be entered as input The weir calculator uses the standard equation for computing flow over a weir If a hydrograph has been computed using one of the supported hydrologic model the peak flow for the hydrograph will be used as the default flow value if the hydrograph is selected prior to opening the dialog 15 36 WMS Weir Calculations El Weir type Calculate flow Cipolletti v 1 500 Head O Calculate head 4 000 Weir length Sada Weir flow 3 367 Weir Coefficient mes Figure 15 10 Weir Calculations Dialog Selection of one of the predefined weir types automatically
203. a watershed with multiple sub basins you must define the time of travel from one outlet junction to the next The travel time for an outlet is defined by selecting the outlet and then entering the appropriate travel time You may wish to use a time computation arc to compute the travel time see section 15 3 123 Using the WMS Interface to Run TR 55 Simulations Once all of the input necessary to run a TR 55 simulation is defined peak flow and hydrograph computations are made using the dialog shown in Figure 12 1 TR 55 Interface 12 3 The first time you select the TR 55 data window lists the remaining information that must be entered before a peak flow 1s calculated Once all of the items listed in this window are entered WMS performs the calculation for peak discharge and displays the result in the same data window Additional information help about any line selected in the TR 55 data window is displayed in the 7R 55 help window In Figure 12 1 the help shows the equation for the peak discharge in TR 55 selected line in the data window TR 55 Initialize TR 55 data Delete TR 55 data TR 55 data window click to get help Warnings for basin Dryck No warnings were detected in this basin Computations for basin Drycrk Peak discharge p 6 207 cubic feet per second Graphical peak dischargetabular hyrdograph data Current basin name Drycrk Compute Tc Basin Data Time of concentration 0 250 Compute Tit klap
204. ace delimited in order for WMS to import it Export File The Export File command is used to export objects from WMS to files that can be used with other applications A number of popular file formats are supported Once one of the formats is selected and the OK button is selected you choose a name for the file using the standard file browser General Tools 2 21 Export Options Feature object polygons Shapetile WMS Data gt ArcViewhWMS Superfic I DEM Arcelnto Grid DEM GRASS Grid DF Wector Data TIFF Image Data W S Tin gt ArcInfo Tin Figure 2 9 Export Dialog Feature objects ArcView requires that polygons lines arcs and points be defined in separate layers or themes Therefore you must export each of these data types in WMS to separate shape files Selecting the appropriate feature object export option polygons arcs or points does this If you want to export outlets streams and basins together you can save them to an ArcView WMS Superfile However in order to read them in together in ArcView you will need the WMSHydro extension for ArcView DEM gt ARC INFO Grid This option saves the currently defined DEM to an ARC INFO ASCII grid file It can then be imported into ARC INFO or ArcView with spatial analyst DEM gt GRASS Grid This option saves the currently defined DEM to a GRASS grid file It can then be imported into GRASS WMS TIN gt ARC INFO TIN A TIN in WMS
205. age When a gage is selected from the list its values are copied into the appropriate fields for editing When the New button is chosen a new gage is created with default values If the Copy button is chosen a new gage is created with the values of the currently selected gage The Delete button can be used to remove the currently selected gage HEC 1 Interface 10 33 HEC 1 Gages Vi est Mame Mer Copy Delete M Define rain gage location 468237000 ka 2458764 T Lat Lon To UTM Calculator Gage Type W Storm total station la 800 Precipitation _ Temporal distribution station Meine Seres ji Day En Year 1 Month Cancel Figure 10 15 HEC 1 Gage Dialog 10 14 2 The Gage Position If a terrain model is being used then the X and Y position in a consistent coordinate frame needs to be entered in the appropriate edit fields Once there are there are three or more defined gages the Thiessen polygon network can be displayed see the section titled Drainage Display Options in section 7 3 If a terrain model is not being used then the weights must be assigned manually and the position information is not important In this case the Define rain gage location toggle should be turned off The rain gage coverage may also be used to define the position of the gages Each feature point in the rain gage coverage is converted to a gage location and will automatically appear in the HEC Gages dialog See page 3 21 for more i
206. ain This removes the item from the set of selected items without affecting other selected items Multiple objects can also be selected by dragging a box around the items to be selected or by choosing the Select All or Select With Polygon commands from the Edit menu You may clear the selection list at any time by clicking on a portion of the graphics window where no objects exist This effectively clears the selection 2 6 WMS 2 5 4 list because whatever is currently selected becomes unselected and since you click in a location where no objects exist nothing is placed in the selection list Macros Many of the more frequently used menu commands can be accessed through the macro buttons in the lower part of the Tool Palette If your computer screen does not have high resolution a large amount of screen display capabilities all or part of the macro buttons may not be visible In such cases you can still use their equivalent menu commands Some of the commands that have associated macros include display options open file save file refresh and frame They are documented in more detail later in this chapter 2 6 Edit Window 2 6 1 2 6 2 2 6 3 There are two lines in the Edit Window the coverage and data selection boxes and the coordinate edit boxes Coverage and Data Set Selection The coverage selection combo box allows you to quickly specify the active GIS coverage The active coverage is the only one that can be edited
207. all and then click Ok Note that some installation notes may be displayed This information informs you what the installation program will be doing when it installs the application onto your computer hard drive 4 A dialog box will be displayed allowing you to define a destination drive and directory for installing the software Once you have defined a drive and directory click Ok Note that installing the software may take some time A progress bar will be displayed showing you the progress of the installation 5 Once the software has been installed a dialog box will be displayed asking you to install the program license If you received a hardware lock with your shipment the installation program will explain how to install the hardware lock to enable the program If you received a serial numbered license diskette with your shipment then the installation program will explain how to install the software license to enable to program Starting Up WMS Once the installation is complete a new program group will be created on your Windows desktop with the WMS icon contained within it Once you have verified that installation is complete you may start up WMS by double clicking on the WMS icon Troubleshooting Microsoft WIN32s WMS is a 32 bit application that utilizes WIN32s WIN32s is a set of dynamic link libraries DLLs written by Microsoft that allow 32 bit Windows applications to run transparently under Windows 3
208. all the regression equations into a single database file This database file is the basis of the NFF program which can be used to guide the user through the input required to compute peak flows for different frequencies using the database of state by state regression equations The NFF interface in WMS provides a windows based graphical user interface to the same database of regression equations The entire program is run from a single dialog Further if a digital terrain model is available for the study area all of the geometric parameters required for the regression equations are automatically supplied as the individual equations are specified These parameters include area slope elevation distances and others The NFF equations are useful for estimating a peak flood discharge and typical flood hydrograph for a given recurrence interval of an unregulated rural or urban watershed These techniques should be useful to engineers and hydrologists for planning and design purposes A statewide summary along with other technical information can be found in the USGS Water Resources Investigations Report 94 4002 The rest of this chapter describes the interface 14 2 WMS to the NFF program You should refer to the USGS report for technical descriptions on the methods used by NFF for computing peak flows and hydrographs and for state by state information 14 2 NFF Run Simulation Dialog The NFF Run Simulation dialog controls all of the input r
209. alled georeferenced TIFF files If you import a georeferenced TIFF file you will not need to go to the registration window and set up the registration points manually Registering An Image As described above an image must be properly registered in order to be used accurately in combination with other data objects or as a background for on screen digitization Registering an image is accomplished by specifying the real world and corresponding image pixel coordinates of three different points The dialog in Figure 3 29 is used to register an image after it has been imported or it may be used to change or correct the registration points of the current image In this dialog the image is displayed in a graphics window with three X s representing the registration points The real world coordinates x y and image coordinates u v of the three registration points are listed in edit fields below Typically you will know the actual coordinates for a few features on the map The easiest way to register the points is to drag the points using the tools described below to known points on the image this modifies the u v coordinates and then enter the xy or real coordinates of that point Since the image can take a few seconds to update in the register window the Escape key can be used to abort the update after enough of the image is visible to see where you want to move a registration point to The Lat Lon calculator buttons can be used to convert a
210. alysis Tool Palette Since the drainage analysis options are found in the TINs module the tools are the same as defined in the previous chapter Drainage Display Options The display options dialog box Figure 7 1 accessed from the Drainage menu allows control over the display of entities related to drainage analysis Display Options ki Hydrologic Modeling TIH Drainage W Outlets _ Outlet names E iM Stream networks IY Reservoirs IY Reservoirs area label po W Storm gages MN IY Thiessen polygons 57 lf Temporal distribution gages _ Drainage basin boundaries _ Fill drainage basins _ Display basin patterns Bazin centroids _ Flow distance contours Number of tranglesflow path Pipe color Watershed color Downhill overland color Downhill channel color Uphill overland color Uphill channel color 20 Grid Flood Scatter Point DEM Ma Data text color _ Basin ID s _ Basin names _ Basin CN s curve numbers lf Show units Basin areas _ Basin slopes Average overland flow _ North South aspects _ Length _ Perimeter _ Shape factor _ Sinuosity factor _ Mean basin elevation _ Max flow distance _ Max flow slope _ Max stream length Max stream slope _ Distance centroid to stream _ Centroid stream distance _ Centroid stream slope _ Stream segment length __ Stream segment slope Ok Cancel Figure 7 1 Drainage Display Options Dialog 7 3
211. ame at the UNIX command line Customizing the WMS Colors The colors used by the WMS interface are defined in the resource file COLOR BYU This file defines four sets of colors used by the various widgets within the program The colors are specified as RGB s You may want to make a back up of this file before making any modifications Similar to the FONTS INC resource file if the COLORS BYU file is not found WMS will select a set of default colors WMS Installation Guide NY Troubleshooting Ss esse eee The following is a list of common problems which may be encountered upon installing or running WMS e Your system does not respond to the command TAR XV It may be necessary to specify the device name by using the following variation of the TAR command TAR XVF DEVICENAME Ask your system manager for the device name of the tape drive being used e WMS does not run or the message command not found appears on your screen Be sure that the WMS script file has execution x privileges You should also ensure that the directory where WMS or the script file is run from is in your path The path is defined in the CSHRC file located in your home directory e The following font and colors file message s appear Font file missing or contains or bad font loading temp fonts Error opening colors resource file The location of the WMS resource files FONTS INC and COLORS BYU cannot be determined In this case WM
212. an one reach reservoir segment that land segment will be copied to a new segment for each reach reservoir This can result in many new segments if the uci file contains several of these cases Each new segment created will have the exact same attributes as the original and will represent the area of the original segment which contributes to each reach reservoir e WMS currently does not read the COPY or GENER block from the uci file e The SPECIAL ACTIONS block is not yet supported Many of these limitations will be eliminated as development of the HSPF interface continues CHAPTER 2 General Tools 2 1 2 2 Introduction This chapter is designed to familiarize you with the basic operations and layout of the WMS user interface The interface to WMS has been designed in a modular fashion Six separate modules representing different types of data are supported These modules are briefly described in the first chapter As you switch from one module to another a portion of the interface menu commands tools etc changes and a portion of the interface remain unchanged The part that remains the same provides access to general tools that are used by all of the modules These tools are described in this chapter Tools that are specific to a certain module are described in later chapters WMS Screen The WMS screen is divided into five main sections when all windows are displayed the Graphics Window the Hydrograph Window b
213. and peak flow related to basin characteristics Transactions of the American Geophysical Union Vol 33 pp 235 246 Wright McLaughlin Engineers 1975 Urban storm drainage criteria manual Denver Regional Council of Governments Volumes I and I Index 2D grid POUR aeaa A Ea 17 5 bounding 2D scatter point Set 18 19 A ae hattes peed se cgsa Gia iaacctaseamegtdnens 17 2 cellecenter diurna usa 17 1 17 6 contour labels ind 17 3 COMUNA celia 17 5 conversion to other data types oooco 17 7 A cassenate 2 18 17 5 CALA AA EE EE 20 15 display OPUONS laca 17 4 E R A EPE AE E E EE TE 20 8 A gatarsetaa a 17 5 O 17 3 17 4 o dere Wracethtercanonaentee 2 18 Mesh centered cecceccescsssevvevees 17 1 17 6 POS AAA 17 1 2D Grid CAS C2 Daa aoe ene 19 4 2D scatter point aE HD o Y POCOON E O PO ulations E 18 1 bounding glld ccccccncnccnnnnnononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 18 19 EIE E E N 18 1 display OPUONS ea 18 3 ON 18 2 PE Seea E 16 3 18 2 20 10 Hon 2D orid o 17 7 O aaa tiaeens 18 2 TUT Srila dotes 18 3 reading from a file ooooooonnnnnnccnnnnnnnnnnns 18 2 SAVING toa lO is 18 2 SR eae eaten ate taeda 18 2 A E A 18 2 SDO o PA OO Pr EU EOI 18 3 3D grid dal sello lis 20 15 abort UAW UNG idad 2 34 activate DEM points cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 5 active 2D scatter point setia 18 1 18 2 li aa 17 6 EEE e EE EET ETE 18 4 O e N 16 9 KY SCLICS cil oan ctlasen
214. ane defined by the three vertices of a triangle is as follows ARDE CZ Said 18 1 where A B and C and D are computed from the coordinates of the three vertices X y Z Xy pZ amp X y Z A y Zz Z y Z Z y z Z EEE AE AR AE EEEE ET E ET 18 2 B Z X Xx z X x z X x O 18 3 C x y y x y y xy y tir 18 4 D AX By Cz PEE E PE EEN EE AE E E E E E A 18 5 The plane equation can also be written as A B z Y Xx y G SS 18 6 which is the form of the plane equation used to compute the elevation at any point on the triangle Since a TIN only covers the convex hull of a scatter point set extrapolation beyond the convex hull is not possible with the linear interpolation scheme Any points outside the convex hull of the scatter point set are assigned the default extrapolation value entered at the bottom of the Interpolation Options dialog Inverse Distance Weighted Interpolation One of the most commonly used techniques for interpolation of scatter points is inverse distance weighted IDW interpolation Inverse distance weighted methods are based on the assumption that the interpolating surface should be influenced most by the nearby points and less by the more distant points The 18 6 WMS interpolating surface is a weighted average of the scatter points and the weight assigned to each scatter point diminishes as the distance from the interpolation point to the
215. ange Units men Figure 3 3 Coverages Dialog Since multiple coverages may exist for the same model one must be designated as active When new objects are created they are placed in the active coverage Furthermore the active coverage is the only coverage which can be edited 1 e arcs points nodes etc selected and modified A coverage can be activated by double clicking on the name or selecting the name and then the Active button Each time WMS is started a default coverage is created but new coverages can be created using the New button When a new coverage is created it automatically becomes the active coverage An entire coverage can be deleted by selecting the coverage name and then the Delete button Since you may need to change the active coverage frequently and from different modules within WMS a combo box listing the currently defined coverages can be accessed from the edit window the space in the GUI just below the menus You can change the active coverage by selecting it from the drop down combo box without having to access the Coverages dialog A coverage can be either visible or hidden Only the visible coverages are displayed when drawing to the Graphics Window When the coverage is visible a small v is placed to the left of the coverage name in the Coverages dialog The visibility status can be set in one of two ways 1 Clicking on the coverage name and setting the Visible toggle to the desired status
216. are eight neighbors for each point DEM point with the lowest elevation The algorithms typically include functionality for eliminating pits and resolving ambiguities when the lowest elevation is shared by more than one neighboring point The typical steps for using DEMs to develop hydrologic models are 1 Obtain and Import a Digital Elevation Model DEM As mentioned above USGS DEMs can be downloaded from the internet obtained from government agencies universities or private vendors The File Import section 2 8 6 command can be used to import the DEM from one of the supported formats Figure 1 5 shows a contoured DEM after it has been imported 1 8 WMS Figure 1 5 Contoured DEM 2 Import a Flow Direction Grid The flow direction grid can be computed from the active DEM region using a custom version of the TOPAZ model distributed with WMS It can also be created in GRASS ARC INFO the ArcView Spatial Analyst or any other program that supports either ARC INFO ASCII or GRASS ASCII formats section 5 3 3 The flow direction grid is then imported as a DEM point attribute and is used to define the flow regime of the entire domain as illustrated in Figure 1 6 Introduction 1 9 Figure 1 6 Flow Directions for a DEM 4 Compute Flow Accumulations With the flow directions assigned for each DEM point the flow accumulation at each DEM point can be computed section 5 3 4 The flow accumulation for a given DEM point
217. are has tools for creating grids and delineating watersheds using a grid based data structure WMS can import grids from both the ARC INFO and GRASS GIS s The grid cell values should be either on or off 1 or zero representing cells that are inside 1 and outside 0 the watershed boundary In order to establish elevations for the grid cells a separate grid file from the GIS should be exported containing the elevations This grid can then be imported as explained in the section below on editing map parameters from the Edit Map dialogs that comes up from the Overland Flow Properties command 196 Job Control Parameters The Job Control command allows all general run time options for a CASC2D model to be defined These options are saved as part of the project file The dialog used to define these parameters is shown in Figure 19 2 and definitions follow CASC2D Job Control Parameters Ieee EA SiE Delete CASC20 Data Model Computation Channel Routing Parameters Total JUN Ho routing Implicit routing Time fro a Explicit routing Initialize by draining Input Units Initialize by backwater 8 Metric O English Output Units O Metric English Total draining time lo Node length 150 000 ae reia Routing time step li 0 Derivative weight i O00 Cell col 1134 row 35 Friction slope weight 11 000 Minimum Flow 0 000 Slope 5 3858 00 Velocity corection 1 000 Long term Simulation Dutput Control Pat Ratemetets EX
218. are unlocked You may wish to unlock all vertices for further editing Smoothing Triangles If you have a small number of isolated flat triangles no more than 2 or three adjacent connected flat triangles then the Smooth Triangles command is the ideal way to eliminate them Each flat triangle fits one of the following classifications and is fixed as described 1 If flow from all three edges is into the triangle then this triangle is a pit or depression region This class of flat triangle is fixed by creating a vertex at the centroid whose elevation is 1 1000th lower than the 6 20 WMS 6 9 3 6 9 4 vertices of the flat triangle You may need to use the Smooth Pits command described below to further eliminate the pit just created 2 If flow from all three edges is out of the triangle then this triangle is a peak region This class of flat triangle is fixed by creating a vertex at the centroid whose elevation is 1 1000th higher than the vertices of the flat triangle 3 If flow from two edges is out of the triangle and flow from one edge is into the triangle then the fix is to lower the elevation of the vertex between the two edges flowing out by 1 1000 4 If flow from two edges is into the triangle and flow from one edge is out then the fix is to swap the edge from which flow is away It should be noted that if one of the triangle edges is adjacent to a flat triangle flow from that edge is considered to be into the triangle Th
219. area If no pattern is given for the second through ninth storms then the previously defined precipitation pattern will be used Alternatively hypothetical storms may be used to specify precipitation patterns In such cases only a single storm using the PH record needs to be defined The rainfall pattern type is specified using the radio group at the top of dialog as a new storm is activated data fields which require input will be undimmed 10 3 11 HEC 1 Interface 10 7 Data fields which do not apply to the specified pattern type will remain dimmed Depth Area Storms Different depth area storms can be defined by toggling on a storm from within the Depth Area Storms portion of the dialog Precipitation The average precipitation is entered in this data field Area The applicable area for this storm is entered in this data field Defining a Series If a standard storm type has been chosen a rainfall pattern must be defined using the XY Series Editor Activate the XY Series Editor by choosing the Define Series button A series for the first storm must be defined If a series is not defined for the second through ninth storms the previously defined storm will be used MULTI FLOOD STORMS JR Multiple ratios of a given storm event can be specified by bringing up the Multi flood dialog Figure 10 3 using the appropriate button The data input options are described below 10 8 WMS 10 3 12 10 3 13 Mutliflood Storms
220. area for the watershed However if a watershed does overlap two or more basins then the percentage of total area must be assigned to each When the first region is moved to the overlap window the area parameter is defaulted to the total area as assigned in the edit field at the top middle of the dialog If this area is changed to a smaller value then when the second region is moved it s area value will be defaulted to the difference between the total area and the area assigned to the first region These areas can be viewed changed at any time by clicking on the Assign Watershed Which Overlaps Regions button Assigning Regression Equation Parameters As regions are selected in the Regions overlapped by watershed window the relevant parameters for the regional equations are activated in the edit fields Any parameter with an after the name is a parameter that is computed by WMS when drainage data for a basin is computed from a digital terrain model These parameters are defaulted to the computed values at the time the regression equation is selected for use You may over ride defaulted values if you wish and later you could return to the computed values by clicking on the Restore Values from TIN button 14 2 6 14 2 7 NFF Interface 14 5 The NFF program includes in its database the range of parameter values for the watersheds used in developing the regression equations The applicable range is displayed in the help window whenever t
221. arge and water surface profile files are the only output These files are subsequently used as input when a full channel routing simulation is performed 19 16 Post Processing Results Post processing of CASC2D models is done in WMS through the standard data commands Any of the output maps available in CASC2D can be imported as data sets after a simulation has been successfully run These output maps are toggled on from the Output Control dialog accessible from the Job Control command and file names are specified in the Save Project dialog These maps are enumerated in the section describing the job control parameters Whenever a project file is imported files specifying output maps are checked to see if they exist 1 e the simulation has already been run and the maps generated If they do they are automatically imported as data sets for the project Once imported any of the post processing options including contours animations and gages can be used These options are all described in Chapter 16 on data sets CHAPTER 20 File Formats 20 1 Introduction This chapter contains the file formats for most of the files used by WMS Files which are used by analysis codes such as HEC are not documented here since they are described in the documentation for the codes Most of the files used by WMS have a card type format With this format the different components of the file are grouped into logical groups called cards The first co
222. ariable valig Description TA X Y Z Stream coordinates Repeat for each stream point Points preceded by an S are starting points of a new branch 20 16 Stage Files Stage files are used to define water surface or stage values at locations on the TIN These values are then used to automatically delineate flood plains Values can be given in either absolute water surface elevation z elevation plus water depth or as stage height of water above stream bed The format of the stream file is shown in Figure 20 27 and a sample file in Figure 20 28 FLOOD file identification string ltype value identification type X1 Vir fi x y position and stage or x2 Yip Ep water surface elevation value nr May ak NER value Figure 20 27 Stream Stage File Format flood stage IST 1 53 IST 329 IST 614 SE 822 IST 441 833560 IST 495 800990 IST 763 363530 ST 678 969730 749310 TEZO 20 3030 443970 349 300 SOT 058500 106990 ISLOTO 306 312990 360 680420 bt TOLU LLO 260 344 108950 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 Figure 20 28 Sample Stream Stage File The format of the FLOOD card is as follows Card Type FLOOD eeeeeeeseseeeeseses Description Defines a set of flood stage or water surface elevation values Defines a set of flood stage or water surface elevation values Required YES Form
223. ariable See below for the table of unit codes 7 name str Flag to indicate whether or not the variable can be rs mapped by WMS See mapping code table below Card Type EQUATION Description _ Marks the beginning of an equation definition Required YES eae File Formats 20 37 Format EQUATION num Sample E Field Variable Value Description i nes int The flood interval corresponding to the equation Note An equation card for each interval 2 5 10 AS 25 50 100 500 years must be defined in the file Card Type STANDARDERROR Description Provides the standard error given for the equation Required YES Format STANDARDERROR value Sample STANDARDERROR 85 3 Field Variable Value Description no standard error data exists The standard error for the equation 0 0 is entered if Card Type EQUIVALENTYEARS Description Provides the number of equivalent years for the equation Required YES Format EQUIVALENTYEARS value Sample EQUIVALENTYEARS 12 0 Field Variable Value Description 1 value The equivalent number of years record for the equation 0 0 is entered if no data exists Card Type REGRESSIONCONSTANT Description Provides the regression constant of the equation Required YES Format REGRESSIONCONSTANT value Sample REGRESSIONCONSTANT 0 03
224. as dropped some of the lesser used functions and added others You can use WMS to delineate watershed data and define most parts of the HMS model The Export HMS Basin File found in the HEC menu will HEC 1 Interface 10 37 create the input file necessary to use data derived in WMS to perform modeling in HMS There are five different files that are or can be exported as part of the HMS simulation as shown in Figure 10 18 l The Project file is like the WMS super file in that it is used to keep track of the other files that make up the HMS simulation The Control file includes the job control data or simulation global parameters such as time step number of ordinates id cards etc The Basin file has all of the parameters for each hydrologic unit basin outlet diversion etc The Precipitation file contains the information used to define the precipitation event for the simulation The Map file is a map or trace of the watershed and sub basin boundaries It is not a terrain model and therefore cannot be used to extract information such as area or runoff distance it is only a picture of the watershed that is placed as a backdrop to the HMS schematic If you have a watershed derived in WMS from a digital terrain model then you can export it as part of your HMS project In order to export the map you must convert it to feature objects If you create your watershed from feature objects or a DEM then it will already be in this f
225. assigns the appropriate weir coefficient A user defined weir coefficient can also be entered or the default value for one of the weir types listed modified Weir calculations can also be used in combination with the detention basin calculator to define any outlet works of the basin reservoir 15 6 Detention Basins An important aspect of any hydrologic study is the development of on site storage facilities The effects of a detention basin on an inflow hydrograph can be analyzed and an output hydrograph created in WMS using the Detention Basin calculator Figure 15 11 This same calculator is also used in to define detention basin parameter input for HEC 1 the Rational Method and other hydrologic models as part of an overall analysis for a planned development A level pool routing technique is used to determine the effects of storage routing on an input hydrograph for given detention basin reservoir parameters Using the principle of conservation of mass the change in reservoir storage S for a given time period At is equal to the average inflow I minus average outflow 0 S2 S1 fli l 01 02 At 2 2 The defined storage vs discharge relationships are used to iteratively solve for the end of period storage and outflow The detention basin calculator requires three sets of input 1 A hydrograph Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 37 2 A storage capacity volume elevation relationship 3 An elevation discharge relat
226. at TIFF filename Sample TIFF jonescyn tif S SW Field Variable Value Description ss filename str The name of the TIFF file Card Type PT1 PT2 PT3 Description The three registration points used to define locations on a given image Required YES Format PT1 tx ty wx wy PT2 Tx ty2 WX wy Sample PT1 117 797 0 000000 10000 000000 PT2 117 88 0 000000 0 000000 PT3 1053 88 13220 0 0 000000 Field Variable Value Description o l 2 tx ty Texture map coordinates a EY World coordinates 20 8 WMS 20 6 Card Type CLIPPOINTS Description Defines the coordinates of the area in the TIFF file to be displayed as the image The area clipped and displayed from the TIFF file Required YES Format xmi1n xmax ymin ymax CLIPPOINTS 628 990382 857 665608 xmin xmax ymin ymax 2D Grid Files Two dimensional grids are stored in 2D grid files The grids can be either 14338 471657 8354 617436 CLIPPOINTS cell centered or mesh centered If the grid is mesh centered a set of material ids may be included in the file The 2D grid file format is shown in Figure 20 9 and a sample file in Figure 20 10 GRID2D File type TYPE i Type of grid Mesh or Cell centered IJ idir jdir Card for defining rows columns DIM nx ny of cell boundaries in each direction x1 X coord of cell boundaries 2
227. at FLOOD STAGE 20 28 WMS x1 y1 1 x2 y2 2 Sample FLOOD STAGE 1004020040 5 05 300 0 450 0 8 0 271350 80040 10 2 330 20 740 0 15 0 Field Variable Value Description 1 type str The type of flood values used for f Either water surface elevation WATER or stage STAGE values can be defined 2 3 Xr Y X Y position of the stage value 4 f Flood stage or water surface elevation po Fields 2 4 are repeated for each flood value It should be noted that X and Y coordinates need not be exactly the same as they are represented in the TIN The program automatically selects the closest vertex to the values found in the file and assigns the corresponding stage value to it However if a vertex has been moved and another vertex is now closer to the XY coordinates found in the file the closer vertex will be assigned the stage value Some manual editing of stage values may be needed to ensure proper results 20 17 Land Use Files When using a land use coverage or grid to map model parameters such as curve number percent impervious etc a corresponding mapping file must be either created manually or imported into WMS WMS will also export a mapping file created manually so that the same definitions can be remapped in a future model Depending on the application one of three different land use tables will be required 1 Mapping of land use to CN for hydrologic soil types A
228. ate basin id Drawing Flow Patterns The Draw Flow Patterns command initiates a flow path from the DEM points according to the current display step By drawing flow paths from the DEM points a could visual queue of the watershed flow patterns can be obtained If a basin polygon is selected prior to issuing the command then flow paths will only be drawn for the DEM points that are part of the selected basin The display step of the flow patterns can be controlled by modifying the Point Display step option in the DEM Display Options dialog Computing Basin Data After defining basin boundaries attributes such as basin areas and slopes and stream lengths and slopes can be computed using the Compute Basin Data command These are all geometric parameters used in defining basins and routing networks in HEC 1 TR 20 and other hydrologic models If the basins are changed in any way the drainage data must be recomputed using this command When computing basin data the model units and the parameter units must be specified The only choices available for model units are feet and meters whereas the parameter for area include square miles square kilometers and acres and for distance include mile kilometer feet and 5 12 WMS meters A complete definition of the different geometric attributes computed and how they may be used to compute travel times lag time time of concentration is given in the Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculations chapter see sectio
229. ating coefficients x and m in the following equation An 11 1 where Q is the discharge A is the valley storage area divided by length and x and m are the coefficient and exponent of the relationship describing the reach and maximum inflow hydrograph peak discharge 11 7 4 Output Control Control of the output files can be specified individually for each of the reaches or outlets The output control parameters for the inflow hydrograph corresponds to the ADDHYD record whereas the parameters for the outflow hydrograph correspond to the REACH record Output control parameters for all hydrograph stations are identical and are discussed in an earlier section 11 7 5 Direct Input Hydrographs Hydrographs can be input directly and then routed down stream using the different routing options To do this select the Direct Input Hydrograph option Hit the New button in the Define input hydrographs dialog to define a new hydrograph The base flow and contributing drainage area for the hydrograph should be entered for computation purposes The hydrograph may be edited by selecting the Edit button after selecting the hydrograph to edit For each input hydrograph in TR 20 the discharge in cfs at each time interval must be entered 11 8 Reservoirs TR 20 allows you to route a hydrograph through a reservoir using the RESVOR TR 20 file card You can define these reservoir routing parameters in the TR 20 Reservoir Routing dialog Figure 11 6 Rese
230. ation on a TIN will cause a flow path to be initiated from that point and followed downstream until a pit or local minima is reached or until the path leaves the TIN Overland flow and Stream flow are distinguished by setting the colors for Downhill Overland and Downhill Channel in the Drainage Display Options dialog By default light blue specifies overland flow across triangle faces and dark blue specifies channel flow along channel edges This tool can be very useful in checking portions of an edited TIN before stream and basin definition is completed The length and slope of overland and stream flow is displayed in the help window each time a new path is drawn This can be helpful in obtaining parameters used to compute lag times with some empirical formulas Stream distances are shown only after a stream has been created In other words channel flow is not counted in the stream distance unless a stream has been created along the channel Flow paths initiated from the centroid of each triangle can be displayed using the Draw Flow Patterns command in the Drainage menu 6 3 Display Options Display options control which features of the TIN are displayed Each display feature associated with TINs is listed in the TIN tab of the Display Options dialog Figure 6 1 accessed by selecting the Display Options command in the Display menu The TIN tab will be displayed on top whenever you access the display options from the T Ns module The
231. ays of defining the unit hydrograph used to compute runoff from your watershed The first way is to use the standard SCS hydrograph provided with TR 20 Another way is to define your own input hydrograph This can be done by selecting the Define another dimensionless unit hydrograph radio button and defining the unit hydrograph in the time series editor 11 4 WMS 11 3 5 11 3 6 Precipitation In TR 20 there are two different ways to define precipitation Precipitation is defined by selecting the Job Control command from the TR 20 menu Then select the Define Precipitation button to define precipitation over the entire watershed You can define precipitation by using either a standard SCS rainfall distribution or by defining a custom rainfall distribution If a custom rainfall distribution is used you must define a custom rainfall distribution in the XY Series Editor If one of the standard SCS rainfall distributions are used you can select one of the following rainfall types e Emergency Spillway and Freeboard e Type I 24 hours e Type II 24 hours e Type IA 24 hours e Type III 24 hours e Type I 48 hours For all the standard distributions you must define the rainfall depth For the dimensionless distribution you must also define the rainfall duration You only need to define the depth and or duration of the rainfall for a custom distribution if one of the units entered in the XY Series Editor is dimensionless Base Flo
232. basin outlet or diversion icon from the Graphics Window Figure 10 4 shows this dialog If a basin outlet or diversion is selected before issuing the command then data for that object appears in the text window at the bottom of the dialog The top portion of the dialog lists the HEC 1 cards that can be edited by selecting the corresponding button When a hydrograph station is selected basins outlets diversions only the buttons that edit parameters associated with that hydrograph station are active all others are dimmed In addition to using the appropriate button HEC attributes can be edited by clicking on the HEC 1 card in the text display window Using this method job control parameters can be edited by first toggling their display using the Display Job Control Cards toggle box and then selecting a job control card from the text display window Once the dialog appears 1t becomes part of the main screen until you select the Done button Therefore you can continue to select additional or other hydrograph stations so that data for that object may be edited without exiting the dialog You can use the previous and next hydrograph station buttons to cycle through hydrograph stations in the order they are computed by HEC 1 Since the dialog 1s part of the main screen all menu commands are active while this dialog 1s present lt Pare thapa dance Hod Aros gor gt isan HEC Cark Arcaig HEC 1 Cadi EFE jenis ERALA AK Au jit ts E
233. be computed In addition to these parameters an eight point cross section must be defined using the XY Series Editor The first two points define the left overbank the third point defines the left bank the fourth and fifth points define the channel itself the sixth point defines the right bank and the last two points define the right overbank HEC 1 Interface 10 27 If the modified Puls method is chosen the volume SV outflow SQ relationship must be defined Both records are defined using the XY Series Editor Reservoir Routing If the reservoir routing option is specified then one method for volume and one method for outflow must be defined The available methods are shown in Figure 10 13 and defined below HEC 1 Reservoir Routing Options Outflow Volume Known outhlow Known volume y I 50 Defne I Sig Define Compute Weir spillway C Compute volume M SL PSA ELEWL 0 000 CAREA 0 000 Lafin cool fao expL fas SE Define cREL ooo seo ooo coow eooo ExPw fso wi TOPEL 000 pamwiefo ooo coop fomo Expo friso Figure 10 13 HEC 1 Reservoir Routing Dialog e Known volume Define a known volume SV record using the XY Series Editor Optionally you can define the elevations SE which correspond to the known volumes e Computed volume By defining an area SA elevation SE relationship the volume can be computed automatically by HEC 1 Both records are defined using the XY Series Editor
234. be swapped without creating overlapping triangles the split flow vertex will not be eliminated and you will have to add new vertices adjust elevations swap multiple edges or some other form of manual editing technique Merge Basins Selected basins can be merged together using the Merge Basins command In order to select drainage basins the Select Drainage Basins tool must be active For each upstream branch of an outlet point a drainage basin is automatically created This command allows you to combine the basins for a given outlet In order to merge basins they must be adjacent to each other and belong to the same outlet Split Basins The Split Basins command subdivides selected basins into separate sub basins if possible By default a separate drainage basin for each upstream branch of an outlet point is created If the drainage basins of a given outlet have been merged together they can be split again using this command Delete All Basin Data This command is used to erase from memory all of the currently defined outlet points stream networks and drainage basins Delete Null Basin Triangles The Delete Null Basin Triangles command can be used to delete all triangles whose flow path does not encounter an outlet Before defining drainage basins all triangles are classified as belonging to the null drainage basin After defining drainage basins some triangles still belong to this null basin since they do not contribute flow thro
235. both use dynamic memory allocation the memory and time required for computation display can become prohibitive Be sure to provide time for the individual processes to be performed Also you will likely need more than 64 or higher Megabytes of RAM and plenty of swap space to do problems in this size range 5 2 Tool Palette 9 2 1 9 2 2 9 2 3 9 2 4 Besides the select DEM point and contour label tools described in the previous chapter the following tools have been added to the DEM module to aid in drainage analysis Because hydrologic data development with DEMs requires tight integration with the Map Module many of these tools are copies of the same tools used in that module Refer to the Map Module chapter for a complete description of these tools in this chapter only the uses for the tools as they relate to performing drainage analysis with a DEM is discussed Flow Path Draws a flow path from a selected point on the DEM This options only works if a flow direction grid has been imported to accompany the DEM fel Select Points Nodes The Select Points Nodes tool is used to select existing points or nodes so that they can be converted to outlet points Double clicking on a point or node with this tool brings up the Point or Node Attribute dialog Al Select Vertex The Select Arc Vertices tool is used to select vertices on an arc El Select Arc The Select Arc tool is used to select arcs for operations such as deletion
236. by selecting the appropriate toggle box in the upper right portion of the Soil Type Mapping dialog see Figure 3 9 You may only define parameter values for the applications selected Map Module 3 17 Soil type mapping E IY Display SCS soil type _ Display runoff coefficient parameters _ Display Greens mpt parameters Selected soil properties Add soil ID to list Import soi attribute file Import File type Runoff Coetticient file T Import AC file Esport soil attribute file Esport file type Aunoft Coefficient file h Export AC file oe Figure 3 9 Soil Group Dialog Each soil type polygon will have a soil type ID associated with it a single integer number In order to perform the correct mapping you will need to link the appropriate soil type variables to each ID WMS allows you to do this in one of two ways First of all with the soil type coverage active you can open the Soil Type Mapping dialog from the Feature Objects menu using the Attributes command and then create new IDs and enter parameters for each ID Secondly you can enter the data in a text file and then import it from within the same dialog The file format is simple and is defined in section 20 18 Parameter values for soil type IDs are defined by selecting the ID in the WMS soil type ID text window and the parameter from the Selected soil type properties text window and then entering the value in the edit field
237. can be use to delimit the different fields of the data file 2 20 WMS 2 8 7 NEXRAD Precipitation gt Scatter Points This option was developed by personnel at the Waterways Experiment Station WES for importing in house formatted files of NEXRAD precipitation If you have access to data from WES contact us for what needs to be done to import this into WMS The WMS developers would like to be able to support more standard formatted files of NEXRAD data If you have additional information please contact the developers for help in implementation Rain Gage File gt Scatter Points The rain gage file supported is the CASC2D rain gage file These files contain gage information for long duration events and can be converted to scatter points for visualization purposes TIFF Image Data A tiff file can be imported and registered so that it appears as a backdrop in WMS or mapped to TIN data when shading More details on importing TIFF image data are given in section 3 4 2 DXF Vector Data DXF files may also be imported and then converted to feature objects TINs or simply used to enhance the display of a project More information on importing DXF files is given in section 3 5 XYZ Data as TIN Vertices Choosing this option allows you to read in a space delimited file containing x y and z coordinate values The Triangulate command in the 77Ns menu can then be used to create a TIN from the xyz data The file must be sp
238. cations and LIMITAtiONS ooooooonnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnonnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnancnnnnnnnnnos 15 41 T32 CUNE DO i E E EE E 15 42 LIT LES LAA Dio 15 44 15 7 4 HYS Roda wa Dala varesi eE E a 15 45 15 7 5 Sav mehe TPU T UO A A A OEE EOE 15 46 15 7 6 SOLEC UNET AOL YSIS saith A esis clade ira eal Spans Sey A td 15 46 LLL Minimizing a Culvert Width for a Specified Head ooooooonnncnnnnnnnnnnnnoconnnnnnnnnanoconnnnnnnanononos 15 47 15 7 8 Multiple Culvert Analysis and Overtopping oocccccnccnnnoonnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanoncnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnos 15 48 16 NAAA aa aaae aa SS 16 1 TOE INTER OC LOIN oirein a A nade eapea tenements 16 1 6 2 DATA BROWSER tata add 16 2 16 2 1 O o T 16 3 16 2 2 ACME a 16 3 16 2 3 A O AR A A Sle aon te ts 16 4 16 2 4 DEl nE DOT OEN n a A A a 16 4 16 2 5 DOTES CAOS T 16 4 63 DATA CALCULATOR aaa 16 4 10 CONTOURS iio o ide oo alone 16 5 IOS ERINCES aa ido a a 16 5 16 6 MAPPING ELEVATIONS de oca 16 6 16 7 FEM POOR NIVEA TION eae A e e EEE E o ae oc le bi e E o 16 6 xii WMS 16 7 1 Savne FUIMOS OS oero niece ee 16 7 16 7 2 Film LOOPT la VOOK A A Seth aur cst dag Se ace ang GR AS Ad 16 7 16 7 3 TOUT LISA si ieee te ela A 16 7 IOS GAGES a As 16 9 16 8 1 INS SASSO LIC Ch LIRR a e E O 16 9 16 8 2 NASA SC DOS AA A NE 16 11 16 8 3 The Gace POL MONG lalo ado 16 12 17 E GUID AAA RARA AS AAA 17 1 FA INTRODUCTION oia 17 1 Vee GRD TYPE AAA saunas E AENT AAN 17 1 IO OOM PI TI act 17 2 Nel Cal AA a 17 2 DOLO
239. catter points used to interpolate a value at Pp In this case only points 1 4 5 6 amp 9 are used The local coordinate for each of these points with respect to Pp is defined as the area shared by the Thiessen polygon defined by point Pp and the Thiessen polygon defined by each point before point Pp is added The greater the 2D Scatter Points 18 17 common area the larger the resulting local coordinate and the larger the influence or weight the scatter point has on the interpolated value at Pp PE Figure 18 11 Overlapping Thiessen Polygon Areas Used in Computation of Local Coordinates If we define x n as the Thiessen polygon area of Pp and Km n as the difference in the Thiessen polygon area of a neighboring scatter point Pm before and after Pp is inserted then the local coordinate m n is defined as Km n k n A TA 18 25 The local coordinate Ay n varies between zero and unity If Pp is at precisely the same location as Pm then the Thiessen polygon areas for Pn and Pm are identical and A nm has a value of unity In general the greater the relative distance Pm is from Pp the smaller its influence on the final interpolated value The weights used in natural neighbor interpolation are computed by normalizing the local coordinates so that they sum to one 18 18 WMS A wm n ae ee ete tees 18 26 Y Ain i where wm n is the weight of scatter point Pm with respect to the interpolation point P
240. ccccccccnnnnnnnnnno 14 3 TOS UCD 122 e A 2 26 PESISLEMING IMACS ad 3 44 removing duplicate Venice nad 6 12 Hatillo 6 20 O a see shading renumbering links and nodeS ccccccccccnnnnnnmm o 3 38 reorder SUCATINGALCS aida 3 28 AAA tee a E 3 46 Index l 11 reservoir Creatina yrassa IIE E O 7 9 defining an TREO aiii 11 14 STINT 1 ON Odd 7 8 A eRe eE Ser verb t Creer teen er 7 10 storage capacity curves from TINS 7 9 reservoir ANALYSIS al 15 36 reservoirs AC CINE OEE Sear sa 9 5 deleting from trees onica 9 5 9 6 restore CLE VALIONS yi issues scashaee teenie oacatetshancatuaene 6 21 remeng ON coord 6 10 RETURN key Selecting vertex strings occcccccccccnonnnonnnnnnnnnoss 6 2 reverse aro direcion iii 3 33 A dctactat E T E Acuaods 6 6 ridges Node lOCAWON ss 3 27 A nas Giaerun ad Mean tuiesuacen ene cadens 2 4 routed NV CRO rasca ia 10 10 routing channe A a ease 10 26 kinematic Wave scosi a i a 10 29 Musica 10 25 Muskingum Cunge c ooooooooooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnonnos 10 29 O OO 10 24 A A seco ielaseusessseaastubenh 10 23 POSSI VOLE pdas 10 27 SOAGE sis dita ates snes me oitaccai E 10 25 Straddler tas A 10 28 TRA ci 11 9 11 10 omie HEC Tzaneen a 10 34 Mimie ETRU seana E 11 16 RUNOP Ees T A 11 6 runoff coefficient DTIC EENE E E EE E EAE 20 30 runoff coefficient table o oooocccccnnnnnnnnn 15 5 runoff coefficients vaa 15 1 Save ASi Eee iets 2 9 save detal aid 2 10 savi
241. ccccccssesseccccccceeeeseeccceeecaeeseecceeseaaeaeeeceeeesaaeeseeccesssaaaaeeeess 11 16 LELI RUNNING BR 20 ANALISTA E A A A 11 16 L ModelkChds tasas Aida 11 17 AZ 47 A RRR RR O ira 11 17 P RSS IN TEREACGE lt a is 12 1 EZE ANTRODUCTON dr altea 12 1 12 2 ANPUTREQUIREMEN ES FOR TR ita ti ita 12 1 12 2 1 MAINE TRE Y SIU ONON capsids ctiss EE AAE E R OE A 12 2 Ia BAS DIO lt A AAA AI AT AAA AAA AAA O TEAN 12 2 12 2 3 OUEN AS cokes de St aula Rae A EA eh tetas 12 2 12 3 USING THE WMS INTERFACE TO RUN TR 55 SIMULATIONS 0cccccccsssseceeceeeeeceeeeeeseccesaeeeseeseaeneseeeas 12 2 12 3 1 BASUN si trote 12 4 12 3 2 LHe OF CONCCIIIOLION A di oasis ica 12 4 2 3 3 Dana TAI CG Soeria EEEE aia 12 4 12 3 4 CIV CIN UM OET EET ENON AAA AAA AAA AA A td AA AS 12 4 12 3 5 NO A Me Oe AE EROS aR Ae 12 5 12 3 6 PORTS WAN T COLON ih sa ae cea E Sea gull vised aaa welt E ae te i seie be ees sublets au es bul eee clan i 12 5 12 7 Travel TUMOR t 12 5 I2Z4 COMPUTING HYDROGRAPHS id N E A A A A 12 5 12 5 COPYING RESULTS TO THE CLIPBOARD eraron NAA E AA 12 6 ES RAHONAC METHOD 00000 EEA T A 13 1 ISAE INTRODUCTION iS ao 13 1 152 RAHONAL METHOD EQUATION 0 a a a a a 13 2 13 2 1 IMPORTAN TLAMUATOAS nas 13 3 13 3 COMPUTING PEAK FLOWS WITH THE RATIONAL METHOD EQUATION csccsscssccsccsccsccsscescescencs 13 4 13 3 1 FIMO OSU II wag A ia 13 4 13 3 2 EXT A ii 13 5 13 3 3 Determine RIA AH ANTCNS INOS eck ccs escalate A tug tin A A ee et eset
242. cccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 4 3 Gisplayine POMts ida 4 3 drawing flow patbs ooococccnncccos 5 2 5 11 TT 2 8 20 5 A ON 4 7 flow accumulations ici ii 5 7 HOWE C MONS adas 5 7 importing attributes oooonnccnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnos 2 18 INDONESIA ees 2 15 inactivate points a 4 6 INAC UVE DONS e A 5 11 Hnd seid Sieso A n 4 4 memory requirements oooocccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnno 2 17 A teaalaeia soos ssuneas 1 24 POLY SOM DAST Id vespide diras cae 5 12 lar La 11 0 Y 25 25 AE o PEE E EC a 2 34 smoothing elevations occccccccnnnnnnnnnooncnnnnnnoss 4 6 SOLID accentuate 4 4 al EON 4 5 CMTS soeone sedan ecistipestedaset 2 17 watershed delineation ceeeeeeeeee 1 6 5 1 where to download from internet 1 7 DEM GIS PAVING a 4 4 displaying flat cells ooccccnnnnmmmmmm 4 4 TEMO MELON o i 2 25 detention basin calculati0ns co oooo mmmm 15 36 dew DOME aria 10 23 digital line graph ooooooonnnccnccnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnos 2 14 Digital Terrain Modeling cccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 1 2 GISIUZING SUEAINS cs veissndva edie 20 25 dimensionless hydrograph A A odes 20 33 GL PD A E ama wa cas wea E E E 2 36 display options A A T 17 4 DID scatter PONE idiota 18 3 DEN AS 4 2 5 4 A a A ante 7 2 O lancet iaadutnaten 3 47 feat Ure OD JE 6 ESIOMEAAO APPLE 3 25 MOOG o E EE E 8 2 aCe CUE as 16 13 CAGES EA ASE AE A T N 16 10 A a NERE EEEE A e 2 35 A
243. ce basindaDc Sac 6 3 place drainage label oococcocccoc 5 4 TOM 2 4 SCIECE PIET E EEE T E E ETE ETE 2 5 E Gh P A E RETETE A E A 3 7 5 2 selet are VETICES id 3 7 5 2 select Das IMSS 6 3 9 2 Select Drac e e o 3 9 5 3 SEICCE CEI POr rada 4 2 pelec Edi Vers iOler ES 9 2 select drawing Objects isinisi 3 40 SClECUNVdrO Crap cintia 9 2 Select network oocooccooccncnnccnccnononononos 3 9 5 3 selce Node cis 3 7 5 2 BELECU OUE Sri 9 2 SClECE POMS iit ed 3 7 5 2 Select PONY SOM aaa 3 9 5 3 select TIAN GIGS aia 6 2 SEICCE VENENO S ra 6 2 BCIECEVETLICES iia 6 1 select XY SELES POr o o 21 4 Static Paleo coi asia 2 4 l 14 WMS SWAD COC CS A re po a 6 3 combining arcs within a basin 15 32 TIN contour label uns 6 3 tree TIN dynamic palette cuina 6 1 Dasmi creation silla 9 5 topologic tree dynamic palette 9 2 centerins 1 WING We id 9 3 ZOU RO O CE SE E A a 2 4 CTC AUN 9 OA ERE Po O O Ge 9 4 ZOOM Ry SCTIC K a aei 21 5 delete OUTIL Sanan tend sd ee 9 5 TOP AA ol res E cme 5 7 5 12 A A E O 10 5 A AO 11 1 display oponse 9 2 ADD tareas 11 9 displayi O alias 9 3 DAS TOW rura a A 11 4 diversion Credion sarina oa 9 5 Basin Geometric Attributes o o o o ooo 11 8 INSETIION OE 9 4 DSTI NANG a 11 7 O 1 24 basin parameters oooooooononcccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 11 6 reservoir Crd is 9 5 creating without TIN oooooonnnnnnncncnnncncnnnnnnnnnnno 9 4 sa
244. ch for which routing takes place If a TIN DEM or Map based watershed model is present this value is automatically computed and assigned to this field whenever the Compute Basin Data command is executed A cross section must be assigned to the reach length assigned The cross section editor is discussed in section 11 7 3 Routing Method TR 20 has two different routing methods to choose from If cross sectional data is available it can be used to establish routing parameters using a m value method If the cross section data are not available a Kinematic wave method may be used instead The method for each outlet is determined by the radio group selection Using Defined Cross Sections With this routing method a typical cross section for each reach outlet must be defined This is done using the TR 20 Cross Section Data dialog and is accessed by selecting the Define Cross Section Data button This dialog is shown in Figure 11 5 and a description of the different options follows TR 20 Interface 11 11 TH 20 Cross Section Data M Bank full elevation ft 2356 00 elevation discharge _ Zero damage elevation ft ooo ate 0 00 _ Low ground elevation ft ooo 05 21 100 00 506 74 300 00 Flows in cfs 508 28 600 00 Flows in cam cfs mi 2 50850 62456 Drainage Area jaa 50951 100000 310 37 1500 00 Cross Section Data Series 5107 210000 20 to 30 10 to 20 s144 2500000 joe fee COC Current
245. check box next to the feature name can be toggled on or off to control whether or not the feature is to be displayed In addition the color button to the left of the check box can be used to set the color and other appropriate attributes such as radius line thickness line style etc 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3 6 3 4 TINS 6 5 Display Options Ei Hydrologic Modeling O Grid Scatter Point TIN Drainage Flood DEM l Map M Yertices _ Ridge edges E Unlocked vertes color 35 Locked vertex color W Triangles J L Contours Contours W Boundaries E _ Elevations US _ Soil columns _ Circumcircles _ Split flow EN _ Vertex numbers im _ Soil group ES Channel edges Sal lupe Triangle numbers _ Soil group legend _ Vectors Vector _ Land use legend Change OA color _ Land use OF Cancel Apply Figure 6 1 TIN Display Options Dialog Vertices If the Vertices item in the TIN Display Options dialog is set the TIN vertices will be displayed each time the Graphics Window is refreshed Both a Locked and Unlocked vertex color may be set so that there is a visible difference when displaying the TIN Triangles If the Triangles item in the TIN Display Options dialog is set TIN triangles will be displayed each time the display is refreshed Contours If the Contours option in the Display Options dialog is set the TIN is contoured when the display is refreshed
246. citly entering a number or by entering a base cell size and a limit cell size The base and limit cell size options are used when a bias other than 1 0 is specified The base cell size is the size of the first cell in the sequence The cells are then generated by altering the cell size according to the bias until the limit cell size is reached The remainder of the cells are constructed using the limit cell size The controls at the bottom of the Create Grid dialog are used to define the type The user can specify whether the grid should be a mesh centered grid or a cell centered grid 17 6 Active Inactive Cells Each of the cells in a cell centered grid can be active or inactive An inactive cell is a cell which is not part of the computational domain For example when 17 6 1 2D Grids 17 7 doing a surface runoff analysis using CASC2D cells inside the watershed boundary should be active while cells outside the boundary should be inactive An inactive cell is ignored when contours or fringes are displayed on the grid A set of selected cells can be made inactive by selecting the Inactivate Selected command in the Grid menu A set of inactive cells can be made active again by turning on the display of inactive cells using the Display Options dialog selecting the cells and selecting the Activate Selected command in the Grid menu inactive cells can only be selected if they are being displayed Activate Polygon Region In many cases it
247. cnnnnccnonccnnnccnonocnnonccnoncononocnnnncnnoncononcononnrnnnncononccnonicnananonos 21 7 211d SDERINING A UNIT HYDROGRAPH Uli coto 21 7 21 12 DEFINING A GIVEN HYDROGRAPH O Disco 21 8 CHAPTER 1 Introduction 1 1 Overview WMS is a comprehensive environment for hydrologic analysis It was developed by the Environmental Modeling Research Laboratory of Brigham Young University in cooperation with the U S Army Corps of Engineers Waterways Experiment Station Running WMS for the First Time The same executable downloaded as a demonstration version can be enabled to full capabilities When running WMS the first time and each time until you register the registration wizard is the first dialog you will see Figure 1 1 1 2 WMS eee bn a Wy Watershed frend yore do ra AE Tia peded bee od el bear ied fou hee Guile eae a bea ee sabio AAA he ee Cira de heey ee ee ee Gee ee eh Gag ered qe dealer Di tro horda hi Figure 1 1 Register Wizard Dialog By choosing the Demo Mode button you will be running the WMS demonstration which allows you full access to WMS capabilities without the ability to print or save If you have licensed WMS and have a hardware lock or need to get the security string so that you can obtain a password you should choose the Enable button see section 2 8 14 for more information on registering WMS Digital Terrain Modeling In addition to providing interfaces to hydrologic modeling
248. command tries to identify any potential problems or data inconsistencies before the model project is saved and run through CASC2D Checks are continually being added and the developers encourage suggestions from users who have struggled with a problem that could easily be identified by the model checker 19 15 Running A CASC2D Model Once all necessary data for a CASC2D simulation has been defined a project file can be saved and then used as input to the CASC2D program CASC2D is distributed as a separate program from WMS but can be launched from within WMS The Run CASC2D command launches CASC2D and sends the given project file name as a command line argument By default the project and all associated files are saved prior to executing CASC2D in order to insure that all changes made are saved to files 19 16 WMS CASC20 Run Options Curent project file APRO ms Change project file names Lancel Figure 19 6 Run CASC2D Dialog As an alternative the project file can be saved using the Save Project command and then CASC2D run as a stand alone process When run as a stand alone process the project file should be specified as a command line argument When using defined channels in combination with surface runoff CASC2D must first be run to initialize depth and flows in the channel cells This is done by specifying one of the channel initialization options in the Job Control and then running CASC2D When doing initialization the disch
249. cons Tree Display Options direction pel length Display 50 Jin Tree Module a direction pel height M Display tree node icons 50 M Display tree node names E v Display outlet connections Square icons MN Yo Display basin connections M Display diversion connections Plot Options Diversion arrow size 4 Legend li F _ Display tree origin indicators Legend pte _ Labels _ Ratio 1 _ Ratio 6 _ Ratio 2 _ Ratio _ Ratio 3 _ Ratio 8 _ Ratio 4 _ Ratio 9 _ Ratio 5 OK Cancel Apply Figure 9 1 Tree Display Options Dialog Frame Tree The Frame Tree command is used to center the entire tree within the Graphics Window This 1s particularly useful after panning and zooming operations Collapsing the Topologic Tree The Expand Tree Nodes and Collapse Tree Nodes commands in the Tree menu allow you to simplify the display of larger more complicated trees By selecting an outlet point and collapsing the tree everything upstream from the selected outlet will not be displayed until the same outlet point is selected and the Expand Tree Nodes command chosen A collapsed tree node will be 9 4 WMS represented by outlining and connecting it to the rest of the tree with a dashed line Even though upstream outlets and basins are not displayed they are still a part of the analysis and would be written to the particular hydrologic model file 9 4 Default Model The commands in the Tree menu are used in
250. cs and elevations for these new vertices are assigned from the z value of the nodes vertices Building Polygons Just defining a series of arcs that form a closed loop or polygon does not create a polygon Polygons are created from arcs only after the Build Polygons command is used Feature polygons can be created in one of two ways 1 If there are no selected arcs when the Build Polygons command is chosen polygons are created for all arcs of the active coverage that form closed loops or polygons The one exception being that if the active coverage is a drainage type coverage stream arcs are not used to create polygons If you want a stream arc to also form a basin boundary then you must build polygons according to method two below 2 If there are selected arcs when then Build Polygons command is chosen then polygons are only created for closed loops or polygons formed by the set of selected arcs By either method the new polygon inherits the current default polygon type unless in the drainage cover and then the new polygon will be defaulted to a lake polygon if all it s arcs are lake arcs and a drainage polygon otherwise Creating TINs A TIN can be created from a set of feature objects in a drainage coverage using the Create TIN command The density of vertices in the TIN will be proportional to the vertex spacing along arcs The Redistribute command in the Feature Objects menu can be used to adjust vertex spacing and loca
251. cting the corresponding button When a hydrograph station is selected basins outlets reservoirs diversions only the buttons which edit parameters associated with that hydrograph station are active all others are dimmed Once the dialog appears it becomes part of the main screen until you select the Done button Therefore you can continue to select additional or other hydrograph stations so that data for that object may be edited without exiting the dialog You can use the Previous and Next Hydrograph Station buttons to cycle through hydrograph stations in the order they are computed by 7R 20 While the dialog is up all menu commands are active The remaining sections in this chapter cover the attributes which can be edited from each of the buttons in the Edit TR 20 Parameters Dialog 11 5 Output Control For each hydrograph station basin hydrographs combined hydrographs routed hydrographs reservoir hydrographs and diversion hydrographs different output controls can be specified Selecting the Output Control dialog button from the individual hydrograph station dialog accesses this dialog Entries that can be defined in this dialog are described below 11 6 WMS 11 6 11 5 1 11 5 2 11 5 3 11 5 4 11 5 5 Peak Discharge and Runoff Volume Selecting this option will output the following data at the selected hydrograph station s e Peak discharge in cfs e Peak time in hours e Volume of water above constant base
252. cts are displayed becomes important whenever a rectangle or oval is displayed in color fill mode For example if a 3 42 WMS rectangle is used to erase an area behind a text string it must be drawn prior to the text string or it will result in erasing the text string as well The order of drawing objects can be controlled using the Move to Front Move to Back Shuffle Up and Shuffle Down commands described below Move to Front The Move to Front command causes the selected drawing object to be drawn last In other words it will appear on top or in front of all other drawing objects Move to Back The Move to Back command causes the selected drawing object to be drawn first In other words it will appear at the bottom or in back of all other drawing objects Shuffle Up The Shuffle Up command causes the selected drawing object to be displayed one object later than it is currently be displayed This causes it to appear in front of the object that is currently being displayed just ahead of it Shuffle Down The Shuffle Down command causes the selected drawing object to be displayed one object sooner than it is currently be displayed This causes it to appear in back of the object that is currently being displayed just behind it 3 4 Images An image is a digital picture that has been scanned from a photo or captured from the screen of another application A common format for saving images 1s the TIFF Tags Image File Format format W
253. d as cyclic repeating 6 begc The x value in the series where the cyclic portion of 7 nae str Thenameoftheseries 8 9 X Y E xy values of the points defining the curve OD Repeat ntimes S Card Type XY2 0 Description Defines a curve with a list of XY values This card is identical to the XY1 card except that the number of points and the x values are assumed to be static and cannot be altered by the user File Formats 20 43 Card Type X S o Description Defines a curve with a list of Y values The x values are defined by a beginning value an increment and a bias Required NO Format XY3 id n x1 incx biasx dx dy rep bege name yi Field Variable Value Description 1 id The id of the XY series n The number of point in the series 3 x1 The first x value 4 incx The increment in x used to compute the next x value 5 pex The per cent change in x used to compute subsequent x values Expressed as a decimal i e IN E 05 ESF 6 dx 0 1 A flag defining whether the x values listed are to be interpreted as incremental dx 1 or absolute E a e a E o interpreted as incremental dy 1 or absolute 7 dy 0 1 A flag defining whether the y values listed are to be D y 0 8 rep 0 1 A flag defining whether the xy series is to be interpreted as cyclic repeating 9 begc The x value in the se
254. d centroidx Basin centroid closest point in basin if centroid is outside of the basin Y coord float General Tools 2 13 sub basin name basinname Basin name string sub basin lagtime lagtime Lag time in Hours float _ sub basin time of concentration tc Time of Concentration in hours sub basin SCS curve number cn SCS Curve number computed from hydrologic soil type and land use sub basin average precipitation precip Basin average precipitation in landuse lu_code Land use code from the SCS land use table Possible values range PO rom 02 soil type hydgrp SCS Soil type A B C or D or 0 1 runoff coefficient C means this is essential to import into WMS and create a watershed model directly The three essential items are point arc and polygon types The general stream arc should be used to represent a stream in a watershed model The boundary polygon type should be used to represent a polygon boundary The outlet point type should be used to represent a watershed outlet or sub basin outlet point In order to import shapefile attributes into WMS and build a tree automatically the following conditions must be met 1 A point coverage containing watershed and sub basin outlets with the appropriate type outlet point attribute defined must exist 2 An arc or line coverage containing streams in the watershed with the appropriate type
255. d in GIS software such as ARC INFO and ArcView there are several possible scenarios for importing and using data developed by GIS applications that support the ArcView file formats Shape Files There are just about as many different ways to have stored watershed data in a GIS as there are watersheds stored Therefore what you do with basin polygons or stream networks in WMS will likely be somewhat different This section outlines some of the key issues involved in importing shapefiles ARCJIINFO or ArcView data and provides examples of common problems Fundamental to importing any vector data layer is the ability to map attributes associated with the shape file to corresponding parameters used by WMS The same dialog Figure 1 19 is used for each of the three basic layer types A set 1 22 WMS of key words shown in the table on page 2 10 can be used to define the item names of attributes in the shape file so that mapping to corresponding variables in WMS occurs automatically In the event that the attribute name is different the fields can be manually mapped Regardless of the way your data is stored in the GIS you should be able to take advantage of as much of the pre defined and stored hydrologically related parameters as possible Import Shapefile Data Coverage options ESTE default coverage Type Drainage I Paints DRAINTYPE gt Drainage Point CMS Stutoralasppnits1 shp Attribute mapping Iv Arcs DRA
256. d in the Display menu is used to toggle the window open and closed It can be resized and moved to any location on the screen 2 5 Tool Palette 2 5 1 The Tool Palette is divided into four parts as shown in Figure 2 2 modules Background color and static tools dynamic tools and macros Module Palette The Module Palette is used to switch between modules Only one module is active at any given time However the data associated with a module ex a DEM is preserved when the user switches to a different module Activating a module simply changes the set of available tools and menu commands Elle 2 0 x Figure 2 2 Professional Tool Palette 2 4 WMS 2 5 2 Static Tool Palette The tools that are available in every module are located in the Static Tool Palette These tools are used for basic operations such as panning zooming and rotating The static tools are as follows Backcolor Button The Backcolor button is used to change the color of the background of the Graphics Window Clicking on this button brings up a palette of standard colors to choose from Pan Tool The Pan tool is used to pan the viewing area of the Graphics Window When the Pan tool is active clicking the mouse in the Graphics Window has the following results e If a point is clicked the viewing area is shifted so that the point clicked corresponds to the center of the window e If the cursor is dragged while holding the mouse butto
257. d rather than first for some arcs but not others All arcs can be consistently ordered by selecting an outlet node a node attached to only one arc and then choosing the Reorder Streams Redistributing Vertices Vertices along arcs can be redistributed at either a higher or lower density using the Redistribute command in the Feature Objects menu The vertex density along arcs determines the density of TIN vertices when issuing the Create TIN command from the Feature Objects menu Vertices are redistributed along all selected arcs using a uniform or cubic spline method Map Module 3 29 Arcs can be selected one at a time using the Select Arc tool the Select All command in the Edit menu the Select Arc tool must be active the Select Branch tool or the Select Network tool Once the arcs are selected the method of redistribution can be chosen from the Redistribute dialog shown in Figure 3 17 Redistribute Yertices Ea Number arc segments 7 Maxinum length 247 658 Average length 173 407 Minimum length 76 444 8 Subdivide each end anormal Number of subdivisions KE a Specified spacing mo C Redistribute along a cubic spline fi 00 00 Target spacing cos Figure 3 17 Redistribute Vertices Dialog Uniform Subdivision If the Subdivide each end uniformly options is specified then either a number of intervals or a specified spacing can be given to determine how points are redistributed along the selected arc
258. d to display the coordinates and current function value of a grid under the cursor when the displayed data are in plan view The z coordinate corresponds to an interpolated value from the active TIN DEM or grid depending on the active module 2 7 Menu Bar The commands in WMS are accessed through pull down menus located in the menu bar Each menu can be accessed with the mouse or by holding down the Alt key and pressing the underlined letter in the menu title Once a menu is visible the individual commands can be selected with the mouse or by holding down the Alt key and pressing the underlined letter in the menu command When the active module is changed the menus change to a set of menus associated with the selected module The first four menus File Edit Display View are the same for every module The remaining menus are dependent on the selected module If a menu item is dimmed then it can not be used until the proper conditions exist Typically this means the appropriate data has not yet been created or selected 2 9 File Menu 2 8 1 The File menu is one of the standard menus and is available in all of the modules The commands in the file menu are used for file input output for the basic data types for printing and to quit the program WMS File Types The file types supported by the Open command in the File menu correspond to the WMS data types only The file input output commands associated with specific analysis co
259. d using the Export command found in the Image menu These files can then be read in together by opening the image file using the Open command in the File menu Display Options The Image Display Options Figure 3 28 control whether the currently registered image is displayed and whether it is registered as a background image or draped over a TIN or a grid There are two different ways an image may be mapped and used in WMS e Draw on XY plane behind all objects In this case the image is registered to specified xy coordinates and drawn first so that it appears behind all other objects e Texture mapped to a TIN or GRID In this case the image is draped over the active TIN or GRID The image must be registered to an xy location within the domain of the TIN or GRID Image Display Options Draw on 247 plane behind all objects _ Texture map to surface when shaded Figure 3 28 Image Display Options Dialog Importing Images The Import Image command is used to read a new image It is only possible to have one image at a time in WMS so reading a new image will always cause an existing image to be deleted When this command is issued the File Browser is used to select the TIFF image file and the image is drawn in the Register Image dialog as shown in Figure 3 29 and explained in section 3 4 3 Some of the new TIFF images contain registration information within the 3 44 WMS 3 4 3 TIFF file itself they are often c
260. de of the stream arc and the hydrologic modeling tree is updated to include this outlet point When a stream arc is created A drainage basin is added on the hydrologic modeling tree for each upstream arc emanating from an outlet point If the stream arcs are being used to create a TIN a breakline is forced along the arc triangle edges are enforced along the arc Furthermore a stream along the affected triangle edges is automatically created for the TIN Lake arcs should be used to trace around the boundary of a lake Stream arcs can be attached up and or downstream of the lake If no downstream stream arc is attached to the lake then a node on the lake will automatically be defined as the outlet of the watershed and a drainage basin will be created for the lake stream combination If a downstream arc is defined from the lake then the downstream most point on the stream will by default be designated as the watershed outlet However any node on a lake arc can be assigned an outlet if you want to define a sub basin outlet at the lake If a lake polygon exists when using feature objects to create a TIN then the lake arcs will be enforced in the TIN as breaklines Ridge arcs should only be used when creating a TIN from feature objects and are used to designate any other besides boundary stream and lake linear segment you wish to have enforced as a breakline in the resulting TIN They have no effect when creating the hydrologic model directly f
261. dea of where streams roads etc are However often their best use is as a background map which can be used as guide for manual creation placement of streams and roads When choosing this option a second dialog will appear which allows you to add several adjacent DLG files and then import them all at the same time ACAD Streams as Feature Arcs The ACAD Streams to Feature Arcs option can be used to read in an xy or xyz file similar to the one documented in the previous paragraph in and create a series of feature arcs This file is exported by some AutoCAD applications and the format is documented in section 20 15 This format can be used to conveniently convert any xy z data to a file which not only reads the points but also connects them together Since WMS now supports direct importing and conversion of polylines from DXF files AutoCAD users will typically find this method easier see Section 3 5 2 USGS SDTS ARC INFO ASCII DTED and GRASS DEMs Grids The USGS and other government and proprietary agencies have distributed both the 1 250 000 and 1 24 000 scale USGS digital elevation files in a USGS defined format for a number of years The 1 250 000 DEMs available for download from the USGS web site remains in this format However the 1 24000 DEMs are now distribute on this site in the SDTS format Other common DEM file formats include ARC INFO ASCII Grid DTED and GRASS All of these dialogs are imported in WMS in essent
262. defining any of the hydrologic models supported by WMS The Default Model command is used to specify which model should be chosen whenever an operation that requires a choice between one of the hydrologic model is executed For example double clicking on a basin or outlet causes the Edit Parameters dialog of the default model to come up The default model is automatically set whenever a file of the given type is read or if its Edit Parameters dialog is accessed from the normal menu commands 9 5 Creating Trees 9 5 1 9 5 2 In the absence of a digital terrain model topologic tree representations of watersheds can be created using the commands found in the Tree menu Trees are automatically created when reading existing hydrologic model files Add Outlet The Add Outlet command allows the user to enter a new outlet upstream from the currently selected outlet node This represents a new confluence or sub basin outlet which is upstream from the selected outlet In this fashion a network of outlet points can be built which actually represent the stream network of the watershed The Select Vertex tool the same tool used to select outlet points on TINs can be used to select the outlet points Insert Outlet The Insert Outlet command allows the user to enter a new outlet between two selected outlet points This makes it possible to insert a confluence which may have been inadvertently left out or to simply subdivide a watershed into small
263. delineation However when triangulating a set of scattered xyz data it is difficult if not impossible to ensure that triangle edges conform to streams ridges and other drainage features Drainage coverage feature objects can be used to create a TIN that conforms to the feature objects The distribution of TIN vertices will approximate the distribution of feature arc vertices in the conceptual model 3 12 WMS NAS NN Ky NY NY W KN N IN NN NNN NN ANS S AN NN NS INN N RRS SNS SS NANANA NR SR NI NN N S RN N N ANN KV WV IN Y SN RN NN N N NS NP A NJ S SS K SSNS N SS N N SS Q K S S KI N IN RN SEN N S O IN A N NN AN NI NN SAN NY NN NNAAAAAMS NS N va N N N S S N N SSN N RRS KN N Q S x YAN N M A lt I NANAAAAAAA N Y gt SSS Y N N SR SON Ae ANNY K A NN y O AWGN SNS 4 BS RN RISERS Sy KR NN ANNA S O RV Y N K N S A SN Ni N INZ NA N N RW N NANA VY RV NS SN IN NJ Y AAS NNAN N N ASASNSSSN NAAN K S NNN N S O N N N NR NV NN N S RI N N WN ANA NJ N TAV N OS va AAA VA ZAVAVAVAVAVAVAWAVAVAVAVAVAVAVAVa APOGEO DEAD IRA AAA SANS DEAR AVS ALVA AAT VA NALAAA AAA VAD AAA AAAAD AERIAL COLE OE EEA OG 2 LOOSE N N N s N S S N N N y N
264. des such as HEC 1 are found in the menus associated with the analysis codes Other supporting data such as ArcView shapefiles DXF files USGS DEMs etc are opened using the Import command discussed later in this chapter The basic file types are as follows 2 8 WMS 2 8 2 2 8 3 TIN File File containing a set of vertices and triangle connectivity information DEM File File containing a rectangular portion of elevation points Map File File containing feature point and feature arc definitions Tree File The topologic data structure created as part of the lumped parameter models supported by WMS HEC 1 TR 20 rational method etc is stored in the tree file The tree file also stores all of the modeling parameters associated with the hydrologic models such as curve numbers precipitation etc Grid File File containing 2D finite difference grid information Scatter Point File File containing information for scatter points used in interpolating values to grids Data Set File File containing function or data set values which can be used in conjunction with scatter point or grid files Image File File containing the name of a pre registered TIFF file along with the accompanying registration points Super File File containing a list of names of other files This file is used to group a set of files together so that several files can be loaded at once by selecting the appropriate super file DXF file and image file names can
265. determined In our example the standard rational method triangular shaped hydrograph option was chosen Since the times of concentration are different and therefore the times to peak for the hydrographs the resulting peak flow is not the sum of the two basin peak flows but as can be seen in Figure 13 6 is 225 Flow vs Time 270 240 210 180 so gt N Q 0 00 0 15 0 30 0 45 1 00 Time Figure 13 6 Rational Method Hydrograph Comparison Upper Outlet For the lower outlet point a similar comparison can be made The only difference is that the time of concentration is the longest time between the time of concentration of the lower basin 21 minutes and the longest time of concentration of the two upstream basins plus the travel time through the tributary 18 6 24 minutes In this case it is 24 minutes Using the traditional method the rainfall intensity for a time of concentration equal to 24 minutes is 2 59 the total summed area is 159 6 acres and the resulting peak flow 338 1 cfs The peak flow for the route by summing methods is 366 and the comparison of hydrographs using the standard triangular rational method dimensionless unit hydrograph is shown in Figure 13 7 13 12 WMS Flow vs Time 400 350 Route by summing 300 250 200 150 100 50 30m 0 0 00 0 15 0 30 0 45 1 00 Time Figure 13 7 Rational Method Hydrograph Comparison Lower Outlet One final difference is that with the route by summing method t
266. dialog DEM Processing Full DEM processing includes flow direction accumulation computations and watershed delineation whereas the pre processing only option will only aggregate and smooth the DEM resulting in a new elevation DEM Watershed Outlet The watershed outlet is the DEM row and column where the watershed outlet is You can change this during run time to evaluate different locations 5 14 WMS 9 6 3 9 6 4 9 6 5 9 6 6 Aggregation Resampling Aggregation and resampling result in a reduction of data since DEM points in an nXn window are reduced to a single point The level of aggregation resampling can be from 2 to 20 The result is an elevation DEM with reduced resolution The difference between the two options is that resampling interpolates to find the new elevation value for each new DEM point whereas aggregation simply takes the elevation point nearest the center of the moving window Smoothing The TOPAZ smoothing option is similar to the one performed internally by WMS see section 4 6 An 3X3 window is passed over the DEM and a new elevation value is computed based on interpolation of the 9 DEM points in the window Weighting factors can be assigned to the center cross and diagonal cells Analysis and Adjustment of Outlet Depressions When removing interior pits and flat depressions it is often necessary to adjust some DEM points in the area where a depression needs to breach a higher DEM point to
267. e the first time you import a shape file it can take up to several minutes depending on size to build the correct line or polygon topology If you intend to use the data from the shape file in more than one session you should save it as a WMS map file after importing the first time Further after importing the shape files you may wish to consider the following 1 Clean see page 3 27 the feature objects in order to snap nodes within a certain distance intersect arcs and eliminate dangling arcs 2 Reorder Streams see page 3 28 for arcs which will be used as stream arcs WMS requires that the direction of an arc from node to to node be from downstream to upstream General Tools 2 11 Build Polygon see page 3 33 so that WMS can define the topologic tree used for hydrologic modeling After intersection of arcs reordering of streams etc 1t 1s often necessary to rebuild the polygon topology so that the topologic structure 1s consistent with the tree used for hydrologic modeling gt More information about how shapefile data can be used to define watersheds is given in the introductory chapter on page 1 21 The same dialog is used to import point line or polygon shape files and is shown in Figure 2 5 Import Shapefile Data x Coverage options Name default coverage Type Drainage I Points DRAINTYPE gt Drainage Point LM biS tutonalaspprtsl shp Attribute mapping W Ares DRAINTYPE gt Drainag
268. e Arc by LENGTH gt Stream length SLOPE gt Stream slope Bl CM SStutorial asparce 1 shp Attribute mapping I Polygons MEANELEY gt Basin mear 1 a LAGTIME gt Basin lag time CAMS Stutoralyasppoly shp CN gt Basin curve number PRECIP gt Basin average p Attribute mapping Import ArcView generated watershed shapefile Cancel Figure 2 5 Import Shapefile Data Dialog The following key words are used to automatically map shapefile dbase or dbf attribute field names to data within WMS 2 12 WMS Table 2 1 Keyword names to map Shape file attribute item names to WMS variables j o Parameter ___Name ___Description Possible values __ Type of point draintype 0 generic 1 link break 2 weir 3 bridge 4 culvert Pd SE outlet point Drainage arc type draintype 0 generic 3 general stream Drainage Manning s n dmannings Manning s n value floating point Polygon Attributes Drainage polygon type draintype Drainage polygon type 0 generic 1 boundary O O AE IA Drainage basin id basinid Drainage basin id integer sub basin area basinarea Basin area float sub basin slope basinslop Average slope within the sub basin A gt MAMA o lo sub basin maximum flow distance mfdist Max flow path including overland and stream flow float sub basin max flow distance slope mfdslope Slo
269. e E CH a trpe CH Add landuse ID to list cope te Import land use attribute file Import file type sos Land use file y Import SCs file Export land use attribute file Export file type oo Land use file Export SCS file Figure 3 8 Land Use Mapping Dialog Each land use polygon will have a land use ID associated with it a single integer number In order to perform the correct mapping you will need to link the appropriate land use variables to each land use ID WMS allows you to do this in one of two ways First of all with the land use coverage active you can open the Land Use Mapping dialog from the Feature Objects menu using the Attributes command and then create new IDs and enter parameters for each ID Secondly you can enter the data in a text file and then import it from within the same dialog The file format is simple and is defined in section 20 17 Parameter values for land use IDs are defined by selecting the ID in the WMS landuse ID text window and the parameter from the Selected landuse properties text window and then entering the value in the edit field 3 16 WMS If you choose to define all the data manually using the Land Use Mapping dialog you will want to export the data to a file so that you will not need to reenter the data for future models using the same land use parameter definitions Once the land use parameters have been defined land use ID s can be assigned to polygons by first s
270. e Input File Once the HY8 data have been entered you must save the input file using the Save input file button in the main dialog see Figure 15 15 You will not have the opportunity to specify a directory since the current implementation of HY8 in WMS requires that the input file be saved in the same directory where the HY8 executables reside Once WMS is installed the HY8 directory will be created in the main WMS directory the same directory where the WMS executable resides The input file name should be saved with a inp extension If you do not save the input file prior to computing the culvert hydraulics you will be prompted to do so You may also read in an existing input file using the file browser button found near the top of the main dialog Single Culvert Analysis When the Compute button is chosen with the single culvert analysis option HY8 will compute a performance curve for the first culvert defined When running the single culvert analysis you will see a DOS window appear and then disappear This is normal execution and to view the output or report generated by HY8 select the View Report button see Figure 15 15 The report actually contains several screens that come up in a DOS window 15 7 7 Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 47 including the performance rating curve as shown in Figure 15 21 The different screens in the report are scrolled by selecting the Enter key The report screen also includes options for sendin
271. e Objects Display Options Dialog Menu Commands There are several command available for creating editing and using feature objects to create stream networks basins and other supporting features From these features TINs or grids may also be created which inherit important attributes defined on the feature objects Many of the commands require that feature object s be selected prior to choosing the command In such cases the tools described previously can be used for feature object selection Vertex lt gt Node The Vertex lt gt Node command can be used to create a node from a vertex or a vertex from a node providing the node is connected to only two arcs Map Module 3 27 Vertices only define the geometry of the arc whereas nodes define the beginning and ending of an arc Therefore when converting a vertex to a node the arc to which the vertex belongs is split into two separate arcs at the selected vertex Likewise when a node is converted to a vertex the two arcs attached to the node are merged into a single arc if more than two arcs are attached to a node it cannot be converted to a vertex Cleaning Feature Objects The Clean command is used to clean up feature object data Specifically it prompts for a snapping tolerance and minimum dangling arc length and then uses these parameters to do the following 1 A check is made to see if any nodes are within tolerance of other nodes If so the nodes are snapped together
272. e RTIMP Percentage of drainage basin that is impervious Unit Hydrograph Methods 10 9 1 One of several different unit hydrograph methods can be chosen when generating synthetic hydrographs A method is assigned to a basin by first selecting the basin and then choosing the Unit Hydrograph Method button from the Edit HEC 1 Parameters dialog As with other basin options the same parameters can be assigned to several basins by selecting multiple basins before accessing the Unit Hydrograph Method dialog HEC 1 Unit Hydrograph Methods Clark UC Kinematic wave UK ee fo oo00 A 8 0000 I First kinematic record HO eine Tine Ares L momi lt oom O Snyder US N ioo a f0 0000 ir ooo ce o oo perne lossy Wetine lime Sea M Second kinematic record SCS dimensionless UD L 0 0000 at Jo o000 TLAG 1 0789 H 0 0000 A Jo o000 Given unit hpdrograph UI Define Loss Heine Unt Graph te BRE C RD Miancopa Louis Aaraph Define Eharmmels Basin Geometrical Attributes Compute Parameters Basin Data Eompute Tine erea Lurvele Eompute Parameters Map Mata E Cancel Figure 10 9 HEC 1 Unit Hydrograph Dialog Clark UC The parameters for the Clark method are as follows HEC 1 Interface 10 19 e TC Time of concentration in hours for the unit hydrograph Several different equations exist for determining the time of concentration The list of basin geometric attributes computed automatically when
273. e an HEC 1 simulation and an NFF simulation in WMS then save an HEC 1 or NFF file to your computer s hard disk If you save only an HEC 1 file close WMS start it up later then read the HEC 1 file in you will lose the NFF data you entered into WMS Alternatively if you save an NFF file close WMS start it up later then read in the NFF file you will lose your HEC 1 data Some models such as the Rational method and NFF do not support diversions Therefore if a diversion is created in one of these models it is not saved when the model file is saved To fix these problems the WMS Tree file has been created The WMS Tree file contains all the data necessary to restore all the tree data from all the models in WMS When creating a model file you will need to save out a model file when running the model from WMS But you should save all your tree data to a WMS tree file as well Doing this will insure that all your tree data will be restored each time you re start WMS 9 10 WMS To save a Tree file simply select the Save As command from the File menu This will give you all the options for saving a super project file Make sure you are saving out a Tree file specify a filename for the Tree file and the Tree file will be saved You can read a Tree file in from the Open command in the File menu CHAPTER 10 HEC 1 Interface 10 1 Introduction 10 1 1 10 1 2 10 1 3 In order to provide an integrated hydrologic a
274. e appearance of the flood plain they differ from the options discussed in the section titled Flood Display Options The flood plain must be delineated for these options to take effect Flood Plain Options E Delineation options 0 000 Minimum flood plain value 2 000 Flood plain interval Fixed number of stage values f g Num nearest stage values C Fixed radius foo Fixed radius stage import options Snap stage values to closest stream Only import stages inside TIN boundary Cancel _ Figure 8 2 Flood Plain Options Dialog Minimum Flood Plain Value The value entered in this data entry indicates the water depth at which the flood plain boundaries will begin to be drawn Flood plain boundaries are delineated at incremental water depths see the section titled Flood Plain Interval with the first boundary being defined at the minimum flood plain value By default this value is zero representing the maximum extent of inundation of the floodwaters No negative values may be entered for the minimum flood plain value 8 8 8 6 WMS 8 5 2 8 5 3 8 5 4 Flood Plain Interval WMS allows the user to delineate flood plain boundaries for multiple water depths simultaneously Water depths for which flood plains are delineated are determined from the minimum flood plain value and the flood plain interval The first or outermost flood plain is delineated for the water depth specified by the minimum flood
275. e being imported If you turn on the snap stage values to closest stream option then the stage will be defined at the closest stream node and it does not need to have a matching xy value You may also specify to eliminate stage values that are completely outside of the TIN boundary Floodplains WMS delineates flood plains based upon stage values entered by the user interactively read from a stage data file or interpolated along a stream between known stage values The delineation technique makes use of a inverse distance weighted interpolation scheme and gradient plane information calculated for defined stage locations on the TIN as described earlier 8 6 1 8 6 2 Flood Plain Analysis 8 9 Delineate Flood This menu selection will delineate a flood plain based upon all fixed and interpolated stage values that are defined on the TIN As described earlier WMS delineates flood plains by means of gradient planes passed through each vertex where a stage value is defined When calculating the stage contributions of the nearest vertices the program must know how many nearest vertices to use This value can be set in the Flood Plain Options dialog The value used will be the lesser of the maximum number of vertices with stage values defined and will be set in the Flood Plain Options dialog The number entered here determines how many vertices are to be used in the delineation interpolation scheme A TIN may have only one flood plain delinea
276. e interpolation This command is intended to correct single isolated DEM points or a single row column and is not intended to create data for large regions of NODATA cells especially regions on the border of the DEM Lat Lon Calculator The Lat Lon gt UTM command can be used to convert a pair of latitude longitude coordinates into their corresponding UTM coordinates This is useful when working with DEM data or gage locations in order to properly geo reference objects with data being worked on in WMS Coordinates can be entered in either the degrees minutes seconds format or as seconds only as show in Figure 4 33 To locate the UTM coordinates calculated in this dialog in your data it may be useful to toggle on the Create feature point at this location check box This will create a point in the Graphics window at the given UTM coordinates Lat Lon To UTH Latitude Morth e Degrees Minutes Seconds Ci Arc Seconde South i Latitude o fo 0 lo Longitude nual Longitude lo lo lo lo East UTM Coordinates Bee Tee Convert _ Create feature point at this location cos Figure 4 3 Lat Lon to UTM Dialog CHAPTER 5 9 1 Drainage DEMs Introduction The previous chapter discussed all of the tools used to manipulate smooth and visualize DEMs A DEM can further be used to provide a background elevation source for the creation of a TIN from feature objects or to perform drainage analysis using informati
277. e name is defaulted to ID B where ID is an internal identification number and B stands for basin The name can be changed to something more identifiable at any time While TR 55 does not require that basin names are unique other models supported by WMS do Time of Concentration Three different options exist for determining the basin time of concentration tc 1 The time of concentration can be computed outside of WMS and entered into the appropriate edit field 2 Second the Compute Tc Basin Data button can be chosen and one of the time of concentration or lag time equations specified this option is only available when you have computed basin data from either a TIN or a DEM The available equations in WMS are described in section 7 7 11 3 Finally a series of time computation arcs may be used to define overland sheet and channel flow with in a basin and then travel times for each arc are summed to compute the total travel time or time of concentration for the basin The Compute Tc Map Data button accesses the dialog which allows you to combine arcs within the currently selected basin to compute a time of concentration A description of the time computation coverage can be found in section 3 2 6 and it s use 1s described in more detail in section 15 3 Drainage Area Enter the area of the basin in this edit field If you have delineated a watershed from feature objects a DEM or a TIN the drainage area can
278. e profile be sure to turn on the Save station edits toggle WMS will create arc vertices for each of the interior points but will use the elevation values you have provided rather than interpolating from a TIN or DEM Rain Gage Coverage The rain gage coverage was designed specifically for use with the HEC 1 interface in WMS The HEC 1 interface allows the x y coordinates of gages to be defined see section 10 14 and then a series of thiessen polygons created from the gages When gages are present weights are assigned to each basin from the thiessen polygon network as the basin data are computed Using the feature point create select tools gages can be created edited in a rain gage coverage by graphical selection as opposed to the HEC 1 interface where the coordinates are typed in explicitly As feature points are created edited a rain gage is simultaneously created note that the feature point and the rain gage point are separate because it is still possible to create the gages without a rain gage coverage by typing in the coordinates in the HEC 1 interface The only feature in the rain gage coverage is points Rain gage display options are 3 22 WMS found under the Drainage tab if you are asking why it is clearly a good question but historical reasons is the only excuse we can provide General Coverage Sometimes you may be unsure which coverage attributes to use especially when importing a layer from another source GIS DXF The
279. e section 2 8 7 All of the drainage data computed entered for the TIN basins and junctions areas lag times slopes and other hydrologic modeling parameters are automatically transferred during the conversion process CHAPTER 8 Flood Plain Analysis 8 1 Introduction In addition to stream network and drainage basin delineation WMS can also be used to perform flood plain delineation Stage values water depth are defined by the user at selected locations in the TIN A smooth surface representing the water surface is then constructed which interpolates these stage values This surface is then intersected with the triangles in the TIN and the resulting set of edges defines the flood plain The water surface is constructed from the stage values using a special type of inverse distance weighted IDW interpolation For each vertex where a stage value has been assigned a plane is constructed which interpolates the water surface elevation at the vertex The slope of the plane approximates the water surface elevation at the vertex These planes are called gradient planes and the surface is constructed by blending the planes together to form a continuous smooth surface which honors the stage values At each point of the surface the elevation is defined by averaging the elevation of the gradient planes at that point During the averaging process more weight is given to planes whose vertices are nearest the interpolation point An imp
280. e the TIN into subtriangles Figure 6 4 The Uniformly Subdivide TIN command can be used to smooth a TIN When using a TIN for contouring the contours are computed using a linear interpolation of the triangles If the vertices are sparse the contours are not smooth and the plot may not appear natural The contours can be smoothed by copying the vertices to a scatter point set subdividing the TIN into subtriangles and interpolating the z values or other data sets from the scatter point set to the new vertices defining the subtriangles Figure 6 4 TIN a Before and b After Uniform Subdivision Subdivision and smoothing can be accomplished using the following steps 1 Convert the TIN to a scatter point set using the TIN gt Scatter Points command in the TINs menu 6 6 4 TINS 6 15 2 Subdivide the TIN by selecting the Uniformly Subdivide TIN command from the TINs menu 3 Switch to the 2D Scatter Point module and select an interpolation method using the Interpolation Options command in the Interpolation menu 4 Select the to TIN command from the Interpolation menu This creates a new elevation set for the TIN Merging TINs You can merge a selected TIN with another TIN using the Merge to Active command in the TINs menu This is particularly useful if you wish to merge a TIN generated from one program with a TIN derived from a background elevation source such as a DEM For example you may have surveyed data with
281. ead of others Altering the order of the options in the project file could cause problems the next time the project file is read into WMS or used with CASC2D Because there are so many files involved in a CASC2D project it is a good idea to create a separate directory for each project This will help avoid problems associated with mixing files of different simulations together Saving a CASC2D Project The Save Project File command is used to save CASC2D project files After issuing this command a dialog appears with numerous file names Figure 19 1 File names for options which are active are undimmed while those for options which are not currently being used are dimmed While this dialog may seem foreboding it 1s actually very simple to use The name of the project file is shown at the top of the dialog and can be changed by clicking on the File Browser button Once the project file name is specified the name in the prefix edit field 1s updated to reflect the prefix of project file This same prefix can then be applied to all files by clicking on the Update button to the right of the edit field The other file name edit fields need not be changed manually but are listed separately so that single files can be renamed with other prefixes if the need arises 19 4 WMS CASC2D Project File Project file untitled pry Prefix for all files untitled Update All Prefixes Watershed mask Juntitled msk Map file untitled map Maternal ID Jun
282. eaning after a TIN has been created from a conceptual model using feature objects and a background elevation source it is possible that flat triangles flat edges pits and other TIN anomalies may exist Flat objects must always be removed before performing any type of drainage analysis Most of these problems occur because of a lack of resolution in the elevation data it would be impractical though in most cases to increase the resolution to the point where these anomalies are eliminated Most of the problems can be fixed by a combination of inserting additional vertices deleting some vertices smoothing elevations adding breaklines or swapping edges In order to automate the editing process as much as possible several different techniques are provided to remove flat objects and better infer stream networks e Interpolating Flat Triangles Edges Inserts new points in flat triangles and adjusts the elevation of the new points by using an interpolation technique This method works well when there is a small number of clustered 2 10 flat triangles However when large regions of flat triangles exist the TIN filtering should be used before trying to remove flat objects e Smoothing Flat Triangles This method works well if you have isolated flat triangles that are not clustered no more than 2 or three adjacent flat triangles With this method flow paths are computed into and out of the flat triangle to infer the general direction of
283. eate Arc The Create Arc tool is used to interactively create new arcs An arc is created by clicking once on the location where the arc is to begin clicking once to define the location of each of the vertices in the interior of the arc and double clicking at the location of the end node of the arc As arcs are created 1t 1s often necessary for the beginning or ending node of the arc to coincide with an existing node If you click on an existing node within a given pixel tolerance when beginning or ending an arc that node is used to define the arc node as opposed to creating a new node Also if you click on a vertex of another arc while creating an arc that vertex is converted to a node and the node is used in the new arc If an existing point is clicked on while creating an arc the point is converted to a vertex unless it is the beginning or ending location of an arc in which case it is converted to a node While creating an arc it is not uncommon to make a mistake by clicking on the wrong location In such cases hitting the BACKSPACE key backs up the arc by one vertex The ESCAPE key can also be used to abort the entire arc creation process at any time The new arc type is determined from the Feature Arc Type dialog accessed from the Attributes command in the Feature Objects menu The Feature Object Type dialog that comes up when selecting the Attributes command is determined by the currently active tool For example if the Select
284. eation and watershed characterization with DEMs Once these data are imported and flow accumulations computed stream networks and basin boundaries are defined with the aid of feature objects Arcs representing streams and feature points or nodes representing basin outlets must be present in order to define basins Once basins are defined watershed and sub basin boundaries can be converted to feature polygons All of the ties to the hydrologic models are made available through these feature objects with geometric values such as area Slopes lengths etc being populated from the DEM data DEM Streams gt Feature Arcs The DEM gt Stream Arcs command is used to create feature arcs from DEM points whose flow accumulation values are above a defined threshold An arc vertex is created for each DEM point that has a flow accumulation value greater than the threshold entered Consecutive stream DEM points are then joined together as arcs with nodes created at junction points where the stream splits 5 10 WMS 9 9 2 By default stream arcs are created for all DEM points that have a flow accumulation larger than the threshold Outlet feature points nodes are created at DEM points which pass the accumulation threshold and do not have a neighboring point with a higher accumulation The stream is traced upstream by noting the neighboring DEM point with the next highest accumulation This process is repeated until no neighboring point has an accumula
285. ed for each lake 3 2 1 Map Module 3 25 Feature Polygon Type Ea O Generic a Boundary Lake Initial leakage discharge Spillway crest width Discharge coefficient Initial water elevation Crest elevation Figure 3 14 Feature Polygon Type Dialog for CASC2D Coverages Display Options Display options control which feature objects are displayed Each object is listed in the Feature Object Display Options dialog Figure 3 15 The check box next to the object name can be toggled on or off to control whether or not the feature is to be displayed In addition the color button to the left of the check box can be used to set the color and other appropriate attributes such as radius line thickness line style etc Some of the display options are coverage specific and therefore the display options dialog is slightly different for each different coverage type The active coverage type determines which of the display options dialogs is used 3 26 WMS 3 2 8 Display Options ki Hydrologic Modeling 2D Grid Scatter Poirt TIN Drainage Flood DEM Map Achve coverage Fonts Nodes _tio s W PointsNodes lic Generic MN Y Vettices MAY Stream e Watershed outlets m Lake Polygons E L D s Po IY Generic lu Ho un 4 Boundary Change lt 0A color MW Lake Change inactive coverage color Drawing l e Ten Image Display Options MW Lines M Rectangles W Ovals Figure 3 15 Featur
286. ed it can be used to perform all of the watershed characterization operations available in WMS Tabular Data to Scattered Data Tabular data can be generated from a common spreadsheet or other database management program and read into WMS to create a set of scattered points with either a single or a transient data set Tabular Data to Feature Object Data Tabular data from ARC INFO or other database program can be imported into WMS and associated with feature objects Currently only land use and soul type data is supported The file consists of a self describing header followed by the data to be imported The self describing header tells WMS what values are represented and the order of the data in the file The following are the available key words that should appear on the first line of the file you wish to input The key words can be in any order but WMS will interpret the data on the following lines in the order that the key words appear One of the feature object ID cards must be included as one of the key words If data exists in your tabular data that cannot be associated with one of the feature objects and you don t want to edit it out of the file you can use the NODATA key word for that column s POINTID ARCID POLYID LANDUSE SOILTYPE NODATA The following is an example tabular data file which associates a land use id with polygons POLYID LANDUSE 111 1223 13 29 1430 15 28 6 24 Spaces commas or tabs
287. ed to select triangles for operations such as deletion In addition to the standard multi selection options another type of multi selection is available with this tool By holding down the CTRL key while dragging the cursor a selection line can be entered Al triangles intersected by the line are added to the selection list El Select TIN The Select TIN tool is used to select one of the TINs currently in use by WMS When this tool is active a triangular icon 1s placed at the centroid of the TIN so that it can be selected by clicking in the icon Selected TINs can be used to set the active status or to merge with another TIN I Select Vertex Strings The Select Vertex Strings tool 1s used to select one or more strings of vertices Vertex strings are used for operations such as adding breaklines to the TIN or selecting a string of vertices which will be used to create a stream The procedure for selecting vertex strings 1s somewhat different than the normal selection procedure Strings are selected as follows e Click on the starting vertex for the string The vertex selected will be highlighted in red e Click on any subsequent vertices you would like to be part of the string vertices do not have to be next to each other and double click on the final vertex The vertices selected are now connected by a solid red line e To remove the last vertex from a string press the BACKSPACE key To abort entering a vertex string press the ESC ke
288. ed using standard overland and channel flow equations such as those used by the FHWA TR 55 or any other user defined equation Since most equations used for travel time are functions of flow path length and slope WMS automatically determines the length of the arc and if a TIN or DEM is available the slope and makes them available for use in an equation Time of concentration arcs are similar to stream arcs as defined in the drainage coverage in that their direction is important When creating time computation arcs you should always define them from downstream to upstream in the same way that drainage arcs are defined Time computation arcs are the only type of arcs in the Time Computation coverage Each arc is assigned a time of travel equation Equations may be selected from a library of equations or as a user defined equation The predefined equations in WMS include TR55 FHWA and Maricopa County For example TR55 includes the standard equations for sheet flow shallow concentrated flow and open channel flow The dialog shown in Figure 3 10 is used to assign the arc attributes and corresponding values for the parameters of the equation so that a travel time for the arc can be determined Map Module 3 19 Time Computation Arc Attributes Are Instructions Results The Time of Concentration for this arc is 6 819 hrs Arc 26 Equation Type TRES sheet flow egr Equatic 007 n L 8 P 5 3 4 Wanablez
289. edit field Creating a Storage Capacity Curve If the Create storage capacity curve option is chosen then a relationship between elevation area volume is computed using the TIN geometry These 7 10 WMS 7 6 2 three curves are stored in the storage list used by the time series editor so that they can be used later to define routing in one of the supported hydrologic models or in the detention basin calculator section 15 6 WMS computes these relationships by beginning at the outlet elevation and incrementing the elevation by the number of specified divisions until the specified water surface elevation 1s obtained At each increment the area between that elevation and the outlet elevation is computed and then volumes between adjacent surface elevations are computed using the conic method see section 15 6 The storage capacity elevation area volume data can be stored in either English or metric units Deleting Reservoirs An entire reservoir can be deleted by selecting the reservoir outlet using the Select Vertices tool and issuing the Delete Selected Reservoir command 7 7 Drainage LA 7 7 2 Drainage basins are defined by starting a flow path from the centroid of each triangle and then classifying it according to the outlet first encountered by the flowpath Once the basins are defined many attributes associated with the basin such as area slope and maximum flow distance can be determined displayed or written to a file
290. eeloernaleumeiondegtiaas 21 2 active inactive activate with polygoW serieei 17 7 O O 16 4 16 6 16 9 O 16 8 arc O ON 3 8 5 3 arc type CASCO ii aa 3 23 A tia ies Mnte ean eos 3 12 arc vertices A CON 3 7 5 2 ARC INFO ASC Sd TING doses aceasta tvadeateas eee 20 20 CX POU uan lados 2 21 shape NCS tidad 2 10 A E TO E T N 3 4 creating polygons ccccccccccnncccnonnonnnccnnnnnnss 3 33 creatine streanis TOM oirein cacacri n 3 33 dans INO OP e 3 27 IMSS COIN aA es scaveadennaneannamterten 3 27 reverse CITE CUON eskoa 3 33 LIME compila id 15 25 AY CVIEW superfile ooooocccncccnnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnanonoss 2 14 INE EPEE EAE NET ATA 10 12 11 7 15 12 computing for basins 5 11 7 12 clevai on ZONES is caseeen acct deadertarenvatauieenan 7 13 ADEC O o o coc ec S 15 12 assign land USE il 3 16 ASSIST SOUMY PE ias 3 17 attributes DEMI ci eiii 2 18 ato ted ace oaid n 2 35 dto Cent 2 36 UG op cat ach A E E E E T 9 3 SO E ol COPE OE ROO ne OTe 21 4 BACKSPACE key A O ian hl Ses Sas lshead as 2 26 select DY POLY COM tis piba direis 2 27 Selecting vertex strings cccccccccccncnnnononocnnnnnnss 6 2 DALY CONUING in 18 11 base flow TREO ansiada 11 4 Dase HOW lana SS 10 13 basin delineation COMIMANdS ccccccncncnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnoss 7 1 ASIN delineato eneon 5 10 basins ME iso EAEN 5 11 7 12 attribute display colof o occcccccnccnnnnnmmo 7 5 attributes A wisumuatadenes 15 12 AS DEC A
291. el delineated by WMS 12 2 WMS 12 2 1 Initializing a TR 55 Simulation The first time you open the TR 55 simulation dialog no matter whether you have a basin an outlet or nothing selected the only option available in the TR 55 dialog is the Initialize TR 55 Data button In order to allocate memory in WMS for TR 55 variables you must initialize the data once Should you decide to work with a different model you may want to choose the Delete TR 55 Data button If you are planning on using a TIN DEM or feature objects to delineate and compute watershed parameters you should initialize TR 55 data first so that computed parameters can be stored in the TR 55 data Structures 12 2 2 Basin Data The following information must be determined and appropriate values entered for each sub basin 1 Drainage Basin Area 2 Time of Concentration 3 SCS NRCS Curve Number 4 24 hour rainfall depth and an appropriate time distribution curve Optionally the effects of water bodies can be determined by entering the percent of the watershed covered by lakes ponds 12 2 3 Outlet Data WMS allows you to define your watershed as a single basin or you may also subdivide the watershed into multiple sub basins Besides computing peak flows using the standard TR 55 equations storm hydrographs may also be computed for each basin and then combined lagged to downstream outlets junctions using the TR 55 tabular hydrograph method When you create
292. elative to the vertices of the triangle The coordinates are based solely on the geometry of the triangle Area coordinates are sometimes called barycentric coordinates The relative magnitude of the coordinates corresponds to area ratios as shown in Figure 18 7 The xy coordinates of the interior point can be written in terms of the xy coordinates of the vertices using the area coordinates as follows X DEDO ED a ee 18 16 18 12 WMS MCh a oh Gia raid 18 17 ECC cre oes o IIA 18 18 Figure 18 7 Barycentric Coordinates for a Point in a Triangle Solving the above equations for bj bj and bx yields 1 b 2A EPT ST AAA ticetaresscaaneies 18 19 1 bj 2A XKVIKTXIV EFC Y HR XA Y e ooccccccccnoooncononcnnnnnononaconnccnnncnnno 18 20 1 D 2A ANAYA YAA RAY e i 18 21 1 As y A Sm VaR reste taper theetaeentees 18 22 Using the weight functions defined above the interpolating surface at points inside a triangle is computed as F x y W x y Qi x y Wj x y Qj x y WECGY QKCKY reece 18 23 where Wi Wj and Wx are the weight functions and Qi Qj and Qx are the nodal functions for the three vertices of the triangle IDW interpolation using local weights as defined in equation 18 15 can be selected in the Weighting Method section of the IDW Interpolation Options dialog This type of weighting is significantly faster than the standard weighting method particularly if the number of scatter points is
293. electing the desired polygon s and then choosing the Attributes command from the Feature Object menu or by double clicking on the polygon and choosing the appropriate ID from the WMS landuse ID text window Mapping files may also be imported exported so that if you constantly use the same landuse id attributes you do not need to enter the values for each new model Once land use IDs have been assigned to polygons and parameters linked to the land use IDs model parameters can be computed using the Compute Composite Runoff Coeff CN command from the Calculators menu in the Hydrologic Modeling module see section 15 2 Soil Type Coverage The soil type coverage is similar to the land use coverage in that it can be used to map different model parameters related to soil type from polygonal coverages usually imported from a GIS The following 1s a list of operations that can be done using soil type coverages and the parameters that must be linked to soil ID s 1 Hydrologic soil group to map SCS Curve Numbers requires the use of a land use coverage as well Soil Type Number must be O for type A 1 for type B 2 for type C and 3 for type D 2 Runoff coefficients for the Rational Method C in Q CIA Runoff coefficient 3 Green amp Ampt parameters for infiltration modeling in HEC Hydraulic conductivity percent impervious percent effective You indicate which application s you wish to use the soil type coverage for
294. elet naa aa tawucau sacra cea taaatcustuuseutaratecas 8 10 delineation options cccsssseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 7 ESCUDO OT sosaren as 8 1 display Opluions sa 8 2 displasia ease aduaceed canons 8 3 EXportino to iodo 8 9 Eje y 10 PACA PE LF SEO O ee mr meter eer ret 8 4 A O O 8 7 flow accumulati0DS sosen 5 7 TIO WIRE CU ONS ic 5 7 HONDA 6 4 dina DASS a a eae 7 10 O ance tues otesiteauiet aateelobane 7 5 doy aa lara daa 7 5 maximum within a basin ees 15 12 UEP AI EAA T T E TO E 7 5 HOW AUIS esa a todnsealalansts 5 2 5 11 TOW pate MIS ada ade 7 12 A o o O 7 12 format EALS EPE AE E EE Mia suas EEE EE 20 1 frame ENC EATE AE E T E ST 9 3 TEAC WIN AOC ME POE BO E a 2 36 DTIC O E TE E A E E O 16 5 ABEE S EELEE ENEIT E NA EEN TE 17 5 Cilia 2 32 Ne SING IPC PL A nn A o 2 31 ftp USGS DEM cies 4 1 gage A AT A E EAT AAE 17 3 computing WelghtS ccccccccnononononononcnnnnnss 10 14 Erea n O at eaaates 10 32 CCAS aa 16 9 16 11 17 3 CNE EE E aint ica co Ecas 16 13 A deat Woncehesuansamauaae 16 11 ld 10 32 A A A IN 16 12 IPMS PPP Ap A ETE 16 10 20 22 MAI OL o ananassae 16 10 interpolation method ccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 16 10 PIOE MaMa lina dels 16 12 nn iencaentes 16 14 POMO odo 10 33 PUN aay a 16 12 A O 10 34 A 16 11 A A PRT mr 10 34 COONS spec lesa earnact assole nate aca iee nega 16 11 O 10 34 A cata nteaeecinmentere 10 14 10 32 A se T A E nds aecaew tailback tam ont ances 10 32 CAVING SALONS A
295. eleting moving arc vertices directly rather than trying to edit in the Cross Section Editor The several tools are used to select cross section points el create new ones delete selected ones xl wk or control the display by refreshing Edl framing FHI panning or zooming aj Since 1t 1s often difficult to visualize the cross section when the z scale is the same as the x station you can change the z scale to something more appropriate using the drop down combo box Finally the name of the cross section is important because if you want to compute hydraulic properties for it from the cross section calculator you will need to be able to identify it By default WMS will name a new cross section arc XsectionID where ID is the ID of the arc but you may wish to change it to be something more identifiable The Export button allows you to save the current cross section to a space delimited file station elevation n that can be imported in a spreadsheet or hydraulic modeling program The mport button allows you to import a space delimited file If you wish to analyze a surveyed cross section or one that is not cut from a TIN or DEM in WMS you can enter the station elevation information directly To do so you will first need to create an arc dont worry about having intermediate vertices though then in the Cross Section Editor you can edit the end station and elevations and insert new points on the cross section for each of the points along th
296. els you intend to create In order to obtain more memory there are a few things you can do Exit other programs currently running Edit your CONFIG SYS file and turn off any RAM drives From the control panel choose the 386 Enhanced icon Select the virtual memory option and increase the size of your virtual memory WMS Installation Guide WMS dialog boxes appear to take up the entire screen and some will be larger than the screen Check to make sure your monitor is running in Super VGA display mode WMS requires a display minimum screen resolution of 1024x768 Use the Windows setup command to change the display mode Check with your Microsoft Windows documentation for a description of how to change the screen display resolution WMS immediately quits upon starting up It is possible that WIN32s was not installed successfully Try running the FreeCell program that was installed on you hard drive as part of the WIN32s installation If it does not run try reinstalling WIN32s If the problem persists there may be an incompatibility between your systems hardware and Microsoft s WIN32s Contact the manufacturer of your computer You used the alternative method to register the licensing of WMS if you are running Windows NT and WMS comes up as an evaluation copy even though WMS has been previously registered WMS will startup as an Evaluation Copy only if the WMS password file does not exist or an incorrect password is defined in
297. enerated when the object is shaded The current color ramp and the values of the active scalar data set are used to vary the colors on the grid in a continuous fashion By default the minimum color on the color ramp is associated with the minimum data set value and the maximum color is associated with the maximum data set value The Fringe Options dialog can be used to force the ramp of colors to be confined to a smaller interval specified by the user This forces all of the color gradation to be concentrated in a particular range of 16 6 WMS interest The Fringe Options dialog is accessed using the Fringe Opts command in the Data menu or from the Data Browser 16 6 Mapping Elevations For 2D grids it is often useful to change the values used for the elevations of the objects For example suppose a set of data values has been interpolated to a grid The values can be displayed using contours Another way to display the values is to map the data set to the mesh elevations This option further emphasizes the variation in the data when the grid is displayed in oblique view Any data set can be mapped to elevations using the Map to Elevations command in the Data menu The original elevations are always saved as a data set so that the original elevations can be restored at a later time 16 7 Film Loop Animation One of the most powerful 2D visualization tools in WMS is animation An animation sequence can be generated for a grid with a transi
298. ent data set is imported to WMS to a grid the data set is interpolated to each gage and a curve is drawn in the Hydrograph window representing the variation of the data set with time at each gage The plot can be customized to include any combination of gages and data sets Field data can be imported from text files and plotted for comparison with computed curves Gages and gage plots are supported only in the 2D Grid module The Gages Dialog A set of gages can be created by selecting the Gages command from the Data menu This command activates the Gages dialog shown in Figure 16 5 All existing gages are listed in the text box in the upper left corner of the dialog One of these gages is highlighted at all times The name color and location of the highlighted gage can be edited using the controls on the right hand portion of the dialog The color and name are used in displaying the gage in the Graphics Window 16 10 WMS A new gage can be added to the list of gages by selecting the New button beneath the list of gages A highlighted gage can be removed from the list by selecting the delete button A set of gages can be imported from a text file by selecting the Import button The format of the gage file is described in Chapter 20 A set of measured curves can be included in the gage file for comparison with computed curves A set of gages created within WMS can be exported to a file for future use by selecting the Export button The Inter
299. ent data set to illustrate how contours vary as a function of time Each frame of the animation is stored as an image as part of an AVI file The entire set of frames in an animation sequence is referred to as a film loop Animation film loops are generated by selecting the Film Loop command in the Data menu This command brings up the Film Loop dialog shown Figure 16 3 The Film Loop dialog is used to control the playback of film loops A new film loop can be generated by selecting the Setup button Once a film loop has been generated it can be saved to an AVI file using the Save button Previously saved film loops can be read from disk using the Read button they can also be run using any AVI playing software or included in presentation software documents Film Loop TPA ia l eg Done Figure 16 3 Film Loop Dialog 16 7 1 16 7 2 16 7 3 Data Sets 16 7 Saving Film Loops Saving and reading film loops is useful since some film loops may take a significant amount of time to generate depending on the complexity of the image The film loops are saved to disk in a compressed AVI format Film Loop Playback Once a new AVI film loop has been generated or an AVI film loop has been read from disk several options are available for playing back the film loop The buttons at the upper left of the Film Loop dialog are designed to mimic the buttons on a VCR or CD player The Play button causes the film loop to cycle continuously T
300. equired for peak flow estimations using the USGS state by state regression equations The dialog is shown in Figure 14 1 Hatin Flood Fr gui cs Agenda Equabohs ls Tend FJ Haa Tatal area fg rrd Waa fund gun Rocky TH Ten pl 5 fia Fag nal mas n equal adobo Fagor dvarlpped by wetara bad wns i I i i nn Puget hegi ie j biel 2 amp cE Puna Peak Be i ETLI a E H AE Fanal Pook ELO 1 HIT EF T H rE PSL Park EEr 1 is rm E Bs Pai Fook pu sun dea E H Phannal Fash gia Li deh i E Bre Final Funk Him 1 Lai MA Mr E Figure 14 1 Run NFF Simulation Dialog The text window at the lower center of the dialog acts as both a model checker leading you step by step in setting up a simulation as well as the location where peak flow results are displayed The following sections describe the steps necessary to set up a simulation 14 2 1 14 2 2 14 2 3 14 2 4 14 2 5 NFF Interface 14 3 Basin Name The basin name is not required to run a simulation and is primarily used for identification in the topologic tree window If you are going to run either HEC 1 or TR20 with the same model you should keep the name to six characters or less State The NFF regression equations are separated by state The State button is used to specify the state that your watershed is located in Once the state is specified the available regions will appear in the regional equations text window Besides the 50 US states an equation fo
301. er sub basins The Insert Outlet command can also be used to insert a new outlet at the base of a tree In such cases then only the bottom most outlet should be selected before issuing the Insert Outlet command 9 5 3 9 5 4 9 5 5 9 5 6 9 5 7 9 5 8 Topological Trees 9 5 Delete Outlet The Delete Outlet command allows the user to delete selected outlet points The Select Vertices tool can be used to select outlet points which are to be deleted Add Basin The Add Basin command defines a new drainage basin for the selected outlet point Any number of sub basins can be associated with each outlet point Typically there are either one or two a sub basin for each upstream branch depending on whether or not the outlet point represents a branch in a stream network Delete Basin The Delete Basin command can be used to delete a selected drainage basin from a given outlet The Select Drainage Basin tool should be active to select a basin icon Add Reservoir A reservoir can be created for an outlet by selecting the outlet and choosing the Add Reservoir command from the Tree menu By creating a reservoir at an outlet storage routing for the outlet can be done followed by routing from the outlet of the reservoir to the next downstream outlet point Delete Reservoir The Delete Reservoir command can be used to delete a selected reservoir from a given outlet The Select Outlets tool should be active to select an outlet icon w
302. erior of each flat triangle The subdivision factor in the Interpolation Scheme dialog controls the level of subdivision or the number of interior points The point in each flat triangle with the maximum deviation is assumed to represent the maximum for that triangle Once the deviations are determined WMS locates the flat triangle whose deviation is the maximum A new point is added at the XY location of the maximum deviation The elevation of the new point is computed using the IDW quadratic interpolation scheme The new point is inserted into the TIN and the TIN is adjusted locally to accommodate the new point Many times the insertion of a new point in a flat triangle combined with the local retriangulation of the TIN results in the removal of several flat triangles The list of flat triangles is updated the flat triangle with the next largest deviation is found and the process is repeated By inserting new points in this fashion the minimum number of new points will be added in the best possible locations to infer local minima and maxima such as pits peaks streams and ridges Once all flat triangles have been eliminated further processing to remove flat edges and pits is done Prior to performing the Remove Flat Objects command all TIN vertices are locked Any new vertices created as part of this process are set to ulocked status When completed you will be able to distinguish the new vertices from the original by observing the ones that
303. ers Define the rainfall values Define stream channels and cross section properties Run the Model Checker Save the project file Run CASC2D The majority of the CASC2D model is set up from with in the Grid module so the required tools are the same as for that module Stream channels are set up using arcs in the Map module 19 4 Reading And Writing Casc2d Project Files Several different files are required to run a CASC2D simulation In most cases there is a separate grid file for each grid cell attribute along with files for precipitation and channel routing In order to conveniently manage all of these files WMS uses a project file The project file is a file which contains the options and names of files being used for a particular simulation Whenever a CASC2D project is saved from WMS all of the currently defined options and filenames are saved to a project file In addition all options which require the use of a separate file are saved When reading a project file the 19 4 1 CASC2D Interface 19 3 options and all accompanying files are read back into WMS Furthermore the CASC2D program distributed with WMS reads this same project file so that it can be conveniently executed using the project file name as a single command line argument While the project file itself could be edited it is important not to change the order or delete some of the options manually since certain aspects of a CASC2D simulation must be created ah
304. es Are Instructions Results The Time of Concentration for this arc ig 0 579 hrs Equation Type TR55 shallow conc egr E quaticL S600 Vanables Paved NO 5 Slope 0 040 ft ft L Length 6692480 ft Hydraulic Radius Ealeulatei Time of Concentration has units of hours Cancel Variable value fo o00 Figure 15 6 Time Computation Arc Attributes Dialog This dialog is used to set all values and compute travel times for selected arcs It can be accessed by selecting an arc and then choosing the Attributes command from the Feature Objects menu in the map module by double clicking on the arc when in the map module or when using the Travel Time 15 26 WMS Computation dialog see Figure 15 8 If multiple arcs are selected then the ArcID window displays the ID of all selected arcs and you may edit the equations variables of any selected arc by choosing it from this window While the selected arc is highlighted in the Graphics Window you may find it useful to toggle on the display of arc ID s from the Feature Object Display Options dialog see section 3 2 7 When using the Time Computation Arc Attributes dialog the Instructions Results window will let you know which variables need to be entered before a time computation can be made and when all variables are defined it will display the computed travel time of the selected arc Editing Equation Variables Equation variables from the currently se
305. es Deleting the image removes it from memory Since only one image at a time can be displayed the current image must be deleted whenever a new image 1s either imported or created using the screen capture command 3 4 7 3 4 8 Map Module 3 47 Exporting Images The Export Image command is used to save a TIFF image and its accompanying registration points When this command is issued the currently contents of the TIN window are written out in a TIFF file format and the TIFF file name and registration points are saved in an image file that can be reopened later using the Open command from the File menu This command can be used to save the contents of a complex display one that may be requiring several seconds to update to an image It can then be used as a backdrop or base map and the image will update much faster than the original display Besides saving the TIFF image and registration image file an ARC INFO world file may be saved World files are used by ArcView and ARC INFO for displaying registered images as well as several other programs with image display capabilities Capturing The Screen Displays created by WMS can be captured to a TIFF image file using the Screen Capture command These images can then be used in WMS as backgrounds or can be used as images in other applications or report documents When the Screen Capture command is issued the image currently in the Graphics window is converted internally to
306. es 7 3 A O A 2 25 E Pe E cases ET E TTET 2 22 ASCO RIOS arrsa innit 1 23 creating watershed models from 1 3 A a ois tudeneadeneabats 2 20 Importing Shapefiles ooocccccccnnnnnco 1 21 O toss eaiea ties 1 23 radiel A oan cause ie eens ates 18 8 OL AP n EEE S E AET 16 13 GRASS TANG AE EEE AN E EE E E A 20 20 Green amp Ampt COMPU 15 1 Green Ampt IOSS ccccccccnnnnnnnoocncncnnnnnnnnnnnnos 10 16 grid A A O ieaalaas 2 35 E Cashion das 2 8 A EAEE 1 25 SID AP LOG EAER E I O N O 2 35 and VENCEALION oia 17 5 DIAS 5 atado did 17 6 grid node Index l 7 CRE AGING ee a 17 6 A EE 17 4 eleva ONS Kerne ena cette isu natea 17 5 grids creating from feature Objects oooo 3 35 HEC1 FESOIVOITS miara intatenttesaes eeeabaattansou iaiads 10 30 A A a dias 10 1 ANS O A 10 12 11 7 Dassin Parameters ii 10 11 DCS IMMING IME cies 10 4 calibration an coaster dinatiadastacuneipindadgateedan des 9 8 cards DIAGRAM aaa 10 5 A O 10 5 all 10 9 B OOOO CO Io 10 12 11 7 IE orea 10 13 DI10 31 21 7 DOS aran ici 10 31 21 7 A a eons 10 23 MINAS O NRE 10 4 1010 4 IT 10 4 O A TE E 9 7 10 5 JR9 7 10 7 A loin TE AE 10 12 10 24 A cumocamncusenuecannens 10 10 KO reer rer earn terre 10 10 10 11 A O E 10 16 1E E E O 10 16 A E E TT 10 17 EN POPE Ai E E E 10 23 l EE EAE ENE ER E O 10 17 A n 10 16 MA arruinado 10 22 A tae 10 23 M sere E N ceeds 10 23 MA 10 23 MW cei nas 10 23 PE CAPAS
307. esent another equation then you should follow it with a 1 See the example above where the hydraulic radius variable R represents the second equation in the group XA Pw You may define as many equations as you want in the file and each time WMS is started the equations will be read and become members in the list of equations you can select from when defining travel times from basin data Computed Basin and Stream Variables A complete list of variables computed for drainage basins that are available for use in defining equations along with the acronyms used in WMS is given below A The area of the basin in the units specified prior to computing basin parameters BS The average basin slope or average slope of the triangles comprising this basin A triangle s slope is computed as the change in elevation divided by the change in XY or plan distance AOFD The average overland flow distance within the basin This is computed by averaging the overland distance traveled from the centroid of each triangle to the nearest stream NF The percentage of the basin whose aspect is directed North where North is defined as the positive Y direction SF The percentage of the basin whose aspect is directed South where South is defined as the negative Y direction L Basin length P Perimeter of the basin Shape The shape factor of the basin or the length divided by the width Sin Sinuosity factor of the stream in the basin Defined by divid
308. esponds to or approximates the convex hull of the data points This may result in some long thin triangles or slivers on the perimeter of the triangulated region There are several ways to deal with the long thin triangles Selecting Boundary Triangles The thin triangles can be selected and deleted using the normal selection procedures There is also an option for selecting thin triangles when the Select Triangles tool is selected If the CTRL key is held down it is possible to drag out a line with the mouse All triangles intersecting the line will be selected Another technique can be used to select long thin triangles on the perimeter of the TIN By selecting the Select Boundary Triangles item from the TINs menu the thin triangles on the perimeter of the TIN are automatically selected The Select Boundary Triangles command checks triangles on the outer boundary first If the length ratio of the triangle is less than the critical length ratio the triangle is selected and the triangles adjacent to the triangle are then checked The process continues inward until none of the adjacent triangles violate the minimum length ratio 6 18 WMS 6 8 2 Length Ratio The critical length ratio for selecting thin triangles can be set by selecting Length Ratio from the TINs menu The length ratio is defined as the longest side of the triangle divided by the sum of the two shorter sides 6 9 Automated TIN Editing After the initial triangulation m
309. et the extrapolated values will be 2D Scatter Points 18 19 influenced by interior scatter points in the neighborhood of the interpolation point in addition to perimeter scatter points near the interpolation point The relative size of the bounding window can be altered using the Natural Neighbor Interpolation Options dialog In addition the dialog can be used to turn off the extrapolation option entirely 18 8 Interpolation To Grids Once an interpolation scheme has been selected and all of the parameters for the selected scheme have been input the data associated with the active time step and data set of the active scatter point set can be interpolated to a grid During the interpolation process a new data set is constructed for the grid containing the interpolated values The interpolation is done either to the grid nodes or to the grid cell centers depending on whether the grid is a mesh or cell centered grid 18 9 Interpolating Rainfall To Basin Centroids The Interpolate to Basin Precip command is designed to interpolate rainfall values at scattered points to the xy series representing rainfall for a basin in either HEC 1 or TR 20 The scattered points typically represent either gaging stations or radar locations for NEXRAD data Unlike interpolation to grids this command does not use the active interpolation method but rather uses the Thiessen method in order to assign the weights of each scatter point for each basin In addit
310. etermine the intensity value to be used in the Rational Method equation This value can either be entered manually or computed from the overland flow length Manning s n and slope One equation used to compute the time of concentration from basin geometric parameters is the kinematic wave equation KL po eS 04600 3 1 S where t the time of concentration L overland flow length n Manning s roughness coefficient 1 rainfall intensity S average slope of the overland area K 93 This method has been adopted by the FHWA for general use but other equations can be used as defined earlier in this chapter 13 3 4 Rational Method 13 9 Computing Hydrographs with the Rational Method The Rational Method equation is designed to compute peak flows However a hydrograph based on the peak flow and basin or outlet time of concentration can be computed using one of five different unit hydrographs Furthermore there are two different methods traditional and route by summing hydrographs can be computed at confluence points The Rational Method Hydrographs dialog Figure 13 4 is used to specify the dimensionless unit hydrograph method and the way hydrographs at outlets are computed Rational Method Hydrographs Traditional method C Route by summing Hidrograph computation method Rational method hydrograph z diii A Recession limb coefficient jo Sd Storm duration etre Done Cancel F
311. ething like this drivers azmemory drv mmsystem dll In the drivers section of SYSTEM INI add the line AzMemory azmemory drv Save the SYSTEM INI after the specified changes have been made You must then restart Windows for the AZMEMORY DRV to be loaded 12 WMS Installation Guide WMS Installation Guide for UNIX Workstations This section describes the system requirements installation and start up of WMS for UNIX workstations Inventory Included with your distribution of WMS should be the following items e Magnetic tape containing the WMS executable its resource files and any groundwater models ordered with this distribution unless the software was received via the Internet e WMS Reference Manual e This installation guide e Technical documentation for any model interfaces you may have ordered optional If you are missing any of the above items please contact us How to Contact BOSS International A BOSS International can be reached at BOSS International 6612 Mineral Point Road Madison WI 53705 USA Monday through Friday 8 00am to 5 00pm CST 6hrs behind GMT Telephone 608 258 9910 24 hours 7days a week Fax 608 258 9943 BBS 608 238 5266 Email support bossintl com WWW Site http www bossintl com WMS Installation Guide AAA B Installation bee a a E O U WMS is installed on a UNIX workstation using a two step process In the first step WMS is either copied from the magne
312. ethod uses an initial value and a uniform value to define infiltration losses Input parameters are as follows STRTL Initial rainfall snow melt loss in inches mm for snow free ground CNSTL Uniform rainfall loss in inches hour mm hour which is used after the starting loss STRTL has been satisfied RTIMP Percentage of drainage basin that is impervious 10 8 2 Exponential LE Parameters for the exponential loss method are as follows STRKR The starting value of the loss coefficient on the exponential recession curve for rain losses DLTKR The amount in inches mm of initial accumulated rain loss during which the loss coefficient is increased RTIOL Parameter computed as the ratio of STRKR to a value of STRKR after ten inches ten mm of accumulated loss ERAIN Exponent of precipitation for rain loss function that reflects the influence of the precipitation rate on basin average loss characteristics RTIMP Percentage of drainage basin that is impervious 10 8 3 Green Ampt LG Green Ampt infiltration loss parameters are as follows IA Initial loss abstraction in inches mm HEC 1 Interface 10 17 DTHETA Volumetric moisture deficit If this value is 0 then the method reduces to the initial loss equal to IA and a constant loss equal to XKSAT PSIF Wetting front suction in inches mm If this value is 0 then the method reduces to the initial loss equal to IA and a constant loss
313. etic hydrograph This hydrograph can be input by selecting the check box and then defining the hydrograph using the XY Series Editor Precipitation base flow loss rates and unit hydrograph methods for each hydrograph must be specified regardless of whether or not a TIN is being used before a complete HEC file can be created Selecting all of the basins enters data for one or more basins NOTE If no basins are selected the information entered is applied to all basins 10 6 4 Observed Hydrograph QO This record is used to input an observed hydrograph for an optimization job OU record This hydrograph can be input by selecting the check box and then defining the hydrograph using the XY Series Editor 10 6 5 Base Flow BF Base flow parameters can be defined for a basin by selecting the Enter base flow check box The input parameters for base flow are as follows e STRTQ Flow at the start of the storm in cfs cms for metric units e QRCSN Flow in cfs cms below which base flow recession occurs in accordance with the recession constant RTIOR In other words it is that flow where the straight line in semilog paper recession deviates from the falling limb of the hydrograph e RTIOR The ratio of the recession flow QRCSN to that flow occurring one hour later Must be greater than or equal to 1 10 7 Precipitation Precipitation patterns are assigned to basins by first selecting the appropriate basin s and then clicki
314. ets This command works for either TIN or feature object stream segments CASC2D CASC2D is a two dimensional finite difference rainfall runoff model A finite difference grid is used to establish the computational domain and parameters for surface runoff The CASC2D model is fully coupled with hydraulic stream flow routing models Parameters for stream channels are defined using arcs and then mapped to the appropriate underlying grid cells In order to define CASC2D channel parameters using arcs the current coverage type must be set to CASC2D Smoothing Stream Cells Because elevation data used to define the surface runoff component of CASC2D does not contain the detailed resolution required to capture the actual stream bed elevation of the channels the bed elevation profile can be highly irregular These irregularities or abrupt changes in elevation can cause 3 38 WMS instabilities in the channel routing computations and therefore must be smoothed out The Smooth Stream Cells command is used to adjust the elevation of the stream bed for CASC2D Smoothing is done by first selecting a continuous set of arcs which represent the stream and then choosing the Smooth Stream Cells command from the CASC2D menu The dialog shown in Figure 3 24 is then used to smooth the channel bed elevation Initially the bed elevation is assigned the same value as the grid Whenever a profile is shown the bed elevation profile is displayed in blue while
315. etween the extreme values in the data set In other words the surface will not infer local maxima or minima implicit in the data set This problem can be overcome by generalizing the basic form of the equation for Shepard s method in the following manner F x y Y wiQi x y AIEEE ARIEI NO 18 11 1 1 where Q are nodal functions or individual functions defined at each scatter point Franke 1982 Watson amp Philip 1985 The value of an interpolation point 1s calculated as the weighted average of the values of the nodal functions at that point The standard form of Shepard s method can be thought of as a special case where horizontal planes constants are used for the nodal functions The nodal functions can be sloping planes that pass through the scatter point The equation for the plane is as follows DS TER PATO VO teas tee eta tees 18 12 where fx and fy are partial derivatives at the scatter point that have been previously estimated based on the geometry of the surrounding scatter points Gradients are estimated in WMS by first triangulating the scatter points and computing the gradient at each scatter point as the average of the gradients of each of the triangles attached to the scatter point The planes represented by equation 18 12 are sometimes called gradient planes By averaging planes rather than constant values at each scatter point the resulting surface infers extremities and is asymptotic to the gradient plane at t
316. ewhat before execution Hydrograph names defined on KK cards should not be changed as they are needed to correctly read hydrographs generated by HEC back into WMS for post processing WMS can read HEC 1 input files so that data previously entered can be restored for basins and outlets Names on the KK cards must match the basin or outlet names when reading the file for an existing terrain model Existing files generated outside of WMS can be read into WMS and a separate topological tree will automatically be generated for the watershed described in the file Since WMS does not support all possible HEC card types there may be some incomplete information However the basic structure of the watershed will be created and all possible data will be retained Parameters from unrecognized cards and or hydrograph names are ignored More information on the limitations of reading existing HEC 1 simulations can be found in section 1 4 10 16 Running An HEC 1 Analysis The version of HEC distributed with WMS can be run directly from WMS by using the Run HEC 1 command in the HEC menu Before running an HEC 1 simulation you should run the model checker which will help you identify 10 16 1 10 16 2 HEC 1 Interface 10 35 serious and potential problems that should be corrected before a successful run of HEC 1 can be made Model Check The Model Check command should be issued once you feel that all necessary HEC 1 data has been defined I
317. ext to each scatter point Display Options Fo TIN Drainage Flood DEM Map Hydrologic Modeling O Grid Scatter Point Active scatter point MW Scatter point symbols _ Scatter point numbers _ Scatter point values Figure 18 1 Scatter Point Display Options Dialog 18 4 WMS 18 7 Interpolation Options Scatter point sets are used for interpolation to other data types such as grids or basin centroids Since no interpolation scheme is superior in all cases several interpolation techniques are provided in WMS The interpolation option is selected using the Interpolation Options dialog accessed through the Interpolation Options command in the Interpolation menu Figure 18 2 Once an option is selected that option is used for all subsequent interpolation commands 2D Interpolation Options raintall all Interpolation Method Inverse distance weighted Options 0 000 Default extrapolation value W Truncate values ja agh mir En GES max Figure 18 2 2D Interpolation Options Dialog Interpolation is always performed using the active scatter point set By default the active data set and time step are interpolated The active data set and time step can be selected using the Data Browser command in the Data menu or using the Data Set button at the top of the Interpolation Options dialog This button also allows interpolation from all time steps of a transient data set to be performed When
318. f iterations Maximum change in elevations 0 50 Filter ratio 0 25 Memory required to store current elevations X Store curent elevations Cancel Figure 4 2 DEM Smoothing Options Dialog Filter Size When a DEM is a smoothed an NxN filter matrix is placed over each elevation point and a new elevation is computed by taking an inverse distance weighted average of all elevations within the filter The weight assigned to the central cell is determined from the filter ratio The dimension of N can be specified as either 3 or 5 meaning that new elevations are computed from either the nearest 8 or 24 neighboring points When computing new elevations for points near the boundary the number of neighboring points is modified to include only those portions of the filter which overlap the DEM Iterations The number of smoothing iterations can be specified in the Smoothing Options dialog By default only one iteration is done but sometimes several smoothing iterations are required to propagate a change in elevations across a large flat area If all neighboring points have the same elevation no change will be made during the smoothing iteration Maximum Change in Elevation A maximum change in elevation can be specified to insure that the integrity of the original DEM elevations is maintained For example if DEM elevations are rounded to the nearest meter then smoothing should not adjust the elevation by more than plus or min
319. f the available time steps are to be used for animation The range of time steps can also be entered directly in the edit fields below the time step strip The range displayed in the strip corresponds to the scalar data set The total number of frames generated in the film loop can be defined by either matching the time steps one frame per time step or by using a constant interval e g one frame for every two hour interval If the Match Time Steps option is chosen extra frames can be created between each time step if necessary using linear interpolation of the data values at the specified time Steps One of the most important steps in any modeling problem is calibration During the calibration phase an attempt is made to model a set of conditions which have been known to exist at a site and for which measured data surface depth infiltration are available The geometry resolution and input parameters of the model are adjusted until the output computed by the model is reasonably close to the measured data The calibration stage can be the most tedious and time consuming portion of the modeling process In order to make the calibration stage more efficient a set of tools for managing gages has been provided in WMS A gage is an xyz point defined by the user representing a location where field data has been collected ex a gaging station or simply a point of interest in the model Once a set of gages has been defined whenever a transi
320. ferent routing options available in this dialog are described in the following paragraphs HEC 1 Routing Data Routing name GRO 8 Muskingum RM Combining name fac NSTPs 12 AMSER 1 400 E 0 200 O Straddler Stagger AT Ho routing AN ager RT s Normal Muskingum Cunge parameters O Storage R5 L 1es32 702 5 oomsiai N fo ono NSTEPS fi RSVRIC foo po Shape TRAP C DEEP C CIRC Type C STOR FLOW C ELEV O Muskingum Cunge AD NSTPS i NSTOL jo LAG fo 0 WO 10 000 fa 000 ff Channel Reservoir Meine Defined cross section 4 Channel Loss AL a GLOSS e oa BASS o oo 1 Kinematic wave AE L fiess2702 s fonn fo o00 PEAGAT 000 ELMNY o oo _ Direct input hydrograph 01 Wefie l Shape TRAF DEEP CIRC Ta odos gt 000 _ Observed hydrograph 00 etre i Pattern hydrograph GF Define OF Cancel Defne BE Record Figure 10 11 HEC 1 Routing Data Dialog Outlet Names KK Since outlets are used for both types combining and routing of hydrograph stations in the HEC 1 input file a separate name for each type of hydrograph must be entered The name should be six characters or less and correspond to the name used on the KK card to represent the appropriate hydrograph station No Routing RN By default there is no routing at an outlet point This allows for hydrographs to be combined without considering routing effects 10 11 3 10 11 4 HEC 1 Interface 10 25 Muskingu
321. ff all of the display options except the flood plain boundary do have turn on the filled or contour options for the flood plain boundary 2 Export the flood plain boundary as a DXF file see page 2 22 3 Import the DXF file just exported see page 2 20 You will now have the flood plain in WMS as DXF data 4 Convert the DXF data to feature objects 8 10 WMS 8 6 3 5 You may want to edit the feature objects some more and build polygons 6 Export the feature objects as a shape file see page 2 21 Delete Flood Plain The current TIN may have only one flood plain associated with it The current flood plain can be deleted by using the Delete Flood Plain command in the Flood menu When the flood plain is deleted it 1s deleted from memory and the display of the TIN is updated The display of the flood plain in Display Options dialog is also turned off CHAPTER 9 Topological Trees 9 1 Introduction A topological tree is one way to represent a watershed in the absence of terrain data When a digital terrain model or feature objects are being used to automate basin delineation and build a particular sub basin configuration a tree is simultaneously generated The tree representation uses icons for confluences outlet points and basins and should be clear to both experienced and inexperienced users of hydrologic models such as HEC or TR 20 The tree can also be used to create a watershed configuration in the abse
322. fferent methods that can be used to represent reservoirs The parameters required to define the reservoir are the same in all cases and are described in the section 10 11 4 on reservoir routing above The main difference is whether the reservoir stands alone by itself or whether the routing option of the outlet is used to define the reservoir 10 13 Diversions HEC 1 allows flow to be diverted from an outlet or drainage basin This flow can be thought of as leaving the normal drainage system at that point It can be retrieved at a downstream outlet where the diverted flow then contributes to the flow at that outlet If no downstream retrieval outlet point is specified the flow simply leaves the system at the diverted outlet point and never returns HEC 1 Interface 10 31 10 13 1 Editing Diversion Data DT Diversions are created using a combination of the Add and Retrieve Diversion commands found in the Tree menu Once created data for the diversion can be defined and or edited by selecting the Diversion Data button from the Edit HEC 1 Parameters dialog This button will bring up the dialog shown in Figure 10 14 HEC 1 Diversion Data Mame fo Maximum volume ac ft 500 000 Peak flow cfs E Outflow hedrograph name DO Inflow hydrograph name E 1 Detine DI Define DO cos Figure 10 14 HEC 1 Diversion Data Dialog The following data should be defined for a diversion Name The name identification string of
323. field identifier RESIDUAL_SATURATION Fifth field identifier MOISTURE_CONTENT Sixth field identifier SURFACE_ROUGHNESS Seventh field identifier INTERCEPTION_COEFF Eighth field identifier STORAGE_CAPACITY Ninth field identifier 20 30 WMS INITIAL DEPTH Tenth field identifier RETENTION Eleventh field identifier AREA_REDUCTION Twelfth field identifier ALBEDO Thirteenth field identifier WILTING_POINT Fourteenth field identifier VHEIGHT X Pitteenth field identifier COEFF Sixteenth field identifier CANOPY Seventeenth field identifier SOIL_ERODABILITY Eighteenth field identifier CROP_MANAGEMENT Nineteenth field identifier CONSERVATION_PRACTICE Twentieth field identifier SAND_MAP Twenty first field identifier SILT_MAP Twenty second field identifier NUMSOILS n Number of soils types in this file lidi d scriptionl hel cpl pol pil sl mel srl tel scl idl rtl arl abl lwol vhl tcl cal sel cml col sml sil idz deseri stone he2 ep2 por paz rS me pro ae er ade tr ar22 albo lwo2 vh2 tc2 ca2 se2 cm2 co2 sm2 si2 idn descriptionn hcn cpn pon pin rsn men srn icn sen idn rtn arn abn wpn vhn tcn can sen cmn con smn sin Figure 20 33 CASC2D Attribute Mapping File Format SOILSTABLE HYDRAULIC_CONDUCTIVITY CAPILLARY POROSITY PORE_INDEX RESIDUAL_SATURATION MOISTURE_CO
324. first vertex selected is already a member of a stream network in which case a branch point will be created A stream will be created that connects the rest of the selected vertices to the outlet or branch point in the order they were selected However none of the remaining vertices in the selected vertices string may be a member of an existing stream network as this would create crossing streams Stage streams may be added to existing stream networks regardless of whether the existing streams were added as stage streams or created in the normal fashion Save Stage This command will save the present stage values to a stage data file as described in the section titled Read Stage Upon selecting this command from the Flood menu a file browser will be available to change directories and specify a filename The current working directory will be the last directory written to or read from Below the file browser a text field is available to specify a filename for the saved stage file After a filename is entered another dialog box will appear asking the user to choose the type of stage data file to write The choices are as described in the 8 5 Flood Plain Analysis 8 7 section titled Read Stage stage value or water surface elevation The files will be of the same format as shown in Appendix A for stage files Flood Plain Options 8 5 1 WMS offers several options for defining flood plain boundaries While these parameters do affect th
325. flow distance _ No data cells L Max flow slope _ Inactive cells Max stream length M Rainfall grid __ Max stream slope i Land use grids _ Distance from centroid to stream W Soil type grids _ Centroid stream distance Land use legend _ Centroid stream slope Soil ype legend _ Stream segment length _ Stream segment slope OF Lancel Apply Figure 5 1 DEM Drainage Display Options Dialog Watershed Any cell which belongs to a sub basin is displayed in the chosen color This is different than filling drainage basins in that all sub basins are given the watershed color Stream Any cell beneath a stream arc is displayed in the chosen color when this option is toggled on 5 6 WMS 9 3 3 9 3 4 9 3 9 9 3 6 5 3 7 5 3 8 Flow Directions A small arrow from the DEM point to the neighboring cell in which flow is defined is displayed This option only works when a flow direction grid has been computed or imported This option is most effective when zooming in since the arrows become so small for most DEMs when the entire region is displayed Flow Accumulations After a flow accumulation grid has been created or imported DEM points whose accumulation number of DEM points whose flow path passes through the given point is greater than a defined threshold are displayed The Accumulation Opts dialog allows you to set different colors for different threshold values Color Filled Drainage
326. for the coefficients to be stable there should be at least five scatter points in the set Interpolation Subsets In the IDW Interpolation Options dialog shown in Figure 18 4 an option is available for using a subset of the scatter points as opposed to all of the available scatter points in the computation of the nodal function coefficients and in the computation of the interpolation weights Using a subset of the scatter points drops distant points from consideration since they are unlikely to have a large influence on the nodal function or on the interpolation weights In addition using a subset can speed up the computations since less points are involved If the Use subset of points option is chosen the Subsets button can be used to bring up the Subset Definition dialog shown in Figure 18 4 Two options are available for defining which points are included in the subset In one case only the nearest N points are used In the other case only the nearest N pts in each quadrant are used This approach may give better results if the scatter points tend to be clustered Subset Definition Number of Points Uze nearest IE points O Use nearest points in each quadrant Searching 5cheme Global search entire set Local use triangle topology Cancel Figure 18 4 Subset Definition Dialog 18 10 WMS Figure 18 5 The Four Quadrants Surrounding an Interpolation Point If a subset of the scatter point set is being
327. from the Edit menu If the Confirm Deletions option in the Edit menu 1s active you will be prompted to confirm each deletion This is helpful in preventing accidental deletions The confirm deletions flag can be toggled by selecting the Confirm Deletions item Changing Vertex Positions and Z Values Two methods of editing vertex positions and z values are available To manipulate vertex positions and z values the Select Vertex tool must be selected e A vertex can be moved to a new position by clicking on the vertex and holding down the mouse button while dragging the vertex to the desired position e If the current view is plan view dragging the vertex will cause it to move in the xy plane WMS will not allow the vertex to be dragged to 6 10 WMS 6 5 4 a position where one of the surrounding triangles would become inverted e Ifthe current view is not the plan view the vertex will move along the Z axis e The vertex position and z value can also be manipulated by selecting the vertex and changing the xyz values that will appear in the x y and z edit boxes Display options such as contours are updated automatically as a vertex s position is altered as long as these options are selected from the TIN Display Options dialog Vertex Options Dialog The Vertex Options dialog accessed from the TINs menu contains six options as shown in Figure 6 2 e If the Retriangulate after deleting is checked the region surrounding t
328. g a time computation coverage These options are accessed from the Compute Parameters Basin Data and Compute Parameters Map Data buttons respectively see section 15 3 e CP Peaking coefficient e TIME AREA CURVE The time area curve defines the area of the watershed contributing runoff to the basin outlet as a function of time This curve is defined by selecting the check box and then activating the XY Series Editor with the adjacent button The time area curve can be computed automatically from a TIN this method will not work for watersheds delineated from DEMs or Feature Objects using the Compute Time Area Curves button 10 20 WMS 10 9 3 10 9 4 10 9 5 SCS Dimensionless UD Parameters for generating a unit hydrograph using the SCS dimensionless method include e TLAG SCS lag time in hours Several different equations have been published to determine the lag time of a basin Many of them use some of the geometric attributes computed automatically when a TIN is present Lag time can be computed from one of several equations using these attributes or by using a time computation coverage These options are accessed from the Compute Parameters Basin Data and Compute Parameters Map Data buttons respectively see section 15 3 Given Unit Hydrograph UI A given unit hydrograph determined from a separate analysis can be input using the XY Series Editor The given unit hydrograph must be derived for the sa
329. g hydrographs See section 9 6 4 for viewing hydrographs in tabular form By default the Hydrograph Window is hidden It can be activated by selecting the Show Hydrograph Window command in the Display menu Once activated in can be hidden again by selecting the Hide Hydrograph Window command in the Display menu Display Options The Hydrologic Modeling tab in the Display Options see Figure 9 1 allows control over the appearance of hydrographs in the Hydrograph Window Each set of hydrographs read into WMS is assigned a color and a set name Hydrographs of the same set will all be displayed using the same color The legend displays all set names in their appropriate colors The legend options can be used to change set names and or colors Labels to identify the outlet or basin associated with the hydrograph can be displayed An X and Y grid can be turned on for closer examination of time to peak max flow etc Options controlling the display of these two grid axes can be specified A major and minor title can be entered and displayed at the top of the hydrograph window The size of the icons used to display hydrographs on the TIN and tree can be specified in the appropriate edit fields If multiple ratios of a storm have been read then the display of certain hydrograph ratios can be specified The contents of the hydrograph window can be output to a printer PostScript file on UNIX computers using the Print command from the File menu
330. g of vector data set No fields Required YES Card Type VECTYPE Card ID 150 Description Identifies the type of vector data that will be read and where to apply it Required This card is only required if the vector data is associated with elements cells If this card is not present it is assumed that the data are associated with Field Variable Size Value Description 1 type 4 byte int 0 The vectors will be applied to the nodes gridnodes 1 The vectors will be applied to the elements cells EE AA Description The number of data values that will be listed per time step This number should correspond to the total number of vertices nodes cells centers cell centered grid cell corners mesh centered grid maximum node id meshes or scatter points Required YES Format ND numdata Sample ND 10098 Field Variable Value Description The number of items At each time step numdata SS values are printed Card Type NC Description This number should correspond to the maximum element id meshes or the number of cells grids Required YES Format NC numcells ETT E Field Variable Value Description numcells The number of elements or cells Card Type NAME OOOO Description The name of the dataset 20 8 1 File Formats 20 15 Required YES Format NAME name Sample NAME T
331. g the report information to a text file or the printer EE x PERFORMANCE CURUE FOR CULUERT i i lt 5 68 lt ft gt BY 5 886 ft gt CoP DIS HEAD INLET OUTLET FULL CHARGE WATER CONTROL CONTROL FLOW H RMAL CRIT OUTLET TW OUTLET FLOW ELEU DEPTH DEPTH HDS5 DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH VEL cfs gt cto cto Kft lt F4 gt kft gt 1801 93 1 36 1 93 6 FFc H 76 H 103 24 6 FFc 2 81 2 104 82 6 FFc 2 86 2 6 FFc aa to 3 5 HH 4 5 48 q 5 48 E 5 5 5 5 1 1 5 48 5 48 5 48 5 48 El inlet face invert 164 66 ft El outlet invert El inlet throat invert a ft El inlet crest AAA efi pfita pfii Cu Pl o GE y A A A A EA EA ps ps A A pik pih pi Cu at Po E BS Pl Pd Figure 15 21 Report from a Single Culvert Analysis in HY8 Minimizing a Culvert Width for a Specified Head The second option available for computing 1s to minimize the culvert width for a specified head When selecting the Compute button with this option specified you will see the DOS window shown at the top of Figure 15 22 You will need to enter the allowable head for which you wish HY8 to compute a culvert width that accommodates the defined discharge without overtopping Once you enter the head value select the Return key and HY8 will perform the analysis and display the results as shown in the bottom of Figure 15 22 15 48 WMS 15 7 8 SPA RISE MANNING INLET ft ift n TYFE SUMMARY TABLE FOR FILE untitled lt C gt CULVERT SHAPE MATE
332. gative stage values along a ridge can prevent the flood plain from spilling over into another basin that is outside the area of interest Remove Stage This command can be used to remove stage values at any number of vertices The stage values for all selected vertices will be removed when this command is issued from the Flood menu If no vertices are selected the program will ask if stage values for all vertices are to be removed When stage values are removed the program sets the stage to an equivalent of none rather than to zero because zero could be a valid stage value Interpolate Stage When this command is selected from the Flood menu the program will search all stream networks for stream nodes that have fixed stage values defined either from a stage file or from interactive editing If two stream nodes with stage values are found all stream vertices between these vertices along the path of the stream will then be interpolated linearly based upon the two known values and the relative distances from them Stage values will only be interpolated in this manner along streams between stream nodes with fixed stage values This command can be useful to define stage values at all stream nodes without entering them all individually with the Edit Stage command With the Interpolate Stage command stage values could be entered at relatively few stream node locations and then interpolated between these values 8 6 WMS 8 4 5
333. ge The Drainage Coverage is the primary coverage used by WMS When ever you start a new WMS session an empty coverage is created and assigned the drainage coverage type If you begin creating points arcs and polygons by default they will belong to this drainage coverage Most of the work you do will be centered around the drainage coverage which has two different purposes as outlined in the following paragraphs 1 To develop a hydrologic model directly from feature objects or GIS vector data In version 5 0 and higher of WMS the points arcs and polygons in the drainage coverage are tied directly to the hydrologic modeling tree When a stream arc is created the most downstream node of the stream arc is converted to an outlet node and an outlet is added on the hydrologic modeling tree A drainage basin is also added on the tree for every upstream arc from an outlet node If a drainage polygon is created and a stream is located in the boundaries of that drainage polygon the drainage polygon is tied into the tree as a drainage basin An example of a drainage coverage used for the purpose of creating a hydrologic model is shown in Figure 3 4 Map Module 3 11 Figure 3 4 Example Drainage Coverage Used to Create a Hydrologic Model 2 To use as a conceptual model when creating a TIN from a background elevation data source and feature objects for the purpose of automated watershed delineation WMS can use TINs for performing watershed
334. grid lcols ncols Number of columns in the grid zt BI als wae Zincols 7 Values sof row 1 47 AA G23 en cols yr values Of row 2 E znrows1 znrows2 znrows3 znrowsncols values of last row Figure 20 16 GRASS ASCII Grid File north 3451250 lsouth 3438850 least 298960 west 290860 lrows 10 lcols 5 lO 1101 111001 O 0O 1 10 Figure 20 17 Sample GRASS ASCII Grid File The card types used in the GRASS grid file format are self explanatory 20 11 ARC INFO ASCII Grid Files WMS can import ARC INFO ASCII grid for use as a background DEM Since it is a simple file format other digital elevation data can be formatted in the same way and then imported into WMS using the Import Grid command in the Dems menu The CASC2D model may also import and used ARC INFO grid files when defining map parameters The file format is shown in Figure 20 18 and an example file in Figure 20 19 ncols ncol Number of columns in the grid nrows nrow Number of rows in the grid xllcorner x Lower left x coordinate of grid lyllcorner y Lower left x coordinate of grid cellsize size Grid cell size NODATRA_valueNODATA walue of an empty grid cell ZU AAD Be ies ADOS Values OF row 1 7 File Formats 20 21 z21 z22 z23 z2ncols values of row 2 znrowsl znrows2 znrows3 znrowsncols values of last row Figure 20 18 ARC INFO
335. gs prior to running one of the supported hydrologic models Creating TINs or Finite Difference Grids The initial versions of WMS were based on watershed delineation from TINs However many hours of edge swapping and breakline insertion was required to develop a TIN that was suitable for basin delineation This was because triangulation of an arbitrary set of points does not guarantee that triangle edges will correspond to drainage features such as streams and ridges But if a set of pre defined streams ridges and boundary arcs are used to guide the TIN construction triangle edges can automatically be created to conform to these features and at the same time inherit any associated attributes In such cases either a DEM or an existing TIN can be used as a background elevation map for interpolating z values to newly created vertices of the TIN The Create TIN command discussed later in this chapter details this process The same process can be used to create finite difference grids used by the CASC2D model For this model attributes assigned to the points arcs and polygons are used to map model parameters to the resulting grid Mapping Curve Numbers and Other Analysis Parameters Besides the creation of stream networks and sub basin boundaries feature objects can be used to define polygonal zones representing soil types land use rainfall zones etc These polygons can then be overlaid with the basin boundaries to determine composite c
336. h Package User s Manual U S Army Corps of Engineers Hydrologic Engineering Center Kerby W S 1959 Time of concentration for overland flow Civil Engineering Vol 29 No 3 p 174 Kirpich Z P 1940 Time of concentration of small agricultural watersheds Civil Engineering Vol 10 No 6 p 362 Nelson E J Automated Watershed Characterization Using Triangulated Irregular Networks Ph D Dissertation Brigham Young University April 1994 128 pp Nelson E J N L Jones and A W Miller 1994 An algorithm for precise drainage basin delineation ASCE Journal of Hydraulic Engineering Vol 120 No 3 pp 298 312 Puecker T K and D H Douglas 1975 Detection of surface specific points by local parallel processing of discrete terrain elevation data Computer Graphics and Image Processing Vol 4 pp 375 387 Putnam A L 1972 Effect of urban development on floods in the Piedmont Province of North Carolina U S Geologic Survey Open File Report Washington D C Ramser C E 1927 Runoff from small agricultural watersheds Journal of Agricultural Research Vol 34 No 9 pp 797 823 Shepard D 1968 A two dimensional interpolation function for irregularly spaced data Proc 23rd National Conference of the ACM pp 517 523 Soil Conservation Service SCS 1972 Hydrology National Engineering Handbook U S Department of Agricultural Section 4 Taylor A B and H E Schwartz 1952 Unit hydrograph lag
337. h stream branch is created For this reason the default outlets are not always sufficient Outlet points can be added and deleted in order to define the sub basins of a watershed All outlet commands are found under the streams menu Find Default Outlets This command automatically finds all pits local minima on the interior of the TIN and channel edge exit points on the exterior of the TIN and adds them as outlets These outlet points can then be used to define drainage basins directly or to create streams When creating streams a separate network is initiated at each outlet Add Outlets The Add Outlets command will add all selected vertices as outlet points A set of vertices must be selected for this command to work Delete Outlets The Delete Outlets command will remove selected outlet points Outlet points are selected using the Select Vertices tool If a vertex that 1s not an outlet point is in the selection list then no action is taken for that vertex When an outlet is deleted the area or triangles associated with that outlet s drainage basins are reassigned to the next downstream basin Select Branching Nodes It is often desirable to add outlet points at a large number of stream branches Therefore this command allows such vertices to be automatically selected This command only selects the vertices and does not actually create outlets from them In order to create outlets from these vertices the Add Outlets command should
338. hat data type is dimmed The check box can be toggled off or on to indicate whether or not the data type 1s to be saved to disk At the top of the dialog the current path name is displayed The File Browser button can be used to change directory paths and the name of the super file A prefix for all files can be entered into the edit field and then updated to all files using the adjacent button The current display settings may also be saved as part of the super file so that when the file is re opened the display settings will appear just as they were when the files were saved A description of these settings is given in the next section The Save As command has a macro in the tool palette El Save Files Director Civ biS tutorial Prefix for all fles frockcarson peA es Save entire model under a super file Super file ft Jrockcanyon sup Display options M tockcangon ini 0 grid frockcanyon 2da TIN e tockcangon tin Data sets rockcanyeg dat DE Ms frockcanyon gdm 2D scatter frockcanyon sy r r F F ir tockcangan fdr Data sets P Jrockcany2s dat p p FACE rockcanyon tac Land Use rockcanyon lus Basin IDs tockcanyon bid Soil Type Maps frockcanyon map Wh S tree file 4 Jrockcanyon tre Data set file format f ASCII C Binary rockcanyon sty Image registration file 7 frockcanyon Runoff Coefficient table OYE data Green Ampt soil table Stage file r GreenAmpt landuse table m HS
339. hbor Interpolation Options dialog Figure 18 9 The difference between IDW interpolation and natural neighbor interpolation is the method used to compute the weights and the method used to select the subset of scatter points used for interpolation 2D Scatter Points 18 15 Hatural Neighbor Options Nodal Furctiors Constant C Gradient C Quadratic Nodal Functions Computed From s Natural neighbors Closest 3 scatter points C All scatter points Bounding Window o o beyond convex hull _ Extrapolate beyond convex hull l Cancel Figure 18 9 Natural Neighbor Options Dialog Natural neighbor interpolation is based on the Thiessen polygon network of the scatter point set The Thiessen polygon network can be constructed from the Delauney triangulation of a scatter point set Figure 18 10 A Delauney triangulation is a TIN that has been constructed so that the Delauney criterion has been satisfied see section 6 6 on triangulation There is one Thiessen polygon in the network for each scatter point The polygon encloses all area that is closer to the enclosed scatter point than any other scatter point The polygons in the interior of the scatter point set are closed polygons and the polygons on the convex hull of the set are open polygons Each Thiessen polygon is constructed using the circumcircles of the triangles resulting from a Delauney triangulation of the scatter points The vertices of the Thiessen
340. he ASCII output file using the View File command in the File menu CHAPTER 12 TR 55 Interface 12 1 12 2 Introduction TR 55 models can be defined in WMS using the commands in the 7R 55 menu and resulting dialogs The TR 55 model has long been used to determine the increase in runoff resulting from the development of rural land into urban land The WMS interface to TR 55 combined with the basin delineation and time of concentration calculations from feature objects see section 15 3 makes it simple to set up and run several different scenarios in a relatively short time period This chapter describes the mechanics of the WMS interface to TR 55 and is not a complete reference to the methodology uses and limitations For more in depth information you should read Technical Release 55 Urban Hydrology for Small Watersheds 2 Edition Input Requirements for TR 55 To run a TR 55 simulation you select the Run Simulation options from the TR 55 menu The TR 55 dialog see Figure 12 1 is a floating dialog This means that all tools and menu commands are available while this dialog is active The fields that are active depend on whether a basin an outlet or nothing is selected You must define the data for each basin or outlet by selecting it and then entering the appropriate values in the corresponding edit fields Some of the values area CN may be computed mapped automatically by WMS if you are using a watershed mod
341. he Stop button halts the playback The Step buttons can be used to advance the film loop forward or backward one frame at a time In addition the frame scroll bar can be used to interactively move the frames forward or backward The speed of playback can be adjusted using the Speed scroll bar The maximum speed depends on the speed of the computer and the size of the image being animated The smaller the image the faster the maximum playback speed Two options are available for cycling the film loop playback The continuous playback option starts a new cycle at the first frame in the loop after the last frame is encountered The oscillation option plays the loop in the forward direction to the end of the loop and then in the reverse direction back to the beginning of the loop Film Loop Setup A new film loop can be generated by selecting the Setup button in the Film Loop dialog This button accesses the Film Loop Options dialog Figure 16 4 16 8 WMS Film Loop Options Scalar Data Set P Display clock Time display 8 Relative Absolute rainfall 1 0000 Display Mode Grid Display Options Wire frame Run simulation fram time step i 000 EI Shading Options Match time steps E Number of frames between time steps 4 LE SS Sc O Hee con tant inter al O Shaded 50 Size screen 0 000 Time Interval Cancel Figure 16 4 Film Loop Options Dialog Data Set Film loops are always genera
342. he Tool Palette when the Map module is activated Only one tool is active at any given time T Create Text Tool The Create Text tool can be used to annotate objects in the Graphics window prior to printing and inclusion in report documents The location clicked on defines the beginning point on the screen where the defined text string will be placed After clicking on a location the Text Attributes dialog will appear allowing you to define the text string font and color A rectangle the color of the background can be used to erase the area behind the text al Create Rectangle The Create Rectangle tool can be used to create wire frame or filled rectangles anywhere on the display Rectangles can be used to represent buildings frame text strings etc in order to enhance a printed file to be used in reports Rectangles are created with this tool by dragging a rectangle with the mouse at the location on the screen where you wish to place the rectangle Create Oval The Create Oval tool can be used to create wire frame or filled ellipses anywhere on the display Ovals can be used to represent buildings frame text etc in order to enhance a printed file to be used in reports Ovals are created with this tool by dragging a rectangle with the mouse at the location on the screen where you wish to place the oval The rectangle width and height determine the major and minor axes of the oval Create Line The Create Line tool can be
343. he Unit Hydrograph Method dialog when the UI option is selected 21 12 Defining A Given Hydrograph Ql HEC 1 allows a measured or given hydrograph to be used for a basin This can be done by specifying the given hydrograph toggle in the basin parameters dialog and then defining the hydrograph by invoking the XY Series Editor from within the same dialog Like the unit hydrograph series the X fields are fixed as time increments of the given hydrograph and Y values represent the hydrograph ordinates However the time parameters are set by changing the starting time and increment using the XY options from within the XY Series Editor The day month and year used to complete the IN record values preceding the QI record are defined prior to invoking the XY Series Editor REFERENCES Anonymous 1963 The application of synthetic unit hydrographs to drainage basins in the Riverside County Flood Control and Water Conservation District Riverside CA Clark C O 1945 Storage and the unit hydrograph Transactions of the American Society of Civil Engineers vol 110 pp 1419 1446 Clough R W and J L Tocher 1965 Finite element stiffness matrices for analysis of plates in bending Proc Conf Matrix Methods in Structural Mechanics Wright Patterson A F B Ohio Air Force Flight Dynamics Lab Research and Technology Division Air Force Systems Command The Air Force Institute of Technology Air University pp 515 545 Dodson amp Assoc
344. he addition of reservoirs detention basins in the calculations is possible However with either method a resulting hydrograph could be used in the design of a detention basin as a separate operation see section 15 6 Rational and Modified Rational Unit Hydrograph The Rational Unit Hydrograph has a time to peak equal to the time of concentration Both the rising and receding limbs of the hydrograph have a duration equal to the time of concentration and therefore the shape of the hydrograph is an isosceles triangle with a time base of 2 t_ as shown in Figure 13 8 This method is chosen by specifying the Modified Hydrograph Method using 1 0 for the recession limb coefficient and t for the storm duration Rational Method 13 13 t Figure 13 8 Rational Unit Hydrograph The Modified Rational Hydrograph also assumes that the time to peak is equal to the t but allows for the duration of the storm to be longer than t resulting in a trapezoidal shaped hydrograph as shown in Figure 13 9 A coefficient to modify the slope of the receding limb may also be applied with this method Sd t Figure 13 9 Modified Rational Hydrograph where t time of concentration Q Flow at time t in cfs Q Peak flow 13 14 WMS r falling limb coefficient s storm duration Universal Rational Hydrograph The Universal Rational Hydrograph uses a set of coefficients and the peak discharge to compute the hydrograph ordinates at different
345. he boundary Such areas can either be processed or not depending on the status of the filter regions with no critical interior points toggle As described above filtering such regions may only serve to slightly 6 10 6 9 5 TINS 6 23 raise or lower the flat region In such cases Remove Flat Objects will more accurately infer local minima and maxima and you may wish to skip over these regions during the filtering process Edge Swapping TINs are generated in WMS using the Delauney criteria This method creates a set of triangles which are as equiangular as possible and while this generally creates a good terrain surface it does not ensure that all important hydrologic features such as streams and ridges will be honored with triangle edges A classic problem which occurs and inhibits drainage analysis is the false dam A false dam occurs during the triangulation process when an edge straddles a natural channel forming a dam in the bottom of the channel as shown in Figure 6 8a False dams are easily corrected by swapping the triangle edge ab to cd as illustrated in Figure 6 8b Triangle edges are swapped using the Swap a Edge tool 25 and clicking on the edge which needs to be swapped Figure 6 8 False Dam Correction TIN Boundary gt Polygon The TIN Boundary gt Polygon command in the TINs menu can be used to create a boundary feature polygon from the vertices on the boundary of the 6 24 WMS TIN Such a polygon
346. he cursor is in the parameter value edit field Since the NFF Simulation dialog is large you may need to move it so that it does not obscure the help window dialog Using a Custom Defined Equation Because there is likely to be some lag between the time a new regression equation is made available and the time it is included in the NFF equations database compiled by the USGS an option to import a custom defined equation in WMS is available This makes it possible to use a regression equation for your state which has been changed created since the time WMS last compiled the USGS database To select a custom equation you should select the Custom option from the States dialog The custom equations are defined in an ASCII formatted file and by default WMS will automatically look for a file named custnff equ in the same directory as the WMS executable file is located If this file is not found then the file browser allows you to select a file from any location The format and instructions for setting this file up 1s documented in section 20 21 Computing Peak Discharges The text display window at the bottom of the dialog lists the steps required to compute peak discharges These steps have been outlined in the previous sections As each step is completed a Done is written in front of the step Once all steps are completed the Compute Peak Discharges button can be used to estimate the peak flows for the 2 5 10 25 50 100 and 500 year recu
347. he dialog shown in Figure 3 12 1s used to define following Node attributes Generic Generic nodes have no attributes and are typically used at stream confluence Link BreakCASC2D divides the grid cells defining channel segments up into links Link breaks are automatically created at branching points but may also be inserted at any node along the stream This is typically done for long stream segments in order to keep the number of grid cells in a link to a reasonable number Map Module 3 23 Weir Weirs can be defined at any node along a stream segment When designating a node as a weir the CASC2D weir parameters should be defined Feature Point 7 Node Type E3 Generic Link break C Weir Free flow coefficient 0 000 Flooded coefficient 0 000 Crest width fo 0o0 Crest elevation o 000 Figure 3 12 Feature Point Node Type Dialog for CASC2D Coverages CASC2D Arc Types The Arc Type dialog used for CASC2D coverages is shown in Figure 3 13 Arc attributes for CASCD include Generic Generic arcs have no attributes and are typically used when constructing polygons General Stream General stream arcs are identical to streams defined for drainage coverages and are used when going back and forth between coverage types Trapezoid Trapezoidal cross sections are used when defining channel routing in CASC2D models A Manning s N value depth bottom width and side slope must be defined for each arc of this type Brea
348. he process of analyzing hydraulics for a culvert using the HY8 program in WMS consists of the following steps 1 Enter the minimum maximum and design discharges 2 Enter the information for the culvert s you wish to analyze see section 15 7 2 3 Define the tailwater rating curve see section 15 7 3 4 Define the roadway surface information see section 15 7 4 5 Save the input file see section 15 7 5 6 Executing HY8 and Viewing Results see sections 15 7 6 15 7 8 All of these data are accessed defined from the HYS Culvert Analysis dialog shown in Figure 15 15 If you wish to run options of HY8 not yet supported by the WMS interface then you can open a DOS window change your default directory the HY8 directory found where WMS is installed and type HY8 at the prompt Culvert Data You may define up to six different culverts using the HYS Culvert Data dialog shown in Figure 15 16 For each culvert you will need to specify the upstream and downstream site information Site information may be entered as a set of stations this will define the length of the culvert and elevations culvert invert data or as a set of stations elevations and slopes embankment toe data Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 43 Hr8 Culvert Data Current culvert number 1 Total number of culverts 1 Site Information O Embankment toe data 8 Culvert invert data Upstream embankment toeculvert invert data Station 10 000 Elewatio
349. he scatter point rather than forming a flat plateau at the scatter point Quadratic Nodal Functions The nodal functions used in inverse distance weighted interpolation can also be higher degree polynomial functions constrained to pass through the scatter point and approximate the nearby points in a least squares manner Quadratic polynomials have been found to work very well Franke amp Nielson 1980 Franke 1982 The resulting surface reproduces local variations implicit in the data set is very smooth and will approximate the quadratic nodal functions near the scatter points The equation used for the quadratic nodal function centered at point k 1s as follows Qk x y ax 1 axo x xk ax3 y yk ax4 x xk AK 5 X XK MY VITA VnV KO ccccccccccnnonannnonananncanicnn ona nn ono nonianc arcano cinco 18 13 2D Scatter Points 18 9 To define the function the six coefficients ax axg must be found Since the function is centered at the point k and passes through point k we know beforehand that ax fk where fx is the function value or z value at point k The equation simplifies to Qk X Y fk ak2 x xk ak3 y yk ak4 X X ak5 X XK Y Yk ak6 Y YK 2 ssseseeseeccscsscsscssssscescssseesssssssssssssasaseasesseees 18 14 Now there are only five unknown coefficients The coefficients are found by fitting the quadratic to the nearest Ng scatter points in a weighted least squares fashion In order for the matrix equation used to solve
350. he separate option groups formerly each tab was a separate dialog that was accessed from an appropriate menu The Display Options command in the Display menu is used to access the dialog shown in Figure 2 13 General Tools 2 29 Display Options Ei EW Hyaologe bo ded ry 2D Grid Ss Pout TH Daage Food oem Map E Moa HAS Fudge eds E a an J Chano ag Locked smtm color l Fist inangies E Thangs Fie ed go edu mo a Bourdais Pe lene ove i Ed coun MN craneo m Ep hee e numer Sod gosp a Sod groep legend Westar f Lara legari B Change 0R coto l Larduss ai Casca Figure 2 13 Display Options Dialog Selecting the check box to the left of the named option toggles on off a display option Color style thickness and other attributes the specific attributes depend on whether it is a point line text or polygon attribute can be modified by selecting the color box that is left of the toggle box Each tab represents a group of display options that are used in the different modules When the Display Options dialog comes up the front tab will be determined based on the current module However display options for any tab can be set simply by selecting the desired one Some modules have more than one tab to define all of the display options A listing of which tabs are associated with each module is given below e TINs module TIN Drainage Flood e DEMs module DEM includes
351. he traditional method are as shown Area 101 9 acres C 41 7 83 60 2 75 101 9 Tc 18 minutes i 3 03 Qp 241 5 cfs Area 41 7 acres Tc 14 minutes Area 57 7 acres Tc 21 minutes C 88 2 79 Qp 142 8 cfs Area 60 2 acres Tc 18 minutes C 75 i 3 09 Qp 137 9 cfs Travel Time 6 minutes Area 159 6 acres Tc 24 minutes 18 6 C 41 7 83 60 2 75 57 7 88 159 6 i 2 59 Qp 338 1 cfs Figure 13 5 Sample Rational Method Model Rainfall intensities are determined using the times of concentration and an IDF curve As would be expected the higher the time of concentration the smaller the intensity Peak values for the three sub basins are identical for each of the two methods and are shown in Figure 13 5 However for the outlet points the peak flows and therefore hydrographs are different In the case of the traditional method the time of concentration for the upstream outlet the location where the two upper basins join is determined to be 18 minutes the largest tc of the two basins From this t a rainfall intensity of 3 03 is determined from the IDF curve The contributing area is Rational Method 13 11 101 9 acres the sum of the two upstream basins which when using equation 13 1 results in a peak flow of 241 7 cfs For the route by summing method the two upstream hydrographs are summed and the resulting peak flow value is
352. he vertex will be retriangulated as each vertex is deleted Otherwise the triangles adjacent to the vertex are simply deleted e If the check box entitled Adjust boundary to include exterior vertices is selected the boundary of the TIN will be changed so that the new vertex becomes part of the TIN if a new point is added outside the active TIN If the new vertex is in the interior of the active TIN the vertex will be automatically incorporated into the TIN e The default z value edit box displays the z value that will be assigned all subsequent new vertices created with the Create Vertex tool if the Confirm z values check box 1s not selected e If the check box entitled Confirm z values item is selected WMS will prompt for a z value every time a new vertex is created e If the Interpolate for default z on interior item is checked and a new vertex is entered in the interior of a TIN the program will linearly interpolate a default z value from the plane equation defined by the triangle containing the point e Ifthe Extrapolate for default z on exterior item is checked and a new vertex is entered outside the TIN boundary the program will extrapolate a default z value by using a gradient based inverse distance weighted interpolation 6 5 5 TINS 6 11 e The X Y tolerance edit box shows the tolerance used for such TIN Operations as removing duplicate vertices insertion of breaklines and dividing drainage boundaries You should not need
353. here a reservoir has been defined from the Tree menu Add Diversion Diversions are defined in a two step process by defining the diversion at the outlet or basin where flow is to be diverted and then assigning a previously defined diversion retrieving a diversion to another outlet Diversions are defined by first selecting an outlet point or a drainage basin where the flow is diverted and then selecting the Add Diversion command from the Tree menu After adding a diversion a link will be drawn from the outlet or basin selected to the side of the Graphics Window indicating that no retrieval outlet has yet been specified for that diversion 9 6 WMS The retrieval outlet point can be specified when defining diversions from one outlet to another by multi selecting the retrieval outlet before issuing the Add Diversion command 9 5 9 Retrieve Diversion To retrieve a diversion at an outlet point select the outlet point where the diverted flow is to be retrieved and then select the Retrieve Diversion command from the Tree menu If more than one diversion not yet retrieved exists a list of defined diversions without retrieval outlet points a diversion cannot be assigned to more than one retrieval outlet will appear in the diversion selection dialog Select the name of the desired diversion and choose OK After retrieving a diversion the diversion link will now be drawn from the outflow outlet or basin to the retrieval outlet point HEC
354. here as your computer monitor may only be 800x800 This means that the entire image can not be viewed at full resolution Initially WMS resamples the image so that it can fit the entire image on the computer screen at the best possible resolution For example using the image and screen size above only one in four pixels every other one in each direction from the image can be displayed since the image has 4 times as many pixels as the computer screen If you zoom in on the image you will notice that each image pixel appears larger than one screen pixel This occurs because when the image is resampled there is one pixel from the image for every screen pixel but after zooming there are fewer pixels from the image in the zoom region than there are screen pixels The image can be resampled to fit the screen again by selecting the Resample command from the Image menu Immediately after resampling the image you cannot view any part of it that is outside of the screen However if you zoom without resampling you can pan the image to view parts of it which are now outside of the screen Fit Entire Image The Fit Entire Image command fits the boundary of the image within the screen and shows the currently resampled region of the image This is useful when you wish to orient where you are viewing relative to the entire or image or if you wish to zoom in on another portion of the image without having to resample the entire image first Deleting Imag
355. hile dragging the cursor in the Graphics Window causes the rotating image to be updated dynamically See the View section later in this chapter for more information about changing the viewing angles Dynamic Tool Palette When the active module is changed the tools in the Dynamic Tool Palette change to the set of tools associated with the selected module Each module has a separate set of tools These module specific tools are documented in their respective chapters Selection Tools Many of the module specific tools in the dynamic portion of the Tool Palette are selection tools tools used to select objects such as triangles or vertices For many commands it is necessary to first select some objects before issuing the command For example to delete a set of triangles in the TINs module the Select Triangles tool is chosen the set of triangles to be deleted are selected and the Delete command is selected from the Edit menu Most of the selection tools follow a standard selection protocol Single items can be selected by clicking on the item With this method only one item can be selected at a time When a new item is selected any other currently selected items are unselected In many cases multiple items need to be selected If the SHIFT key is held down while clicking on individual items the items are added to the set of selected items A previously selected item can be unselected by holding down the SHIFT key and clicking on it ag
356. ially the same way as described below but you will need to know which format the DEM is in prior to reading the DEMs for use in WMS particularly in the case of the commonly used USGS 1 24000 DEMs that are available in both the USGS and SDTS formats The DEM file type is specified in the Import File dialog see Figure 2 4 and include all five of the previously mentioned formats the USGS DEM option refers to both the older single file format and the newer SDTS format Once you specify the format type the Import DEMs dialog controls file selection as well as other import options For example multiple files of the same format may be tiled together when importing but you cannot mix and match between two or more different formats NOTE ARC INFO grids that are to be imported must be saved as ASCII files from ARC INFOO in either feet or meter units and not latitude longitude 2 16 WMS The Import DEMs dialog is used to examine the limits of DEM files as well as defining a clipping boundary to eliminate regions outside the area of interest prior to actually reading the elevations in The Add button is used to add a new file to the list of files that will be read The standard file opening dialog appears from which you may select DEM files Once the file is added to the list a bounding rectangle is displayed in the small graphics window in the center of the dialog As additional files are added the graphics region is updated with new rectangles in o
357. iates Inc 1992 The Dodson Professional HEC System PROHEC Documentation Eagleson P S 1962 Unit hydrograph characteristics of sewered areas Proceedings of the ASCE HY2 American Society of Civil Engineers Espey Huston amp Associates Inc P S 1987 Drainage criteria Manual for Fort Bend County Texas Prepared for the Fort Bend County Drainage District Espey W H Jr W Howard Jr C W Morgan and F D Marsch 1966 Study of some effects of urbanization on storm runoff from a small watershed Texas Water Development Board Report 23 Espey W H Jr D G Altman and C B Graves Jr 1977 Nomographs for ten minute hydrographs for small urban watersheds ASCE Urban Resources Research Program Technical Memorandum No 32 Franke R amp G Nielson 1980 Smooth interpolation of large sets of scattered data International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering Vol 15 pp 1691 1704 Garbrecht J and L W Martz 1995 TOPAZ An Automated Digital Landscape Analysis Tool for Topographic Evaluation Drainage Identification Watershed Segmentation and Subcatchment Parameterization Overview U S Department of Agriculture Agricultural Research Service ARS Publication No NAWQL 95 1 17 pp October 1995 Jones N L 1990 Solid Modeling of Earth Masses for Applications in Geotechnical Engineering Ph D Dissertation The University of Texas at Austin 324 p WMS HEC 1990 HEC 1 Flood Hydrograp
358. ible result Removing Original Elevations Since saving original elevations so that they can be restored requires a large amount of memory they should be deleted once smoothing is done Deleting this array of elevations is done using the Remove Original Elevations command Interpolating DEM Elevations to TIN The Interpolate to TIN command is used to interpolate the elevations of the DEM to an existing TIN If TIN vertices lie outside the bounds of the active region of the DEM no interpolation is performed This interpolation is done automatically when creating a TIN from feature objects and a DEM is used for a background elevation map If you are trying to create a TIN from a very large DEM large number of DEM points it may be advantageous to create the TIN first and then interpolate elevations from the DEM in a piece wise fashion by dividing the DEM into several smaller regions and interpolating to the TIN one at a time 4 6 5 4 6 6 DEMs 4 9 Filling in Gaps Between DEMs When reading in multiple DEM files that are adjacent a small area or gap between the DEMs will have no elevation data The Fill NODATA Cells command will interpolate an elevation for the selected DEM cells that are classified as NODATA The elevation for a selected NODATA cell is determined using inverse distance weighted interpolation from it s eight nearest neighbor cells if any of the eight neighboring cells are NODATA cells then they are not used in th
359. ic parameters can be separated when issuing the Compute Basin Data command See section 7 7 10 Remove Duplicates The triangulation algorithm assumes that each of the vertices being triangulated are unique in the xy plane 1 e no two points have the same xy location When a new set of points is imported to WMS duplicate points should be removed by selecting Remove Duplicates from the TINs menu Otherwise WMS may abort when the points are triangulated The tolerance for duplicate vertices can be set in the Vertex Options dialog discussed previously 6 6 Triangulation A TIN can be constructed by triangulating a set of vertices WMS connects the vertices with a series of edges to form a network of triangles The resulting triangulation satisfies the Delauney criterion The Delauney criterion ensures that no vertex lies within the interior of any of the circumcircles of the triangles in the network Figure 6 3 As the triangulation process proceeds adjacent triangles are compared to see if they satisfy the Delauney criterion If necessary the adjacent edge of the two triangles is swapped the diagonal of the quadrilateral defined by the two triangles is changed to the other two vertices in order to satisfy the Delauney criterion This edge swapping process forms the basis of the triangulation algorithm When a new point is inserted into a TIN the point is incorporated into the TIN and the edges of the triangles adjacent to the new
360. ices or after you have corrected them you will want to refine your boundaries and then eliminate triangles exterior to the actual watershed Triangle basins are defined based on flow paths from the centroid of the triangle so some triangles will actually straddle the basin boundary The Refine Boundaries section 7 7 2 command will split these triangles along the true boundary and results in smoother basin boundaries Once you are satisfied with your watershed boundary the Delete Null Basin Triangles section 7 7 7 command is used to eliminate all triangles whose flow paths do not pass through an outlet basin 10 Compute Basin and Stream Parameters With the stream network and basin boundaries defined you can compute several important geometric parameters section 7 7 10 These parameters area slope length etc are automatically tied to the hydrologic models HEC 1 TR 20 etc where appropriate 1 2 4 Introduction 1 21 Figure 1 18 Computed Basin Geometric Parameters 11 Define the Hydrologic Model Along with the watershed definition on the TIN an accompanying topologic model is created You can then interact with the TIN or tree representation of the watershed to complete input for and run of the supported hydrologic models Guidelines for Using ARC INFO and ArcView Formatted Data Because the data structures used for the three primary methods of hydrologic data development in WMS parallel data types foun
361. idden edge removal flat shading and smooth shading The options are only applicable when smoothing a The Hidden Line option generates a wire frame image with the hidden edges removed 2 10 5 2 10 6 General Tools 2 35 The Flat Shade option generates an image with the hidden edges removed but it also applies colors to the triangles of a TIN The Smooth Shade option is similar to the Flat Shade option except that a light source and Gouraud shading is used to make the TIN surface appear smoother Shade The Shade command is used to generate a shaded image of a TIN or grid using the hidden surface removal technique or a hill shade in plan view of a DEM in the Graphics Window The default wire frame image can be restored by selecting the Refresh command in the Display menu Images can be draped over a TIN if properly registered This is controlled in the Image Display Options by choosing to map the image to the TIN If an image is mapped it will be draped and shaded over the TIN when choosing the Shade command Drawing Grid Options When entering new vertices or entering a polygon or polyline in plan view it is often useful to have the coordinates snap to a uniform grid This allows accurate placement of the objects when the desired coordinates are even multiples of some number A drawing grid can be activated using the Drawing Grid Options command in the Display menu If the Snap to grid option is selected all new vertices wi
362. idual menus Delete The Delete command is used to delete any selected objects This command is also equivalent to hitting the DELETE or BACKSPACE keys The Delete command as a macro in the tool palette xj 2 9 2 2 9 3 2 9 4 General Tools 2 27 Delete All The Delete All command is used to delete all of the data associated with the active module whether or not they have been selected It is similar to the New command in the File menu except that the New command deletes all data in all modules Selection Commands Select All The Select All command selects all items associated with the current selection tool providing that the tool supports the Select All option Select With Polygon The Select With Polygon command allows you to enter an irregular polygon enclosing the items to be selected one of the selection tools must be active To enter the polygon click on both the polygon s starting point and each intermediate point defining the polygon and double click on the ending point All items within the polygon will be selected If an error occurs while entering a polygon the following keys can be used e BACKSPACE or DELETE Back up one line segment e ESC Abort entering the polygon and selection by polygon e CONTROL Holding the CONTROL key down while moving the cursor causes all previously entered segments of the polygon to be moved simultaneously In addition to defining a polygon using the cursor a polyg
363. igure 13 4 Rational Method Hydrographs Dialog Traditional vs Route by Summing Methods of Outlet Hydrograph Computation As stated before the main difference between the two methods is that the traditional method computes a peak flow at an outlet by determining composite C t and areas from upstream basins and tributaries Using the composite tc a rainfall intensity from an IDF curve is chosen to compute peak flow and then one of the hydrograph methods is used to develop a runoff hydrograph The route by summing method on the other hands computes peak flows and hydrographs for basins in the traditional manner but hydrographs at outlet points are determined by combining or summing the hydrographs from upstream basins and tributaries The lag time determines the timing offset for hydrographs that arrive at an outlet through a tributary channel With this method you also have the option of defining a detention basin through which the outlet hydrograph may be passed The detention basin is defined and calculated using the same techniques as outlined in the hydrologic calculators see section 15 6 13 10 WMS The differences can probably best be understood with the following example Figure 13 5 shows a diagram of the basin containing two upstream basins that combine at a junction and are routed through a lower basin The areas runoff coefficients times of concentration and lag times for each basin and for the outlets using t
364. igure 20 22 Several gages can be included in a single file In addition several vector or scalar curves can be associated with each gage The times for each of the curves do not need to match fee VX2 VY VZ ltnp VXnp VYnp VZnp Repeat scalar and vector cards as many times as necessary ENDGAG The end of a gage group 7 Repeat gage card group as many times as necessary GAGE File type identifier BEGGAG The beginning of a gage group NAM name The name of the gage EDS sk ar 2 The gage location IDIR vx vy vz The positive direction vector COL red green blue The color of the gage SCA np name A scalar curve Eg V1 Time and value from 1 to np jt2 V2 I E tnp Vnp VEC np name A vector curve 4 VE UY VET Time vector from 1 to np Figure 20 21 Gage File Format GAGE BEGGAG NAM Gage LOC 10232 768000 3097 442316 600 600 000000 DIR 0 000000 1 000000 0 000000 COL 0 255 51 SCA 10 Runoff 3 000000000000000e 02 6 000000000000000e 02 9 000000000000000e 02 S00 13066833 71 5636 05 733039686961903e 03 495696626058331e 02 1 200000000000000e 03 6 660598699031131e 00 1 500000000000000e 03 2 132752979529125e 01 1 800000000000000e 03 3 714465098671455e 01 2 100000000000000e 03 5 304609314079730e 01 2 400000000000000e 03 6 622922014423446e 01 O 0101 N dD U0 U1 7443702
365. il type Soil type coverage name Soil Type Uze a Land use coverage Me for determining land use Land use coverage name Land Use Drainage coverage computation step oo co000 Mapping i Land use mapping C Soil woe mapping range Sagebrush with range range range range range Sagebrush with grass Sagebrush with grass u Desert shrub Poor Desert shrub Fair Desert shrub Good E Import Cancel Figure 15 1 Compute Composite Runoff Coefficients CN Dialog Once the polygon coverages and or grid files for land use or soil types are defined and the mapping tables set up you are prepared to compute parameters for one of the available methods 15 2 1 Computation Method The computation method determines whether composite curve numbers composite runoff coefficients oGreen amp Ampt infiltration parameters will be computed This affects the type of mapping table that will be required and also where results are stored When computing curve numbers the values are automatically stored with HEC 1 TR 20 TR 55 and any other model 15 4 WMS 15 2 2 15 2 3 15 2 4 15 2 5 requiring the use of a CN If runoff coefficients are computed they are stored with the rational method data Soil Type The soil type option determines whether a soil type coverage or a soil type grid will be used The soil data has a slightly different meaning depending on whether CN or runoff coefficients will be computed
366. ile this section outlines the fundamental concepts that are needed to efficiently use WMS the tutorials provide an excellent way to cement your understanding of how it operates The distinguishing difference between WMS and other applications designed for setting up hydrologic models like HEC and TR 20 is its unique ability to take advantage of digital terrain data for hydrologic model development WMS uses three primary data sources for model development 1 Geographic Information Systems GIS Vector Data 2 Digital Elevation Models DEMs or Gridded Elevation Sets 3 Triangulated Irregular Networks TINs Guidelines for Using Feature Object GIS Vector Data GIS vector data includes points lines and polygons that are used in WMS to represent basins streams and key points such as outlets or culverts In WMS we refer to this GIS data as Feature Objects and tools for using them are included in the Map Module Feature object data can be used by itself to create a watershed models for hydrologic analysis or as a companion in the development of watershed models with TINs and DEMs Many times it is not practical to obtain digital elevation data and perform an automated watershed characterization prior to setting up a hydrologic model Watershed and sub basin boundaries may already be known and stored as part of a GIS or CAD database or it may be straight forward to trace an existing map to define streams and basins With WMS properly str
367. iltering Store present elevations The set of elevations restored when using the Restore Elevations command depends on the last time elevations were stored By default the first time filtering is done all elevations are stored Thereafter 1f you wish to remember a current set of elevations you should use this command to store them Once the filtering process is complete commands other than filtering are chosen the status of the stored elevations is no longer valid 1 e you cannot restore the elevations Minimum and Maximum One of the primary functions of filtering is to remove large flat regions on a TIN When a large flat region is located a check is made to see if the vertices bordering the flat region are all greater than or all less than the elevation of the flat region 1 e a local minima pit or a local maximum peak flat region In this case points which are furthest from the boundary most likely to be the pit peak points can be locked extrapolated by the maximum value or both Such points are referred to as critical interior points By locking these points their elevations will not be altered during the filtering process Locking the points is important because the entire flat region would just move up or down without inferring the pit peak Extrapolating to the maximum value gives the pit peak more definition Some small flat regions do not have any interior points 1 e the only points in the flat region lie on t
368. imply click on any triangle edge El Contour Labels The Contour Label tool manually places numerical contour elevation labels at points clicked on with the mouse These labels remain on the screen until the contouring options are changed until they are deleted using the Contour Label Options dialog or until the Graphics Window is refreshed Contour labels can also be deleted with this tool by holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on the labels This tool can only be used when the TIN is in plan view E Select Basins The Select Drainage Basins tool is used to select basins which can then be either merged together or split In addition to selecting basins from the TIN this tool can be used to select one of the basin icons El Place Basin Labels Computed drainage data may be displayed for each basin However when there are many basins the screen can become cluttered with data The Place Basin Labels tool allows basin data to be placed at a position other than the 6 4 WMS centroid which is the default location When moving a label click in the desired basin and while holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the desired position on the screen and then release the button An arrow will be drawn from the final position to the point first clicked in the basin 6 2 11 Flow Path The Flow Path tool allows the flow paths for specified points to be drawn When this tool is active clicking in the graphics window at a loc
369. ine a model oooooocncncccnnncn 10 1 CIN SICD 7 9 OCA E ni 10 4 Watson 10 34 A sheoet Wiceetesansawiatane 2 6 Midden Hessie eas NA 2 34 Hidden s la erns a a 2 34 PLS AGC eesi o ea 2 34 ANSIA os 10 36 Holtan OES asi ica oo ies 10 17 HSPF Reading Existing cccccccececcccccsseeeesseseees 1 27 PP A A 15 40 A seas diesen ees 15 46 A sae eied beetles 15 46 hydrograph A 5 cats sassagitteacaasaaaetsuseaeeevicnaees 9 8 display Options a ind eens 9 7 GUISP AV A iets siaushsl cnet wedennines 9 6 ME ced A A A 20 31 IPON NO an 9 7 PUE aricuectatasegs 10 30 11 12 INDUE TOF HEC Troa ened eadieks 10 13 Mtra al S 9 8 number Of OrdinateS oooooooooooooooncncnnnnnnnnnnnss 10 4 observed for HEC 1 0 0 10 13 10 30 Patter tor HEC Fenaa 10 30 PODIO A ad 9 7 O 9 2 USO ISO ida 21 7 hydrologic soil grOUP oocccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 15 1 is PIA VIS orina nd aa 6 7 O a E 6 8 Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 1 B alpen terme ai 13 6 TOW ni see inverse distance weighted idw quadratic interpolation cc csseeeeeees 6 19 DUNN A SU LG a 20 7 A CEE 3 42 DACKGROD amarrada 3 43 A rd Sas tascss E E AN 3 46 display options las 3 43 TOT S oen E a 3 43 3 47 mapped to IN e 3 43 EAN a 3 43 EI Pe ere See 3 44 A A NS 3 46 UL E EET E 3 42 import KV SONICS vaca ETT ETE niet 21 2 import ARCGINFPO TIN ras 2 19 attributes of shape file ccceceeeeeeeeeeee
370. ine the representative flow path s within each basin using arcs that are used to determine lag or time of concentration A travel time equation can then be assigned to each arc length and slope are automatically determined from the arc when a DEM or TIN is present and the sum of the arc travel times within a basin used for time of concentration or lag 15 6 WMS 15 3 1 time Pre defined equations such as are used by the FHWA or in TR 55 can be selected or user defined equations developed see section 15 3 2 There is not an advantage of one method over the other Each allows a certain amount of customization and the ability to generate a summary report in a text file or by copying to the clipboard so that these critical input data can be well documented In general if time of travel can be determined from a single empirical equation then computing using the basin data will be more convenient whereas if the time of concentration or lag time is determined by combining the time of travel across one or more flow path segments overland flow shallow concentrated flow channel flow etc then the map data method will likely work best Each of the hydrologic models supported by WMS that require a lag time time of concentration or channel travel time allow you to pick either of the two methods Buttons adjacent to the input fields allow access to the different methods and the computed result is used to define the input value for the model yo
371. ined the user clicks on the button to execute the operation If either of the Delete toggles are set the data set corresponding to that Delete toggle is deleted after the operation is completed The Data Calculator is useful for a variety of tasks For example to generate a data set representing the absolute difference between two other data sets the user first subtracts one data set from the other to make a new temporary data set The absolute value unary operator is then applied to this temporary data set to get the final data set representing the difference between the two original data sets Such a data set would be useful for comparing the results of two separate solutions computed by a numerical model Data Calculator Operarnd 1 Operator Operand 2 Compute Result C Scalar Test 5 000 Results File Namel Delete Done _ Delete Figure 16 2 Data Calculator Dialog 16 4 Contours Most of the objects supported by WMS can be contoured by turning on the contour option in the 2D Grid tab of the Display Options dialog When a grid is contoured the scalar values associated with the active data set for the grid are used to generate the contours Since contouring can be done for several of the different modules the discussion of contouring options is given in section 2 10 2 16 5 Fringes If the Fringes item in the Display Options dialog is selected for an object a color shaded image will be g
372. ined for each different material Finally reclassification causes all cells of a given material index to inherit that soils parameters for each map When the Reclassify Options button is chosen the dialog in Figure 19 5 comes up This dialog is used to establish typical parameter values for each soil A soil id and name must be defined for each soil The toggle boxes at the top of 19 12 WMS the dialog are undimmed if that map has been defined for the current model and dimmed if it is not Turning on a toggle indicates that that value will be reclassified to the appropriate map when the Reclassify button is selected For example if you wish to reclassify hydraulic conductivity then one of the infiltration options must specified before entering the Reclassify Options dialog The toggle for hydraulic conductivity must then be turned on and a value for each different material index defined Finally selecting the reclassify button will cause the values of hydraulic conductivity to be mapped into the hydraulic conductivity according to the material index map Reclassify Ea _ Storage capacity _ Retention depth Moisture content Interception coefficient Area reduction depth Residual saturation Surface roughness x Hydraulic conductryity x Porosity Initial depth Capillary pressure Pore index Import Table Esport Table Add Row Delete Row Description Hyd Cond Cap Pres o Gravel 1 0000 0 0000 0 4500 Pa sand
373. ing the maximum stream length in the basin by the length AVEL The mean basin elevation MFD The maximum flow distance within a basin including both overland and channel flow Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 13 MFDS The slope of the MFD CTOMEFD The distance from the centroid of the basin to the nearest point associated with the MFD CSD The distance from the centroid of the basin to a point in the stream which is a part of the MFD The CSD differs from the CTOMFD in that it is only concerned with the channel or stream flow portion of the MFD whereas the CTOMED also incorporates the portion of the MFD which is overland flow CSS The slope of the CSD MSL The maximum stream length within the basin This is computed by determining the maximum distance traveled when flowing down from the top of streams in a basin and where the streams exit the basin MSS The slope of MSL In addition to the basin attributes defined above the following stream attributes are computed L Stream lengths for each segment SS Stream slopes for each segment Stream attribute labels cannot be moved Empirical Lag Time and Time of Concentration Equations Dodson Dodson amp Associates 1992 compiled several equations from hydrologic publications WMS has implemented many of these equations and allows you to choose from the ones listed below to automatically compute lag times times of concentration Because most of the equations were develo
374. ing curves must be defined for the SE SV and SQ options of the storage routing option The XY Series Editor is invoked whenever the Define button is selected from a dialog used to define storage routing Any time area series already defined in this session will be displayed in the list box If it is the first time the editor has been used in this session or if a series has not been assigned to the given storage routing record an empty default series will be active and ready for definition If the storage routing record already has a series assigned to it that series will be the current or active series when the editor is invoked The X field is simply a cumulative numbering of the values entered and the Y field represents either the elevations volumes or outflows corresponding to the SE SV and SQ cards depending upon the options set when the XY Series Editor was invoked The label above the Y series values will serve as a reminder as to the type of values the XY Series Editor is expecting Up to 20 values may be entered for each of the storage routing options and the editor will not allow more values to be entered for a storage routing curve The graphical display can be used as a visual check of the validity of the values entered for the storage routing curves 21 9 Defining A Cross Section RX RY Cross sections can be used with storage routing when the normal depth option is chosen as well as in conjunction with Muskingum Cunge routing
375. interpolating a set of values it is sometimes useful to limit the interpolated values to lie between a minimum and maximum value For example when interpolating rainfall values a negative value of rainfall is meaningless However many interpolation schemes will produce negative values even if all of the scatter points have positive data values This occurs in areas where the trend in the data 1s toward a zero value The interpolation may extend the trend beyond a zero value into the negative range In such cases it is useful to limit the minimum interpolated value to zero Interpolated values can be limited to a given range by selecting the Truncate values option in the Interpolation Options dialog and entering a minimum and maximum interpolation value 18 7 1 18 7 2 2D Scatter Points 18 5 The interpolation methods are listed in the Interpolation Options dialog To the right of most of the method names is a button used to bring up a dialog for entering more interpolation options specific to the interpolation method The methods supported for 2D interpolation are linear inverse distance weighted Clough Tocher and natural neighbor Linear Interpolation If the linear interpolation scheme is selected the scatter points are first triangulated to form a temporary TIN If the surface is assumed to vary linearly across each triangle the TIN describes a piece wise linear surface which interpolates the scatter points The equation of the pl
376. ion automatically To do this you must create a file named wmstc equ and define one or more equation groups a group may be used because sometimes your equation to compute a travel time may be a function of another equation The following is an example wmstc equ file EQGROUP Myegl EQ 1 49 n R Sc DEF Manning s equation UNITS laghour VAR n DEF Manning s roughness coefficient VAL 002 UNITS none WHICH 1 VAR R DEF Hydraulic Radius VAL 0 0 UNITS ft WHICH 2 EQ XA Pw DEF Hydraulic Radius UNITS ft VAR XA DEF Cross section area VAL 0 0 UNITS sqft WHICH 1 VAR Pw DEF Wetted Perimeter VAL 0 0 UNITS ft WHICH 1 EQGROUP Myequ2 EQ Lc V DEF Time of travel UNITS lagmin VAR V DEF Velocity VAL 2 5 UNITS none WHICH 1 The following describes the keywords used in the file as well as the possible values that can be entered following each keyword Each equation group begins with the EQGROUP card The rest of the line is interpreted as a character string and used as the name of the equation group in the drop down combo box allowing you to select an equation Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 11 Each equation is defined using the following three cards with their associated inputs EQ The equation DEF A character string definition for the equation UNITS Units of the computed result Possible values for units include laghour lagmin tchour temin clarkr tp The first four identify whether the equation 1s intended for use i
377. ion to interpolating rainfall values to basin centroids it is often convenient to interpolate the rainfall values to a grid so that an animation sequence of a storm can be generated The Bounding Grid options described below is useful for setting up a grid for this purpose 18 10 Bounding Grid In many cases it is useful to interpolate to a grid which just contains the scatter point set where the data are defined The Bounding Grid command was designed in order to simplify the creation of such a grid If the Bounding Grid command in the Data menu is selected the Create Grid dialog comes up with the grid dimensions automatically initialized so that the grid extends beyond the bounds of the active scatter point set by ten per cent CHAPTER 19 CASC2D Interface 19 1 19 2 Introduction CASC2D is a physically based rainfall runoff model which uses rectangular grid cells to represent the distributed watershed and rainfall domains The model uses a two dimensional diffusive wave equation to simulate overland flow and a one dimensional diffusive wave equation to simulate channel flow It includes an advanced soil moisture accounting procedure primarily based on the Green Ampt infiltration model WMS can be used to create a finite difference grid and provide all necessary input such as stream locations and properties lakes soil properties and precipitation Spatial data can also be prepared using standard GIS software and then imported i
378. ions are entered edited using the Edit TR 20 Parameters dialog accessed from the 7R 20 menu This dialog displays current values and lets you edit 11 2 WMS values for the currently selected hydrograph station More details are given later in this chapter 11 1 4 Model Check This step allows you to check your TR 20 data prior to performing an analysis It reports errors such as zero area undefined precipitation etc These errors should be corrected by returning to previous steps before actually trying to run TR 20 11 1 5 Run TR 20 WMS creates TR 20 files compatible with any version of TR 20 However a Windows X Windows on UNIX and MS Windows on PC s compiled version of TR 20 is distributed with WMS so that it can be run without leaving the WMS environment The remainder of this chapter describes how data for creating a TR 20 file is entered using WMS For an in depth description of the TR 20 runoff model itself refer to the TR 20 User s Manual 11 1 6 View Hydrographs Once a TR 20 simulation has been run you can view resulting hydrographs using the commands in the Hydrographs menu After viewing the hydrographs you may wish to repeat the previous steps in order to calibrate a model or look at different scenarios 11 2 Tool Palette The tools used for selecting outlets basins and diversions are defined in the TIN DEM Map and Topological Tree modules When entering 7R 20 data for basins or outlets defined parameter
379. ions in English units however metric unit calculations can be specified 10 3 8 10 3 9 10 3 10 HEC 1 Interface 10 5 Tree Diagram DIAGRAM The diagram option causes a diagram of the stream network to be printed to the HEC 1 output file This diagram should appear similar to the tree representation created by WMS Listing LIST Causes HEC 1 to echo print input data DEPTH AREA STORMS JD Runoff simulations which use a consistent depth area relationship as defined in the HEC 1 User s Manual can be defined by clicking on the button to bring up the dialog shown in Figure 10 2 10 6 WMS Depth Area Storm Rainfall Pattern Type Standard Pl PC Day ho Month 1 Year ag Hypothetical PH Frequency i 0 WETHE storm Depth Area Storms JD M Stormi Precip 2 5000 Area Eoo Define Series AStom2 Precip 00000 Area onoo _DefineSer es FP Storm3 Precip fpo000 Area 0 0000 Define Series I Storm4 Precip 0 0000 Area 0 0000 Define Series Po Storm5 Precio 0 0000 Area o 0000 Weine Sees To Storm amp Precip 0 0000 Area 0 0000 Define Series Storm Precip 0 0000 Area 0 0000 Define Series Storm Precip 0 0000 Area 0 0000 DefineSe es T Storm 3 Precip JUUOUU0 Area 0 0000 Defne senes mes Figure 10 2 Depth Area Storm Dialog Rainfall Pattern Type Each storm JD record may be defined with a set of PI PC cards giving the precipitation pattern to be used for that depth and
380. ionship The way in which these three inputs are defined from the detention basin calculator is documented in the next three sections Detention Basin Hydrograph Routing storage Capacity Elevation Discharge Define Define storage Capacity Curve Elevation Discharge Curve 459900 O40 050 1 20 1 60 zg n O40 060 1 20 1 60 lt H 4 00 45 0 45 0 3 50 40 0 40 0 a 35 0 35 0 a 30 0 30 0 25 0 25 0 S 20 0 20 0 1 50 15 0 15 0 1 00 10 0 10 0 0 50 5 0 5 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 000 O40 O80 120 160 2 O00 040 O80 120 1 60 2 00 Elevation Elevation Plotto Aydrograph Window Plotto Aydrograph Window Plot Options Plot Options Hydrograph Compute Outflow Aydrograph Initial storage Mes te Aydrolcaic odel Figure 15 11 Detention Basins Dialog When computing an outflow hydrograph an initial storage 1s used to account for any volume of water that may be in the detention basin prior to the arrival of the inflow hydrograph If depth or elevation is known then the elevation vs volume storage capacity curve must be used to determine the initial storage The units of the initial storage should be the same as the units defined for the storage capacity relationship The storage capacity and elevation discharge curves no matter how they are defined are plotted in the detention basin calculator They can also be displayed in the hydrograph window by selecting the respective Plot to Hydrograph Window buttons Each of the curves can be
381. is may not actually be the case and is the reason why this method should not be used if there are large clusters of flat triangles Smoothing Pits The Smooth Pits command adjusts the elevations of pits in order to remove them For each pit the two next highest elevations of adjacent vertices are located and the elevation of the pit is set to the average of these two elevations Flat triangles should be removed before using this command Filtering A TIN Typical gridded data such as USGS quads contain elevations that have been rounded to the nearest foot or meter This rounding process creates a stair step pattern of elevations and often results in large areas of flat triangles Removing large areas of flat triangles cannot be done with the Remove Flat Objects command because interpolated surface values in large flat areas to not deviate from the flat triangles themselves Thus any new points added would only create more flat triangles In such cases filtering must be done prior to removing flat objects When a TIN is filtered the elevation of each unlocked vertex is averaged with its neighbors Locked vertices are used to compute the average value but only unlocked vertices are actually modified This averaging process blends local discontinuities in elevation thus removing the original stair step pattern and smoothing the TIN You can take advantage of the different ways locked and unlocked vertices are treated to influence how a TIN is
382. ischarge and Runoff VOM is 11 6 11 52 DISCRAFLE ASEO E creci 11 6 11 5 3 ELEVARON OF Hydrog raph esras isere SAA 11 6 11 5 4 Fow DOOD Oss Ares A AAA A A OEE EOR 11 6 11 5 5 Save Results Jor Summary Tables tit AA a a a AA di 11 6 Io BASN DATA RUNOB aiii iii 11 6 11 6 1 BASTAN IVC AA AA AR AA is 11 7 11 6 2 DISTA da 11 7 11 6 3 A A A E a EE 11 7 11 6 4 Timeo CONCERTO ti IN oO E aeeie as aL ieee eee E A 11 8 11 6 5 Basin Geometric ARTES ia 11 8 11 6 6 Compute T CABG S DIGI it A wu O A IEEE aad esata 11 8 11 6 7 COMPUTE ECMO POA LN AA AS 11 8 11 6 8 USO DE med EROS SS COCO A NAAA AAA AA MAA 11 8 11 6 9 USC ADO INCIARCO IVOD AAA AAA A AROS 1 1 9 7 ROUTING DAT ACCRA CH dias 11 9 11 7 1 ONEN AE S oire E E TEE tabetnunaenoseetoeaaess 11 10 11 7 2 REACCION A EAE E E E daa E oe eee ah 11 10 11 7 3 ROUUN LICEO ASA EEE 11 10 11 7 4 OUPUECORTO ls AAA A A AAA A A EEN 11 12 11 7 5 Direc IInp H GIOIA INS sii NA dias 11 12 X WMS PES RESERVOIR daa 11 12 11 8 1 NAME A A E lone Oa aaa sae 11 14 11 8 2 DEMI KOUN E onr A N 11 14 11 8 3 SLATE ROUNA ELEVA AN AAN ER 11 14 11 8 4 DeitiinoRescrivonD Tia 11 14 11 8 5 APUESTO STAN TA TER AI E O AS 11 14 11 8 6 DUDE CINTA ds 11 14 LEO DIVERSION A AA AAA 11 14 11 9 1 LCL ORE CCT TE ETRE is 11 15 11 9 2 Diversion INflOW T aram eter S se isis E ecg Aas aoa was eas dA So 11 15 11 9 3 DIVAS TOO Parameters eS 11 15 11 9 4 OIPUECONTO 3 A EE TEA iss 11 16 11 10 READING AND WRITING TR 20 FILES c
383. ited the corresponding point on the curve is adjusted instantaneously The plot provides an immediate visual feedback to the user which is helpful in detecting erroneous values on input The Plot Tools The Plot Window can also be used to edit the xy series graphically The following tools found on the right side of the plot are used for graphical editing select Point Tool The Select Point tool is used to graphically change the xy values of a point by clicking on the point with the cursor and repositioning the point while holding down the mouse button The tool can also be used to select points for deletion A set of points can be selected by clicking on the points with the SHIFT key depressed or by dragging a box around a set of points The selected points can then be deleted by selecting the Delete button beneath the xy edit fields The XY Series Editor 21 5 T Create Point Tool The Create Point tool is used to graphically add new points to a curve by clicking in the plot window at the location of the new point al Zoom Tool The Zoom tool is used to zoom in on a region of the curve being plotted in the plot window Clicking on a point zooms the view by a factor of two around the point Dragging a rectangle alters the mapping so that the region in the rectangle fills the plot window Holding the SHIFT key down while clicking in the plot window causes the view to be enlarged by a factor of two around the point clicked 21 4 2
384. k Point Break point cross sections are cross sections where area conveyance etc for different locations of the cross section Ridge Like general streams ridge arcs are used for the purpose of compatibility with drainage coverages A Priessman slot is used to initialize channel flows prior to a CASC2D simulation The slot is incised in the channel automatically from within the CASC2D model from the given width and depth parameters 3 24 WMS Feature Arc Type Ea O Generic arc General stream are a Trapezoidal cross section arc Manning s N 0 000 Channel depth 0 000 Bottom width 0 000 Side slope H 0 000 Break point cross section arc Meine Eross Secon Parameters Ridge arc X Define Priessman slot Slot width 0 000 Slot depth 0 000 Figure 3 13 Feature Arc Type Dialog for CASC2D Coverages CASC2D Polygon Type The Polygon Type dialog used for CASC2D coverages is shown in Figure 3 14 The polygon types are identical to the drainage coverage and include the following Generic Generic polygons have no attributes Boundary Boundary polygons are used to define the perimeter of the watershed and are used for creating grids from an already known watershed boundary Lake Lake polygons are used to define cells within a grid used to simulate lakes during a CASC2D simulation Initial leakage discharge spillway crest width discharge coefficient initial water elevation and crest elevation must be defin
385. kground elevation source and a create a new TIN from it A background elevation source can be a DEM TIN or both 1 16 WMS 2 Smooth the Background Elevation Digital elevation data is often rounded to the nearest integral value foot or meter for storage efficiency However this can cause problems for automated basin delineation techniques especially where there is relatively little relief WMS has utilities for smoothing both DEM section 4 6 and TIN section 6 9 4 background elevation data The results can be dramatic as seen in Figure 1 13 and often make the difference in being able to successfully complete a watershed modeling project Figure 1 13 Flat DEM Data Before and After Smoothing 3 Create a Conceptual Model with Feature Objects In order to insure that triangle edges in the resulting TIN will conform to streams and other important drainage features you need to identify them Introduction 1 17 with feature objects A rough basin boundary defining the domain of the TIN region needs to be created Additionally any lines such as streams and roads that should be represented with triangle edges should also be created as part of the conceptual model Conceptual models can be created in many different ways but some of the easiest ways in WMS include 1 Import existing digital data in GIS CAD DXF DLG or other simplified xy formats see section 2 8 6 on importing data 2 Use a contour display of a DEM and on
386. le VIU ES ca aint eps satcoicc usted Som ideo 6 2 A A aeiectaansiestseaae dateaunoe E 6 3 WIRELESS cid 6 3 CONTOUPLADO SNA E 6 3 SLEET TAO SING retire cra late cain rs ars NAAA ee SA AAA AAN See A ld hs A ENEE 6 3 SINE TA As AAA tA ACRE RPE ES RRC RT DOT Oe NERO IR AER ee Da ME SE RE roe 6 3 PLOW TOI AAA ic dicate sie ide she asset UE N alte au eos tb a teed bloke Ua seta dts ONEN 6 4 62 DISPLAY OPTON Siri A 6 4 A A A RM ie Madang ise sede 6 5 OIC oe ies tee sonra O e O Mees ect a a nes eeu nndencateeanttaeesncees 6 5 A 6 5 IE BONUA OS aii 6 5 Do CIRCUIT CES diia 6 6 OO Vente TIAN ENUN OTTS tt RN R O 6 6 OIL VEON IE AEN EEEE gp aS TAs NC sea Ieee Eee ONE 6 6 ODO ELEVA oa ears tated Aa 6 6 CE AIOE DAA II A eitiean tiered stock 6 6 6 3 10 A nekdtinnt abe seu E EE E AE 6 6 6 3 11 Flat TANO A vu coey E ea eon aos 6 6 6 3 12 Fla TRIG CO EAS AA 6 7 6 3 13 FIOUCHONMEL E ATEOS tn AAA AA A AAA AENOR 6 7 6 3 14 E A EA T HIN A L teal NATE I E A EENE ten event ui EA A A A EAE A EAA A tans 6 7 Table of Contents V 6 3 15 A eae ee 6 7 6 3 16 SP TALON So E TE T EEEE E T E ETO 6 7 6 3 17 SOU GROUP gerass a E A er eae dees eee 6 7 6 3 18 TGA U SE rr EN EE E E EEE E EAA EE E AEAEE 6 8 6 3 19 Hydrologic Soil Group LEGENd ck AA OER 6 8 6 3 20 kana USET CONG A des 6 8 A IN AR de 6 8 OS VERTEX OPTIONS ii A a 6 8 O Cre NEW Vr COS E AR 6 8 032 DA A o 6 9 603 3 CRaneina Vertex Positions and Liens 6 9 OSA Vere x Op ons DIOS iS did 6 10 03I LOCKA UN
387. lected arc are displayed in the variables window of the Time Computation Attributes dialog Variables such as length and slope will generally have defaulted values however other variables such as Manning s roughness coefficient will need to be entered before a travel time for the arc can be computed Variables are edited by selecting the variable you want to modify from the text window and then setting the value in the adjacent edit field The Instructions Results window will let you know when variables have not been defined and the travel time for the arc once all variables have reasonable values Equation Types The TR 55 equations for travel time are one set of commonly used equations to compute time of concentration Others including those used by the Federal Highways Administration are variations of the same type of equations These sets of equations form a library of predefined equations in WMS However you can also enter your own equation or modify one of the existing equations Equations consist of a type and sub type user defined equations do not require a sub type Both are specified using the drop down combo boxes in the attribute dialog TR 55 The TR 55 equations represent three different flow conditions sheet flow shallow concentrated flow and open channel flow To select a TR 55 equation set the type to TR 55 and the sub type to one of the three flow conditions Sheet Flow Sheet flow generally occurs in the headwate
388. levations for the domain of the watershed being analyzed General methods for grid creation are discussed in the Grid module chapter but three different techniques are reviewed here since they are the most common ways grids are created for CASC2D models 19 5 1 19 5 2 CASC2D Interface 19 5 Manually Creating a Grid The simplest way to set up a grid is to use the Create Grid command from the Grid menu of the Grid module However while this allows a grid to quickly be generated it leaves two important issues unresolved elevations for the grid cells and which cells within the rectangular grid are inside or outside the watershed boundary If a grid is created manually then elevations must be interpolated from a scattered data set or imported from a grid or data set of the exact same size from the elevations map accessible from the Overland Flow options in the CASC2D menu By default all cells of a grid are active or inside the watershed Cells outside the watershed boundary can be made inactive by using any or combinations of cell selecting techniques and then choosing the Inactivate Selected option from the Grid menu Creating a Grid from Feature Objects Most of the time elevations for a CASC2D model will be derived from DEMs The tools in the DEM module of WMS can be used to import and stitch together adjacent USGS DEM files or import GIS files for use as background elevation maps In addition a set of scattered elevation points c
389. ll snap to the closest grid point The grid spacing and options for displaying the grid can also be set using the Drawing Grid Options dialog Auto vs Manual Redraw When the Manual Redraw is on all display refreshes must be done manually by either selecting the Refresh command in the Display menu or the Refresh macro Ed from the tool palette By default WMS is in Auto ReDraw mode which forces updates after display options change or when a menu or dialog covers one of the graphics windows and there is not enough memory to save the pixels behind the menu dialog so that they can be restored after the menu dialog is dismissed When in manual mode rather than forcing the update the Refresh macro will turn red signifying that the display is not up to date and refresh must be forced manually in order to bring it back up to date The main advantage of using the manual redraw is when you are working on a computer that does not have enough video memory to do backing store and refreshes occur after each pull down menu disappears typically only X Window terminals have this problem 2 36 WMS 2 11 2 10 7 Hide Show Hydrograph Window As described in section 2 2 the Hydrograph Window is a floating window and can be opened and closed By default the Hydrograph Window will be closed to view To open it you should select the Show Hydrograph Window command from the Display menu The Hydrograph Window will appear as a floating window and can be cl
390. lled on their individual computer The Network Server Version by default allows only one concurrent network user to use the software at any time Additional concurrent network user counts may be purchased from BOSS International allowing multiple users to access the software simultaneously from the file server WMS Installation Guide DD For WMS to properly prevent accidental file overwriting a file sharing file locking program i e SHARE EXE when using DOS or VSHARE 386 when using Windows for Workgroups must be loaded on both the file server and the individual workstation For more information on these programs consult your DOS or Windows for Workgroups User Manuals Troubleshooting AA AH H lt A ___ lt lt _ K a __ _ zz5 _ _ E i The following is a list of common errors which may be encountered upon installing and running WMS e Not running on a 386 DPMI implementation WMS is a 32 bit Windows application In order to run WMS Windows must be running in Enhanced Mode To check which mode Windows is running in open the About Program Manager menu item from the Help Menu The Windows Mode will be displayed here If you are running in Standard Mode exit Windows and restart with the following command WIN 3 e Not enough memory for Application WMS requires a minimum of 16 Mbytes of RAM to run effectively You may require additional memory depending on the mod
391. lly refine the TIN in important areas Either an existing TIN or a DEM can be used as a background elevation map when interpolating z values for the 3 34 WMS vertices of the TIN If appropriate z values have been assigned to the feature arcs then the z values from the arcs will override z values interpolated from the background elevation map for TIN vertices created from feature arcs vertices Figure 3 22 shows a TIN which results from creating a TIN using the feature objects shown in Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 TIN Created from Feature Objects For TINs requiring a lot of memory high resolution of vertices or covering a large spatial extent 1t may be advantageous to build the TIN in the absence of a background DEM Interpolation of elevations to the TIN from the DEM afterwards can be done in a block by block fashion using the Interpolate to TIN command found in the DEMs menu In other words you can read in portions of the DEM and interpolate to TIN multiple times Elevations for TIN vertices that are not within the extents of the current DEM are not interpolated No such option exists if a TIN is used as the background elevation source If you already have TIN data why would you ever use a TIN as a background elevation set The primary purpose of creating TINs from feature objects is to insure that stream channels and other important hydrologic features are adequately represented in the TIN as triangle edges If you simply triangula
392. lso be used as the background elevation map used when creating a TIN TIN Files ARC INFO TIN files must be in ASCII NET format in order to import them and use for watershed characterization The TIN can be used directly to create streams and basin boundaries or as a background elevation map used in conjunction with feature objects for TIN creation 1 3 Modules 1 3 1 The interface for WMS is divided into six separate modules A module is provided for each of the basic processes supported by WMS As you switch from one module to another the Tool Palette and the menus change This allows you to focus only on the tools and commands related to the process you are currently working on Switching from one module to another can be done instantaneously to facilitate the simultaneous use of several processes when necessary The modules listed in the next few paragraphs are supported in WMS Triangulated Irregular Network TIN Module The TIN module is used for terrain modeling and automated basin delineation TINs are formed by connecting a set of xyz points scattered or gridded with edges to form a network of triangles Points used to create TINs can be obtained by digitizing a contour map or a scanned image inside of WMS or 1 24 WMS 1 3 2 1 3 3 1 3 4 generated automatically from feature arcs and polygons using DEMs or existing TINs as background elevation maps TINs can be contoured displayed in oblique view with mapped i
393. ly CHAPTER 17 El 2D Grids 17 1 17 2 Introduction The 2D Grid module is used for surface visualization and as the primary building block of the two dimensional finite difference surface runoff model CASC2D Scalar values can be interpolated to a grid from a set of 2D scattered data points These values can then be contoured or displayed with hidden surface removal and color fringes to display the variation in the interpolated data The scalar values for grid cells may also be used as input parameters for running a CASC2D Grid Types Two types of grids are supported in the 2D Grid module mesh centered grids and cell centered grids Figure 17 1 When computations are performed on a mesh centered grid the computation points are the grid nodes or the corners of the grid cells With a cell centered grid computations are performed at the cell centers 17 2 WMS Figure 17 1 Types of 2D Grids Supported in WMS a Mesh Centered Grid b Cell Centered Grid When a data set is imported to a cell centered grid there is one value in the data set for each cell The contouring and fringing functions use scalar values at the cell corners Therefore whenever contouring or fringing 1s performed the values at the cell centers are interpolated to the cell corners Interpolation to cell corners is only done for visualization purposes All computations performed using the data calculator are performed on the original values at the cell
394. m RM The Muskingum method is dependent primarily upon an input weighting factor The parameters along with a short description of their meaning are as follows e NSTPS The number of integer steps for the Muskingum routing e AMSKK Muskingum K coefficient in hours for entire reach e X Muskingum x coefficient Using the basin data computed by WMS when a TIN or DEM is used to delineate the watershed the AMSKK and NSTPS coefficients can easily be estimated AMSKK is essentially the travel time for the reach which can be estimated by noting the length of the stream segment displayed in the Muskingum Cunge dialog even though it is dimmed and multiplying by an assumed channel velocity 1 5 ft s would be appropriate for most natural channels Of course you will need to convert the estimated travel times from seconds to hours before entering it into the AMSKK edit field The NSTPS value is the number of time steps the flood wave is in the channel and can be determined by dividing AMSKK by the computational time step found in the Job Control dialog again be sure that units are consistent Storage RS Storage discharge routing can be used to define either channel or reservoir routing When this routing option is specified the appropriate data items are dimmed and additional radio buttons are used to determine whether channel or reservoir routing is to be used The following parameters must be defined regardless of the storage routing
395. mage or a wireframe image 2 8 8 Print Printed copies of WMS window displays can be generated by using the print command The UNIX version of WMS will create a PostScript file that can be sent to any PostScript printer The UNIX version can also create encapsulated PostScript files that can be imported into many other programs The MS Windows version of WMS will print to any printer supported by Windows When the Print command is selected a dialog Figure 2 10 appears allowing you to change a number of printing parameters The Printer Postscript Setup button accesses the Windows Printer Setup dialog in the Windows version and the Postscript Setup dialog Figure 2 11 in the UNIX version The Page Layout button accesses the Page dialog Figure 2 12 The Display Options button accesses the Print Display Options dialog These dialogs are described below Black and White Print Setup O Gray Page Layout Color Display Options Cancel Figure 2 10 Print Options Dialog General Tools 2 23 Printer Postscript Setup The Printer Postscript Setup command allows you to control the orientation of the printed image on the sheet of paper and the paper size The dialog shown in Figure 2 11 is for UNIX versions For Windows versions the standard Printer Setup dialog for the currently selected printer device will be brought up which allows you to change other relevant parameters of the currently selected printer For the Window
396. mages and hidden surfaces removed and several other display options that can be set to visualize and understand the terrain surface better TINs are used for basin delineation and drainage analysis Basin areas and several other geometric parameters can be computed and combined with hydrologic analyses DEM Module The DEM module is used to import and display USGS 7 5 minute both the older single file format and the newer SDTS format and 3 arc second digital elevation models or to import a pre processed DEM from either the GRASS or ARC INFOS GIS DEMs can be used to delineate watershed and sub basin boundaries and then converted to a series of arcs and polygons They can be contoured and displayed in oblique view When creating a TIN they can be used as a background elevation map Map Module The Map module is used to define stream channels ridges boundaries and any other important terrain features present in the model The points nodes arcs and polygons have been structured after the ARC INFO data model TINs can be constructed from these feature objects using an existing TIN or a DEM as a background elevation map Triangle edges are enforced along all arcs Land Use and Soil type layers can be created using feature objects in the Map module and then used to compute curve numbers or map other important modeling parameters Other layers are also used for computing time of concentration or lag time mapping rainfall and other paramete
397. mapping table must be imported using the Import button prior to computing the composite curve numbers The radio group above the mapping window specifies whether the land use or soil type mapping table is displayed For a land use or soil type coverage the mapping table may be set up interactively by selecting each polygon and assigning the appropriate parameters Such files can then be exported and later imported For grid attributes you can define a land use or soil type table by defining a land use or soil type coverage and then using the Attributes command from the Feature Objects menu to define individual polygon attributes that constitute the table Information on assigning Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 5 parameters to land use and soil type polygon coverages 1s given on page 3 14 The file formats used for the different mapping parameters are given in section 20 28 Composite CN Table Because land use tables with corresponding CNs vary from text to text and agency to agency WMS supports a user definable method for relating land use to CNs This is done through a simple table file that is imported prior to computing the composite CN The file scsland tbl 1s an example of such a file and was created from a table given in the Handbook of Hydrology This file can be edited to supply your own values or a new table with the same format can be created The format of the table is given in the file formats chapter section 20 17 Runoff C
398. may specify whether the options should be applied to the combined or routed hydrograph If a basin is selected the radio group at the top of the dialog does not appear Comment Lines KM Individual comments can be defined for each hydrograph station These comments can be used to identify unique characteristics about a particular basin or outlet point A new comment can be defined by selecting the new button in the Output Control dialog and then entering the comment in the text HEC 1 Interface 10 11 entry When more than one comment card has been defined the up and down arrow buttons can be used to scroll through the list of comments for that hydrograph station When using WMS comment cards always appear directly after the KK cards for each hydrograph station 10 5 3 Output Control KO These controls determine what information about a given hydrograph station 1s written to the AEC 1 ASCII output file By default the IO record information is used However you may wish to print out a more or less complete summary for individual hydrograph stations By default the option to write a hydrograph to the TAPE22 file is specified This is the file read by WMS for display of hydrographs Therefore this option should only be changed to suppress particular hydrographs 10 6 Basin Data General information for each basin is entered by selecting a basin and choosing the Basin Data dialog Figure 10 6 If multiple basins are selected the ap
399. me time interval as is specified on the IT record in the Job Control dialog Kinematic Wave UK Distributed outflow from a basin may be obtained by utilizing combinations of three conceptual elements overland flow planes collector channels and a main channel These elements can be defined if the kinematic wave option is specified The first and second kinematic wave records can be used to distinguish between different properties such as pervious impervious grass pavement For each record the following parameters can be supplied e L Overland flow length e S Representative slope e N Manning s roughness coefficient e A Percentage of sub basins area that this record represents The total of the two records must sum to 100 Losses A loss method must be defined for each plane Choosing the Define Loss button will present the Standard Loss Method dialog and allow a method to be chosen and parameters defined In addition to the kinematic wave records collector channels and a main channel must be defined Either kinematic wave RK or Muskingum Cunge RD routing can be specified by selecting the appropriate radio button A HEC 1 Interface 10 21 dialog for defining the channels is accessed by choosing the Define Channels button The main channel must be defined whereas the two collector channels are optional The following parameters are used for each channel e L Channel length e S Channel slope e N Man
400. ment 1 SentinelSuperPro key detected If after running the diagnostic program you continue to experience difficulties please feel free to contact our Technical Support staff Using WMS on Other Computers WMS is licensed on a single user basis This software can be installed on only one computer for use by one user at a time One extra installation is provided for backup purposes only with the software license diskette If this software is to be installed on multiple computers each computer requires a separate license To use the program on a different computer you will first need to uninstall WMS An Uninstall icon was created in the application s group during installation Double click the Uninstall icon to begin the uninstall process If you are using the software license method you will also need to manually uninstall the software license using the LICENSE program contained on the License diskette The LICENSE program will prompt you through how to uninstall the software license The LICENSE licensing program will query you to confirm that you want to move the program license If you have any difficulties please contact BOSS International Technical Support for assistance Network Server Technical Information C The Network Server Version of WMS allows you to install the software on a network file server enabling anyone connected to the file server to access the software without having the software actually insta
401. ment this section will discuss how to enable the hardware lock license Under most operating systems you must install a hardware lock driver a small memory resident program first so that your computer can recognize the presence of a hardware lock Using the supplied CD ROM installation program from the Utilities Menu you can select to install the hardware lock driver The installation program will automatically install the appropriate hardware lock driver for the operating system your computer has Troubleshooting Hint If you are experiencing difficulties you may wish to run the diagnostic program that is available from the CD ROM installation program s Troubleshooting Menu This program will check to see if the printer port has been located correctly and whether the hardware lock is working properly When running this utility answer Y yes to all prompts The hardware lock is working properly if the program responds with the statement 1 SentinelSuperPro key detected If after running the diagnostic program you continue to experience difficulties please feel free to contact our Technical Support staff Network Hardware Lock License The network hardware locked version enables WMS to be installed on a network server thus allowing multiple users to use the program from separate computers on the network Under most operating systems you must install a hardware lock driver a small memory resident
402. mmand from the File menu Importing of grid files is explained in section 2 8 6 Feature Objects Define a bounding polygon in the Map module and use it in conjunction with a background elevation map to generate a grid covering the extents of the polygon with only the cells inside the polygon being active Creating grids with feature objects is explained in section 3 2 8 Create Grid A new grid can be created by selecting the Create Grid command from the Grid menu This command brings up a dialog Figure 17 3 which allows the user to specify the x and y bounds of the grid 17 6 WMS Create Grid dimension YT dimensiar 7 Begin fi 00 000 End foo Bias O 0 000 100 000 1 000 Humber cells fi T Number cells O 10 000 Base cell size 80 000 Limit cell size Grid type Mesh centered Cell centered Cancel Figure 17 3 Create Grid Dialog Base cell size Limit cell size Several options are available for defining the number and locations of the cell boundaries A bias can be defined which controls how the cell size varies from one cell to the next For example an x bias of 1 5 will cause each cell to be 50 larger than the previous cell when moving in the positive x direction The bias option should not be used when creating a grid to be used with CASC2D since that model requires a constant grid cell size The total number of cells in each direction number of rows or columns can be defined by expli
403. module is used to interpolate from groups of 2D scattered data points to 2D Grids They can also be used to represent rainfall gages or radar locations for NEXRAD data and then interpolated to the basin centroids of a TIN in order to develop a time varying rainfall curve to be used in HEC 1 or TR 20 Interpolation is useful for setting up input data for analysis codes For example interpolation can be used to generate hydraulic conductivity of a 2D grid as input to a CASC2D simulation Scatter Point Sets Each of the points from which values are interpolated are called scatter points A group of scatter points is called a scatter point set Each of the scatter points is defined by a set of xy coordinates Each scatter point set has a list of scalar data sets Each data set represents a set of values that can be interpolated to a grid When an interpolation command is selected the active data set for the scatter point set is used in the interpolation process Multiple scatter point sets can exist at one time in memory One of the scatter point sets is always designated as the active scatter point set Interpolation is performed from the active scatter point set only The active scatter point set 18 2 WMS 18 3 18 4 18 5 can be changed using the Select Scatter Point Set tool described below Whenever a new scatter point set is read from a file or created 1t becomes the active set Inputting Scatter Point Sets Scatter point
404. mount of developed land It is not valid for watersheds with less than 10 percent impervious area 1 The equation uses a runoff coefficient which represents variations in topography This coefficient can also be used to compute the peaking factor using the relationship shown in Figure 15 5 A A Pen Pes ds ds 15 26 where C coefficient of watershed topography based on impervious area L Percentage of impervious area in the watershed must be defined in the HEC 1 Loss methods Tm the watershed lag time in hours L maximum flow path length in miles L length to the centroid in miles Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 21 ae A a Ze ae am ae am ae Za q Figure 15 5 Graph for Determining the Peaking Coefficient C from C SCS Lag Time Equation Perhaps the most commonly used equation for lag time is the SCS equation 1972 given in equation 15 27 This equation may be used when computing the unit hydrograph using Snyder s method and any of the preceding equations for lag time may also be used when computing the unit hydrograph using the SCS method Also remember that the SCS used the relationship defined in equation 15 1 to compute lag time and the other way around from any of the time of concentration equations which follow 78 S 1 LA s 15 27 1900 VY where Tao Lag time in hours L Hydraulic length of watershed in feet S Maximum retention in the watershed in inches as defined by equation
405. mponent of each card is a short name which serves as the identifier The remaining fields on the line contain the information associated with the card In some cases such as lists a card can use multiple lines There are many advantages associated with the card type approach to formatting files Some of the advantages are 1 Card identifiers make the file easier to read Each input line has a label which helps to identify the data on the line 2 The cards names are useful as text strings for searching in a large file All input lines of a particular type can be located quickly in a large input file 3 Cards allow the data to be input in any order in many cases 1 e the order that the cards appear in the file is usually not important 4 Cards make it easy to modify a file format New data can be included simply by defining a new card type If the new card is optional which 20 2 WMS is typically the case for new cards old files are still compatible If an old card type is no longer used the card can simply be ignored without causing input errors A disadvantage of card style input is that the card identifiers make the file slightly more verbose 20 2 WMS Super Files A WMS super file is a file which contains a list of other files If a super file is selected using the Open command in the File menu each of the files listed in the super file are opened and imported This makes it possible to quickly read in several files with
406. n Computation type Compute Time of Concentration a Modify Equation Method Kirpich Method for overland flow on bare earth User Defined Time of Concentration m 0 00013 IL 0 77 570 385 VWarables _ Do not auto recompute parameters m Earth type coefficient 1 000 L Length of overland flow 19193635 ft S average overland slope 0 026 Basin Variables El Variable value 0 000 Export Data Copy To Clipboard Uk Cancel Figure 15 3 Basin Time Computation Dialog Auto recomputing By default once an equation 1s specified for a basin the lag time and time of concentration will be computed automatically each time that basin data are computed or when the curve number changes If you do not wish to have the equation updated when basin data changes then you should turn on the Do not Auto recompute parameters check box for the selected basin Editing Basin Variables The Basin Variables button will let you view edit any of the basin variables that are computed by WMS While it is unnecessary to edit these variables you may find some cases where you want to over ride what WMS has computed and use a value you have derived through a separate analysis Exporting Results for Report Creation The Export Data and Copy To Clipboard buttons are used to create a text report that summarizes the equation variables and computed time of concentration or lag time for the basin Exporting the data will c
407. n 100 000 Slope 1 000 Downstream embankment toeculvert invert data Station 40 000 Elevation 99 000 Slope 1 000 Culvert Culvert Shape Circular Span 0 000 Rise 0 000 Diameter 5 000 Number of barrels Mannings n 0 01 20 Materials Inlet data dd culvert Remove culvert D a Cancel Figure 15 16 HY8 Culvert Data Dialog The only culvert shapes currently available in the WMS interface are the circular and box shapes HY8 allows you to define elliptical and arch culverts but in order to specify these shapes you will have to run the program outside of the WMS Culvert materials are defined by selecting the Materials button and selecting the desired material from the HYS Culvert Material dialog shown in Figure 15 17 The available materials from which you may choose will correspond to the shape of culvert specified By selecting a material you will actually be specifying a Manning s n or roughness coefficient The coefficient will be updated appropriately and can be changed if you want need to in the Culvert Data dialog after specifying the material 15 44 WMS 15 7 3 HY Culvert Material Culvert material Concrete Corugated Aluminiurn Cancel Figure 15 17 HY8 Culvert Material Dialog Culvert inlet specifications are defined using the HY8 Culvert Inlet dialog shown in Figure 15 18 The available inlet types are a function of the culvert shape and material
408. n The number of zones which need to be defined is automatically determined and the appropriate edit fields are unhighlighted The elevation zone parameters are as follows e AREA The drainage area associated with this elevation zone e SNOPACK The snow pack depth HEC 1 Interface 10 23 e AVEPRECIP The normal annual precipitation in inches mm for this zone Areas for the elevation zones can be computed and supplied automatically using the compute areas button The elevation fields are not part of the HEC input 10 10 2 Temperature Time Series MT The temperature time series 1s entered using the XY Series Editor where each value corresponds to the air temperature at the bottom of the lowest elevation zone for that interval The starting date is determined from the IN record values in the edit fields corresponding to the temperature data The starting time and time increment also part of an IN record are specified in the XY Series Editor using the XY Options dialog 10 10 3 Dew Point MD Shortwave Radiation MS and Wind Speed MW Series These three data records are only defined for the Energy Budget method Like the temperature time series these three HEC records are defined using the XY Series Editor Dates for IN records can be specified using the appropriate edit fields and the beginning time and time increment are defined using the XY Options dialog from within the XY Series Editor 10 10 4 Losses LM
409. n followed by a few variables raised to some exponential power such as the following equation from Mississippi Q2 66 2A S L To define a file for this equation follow these steps the lines in bold indicate lines to be included in the file 1 The first line of a file is always CUSTOMNFF 2 The next line for Mississippi is STATE MS Mississippi 3 Assume for simplicity Mississippi has only 1 region The next line in the file would be REGIONS 1 4 Suppose that the above equation is given for Region 1 The steps to define a region s equations are a Start the region with BEGREGION Region_1 3 The last number 3 is the U S maximum flood region in which Mississippi is located refer to the NFF documentation if you are unsure which maximum flood region you are in b For the next line count the number of variables used in the equations for the region In this case 3 A S L NUMVARIABLES 3 20 40 WMS c d The lines under this card are the definition of each variable A S and L For each variable a line in the file must contain the abbreviated name name minimum value maximum value units code and mapping code in that order see NUMVARIABLES card explanation above The units code and mapping code for each variable is found in the tables above For this region s equations these lines are A Drainage_area 0 10 4000 0 1 0 S Mean_channel_slope 0 0003 0 001 5 3 L Channel_length 1 0 500 0 6 4
410. n its simple data structure and wide spread availability have made them a popular source for digital terrain modeling and watershed characterization Several researchers including Puecker and Douglas 1975 and Garbrecht and Martz 1995 have developed methods to extract watershed geomorphology from DEMs Beginning with version 5 0 WMS includes many of these same tools Introduction 1 7 The two primary data sets that must be obtained to perform watershed delineation with DEMs are elevations and flow directions The most common form of DEM elevations are the USGS digital maps DEMs can be downloaded free of charge from the EROS home page at http edcwww cr usgs gov doc edchome ndcdb ndcdb html Other sources of elevation data may include federal state and local government agencies universities or private data publishers WMS can read digital elevation in standard USGS the older single file format or the new SDTS formatted files ARC JINFO ArcView ASCII grid and GRASS grid formats Flow direction data for DEM points must be read in using the flow direction command in ARC INFO ArcView GRASS or by using the version of TOPAZ especially created for distribution with WMS Compute TOPAZ Flow Data command in the Drainage menu All of these programs use a form of the eight point pour technique to determine the direction of flow This technique specifies that the flow will be directed toward the neighboring in a structured grid there
411. n 15 3 1 5 5 7 Merge Selected Basins The Merge Selected Basins command merges two selected sub basins into a single basin The two sub basins must be directly connected to the same outlet point 5 9 8 Polygon Basin ID s gt DEM The Polygon Basin ID s gt DEM command assigns Basin ID s to the DEM from a set of polygons that represent basin boundaries This command is useful if you have not delineated your basin using the flow directions and flow accumulations from within WMS but instead have a set of polygons representing basin boundaries with unique ID s Once basin ID s have been assigned then basin data such as area average slope etc can be computed You would likely only use this option if you had a set of feature objects already and or wish to over ride the basin boundaries that are determined from elevation data This might occur in an urban watershed where streets canals etc may not be apparent in the digital elevation data 9 6 TOPAZ The TOpagraphic PArameteriZation program TOPAZ was developed by the USDA ARS National Agricultural Water Quality Laboratory under the direction of Dr Jurgen Garbrecht TOPAZ is a public domain program that is distributed free of charge to interested persons A modified version of the program is distributed with WMS for the purpose of computing flow directions for use in basin delineation with DEMs directions see section 5 3 3 However TOPAZ is capable of further DEM ele
412. n all be edited 16 14 WMS Gage Plot Curves Available Curves Plotted Curves Selected lt All x Display symbols IX Display lines Current symbol Line thickness j Solid C Dashed cos Figure 16 8 Gage Plot Curves Dialog The Gage Plot Options Dialog The options used to display the plots listed in the Gage Plot Manager can be edited using the Gage Plot Options dialog The options for an individual plot are edited by selecting the plot in the plot list and then selecting the Plot Options button from the Gage Plot Manager dialog This activates the dialog shown in Figure 16 9 A major and a minor title can be entered Both titles are displayed at the top of the plot with title 2 displayed beneath title 1 The x and y titles are displayed by the x and y axes The Foreground color is used to display the titles axes grid lines etc The Background color is used to fill in the background of the plot The Curve legend option causes a legend to be printed on the plot showing the symbol and line style used for each curve next to the curve name Data Sets 16 15 Plot Options x Fo Figure 16 9 Plot Options Dialog The x and y axes can be displayed using either the Autoscale option or the Manual scale option With the Autoscale option the range tick interval label interval and grid line interval are all chosen automatically With the Manual scale option each of the options can be specified explicit
413. n computing lag time or time of concentration a conversion to the other is done using equation 15 1 and whether the result is in minutes or hours The last three are used if the equation is used to compute the Clark storage coefficient or one of the peaking parameters used in HEC 1 If one of the WMS recognized variables are used A Lca etc then you do not need to include a VAR record as it will automatically map the WMS variable for use in the equation For variables not recognized as something WMS computes you should include a VAR line that uses the following keywords VAR Name of the variable DEF Variable definition or description VAL The initial default value should be 0 0 if this will be entered separately for each basin UNITS The units of the variable The following list of keywords are recognized for units If you use a variable with units not in this list you should enter none and then make sure that the equation is dimensionally consistent with the units defined for the equation on the EQ line laghour temin tchour lagmin mi mile m meter ft feet km kilometer hr hour Sec second none none acre acre sqkm square kilometer sqmi square mile sqft square feet sqm square meter in inch mm millimeter 15 12 WMS hect hectare WHICH If a variable represents another equation that is part of the equation group then you should follow the WHICH keyword with the equation number If it does not repr
414. n down the viewing area is shifted to simulate moving the image the direction and distance specified by the line defined while dragging the cursor The image isnt updated until the mouse button is released al Zoom Tool The viewing area can be magnified shrunk using the Zoom tool When this tool 1s active the following actions can be used to redefine the viewing area of the Graphics Window e A rectangle can be dragged around a portion of the display to zoom in on a particular region The display is refreshed and the area inside the rectangle is expanded to fill the entire screen e If a point is clicked the display is zoomed in around the point by a factor of two e If a point is clicked while the SHIFT key is held down the display is zoomed out about that point by a factor of two E Rotate Tool The Rotate tool provides a quick way to rotate the image on screen about the x and z axes Two rotation methods are available 2 5 3 General Tools 2 5 e Holding down the mouse button and dragging the cursor in the Graphics Window rotates the object in the direction specified once the mouse button is released A horizontal movement rotates the image about the z axis A vertical movement rotates the image about the x axis The amount of rotation depends on the length the cursor moves while the mouse button is down The image isnt updated until the mouse button is released e Holding down both the CTRL key and the mouse button w
415. n step and display it in the detention basin calculator When defining a weir the parameters can be chosen from the available weirs in the weir calculator by selecting the Weir Calculator button Elevation Discharge Input X Elevaton Discharge Units English acre ft O Known discharge Elevation Emme T Discharge Define Discharge structures Addie ir Outlet 2 Weir J Add Outlet Add Standpipe Delete Standpipet Name 3 000 Pipe diameter faao Weir coefficient meo E ee veik Galeuletor fo 0o standpipe elevation ooo Base elewation canes dd Figure 15 14 15 7 Culvert Analysis with HY8 HY8 is a BASIC program developed by the Federal Highways Administration and used to evaluate hydraulics of a culvert system Results peak flows computed by one of the hydrologic models supported in WMS can be used to design evaluate different sizes and combinations of culverts WMS contains a graphical user interface to the HY8 program for most of the frequently used 15 7 1 Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 41 options In order to evaluate irregularly shaped culverts and other options not supported by the WMS user interface you will need to run the HY8 program outside of WMS The installation of WMS includes a full installation of the HY8 program and is contained in the HY8 directory this directory can be found in the same directory where WMS is installed Because of the way the HY8 program is c
416. n the Compute Composite Runoff Coeff CN command is used Hydrologic Soil Group Legend If the Hydrologic Soil Group Legend is turned on a legend showing the pattern for each group will be displayed in the upper right corner of the Graphics Window Land Use Legend If the Land Use Legend is turned on and a table of land use data has been read a legend showing the color and pattern for each defined land use will be displayed in the upper left corner of the Graphics Window The flood legend and land use legend should not be turned on at the same time TIN Attributes While WMS will allow you to load multiple TINs at the same time only one TIN can be designated as the active or working TIN The active TIN may be set by selecting the Select TIN tool selecting the TIN you wish to make active and then choosing the Make Active command in the T Ns menu It can also be set by double clicking on the TIN when using the Select TIN tool The Attributes command found in the TINs menu can be used to set the name of the TIN The name of the TIN is always displayed along with the TIN icon when using the Select TIN tool Vertex Options 6 5 1 Creating New Vertices New vertices can be created by selecting the Create Vertices tool from the Tool Palette and clicking in the Graphics Window where the new vertex 1s to be located The x and y values of the vertex are determined by the position of the mouse cursor when a click is made The z value mus
417. n the travel time would be added and again the longest time or combination of times would be used as the time of concentration for the outlet The rainfall intensity value should be supplied separately for the outlet in the same way it is for a sub basin However it is a function of the time of concentration and can be determined from an IDF curve relationship There are two ways routing of a hydrograph can be accounted for using the WMS implementation of the rational method The first 1s to simply apply a time of travel between outlets When hydrographs are computed only with the summing method at downstream outlets they are lagged by the travel time and added with other contributing basins In addition simple level pool reservoir routing may be performed on an outlet hydrograph before it is routed downstream see section 15 6 for a complete description of the detention basin options available in WMS and included as an option in the rational method computations Again both of these options are available only when choosing the summing method of hydrograph generation rather than the traditional method where a peak flow and resulting hydrograph are determined from the time of concentration and therefore rainfall intensity at the outlet point Determining Rainfall Intensities Precipitation intensity duration frequency IDF information is necessary for the specific locality in which the Rational Method will be used In general this is done usi
418. nalysis environment the HEC model can be defined using the commands in the HEC menu and resulting dialogs There are six steps in defining an HEC 1 model using WMS Create a Topologic Tree In the absence of terrain data this is done using the commands in the Tree menu as described in the previous chapter When using a terrain model to define a watershed and sub basin boundaries a topologic tree is automatically created Diversions can not be created directly on a terrain model but must be created using the commands in the Tree menu Define Job Control Parameters Job control parameters are used to define the time and length of a simulation output diagnostic controls and other miscellaneous items Definition of these parameters is discussed in detail later in this chapter Edit Basin Outlet Reservoir Diversion Data Parameters for all hydrograph stations are entered edited using the Edit HEC 1 Parameters dialog accessed from the HEC 1 menu This dialog displays 10 2 WMS current values and lets you edit values for the currently selected hydrograph station More details about using this dialog are given later in this chapter If gages are used as part of the precipitation method they should be defined sometime during this step Gages can be set up using a feature object coverage see page 3 21 or by entering the coordinates directly in the gage dialog see page 10 32 10 1 4 Model Check This step allows you to check all HEC
419. nce of digital terrain or feature object data The tree representation can then be used to select basins and outlet points for entry of all basin and routing data in the same way the digital terrain based watershed map can be used Geometric parameters such as areas lengths and slopes which can be automatically computed when a digital terrain model is used must be entered interactively However all other features of the hydrologic modeling interfaces work in the same fashion This chapter describes the functions which can be used to create a topological tree watershed representation when terrain data does not exist All of the functions for building and or editing trees cannot be used when a digital terrain model is used In this case all new basins and outlet points must be created from the digital terrain model 9 2 9 2 9 3 WMS Tool Palette 9 2 1 9 2 2 9 2 3 9 2 4 The following tools are in the dynamic portion of the Tool Palette These tools are available when the Tree module is activated Only one tool is active at any given time The action that takes place when the user clicks in the Graphics Window with the cursor depends on the current tool The tools are for selection and interactive editing of a topologic tree Sl Select Outlets The Select Outlets tool is used to select outlets for operations such as assigning routing or diversion data creation of new outlets and basins or deletion El Select Basins
420. nd from the HEC 1 menu accesses this dialog A list of the data entries for each item in the Job Control dialog with a short description and the two letter HEC 1 card abbreviation for each follows The Job Control dialog can also be accessed by toggling on the display of Job Control cards in the Edit HEC 1 Parameters dialog and then clicking on a Job Control related card in the text display window HEC 1 Job Control Mame JHEC 1 Analysis using M5 MamelID Rocky watershed Mame Computational time interval min fi 5 Beginning time fo Number of hudrograph ordinates 1100 Dutput print control options E output 0 1 2 M Diagram _ Listing Computation units English units Metric units _ Unit graph and loss rate optimization OU Record First value i Last value fo _ Routing optimization OR Record First value f Last value lo Define Depth4rea Storms Define Multi Flood Storms Cancel Figure 10 1 HEC 1 Job Control Dialog Name 1D Enter a name and or project description identifying the model Three different name records up to 78 characters each can be entered The name records will appear at the top of the HEC input file 10 4 WMS 10 3 2 10 3 3 10 3 4 10 3 5 10 3 6 10 3 7 Day Month Year IT The day month and year fields correspond to the date of the first computational time interval The year is entered as the last two digits only NOTE The date should be con
421. ndary will be printed in the help window Compute Basin Data After defining basin boundaries attributes such as basin areas and slope and stream lengths and slopes can be computed using the Compute Basin Data command These are all geometric parameters used in defining basins and routing networks in HEC 1 and TR 20 If the TIN is edited or sub basin configuration changed the drainage data must be recomputed using this command Once computed they can be displayed along with the basins in the Graphics Window or written to a file using the Export File command found in the File menu By default basin ID s and areas are displayed after computing drainage data The other attributes can be toggled on for display in the Basin Attributes dialog accessed from within the Drainage Display Options dialog Units When the Compute Basin Data command is given the Model and Parameters Units dialog Figure 7 3 appears allowing you to specify the current units of the model TIN vertices and the units you wish to use for computed parameters TIN vertices must either be in feet or meters but the computed areas and lengths can be given separate units If you wish to change the units of computed parameters at a later point you must recompute the basin parameters with different selections Using the appropriate conversion factor Drainage TINS 7 13 the Scale Vertices command see section 6 5 6 can be used to convert the TIN vertices from one set of uni
422. ne of file No fields Required YES 20 6 WMS Card Type ORDER Description Defines the order in which elevations are read in Required NO By default row major starting in upper left corner is assumed Format ORDER ordertype sample ODRO ECC Field Variable Value Description 1 xlowleft 0 3 0 Elevations start at upper left one row at a time 1 Elevations start at upper left one col at a time 2 Elevations start at lower left one row at a time 3 Elevations start at lower left one col at a time Card Type ORIGIN Description Defines the lower left southwest coordinates for the DEM Required YES Format ORIGIN xlowleft ylowleft Sample TNAM 1000 0 1500 0 Field Variable Value Description xlowleft LowerleftX coordinate of the DEM 2 ylowleft Lower left Y coordinate of the DEM Card Type DELTAX O S O Description The X spacing between DEM points Z o Z o o Required YES Y Format DELTAXdel S Y Sample DELTAX 30 0 __ O Field Variable Value Description po o deltx XspacingofDEMpoints Card Type DELTAY O O Description _ The Y spacing between DEM points Z Z o Z o o O Required YES Format DELTAY delty Sample DELTAY 30 00 Field Variable Value Description Y yo delty YspacingofDEMpoints Card Type ELEVATIONS 3 3 3 NN Descripti
423. nformation on the rain gage coverage 10 34 WMS 10 14 3 The Gage Type A gage may be a storm total and or temporal distribution recording station type Recording stations allow for a continuous incremental or cumulative rainfall accumulation to be entered The storm total station only allows for a single rainfall value for the event A station may be both types if the distribution corresponds to the storm total value entered However a more typical situation is to have several stations for which only a storm total is known and to which some type of standard distribution will be applied To accomplish this the storm total stations may be entered along with one imaginary gage that is used to define the distribution When automatically computing weights only storm total stations are used in the Thiessen network and the distribution for each storm total station is found by locating the nearest distribution gage 10 15 Reading And Writing HEC 7 Files Once a topologic tree has been created and all of the necessary data entered an HEC 1 input file can be generated by selecting the Save HEC 1 File command the File menu Save As in the basic version When writing the file the proper order for computing combining and routing hydrographs is automatically determined HEC can be run without any further editing of the input file generated by WMS Because WMS does not allow input for all HEC options it may be necessary to modify the file som
424. ng DEM elevatl0ODS ccccccccccnnnnnnonoononnnnnnnnnos 4 8 A A A n a 6 12 scatter PO asror 1 25 Mess 2 8 TO LN ec acid 6 24 Serce Mlay oU ea ial 2 1 SCS lO Snan E E A 10 17 ao polo AA 10 20 SCS Curve Number A sssoan Beason aaanansidscmuae iasoue naa senee 11 7 SELES CU A O decease 2 5 l 12 WMS 2D scatter point set s 6sasdcasssarsisaneesoetesiassetades 18 2 all2 27 EC PEE EAE TEVE EEA IEE EAN 3 7 5 2 a E TE E EE EEA asas 3 7 5 2 DAS T 6 3 9 2 10 2 11 2 boundary triangles ooocccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnono 6 17 A AT 3 9 5 3 CM ad 17 2 DEM DO DEl 4 2 A A 9 2 O EN IEE NEET 16 11 17 4 oria COM ao 17 3 ING TOW sis REPO ER O E casancaataiancenaennctastntes 17 3 HV CEOS TAM seeno a tle 9 2 A A siielatewales 2 27 multiplesob eo as 2 6 MELO tit nda 3 9 5 3 E AO 3 7 5 2 A cee 10 2 11 2 PONS aaa 3 7 5 2 SLED ROY a oia 2 5 Manli 6 2 verne x do os 6 2 VECE A 6 1 WI PO star dos rain 2 27 MV SELICS POL das 21 4 BEL ACH VE TEMA coli 4 5 SA A 2 10 A T enaheasiGeranchds 2 34 color fill CONTOUES ooooooonnonncnncnnncnnnnnnnnnos 2 31 Command enaar sata wateenae te 2 35 1 ET E E EEEE A cn tT era ke A A E Le nee 2 35 TENS CS PAARE EE TT 16 5 WA CTC isre A i 2 34 o nO o tact 2 34 SM Mot E 2 34 2 35 shallow concentrated flow oooo mmmmoo 15 27 shape files ARC INFO Hess 2 10 Shapefiles A n aN 1 21 AA AA A 15 26 SHIFT key multiple selections cccccccccnnnononnsmscrcnons 2 5 ZOOUMMMG
425. ng either HYDRO 35 or NOAA Atlas 2 data Using the IDF Rational Method 13 7 Curves button for either basins or outlets WMS can be used to develop curves from either of these two data sources statistically derived data or you can directly enter an 1 value if you typically compute it in another way or already know the design value you want to use The IDF Computation dialog shown in Figure 13 3 can be used to create a series of T year IDF curves from HYDRO 35 NOAA Atlas 2 or user defined data Rational Method IDF Computation 3500 722 6000 3 862 2400 10474 ida bard 40d 45 Bera 6748 4207 2537 ec 12446 9 0861 7370 4535 2710 g0 13 426 97395 Fo 4810 2 8655 100 pr 14 400 10 3686 8 400 5082 3 000 IDF Curve Hydro 35 Data Eastern US C NOAA Atlas Data Westem US User Supplied Data Define Data Intensity Duration Frequency Curves 005 0 15 0025 035 045 0155 i 7 24 in4hr n Time of concentration 13 min Specified tc Eo E C Compute te lt oa Imt gt I T Length Mannings rr 1 ale 0 05 0 15 0 25 035 0045 0 55 Duration t Slope Print IDF Curves Export IDF table Plot Display Options e Figure 13 3 IDF Computation Dialog The type of data that will be used to create the IDF curves is specified with the radio group options in the upper left portion of the dialog The Define Data button can then be used to bring a dialog which
426. ng on the precipitation button in the Edit HEC 1 Parameters dialog If multiple basins are selected then the defined parameters will apply to all selected basins NOTE If no basins are selected the parameters can be applied to all basins Four different precipitation types can be specified using the dialog shown in Figure 10 7 Their data entry fields are described in the following sections 10 14 WMS 10 7 1 10 7 2 10 7 3 HEC 1 Precipitation C Mo precipitation fi 300 Average precipitation Define Seres IN card values Basin average PB C Gage PG C Hypothetical storm PH Figure 10 7 HEC 1 Precipitation Dialog No precipitation If no precipitation for a given basin is chosen then the program will use the precipitation pattern of the most recently defined basin In other words if the same precipitation pattern is to be used for each basin specify precipitation at the upper most basin and let all other basins inherit this same pattern Basin Average PB With this method a time distribution can be entered to create a PI or PC card The distribution is entered via the XY Series Editor refer to the chapter titled Using the XY Series Editor Several standard storm distributions can be loaded automatically from this editor In addition distributions can be saved and later restored from a file When creating PI or PC records an IN record needs to be defined to specify the beginning time and date of the
427. ng the Select Gages tool This makes it possible to quickly change the combination of curves plotted The Gage Plot Manager command in the Data menu activates the Gage Plot Manager dialog shown in Figure 16 7 The names of five plots are listed in the text box whether they are displayed or not The word visible or hidden will appear beside each plot title indicating whether the plot is currently displayed in the Hydrograph Window The titles of the plots are listed in the order that they are displayed One of these plots is highlighted at all times To display a plot in the Hydrograph Window first select the plot to be displayed in the text box then select the Make Visible button To hide the plot select the Hide Plot button The Gages button in the Gage Plot Manager brings up the Gages dialog described above This dialog can also be activated using the Gages command in the Data menu The Print button in the Gage Plot Manager prints a copy of the plots currently displayed in the Hydrograph window The Export WKS button exports a copy of the points used to create the plots in the plot window to a spreadsheet file This allows more customization of the plots if necessary Data Sets 16 13 Gage Plot Manager udrogra ihe vwisible Show Flot Untitled 2 hidden Untitled 3 hidden Hide Plat Untitled 44 hidden Untitled 45 hidden Curves Plot Options Gages x Gage legend Curve legend Print Export WES
428. ng travel time equations and variables as described in the previous section The Default Model button can be selected to determine which set of model parameters is to be assigned the computed time of concentration or travel time Travel Time Computation Basinis Travel time arcs Edit Arcs amp rc14 Time of Concentration 0 579 hra A Arc 26 Time of Concentration 0 3 hrs Actives active Default Model Rational Method Time of concentration C Lag time Export Data File Copy To Clipboard Figure 15 8 Travel Time Computation Dialog The Export Data File and Copy To Clipboard buttons are used to create a text report that summarizes the equation variables and computed time of concentration or lag time for the basin Exporting the data will create a text file and allows you to either append to an existing file so that a single report for multiple basins can be created or create a new file Copying to the clipboard places the report text on the Windows clipboard so that it is available for pasting into other documents 15 34 WMS 15 4 Channels It is useful to be able to analyze the conveyance and other properties of channels using Manning s equation The Channels calculator allows for the definition of rectangular trapezoidal triangular circular and user defined cross sectional channels Once channel input geometry is specified either depth or flow can be computed after supplying a value for the o
429. ning s roughness coefficient for the channel e CA Contributing area to the channel e SHAPE The characteristic shape of the channel e WD Channel bottom width or diameter e Z Side slopes if the channel type requires it For the main channel only an eight point cross section as defined with the RC RX RY cards can be used A flag for routing upstream hydrographs can be specified for the main channel from within this dialog as well 10 10 Snow Melt Data When snow needs to be considered in the runoff analysis snow melt data for a basin needs to be defined HEC has two different methods for computing snowfall melt simulations the Degree Day method and the Energy Budget To define data for a selected basin choose the Snow melt Data button from the Edit HEC 1 Parameters dialog The toggle at the top of the dialog Figure 10 10 turns snow calculations on For both methods the elevation or zone data the coefficients and temperature data must be defined The Degree Day method is set up once these parameters have been defined If the Energy Budget method is toggled on then the Dewpoint Shortwave Radiation and Wind Speed data must be defined as well losses should be defined when either method is used These losses are used in conjunction with the LU or LE cards for normal basin losses The check box at the bottom of the dialog allows losses to be turned on or off for a given simulation 10 22 WMS HEC 1 Snow Melt Data
430. nnnnos 18 11 Interpolation subsets cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 18 9 local weighting method oooooonnncccncnnnncn 18 10 local ClO Wal coa 18 10 nodal INCLINA 18 8 WCU DSen tases ec stncn tiveusal dd eeaasiueetate 18 6 kinematic Wave routing oooooonnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnno 10 29 kinematic wave unit hydrograph 10 20 labeling geometric attributes ccccccccnnnmmmmmmo 5 4 A A O 10 19 10 20 Colorado State equation ooooooonoononnccnnnnns 15 20 COMMUN LS N 15 5 Denver equatlON cccccccnnncccccnnnnononanonnnnnnnnss 15 15 Index 1 9 Eagleson equation occcccccccnccnnnnnnnonononnnnnns 15 18 Espey CQuation a 15 16 BENET al e qua don 15 14 Putian equina id 15 19 SO Se GUA OM dd 15 21 Taylor and Schwartz equation 0 15 19 Tulsa district equation ccccocconnnnnnoncnnnnnnns 15 14 A A ets 3 16 4 4 6 8 15 1 AUG ap tac E A TTE EAE 20 28 WS SONG aeiernan ON 6 8 lat lon converso UT Mission 4 9 A nan 2 31 MOOG Pl did 8 4 hydrologic soil group ccccccccccnnnnnnnnnonocnnnnnos 6 8 add UE antauinthe A 6 8 length TRAD Tac 11 10 lena TAO odia 6 18 HERIND oe oa O 2 34 MOR i eacacaraaceaaseaadacenacasas Gait 3 38 A ES 6 7 locked VENICE a Coot eevee aes 6 11 6 20 l sare COMO Sanear a 2 31 loss channe koraan en eS nn RENTS NPN OT 10 29 exponente io 10 16 Gres AMP ais 10 16 A et E A 10 17 SL Gis eee eR CE RT 10 17 AA deers ae aiettant aa 10 23 UPR ica 10 16
431. nonanancnnnnnos 3 3 Bila ROUCO ECLI DES iia 3 3 Dele a A AN ound sadetscnaiebecianad asset E E E 3 7 LO COVA LID doi 3 9 Dele DUPUY ON A Aid 3 25 J20 Mene COMMONS dd ER E EE adidas 3 26 A CAN nt 3 37 3 DRAWING OBIECT Sia ao oia 3 39 33A Drawn ODJECE TOOS AAA A SAA A teria 3 39 ASD ADS PLAN AUDU E S A AA asec egies 3 40 DI DIAM ds 3 4 HIT DEW COLOR ii O O esse WEI 3 4 Sib IMAGE Spa io leelo E tepasoean nates 3 42 SAA DISPLAS OPIO AAA AAA AAA tE 3 43 DZ MOV CTI OS SARA AS AA A RS 3 43 ILI ARES TC E ARMADA AAA AAA A Tees ROEE id 3 44 RA RESP CAD TES aE EREA EE O NEEE EET E EE ee tatdaes 3 46 sAr O TING CC x o EEEE A OAO 3 46 IAO DELIE ATES diine AE E E E EEEE E E 3 46 SA EDONON didas 3 47 O COPIAN E TES CTE AAA AAA 3 47 A aM Siesta ete rears seen ects eS satis a Nee E ok ee eee bie 3 47 De ISI CONS a AN Ad 3 47 Table of Contents ii DI SNOT DAT e e eo duos 3 48 DA Delen DXF OBESA ANA A A AA N 3 48 3 5 4 Converting DXF Objects to Feature ObjectS ooooonnnncccccnnnnnnonononnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnnanannrnnnnnnss 3 48 Soy CONnVETEINO DXF OD ECS LOTIN SI AAA as 3 49 DEMS oia E lios 4 1 Ale INTRODUCTION sia taba 4 1 A E A A 4 1 Selec DEM FOIS idad 4 2 Conor Labels iS ti ia ici io cosas 4 2 As DEM DISPLAY OPTION Sra nad 4 2 LoT PP A erate ed scar atest ce eo tind eres eld sab sett Neal A anf od Saleen eases weed eA ce 4 3 K RA A OCS MITEL eA RE ORES ee MONE EAR Re et TEI nee E 4 3 As A OO VECES ar nT AE ee Oe PROT Ae AN d
432. ns can be found in Jones 1990 Since the Clough Tocher scheme is a local scheme it has the advantage of speed Even very large scatter point sets can be interpolated very quickly It also tends to give a very smooth interpolating surface which brings out local trends in the data set quite accurately 18 14 WMS 18 7 4 Figure 18 8 The Twelve Parameters Used to Define the Clough Tocher Triangle Since a TIN only covers the convex hull of a scatter point set extrapolation beyond the convex hull is not possible with the Clough Tocher interpolation scheme Any points outside the convex hull of the scatter point set are assigned the default extrapolation value entered at the bottom of the Interpolation Options dialog Natural Neighbor Interpolation Natural neighbor interpolation is also supported in WMS Natural neighbor interpolation has many positive features It can be used for both interpolation and extrapolation and it behaves very well with clustered scatter points Natural neighbor interpolation was first introduced by Sibson 1981 A more detailed description of natural neighbor interpolation in multiple dimensions can be found in Owen 1992 The basic equation used in natural neighbor interpolation is identical to the one used in IDW interpolation equation 18 11 As with IDW interpolation the nodal functions can be either constants gradient planes or quadratics The nodal function can be selected using the Natural Neig
433. nsient Data Set data set name O CO taimel 4 ae eee es ade ye vel wale Vals PE Figure 20 43 File Format for Tabular Data with Multiple Data Sets INBaintari 12 os ESO File Formats 20 33 4 3043 48976 10 21 08 2 3896 45782 oD 41 15 13 2439 46346 15 35 a 429444914518 Figure 20 44 Sample Tabular Data File with Multiple Data Sets The extra spaces in front of the time values are not important They are shown here for clarity in reading the file 20 21 User Defined Rational Method Dimensionless Hydrograph Files When running rational method simulations you can use a dimensionless hydrograph to covert the peak flow calculated with the rational method equation into a runoff hydrograph One of the options is to define your own hydrograph which can be done interactively in WMS or by defining the time and flow values in the file and then importing in the User defined hydrograph dialog box see section 0 The format of this fill is shown below RATIONALTABLE NUM_ORDS number_values TIME SERIES time 1 time 2 time 3 time n FLOW_SERIES ord 1 ord 2 ord 3 ord n ENDFILE Figure 20 45 Rational Method User Defined Hydrograph File Format RATIONALTABLE NUM_ORDS 12 TIME SERIES 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 FLOW_SERIES 0 00 0 20 0 40 0 60 0 80 1 00 0 80 0 60 0 40 0 30 10 20 0 00 ENDFILE Figure 20 46 Sample User Defined Rational Method Hydrograph File Card
434. nt areas of overland flow Flow directions and accumulations are typically determined using a program such as ArcView GRASS or TOPAZ Resulting grid files can then be imported into WMS These programs all use variations of the eight point pour model Puecker and Douglas 1975 and Garbrecht 1995 Figure 5 2 illustrates how flow directions are computed by determining which of the eight neighboring DEM points has the lowest elevation The flow direction value for that DEM point is then assigned an integer number representing the given direction 0 103 101 99 Lo ge ee ee es pes a 0 24 102 100 100 p 102 101 101 Figure 5 2 Eight Point Pour Model If al DEM points had one and only one lower neighbor the process of determining flow directions would be simple and the requirement to use other programs would not exist However there are many subtle problems dealing with depressions and flat areas which make the algorithm for determining flow directions complex Computation of flow accumulations are fairly straight forward once the flow directions are determined At this point computations of flow directions can not be done directly by WMS However a version of the TOPAZ see section 0 program modified specifically to work with WMS creates as output the flow direction and flow accumulation grids These grids can then be imported as DEM attributes and used for basin delineation Figure 5 3
435. nto WMS Typical Steps To Set Up A Casc2d Model Because of the variety of tools available in WMS there are a lot of different ways in which a CASC2D model can be created However the following outlines the typical steps which must be completed in order to build a CASC2D model L Create a Grid A grid is usually created in one of three different ways a Using the Create Grid command from the Grid menu and then manually specifying which cells are active inside the watershed boundary and inactive outside the watershed boundary Grid cell elevations must be interpolated from a scattered data set when manually creating the grid 19 2 WMS b c 19 3 Tool Palette Using a boundary feature polygon and the Create Grid command in the Feature Objects menu With this option you should use either a background TIN or DEM to interpolate elevations for the newly created grid Active and inactive cells are automatically assigned according to the boundary feature polygon When creating CASC2D models with feature objects the coverage type should be set to CASC2D using the Coverages dialog found in the Feature Objects menu Importing an ARC INFO or GRASS grid using the ARC INFO or GRASS grid to 2D grid option found in the Import dialog in the File menu The values in the imported grid are used to define elevations Initialize CASC2D data and setup up job control parameters Assign overland flow parameters Assign infiltration paramet
436. o automatically select all arcs of a branch without having to select each individually This is particularly useful when locally redistributing vertices along a stream branch A branch is selected by selecting any arc in the branch WMS searches down the stream from the selected arc until the next branching node is encountered and then adds all arcs upstream from that node to the list of selected arcs Wlsetect Network The Select Network tool can be used to select all arcs of a given network It works similarly to the Select Branch tool except that when an arc is selected 5 4 9 3 WMS 9 2 11 WMS searches downstream until a node with no downstream arcs 1s encountered instead of stopping at the next downstream branching node Place Drainage Label The place drainage label tool can be used to reposition the location of where the drainage attributes for a basin are placed The default location to display area Slope and other computed drainage parameters is at the centroid of the basin However the display often becomes cluttered and it may be necessary to move the display of labels to a different location If the label is moved a long distance then an arrow pointing to the basin containing the parameters 1s created The first location you click on in a basin when this tool is active becomes the position the arrow points to While holding down the left mouse key you can then drag the label to a new location and let up The label will
437. o rise is the time from the beginning of effective rainfall to the peak of the hydrograph The lag time can be computed by subtracting one half the computation time interval from the time rise Equations to compute T and C are given below T 2 65 LP Sp Rural Areas do ion 15 13 T 208UL Sp 1 94 Urban Areas ccccecceccccseeeees 15 14 where T time from the beginning of effective rainfall to the peak of the unit hydrograph L stream length in feet Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 17 S stream slope in feet per foot I percent impervious cover U Urbanization factor equal to 6 for extensive urbanization 8 for some storm sewers and 1 0 for natural conditions Typical conditions for typical rural watersheds include e L from 3250 feet to 25 300 feet e 5S from 0 008 ft ft to 0 015 ft ft e T from 30 to 150 minutes e Areas from 1 sq miles to 7 sq miles Typical conditions for typical urban watersheds include e L from 200 feet to 54 800 feet e S from 0 0064 ft ft to 0 104 ft ft e I from 25 to 40 percent e T from 30 to 720 minutes e Areas from 0125 sq miles to 92 square miles Espey developed the following equations to compute Snyders peaking coefficient Gp 1700A ace mae Rural Areas sccccceeecceeeeess 15 15 qp 19300A ss G Urban Areas sociecon 15 16 Once qp is computed the peaking coefficient can be determined using the following relationships GB Eee E a Sp a
438. oefficient Table The runoff coefficient table must be defined to relate soil type IDs to runoff coefficient values A very simplified file named soiltype tbl is provided with the distribution of WMS This file can be edited to supply your own values or a new table with the same format can be created The format of the table is given in the file formats chapter section 20 17 15 3 Computing Travel Times Lag and Time Of Concentration Lag time and time of concentration are variables often used when computing surface runoff using unit hydrograph methods available in the hydrologic models supported in WMS These variables indicate the response time at the outlet of a watershed for a rainfall event and are primarily a function of the geometry of the watershed WMS provides two powerful methods of computing travel times for lag time and time of concentration from the geometric data you are using for basin delineation and parameter estimation The first method is to use one of several empirical equations or user defined based primarily on the basin data computed by WMS when using a DEM see section 5 5 6 or TIN see section 7 7 10 for basin delineation Many different equations have been developed for different watersheds and most of these equations are a function of the geometric parameters computed from digital terrain models see section 15 3 1 The second method allows you to create a time computation coverage in the map module and then def
439. oit coa 4 4 ASE INODA TA Colla AAA AAA AS 4 4 O A A A thee ERGs ae 4 4 SS POS A A 4 4 DO O IN A eee E 4 4 DUS O DS A O O O omnsae eesenit ube tea ee buen eelaeeuRes 4 4 AA IMPORTING DEM incon Sees in dida 4 5 ASS HEM POINT STATUS tin 4 5 AN SEACE IRC ON sae sacar AAA AAA AA ARA AUS te AA 4 5 43 2 Achvale Selected A A iS 4 5 BODES FRCTIVGATS FU A O A A el hae A dag hedlenhaat tical AS 4 5 AS INGCUVATES CLECICG ooed tis ous natzalsuswad a vous Sebausustgalseeuad bob staves cuedcbeaevasuaecieeeatusnwstesestes 4 6 ADD AMC CAMA ci ee 4 6 43 0 Delete Macive lina 4 6 430 SMOOTHING DEM S carr s 4 6 FOT MODAN e O a e e O 4 6 LO REOL EVAN ONS AAA AAA AAA AAA A A TO 4 8 403 REMOVINGIO SINO LEONA AAA RAS 4 8 4 6 4 Interpolating DEM Elevations to TIN cccccccccccsssssceecccccnaausseeecccccaanssseseecccaaaasseseecessuaaaseeseeeesanaas 4 8 40 3 Filme m Gaps Between DEMS ciie eA EAER ANE A a 4 9 22020 Eat LO Calc A a aaa ee 4 9 DRATNAGE DEMS lt oie ROE 5 1 T ANTRODW ON o e a O 5 1 did EIMuations and Memory CONSI evans in 5 2 Dic ODE RAEE A AAA A eae ala as we twee eed nea 5 2 ALA A e II O O 3 2 EA O ATAN Y RA PRT A RARER SEINE O O A 5 2 CLEC V CTL as 5 2 OR 5 2 CROCE ROI A NAAA oa 5 3 CHATO REMO nadal 5 3 CVE QL A A r O 5 3 CVC CIT OLN COM PRIOR COPE MES E ony tak A A E A 5 3 Select DANCE I 5 3 AN A A NEP AEN RT RENEE aN 5 3 5 2 11 Place Drainase Lasa 5 4 3 3 DISPLAY OPTION Sta dp 5 4 Deo A A ahah ie ths eee et A ae is oat a
440. om a value of unity at the scatter point to a value approaching zero as the distance from the scatter point increases The weight functions are normalized so that the weights sum to unity The effect of the weight function is that the surface will interpolate each scatter point and be influenced most strongly between scatter points by the points closest to the point being interpolated Although equation 18 8 is typically used for the weight function in inverse distance weighted interpolation the following equation is used in WMS E Rh A 18 10 n Do al where hj is the distance from the interpolation point to scatter point 1 R is the distance from the interpolation point to the most distant scatter point and n is the total number of scatter points This equation has been found to give superior results to equation 18 8 Franke amp Nielson 1980 The weight function is a function of Euclidean distance and is radially symmetric about each scatter point As a result when interpolating elevation the interpolating surface is somewhat symmetric about each point and tends toward the mean elevation of the scatter points between the scatter points Shepard s method has been used extensively because it is very simple 18 8 WMS Gradient Planes Nodal Functions A limitation of Shepard s method is that the interpolating surface is a simple weighted average of the data values of the scatter points and is constrained to lie b
441. ompiled all HY8 input output files created by WMS will be stored in this directory This section of the WMS reference manual describes the user interface to HY8 while more detailed explanations can be found in the HDS 5 Hydraulic Design of Highway Culverts HEC 14 manual describing the methods automated by HY8 HY8 General Specifications and Limitations The dialog that controls the primary input for HY8 is shown in Figure 15 15 and can be used to specify the following culvert hydraulic calculations e Single culvert analysis produces an output rating curve for a single culvert that assumes no overtopping e Minimize culvert width varies the width of the first culvert and computes headwater for the design discharge until a user defined headwater is not exceeded or either the maximum or minimum sizes are reached e Multiple culverts with overtopping computes the part of flow through each of up to six culverts and over the roadway HY Culvert Analysis Discharge data Min o 000 Max 500 00 Design 200 00 Outlet control Full flow Profile Compute for Input File Input file name Create Edit culvert data Create Edit tallwater data Create Edit roadway data Save input file Single culvert output table O Minimize culvert width C Multiple culverts with overtopping Compute WEIN Report Cancel Figure 15 15 HY8 Culvert Analysis Dialog 15 42 WMS 15 7 2 T
442. omputations All of the computations for peak flows hydrographs and routing are done within WMS 13 2 WMS 13 2 Rational Method Equation The rational method is used around the world for peak flow estimation of small rural drainage basins and is the most widely used method for urban drainage design The rational method equation is given in Equation 13 1 e Q peak flow cfs or m s e k conversion factor equal to 1 008 SI or 00278 metric e C dimensionless runoff coefficient e i rainfall intensity in hr mm hr e A catchment area acres ha The rational method is generally considered to be an approximate model for computing the flood peak resulting from a given rainfall with the runoff coefficient accounting for all differences between the rainfall intensity and the flood peak Such differences result from infiltration temporary storage and other losses A table of C values recommended by the American Society of Civil Engineers and Water Pollution Control Federation is shown below Business Downtown 0 70 0 95 Neighborhood 0 50 0 70 Residential Single Family 0 30 0 50 Multiunits detached 0 40 0 60 Multiunits attached 0 60 0 75 Residential suburban 0 25 0 40 Apartment 0 50 0 70 Industrial Light 0 50 0 80 Heavy o 060080 Parks cemeteries 0 10 0 25 Playgrounds 0 20 0 35 Railroad yard 0 20 0 35 Unimproved 0 10
443. omputed using the same tools If you have developed your watershed model from a TIN or DEM you can have WMS automatically create flow path arcs from selected points using the Node gt Flow Arcs and Stream gt Flow Arcs command see page 3 36 Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 25 The process of computing a time of concentration involves two primary steps 1 Compute travel times for individual arc segments 2 Combine the travel times of all arcs within a basin to compute the time of concentration for the basin or combine arcs between outlet points to compute the travel time along a stream reach The next two sections describe how these two tasks are performed using WMS Assigning Equations to Time Computation Arcs The primary attribute for a time computation arc is the equation that will be used to compute travel time for the flow path segment represented by the arc In addition to the equation the length slope and travel time for the arc are also stored Length is defaulted from the length of the arc and a slope will be determined for the arc if there is an underlying TIN or DEM However you can edit either of these values if you want For example you may decide that the actual flow path is somewhat more sinuous than the arc represents and decide to increase the length The equation and appropriate variables are defined for an arc using the Time Computation Arcs Attribute dialog shown in Figure 15 6 Time Computation Arc Attribut
444. on Elevations for the DEM Required YES Format ELEVATIONS ncol nrow Sample ELEVATIONS 450 300 101 104 98 a Field _Variable Value Description 3 o nool Numberofeolumms 2 nrow Number of rows File Formats 20 7 20 5 Image File Image files are used in conjunction with TIFF files that have been previously imported to WMS and registered They include the name of the TIFF file the registration points and the bounds of the clipping window The format of the image file is shown in Figure 20 7 and a sample image file is shown in Figure 20 8 IMAGE File type identifier TIFF filename Indicates the name of the tiff file used IMREGPTS PTE al yi sel YA y PT2 u2 v2 x2 y2 y PT3 u2 v2 x2 y2 y CLIPPOINT x1 x2 y1 y2 Figure 20 7 The Image File Format IMAGE TIFF jonescyn tif IMREGPTS PT1 0 756 422424 030700 4519460 893988 PT 0 0 422424 030700 4515391 182075 PTS 7150 A6273 392295 4515301 182075 CLIPPOINT 422424 030700 426273 322285 4515391 182075 4519460 893988 Figure 20 8 Sample Image File The card types used in the Image file format are as follows Card Type IMAGE Description File type identifier Must be on first line of file No fields Required YES Card Type MEE 22 Description Defines the name of the TIFF file to be displayed as an image Required YES Form
445. on created in the Map module may be chosen to define a selection polygon Confirm Deletions Whenever a set of selected objects is about to be deleted the user is prompted to confirm the deletion This is meant to ensure that objects are not deleted accidentally Selecting the Confirm Deletions command in the Edit menu can turn off this option The check mark in front of the command is present when this option is turned off and is not when it is turned off Copy to Clipboard PC Platforms Only With Windows versions of WMS the contents of the Graphics or Hydrograph windows can be saved as a metafile to the Windows clipboard by selecting the 2 28 WMS Copy to Clipboard command The clipboard can then be pasted into other Windows programs such as word processors or drawing packages As with printing WMS automatically determines which windows have data displayed and will prompt for the window to be saved to the clipboard when more than one has some type of data being displayed 2 10 Display Menu 2 10 1 The Display menu is one of the standard menus and is available in all of the modules The commands in the Display menu are used to control how attributes of a TIN DEM Feature Objects etc are being displayed to set up a drawing grid to control how contours are displayed and to generate shaded images Display Options New in version 6 0 all display options have been combined in a single a dialog that contains tabs to t
446. on derived from the elevation points Data such as flow directions flow accumulations and basin id s can be computed and stored as attributes of the DEM at each valid DEM point When determining stream networks and watershed boundaries the DEM works in combination with the Map Module Connected DEM points that comprise a stream branch are converted to arcs see the definition of watersheds in the Map Module chapter and groups of DEM points that make a sub basin are converted to polygons for further hydrologic model definition Besides the elevation DEM a flow direction for each elevation point in the DEM is required in order to perform drainage analysis Elevation and flow direction are the essential data from which all of the other drainage computations are made Flow directions can be computed with ARC INFO or ArcView Spatial Analyst GRASS or TOPAZ A special version of TOPAZ has been created for use with WMS that only requires an elevation grid as input and produces a flow direction grid as output This chapter describes all of the tools and functions available for delineating stream networks and basin boundaries and development of hydrologic data from these elevation DEMs and flow directions 5 2 WMS Limitations and Memory Considerations Developing watershed data with DEMs in WMS can be very memory intensive and there are certain limits While WMS and TOPAZ the program used to develop flow direction data from DEMs
447. on option requires the same maps as Green Ampt and the pore index and residual saturation maps as well These two options treat infiltration the same the difference is that infiltration redistribution accounts for soil moisture recovery during periods of no rainfall 19 14 WMS e Hydraulic Conductivity Map of hydraulic conductivity for each cell e Capillary Pressure Head Map of capillary pressure heads e Porosity Map of soil porosity for each cell e Moisture Map of initial moisture content for each cell e Pore Index Map of pore index values e Residual Saturation Map of residual saturation With the exception of initial moisture content each of these maps is typically defined using the material index and reclassification as described in the Edit Map dialog section above Initial moisture content should be defined using antecedent moisture considerations 19 11 Evapotranspiration The evapotranspiration options include no evapotranspiration calculations Deardorff and Penman Specifying no evapotranspiration means that none of the evapotranspiration maps need be defined however evapotranspiration will not be modeled by CASC2D Deardorff evapotranspiration requires the land surface albedo and wilting point water content maps to be defined The Penman option requires these same two maps plus vegetation height vegetation radiation coefficient and a canopy stomatal resistance maps to be defined as well e Land surface
448. one of two ways In the first method a constant flow is diverted For this method you must define what 11 16 WMS this constant outflow is You can also define a cross section and the decimal fraction of the drainage area to be associated with the main channel output hydrograph the drainage area fraction here In the second method of defining a diversion you define the cross section for the diversion TR 20 uses a rating curve to divide flow between the two cross sections that comprise the diversion You can define the decimal fraction of the drainage area to be associated with the main channel output hydrograph the drainage area fraction using this method as well 11 9 4 Output Control Control of the output files can be specified individually for each of the diversions Output control parameters for all hydrograph stations are identical and are discussed in an earlier section 11 10 Reading And Writing 7A 20 Files Once a tree has been created and all of the necessary data entered a TR 20 input file can be generated by selecting the Save TR 20 File command the TR 20 menu When writing the file the proper order for computing adding and routing hydrographs is automatically determined TR 20 can be run without any further editing of the input file generated by WMS Because WMS does not allow input for all TR 20 options it may be necessary to modify the file somewhat before execution Hydrograph names must be defined in columns 73 80
449. ons dialog is set the elevation of each vertex is displayed adjacent to the vertex Ridge Edges If the Ridge Edges option is set all edges where both adjacent triangles slope away from each other are displayed Channel Edges If the Channel Edges option is set all edges where both adjacent triangles slope towards each other are displayed Flat Triangles If the Flat Triangles option in the Display Options dialog is set all flat triangles will be displayed on the Graphics Window Flat triangles occur where three vertices with the same elevation form a triangle Displaying them can 6 3 12 6 3 13 6 3 14 6 3 15 6 3 16 6 3 17 TINS 6 7 aid in editing TINs so that stream networks and drainage basins can be delineated Flat Ridge Edges If the Flat Ridge Edges option is set all flat ridge edges will be displayed Flat ridge edges occur where two adjacent triangles slope away from each other and where the Z elevation of the two vertices comprising the common edge are the same Flat ridges must be corrected before refinement of drainage boundaries can be done Flat Channel Edges If the Flat Channel Edges option is set all flat channel edges will be displayed Flat channel edges occur where two adjacent triangles slope towards each other and where the Z elevation of the two vertices comprising the common edge are the same Flat channel edges need to be corrected before stream networks can be defined completely Pi
450. ontains a password edit field If this is the first time you are registering the program this field will be empty If the computer you are running on is already registered the current password will be displayed in the field In addition the enable status of each of the WMS modules will be listed in the dialog Click on Details to see detailed description of the security string To register your computer with a WMS password license contact BOSS International Technical Support and provide them with the security string BOSS International Technical Support will provide you with a password that will license the program for your computer 3 Enter the password into the password edit field provided 4 Click on Register to register the password license information If the password was entered correctly the enable status of the modules will be updated below in the dialog box If the status did not update correctly double check that the password was correctly entered or that the security string was properly read Once WMS has been registered a file called WMSPASS TXT will be created in the Windows System directory This file was created for storing the above password and contains only the password If you are running on a network it will be saved in the Windows System directory of the currently active Microsoft Windows WMS Installation Guide Hardware Lock License If you were furnished with a hardware lock with your ship
451. oo 20 21 custom nff equation ooooooooocnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 20 34 AS ra IA 16 3 dataset CAS Cll peris 20 12 dataset Da is 20 16 A A 2 10 DEMisiaraina coda aidbogia 2 8 20 5 dimensionless hydrograph 20 33 O T 16 7 OMA els dase Wa Mctaetataaes 20 1 A E O 16 10 20 22 ASS is 20 20 HOTEL each merase sera Seca deena tea et mame Oe eee dae 2 8 A 20 31 MAT adds lead 2 8 20 7 NAMIC Na Eos PORRO PLE O eecute teaches ntadenw acs 20 28 MA Pisa T E PA N T E 2 8 MENE T 2 7 POSS COP Erna is 2 25 runo COCMICICNE sersa ienaa 20 30 scatter POE ora 2 8 Sha pee asada lagen loan elena denned 2 10 Spread Me agrada 16 12 LA 1 1 O PROMSE o A a 20 25 SUC O 2 8 20 2 A ccasaturiusth stalcheat geal ahaah 2 8 20 3 PES dp 2 7 2 9 SES in a 20 32 20 41 filling NODATA cells cnnnnnnnnnncooooccocnnnccncnnnnnos 4 9 lo AAA IIA 16 4 16 6 16 9 ULE ESS AEE E E A 16 8 CV ANOS OPA CPES o o 16 6 display mode dd 16 8 Mn EEE E EE T E E E EE 16 7 IMA Ia 16 8 playback sess PP P57 O 0 16 7 A T E OA waters 16 7 Li o APEE EET IAEE TA 16 7 A A eee aes 16 8 film loop aniMati0ON ccccccccnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 16 6 DIL CHEFS TAGS a isa a 3 46 HMatehannel Cases ani a 6 7 TAU COGCS andorra 6 18 PlatoDjects aa A 6 18 lat TICS 6 dieS ina a dais 6 7 flat CAN leses a a 6 18 A a a tenets 6 6 COLO A e ON is 6 19 lara rca O tocara icicugods 6 20 A A 6 20 flood plain contour tery ala 8 8 CTC AUC O E A A E ETE T 8 8 d
452. ooooooonnnncncccnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnos 21 8 hypothetical StOrM occcccccccnnnnnonononoccnnnnnos 21 6 MPa ds 21 2 incremental rainfall ooooonnnnnnncncnnnnncn 21 5 A A O 21 2 IN 21 5 19 Le o PPC Eo o 21 4 selectins polt areia 21 4 Standard Storm asie et a 10 7 storage routing CUIVES oooooooooooocccncnononnnnnnnoss 21 7 UME are reU A A 21 6 UDe OP PL OE E 21 4 O A 21 5 XYZ data IMPOR dada an 2 20 Z magnification a a 2 36 A EEA E A Ree Ar 6 8 6 10 o sin iat aes 6 10 EX PAPO Ale sists n a 6 10 ATMS T POLALC uri 6 10 ZOOM er sass vudnans escuela nessa eee 2 4
453. option specified e NSTPS Number of steps to be used in the storage routing Typically this is about equal to reach length average velocity time interval NMIN NSTPS is usually equal to 1 for a reservoir e TYP The next parameter RSVRIC can be entered in one of three different ways e STOR Storage in acre feet 1000 cu m e FLOW Discharge in cfs cms e ELEV Elevation in feet m 10 26 WMS RSVRIC Storage discharge or elevation as defined by ITYP corresponding to the desired starting condition at the beginning of the first time period as specified on the IT record in the Job Control dialog X Working R amp D method not used Channel Routing If the channel routing option is specified the Define button will access a dialog shown which allows you to choose between normal depth and modified Puls methods If normal depth is specified the following parameters must be defined for the RC record in the dialog shown in Figure 10 12 RC Channel Record Manning lett Manning channel foro Manning right foomo Length f 6992 70 Slope pnn Max elevation foo Defne Cross Section Cancel Figure 10 12 RC Channel Record Dialog Manning coefficients Manning roughness coefficients for the channel and left and right overbanks Length The length of the river reach Slope The slope of the river reach Max Elevation The maximum elevation for which storage and outflow values are to
454. or ridges and are used in the creation of polygons Map Module 3 5 Polygons Polygons are a group of connected arcs that form a closed loop Polygons may not overlap within a single coverage However a polygon can have a hole defined by having a set of closed arcs defining interior polygons An example of such a case 1s shown in Figure 3 2 where three arcs are used to define two polygons Polygon A is made up of arcs 1 2 and 3 whereas polygon B is defined by a single arc number 3 For polygon A arcs 1 3 and 4 define the exterior boundary whereas arc 2 defines a hole Figure 3 2 Polygon With Holes Coverages Feature objects can be grouped together into coverages Each coverage represents a particular set of data For example one coverage can be used to define land use and another coverage can be used to define soil type Coverages are described in more detail later in this chapter A common use for coverages is defining soil type and land use for Curve Number CN computation from polygons Separate coverages must be used for the land use and soil type polygons since polygons may not overlap within a given coverage Coverages are managed using the Coverages dialog accessible from the Feature Objects menu shown in Figure 3 3 3 6 WMS Coverages v Drainage Mew Copy 4 Land Use __ New Delete Show All Active Hide 4ll W Visible Mame Attribute Set Soil Soll Type Default elevation 0 000 Ch
455. ormat If you create your watershed from a TIN then you will need to use the Drainage Data gt Feature Objects command found in the Drainage menu prior to exporting your HMS files 10 38 WMS Export HHS Files WiMSJobControl Project exported from MS HEC 1 Analysis using WMS wmazhma Ama wmeszAme control WMS Watershed WS Precipitation Basing exported from WMS WMS Precipitation Model wmazhms map Figure 10 18 Export HMS Files Dialog CHAPTER 17 TR 20 Interface 11 1 Introduction 11 1 1 11 1 2 11 1 3 TR 20 models can be defined in WMS using the commands in the 7R 20 menu and resulting dialogs There are six steps in defining a TR 20 model using WMS Create a Topologic Tree In the absence of terrain data this is done using the commands to build the tree in the Tree menu When using the TIN Map or DEM modules to delineate a watershed and sub basin boundaries a topologic tree is automatically created Diversions can not be created directly on a TIN or in the Map module but must be created using the commands in the Tree menu Define Job Control Parameters Job control parameters are used to define the time and length of a simulation output diagnostic controls and other miscellaneous items Definition of these parameters is discussed in detail later in this chapter Edit Basin Outlet Reservoir Diversion Data Parameters for all sub basin outlets reach routes and diversions hydrograph stat
456. ortant step in the surface construction process is the computation of the slopes or gradients which define the planes The gradient should approximate the local trend of the water surface If stage values are assigned to nodes of a stream network the network is used to approximate the gradients A plane is defined for each segment of the stream The plane passes through the stage values on each end of the stream and the normal to the plane lies in a vertical plane passing through the stream edge This ensures that lines lying in the 8 2 WMS plane which project outwards perpendicular to the plane are horizontal The normals of the planes associated with each segment adjacent to a stream node are averaged to produce the normal which defines the gradient plane at the node If a stage value is assigned to a vertex which is not part of a stream a plane with zero slope is assigned to the vertex The intersection of the water surface and the TIN is computed in such a manner that the water surface is not projected through a continuous ridge and into a neighboring valley unless there is a spill point or passageway into the neighboring valley This is accomplished by starting the search for the intersection at the triangles adjacent to the nodes where a stage value is defined and progressing outward The propagation ceases when the intersection is found Stage values may be entered interactively and edited when necessary Stage values can also be input
457. os 19 4 defining channel properties ccc1cecccceeeee 19 15 editha TADS id 19 14 executing rom WMS sure 19 15 MELO UCA is 19 1 JOD CONO loricam 19 6 links and nodes occcccccncccnnnonononooonncnnonnnnnnnnnos 3 38 map edin suse Sad e a 19 10 MAT Cea r a E 20 20 mode lehecc ke besre lan ol 19 15 OUIPUL CONTO Fasismi aa 19 8 A A 19 12 point NOde Den 3 22 POLY SOM Periana ras 3 24 post processing occccccnccnnnnnnnnnnnnocnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 19 16 Precipita oM anai a 19 8 PEOJSCU IAS ae EE 19 2 A a Aires Gack 19 4 TECLAS SITAS AO ica 19 11 Sai d a 19 3 smoothing stream cell elevations 3 37 A tetanic naeudes 20 21 steps for model creation cceeeeeeeeeees 19 1 took paleta E eee 19 2 using feature objects With cccocooo mmmmmo 3 37 cell ACUSE 17 5 17 6 17 7 EEE E EA tangs E antares 17 6 LISP A VAIN o reani te anes pasa i tuiaieutedanatuadnaes 17 5 TINA CULY Oruro cdo code 17 3 17 5 17 6 Jo ces Oa Laren A a errr sr 17 2 channel calculati0nsS occccccccnnnnnnnnnomo 15 34 channel Cares o es 6 6 7 7 channel TOSSES anuni 10 29 cremita 6 6 6 12 Clark storage COoeffiCieMt oooocccccccccnononnnnnnns 15 23 Clark unit hydrograph ooooooonnnnncnnnnnnnnnnos 10 18 clean Le AUC ODIJCCIS dai ici 3 27 CMP DOATG ii 2 27 Clough Tochet 000000eeees see interpolation CN computation step cccccccccnnnnnnnnnnonncnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 15 4 COMMU ING oaa la
458. osed by reselecting the command which will have changed to Hide Hydrograph Window View Menu 2 11 1 2 11 2 2 11 3 2 11 4 The View menu is one of the standard menus in WMS and is available in all of the modules The commands in the View menu are used to change the orientation of the image in the Graphics Window Frame Image After altering the image display using the Zoom or Pan tools the image can be centered by selecting the Frame Image command in the View menu This command adjusts the window boundaries so that all currently visible objects just fit in the Graphics Window It does not affect the viewing angle The ak Frame Image command has a macro in the tool palette FHI Set Window Bounds The region of the real world coordinate system that is mapped to the Graphics Window can be altered using the Pan and Zoom tools It is also possible to precisely control the visible region by selecting the Set Window Bounds command from the View menu The Set Window Bounds dialog box appears and the x and y limits of the viewing area can be set Z Magnification Occasionally an object may be very long and wide with respect to its overall depth z dimension It is possible to exaggerate the z scale so that the variation in the z value is more apparent by selecting Z Magnification from the View menu and changing the magnification factor Changing the Viewing Angles The objects in the Graphics Window can be rotated and viewed in th
459. oss section Area rl 2 6 41 3 Red bank a SCS curve number Define Cross Section Time of concentration Hr C Use defined reservoir Basin Geometic Attributes zF L t Basm Wate cmpute Tie Basm Mata Define Peserai Eompute Tit Map Data Basin Output Control Cancel Figure 11 3 TR 20 Basin Data Dialog Basin Name Each hydrograph station should be identified with a unique name This name is specific to TR 20 files created by WMS and is used to identify the basin in the file so that resulting hydrographs from a model run can be read back into WMS and associated with the basin The name can not be more than six characters long By default WMS uses the basin ID number followed by a B for the name but a descriptive name 1s generally more useful Basin Area When a TIN or Map based model is present basin areas and slopes can be computed automatically using the Compute Basin Data command from the Drainage menu If a TIN or map data is not present areas and slopes must be entered interactively using the topological tree as a map Areas should be entered in square miles SCS Curve Number The SCS curve number for rainfall losses on snow free ground Note Composite Curve Numbers can be computed automatically see section 15 2 for more information 11 8 WMS 11 6 4 11 6 5 11 6 6 11 6 7 11 6 8 Time of Concentration Time of concentration in hours for the unit hydrograph Several different eq
460. otal head Field Variable Value Description 1 name str The name of the dataset in double quotes Card Type _ TS Description Marks the beginning of a new time step indicates if stat flags are given and defines the time step value status flags and scalar data values for each item Required YES Format TS istat time statl stat2 stat numcells vall val2 valnumdata time step this indicates that all cells are active 1 Status flags will be listed 2 time The time step value If only one time step exists Po time is notreqguired 2 ae stat 0 1 The status of each item If active stat 1 If inactive stat 0 Omitted if i 0 on STAT card mra val The scalar data values of each item 2n 1 Using Vector and Scalar Data with Grids Vector and scalar data can be associated with the nodes or cells of a 2D grid The order that the scalar or vector values appear in the data set file determine which nodes or cells the data are associated with For 2D grids data values are ordered using a row column 1 J priority The following C source code examples illustrate how a 2Darray of scalar values corresponding to the nodes of a grid would be written to the main portion of an ASCII scalar file 2D Grid Example for i 0 i lt nrow itt Lor jJ 0 j lt ncol j fprintf fp f n scalar i j 20 16 WMS 20 9 Binary Dat
461. ould be read in and triangulated into a TIN for use as a background elevation map Once an elevation map has been set up a boundary feature polygon can be used in conjunction with the Create Grid command in the Feature Objects menu of the Map module to generate a grid within the defined boundary using the background elevation map to define grid cell elevations The boundary feature polygon should not extend beyond the limits of the background elevation map When the Create Grid command from the Feature Objects menu is issued the standard Create Grid dialog box comes up with dimensions that just bound the feature polygon The grid size can be specified and when the grid is created cells outside the boundary feature polygon are automatically inactivated The boundary feature polygon can be created using any one of the different options available in WMS For example a rough boundary could be created in the Map module using contours of the background elevation map as a guide This may require that a fine tuning of active and inactive grid cells be done manually after the grid is created Further the rough boundary could be used to create a TIN first and then a watershed delineation performed using the tools of the TIN module Once a more precise watershed boundary is defined using a TIN the TIN boundary can be converted to a boundary feature polygon and used to create the grid 19 6 WMS 19 5 3 Importing a GIS Based Grid Typical GIS softw
462. out having to identify each file individually in the file browser Most of the files are files created by WMS however other files such as DXF and HEC files can be included in order to maintain all files pertaining to a given project together The super file format with all of the possible options is shown in GRID2D FILE 2DG 2D Grid file SCATTER FILE XY Scatter point file HEC FILE HC1 HEC 1 file TR20 FILE DAT TR 20 file DATA FILE SCL Data set file IMAGE FILE IMG Image registration file DXF___C WMS DATA FILE DXF DXF file Figure 20 1 The first line in the file is a SUPER card that identifies the file as a super file Each of the other cards has a file type identifier followed by a file name Except for DXF files the file name should not contain the directory path Any suffix may be used with the file name A sample super file is shown in MAP DXF CAWMSIDATANSITE DXF Figure 20 2 SUPER Super file type identifier TIN FILE TIN TIN file DEM FILE GRD DEM file MAP FILE MAP MAP file GRID2D FILE 2DG 2 2D Gra file t SCATTER FILE XY Scatter point file HEC FILE HC1 HEC 1 file TR20 FILE DAT TR 20 file DATA FILE SCL I Data set file IMAGE FILE IMG Image registration file DXF C WMS DATA FILE DXF DXF file Figure 20 1 Super File Format File Formats 20 3 SUPER TIN SIT
463. ow set of cells with the same 1 index of cells at once Multi selection can be performed by holding down the SHIFT key The 1 index of the selected row 1s displayed in the Edit Window EE Select j The Select j tool is used to select an entire column set of cells with the same j index of cells at once Multi selection can be performed by holding down the SHIFT key The j index of the selected column is displayed in the Edit Window al Contour Labels The Contour Label tool manually places numerical contour elevation labels at points clicked on with the mouse These labels remain on the screen until the contour options are changed until they are deleted using the Contour Labels dialog or until the grid is edited in any way Contour labels can be deleted with this tool by holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on the labels This tool can only be used in plan view al The Create Gages Tool The Create Gages tool is used to interactively create gages in the Graphics Window When this tool is active a new gage is created by clicking in the Graphics Window at the desired location of the gage the Graphics Window must be in plan view when creating gages The xy coordinates of the gage are defined by the cursor position and you are prompted for the z coordinate The x y and z coordinates of a new gage can be edited using the Edit Window In addition once a gage has been defined with the Create Gages tool the gage can be edited using
464. pe along the max flow path as defined above float sub basin distance to centroid centdist Distance from centroid to closest point on main channel float sub basin stream centroid to outlet centout Distance from point in stream closest to centroid to outlet float sub basin slope from centroid to slcentout e along the distance defined outlet above float sub basin percent southfacing psouth Percentage of area facing south 0 0 1 0 float sub basin percent northfacing pnorth Percent of area facing north 0 0 1 0 A A float sub basin maximum stream length mstdist The longest stream distance within the basin float sub basin maximum stream slope mstslope The slope along the longest stream distance float sub basin length basinlen Distance to furthest point along basin perimeter float sub basin shape factor shapefact Basin length divided by basin area float sub basin sinuosity factor sinuosity Maximum stream length divided by basin length float sub basin perimeter perimeter Perimeter of basin float sub basin average elevation meanelev Average elevation float if centroid is outside of the basin X coord float sub basin centroid centroidy Basin centroid closest point in basin sub basin centroi
465. ped for specific watersheds i e size land cover etc you should consider the assumptions made about a given equation and try to identify one that used watershed conditions similar to the one you are studying The following is a list of the equations available in WMS The SCS also found that for many cases the lag time could be related to the concentration time by the following equation AS A A 15 1 This relationship 1s always used by WMS to determine lag time when a method for computing time of concentration is chosen or to compute time of concentration when a method for lag time is chosen Methods used for lag 15 14 WMS 6 time begin with T whereas methods used to compute time of concentration begin with T Customized Lag Time Equation Almost all of the lag time equations are of the form mosco So i n 152 VS where C coefficient accounting for differences in watershed slope and storage L the maximum flow length of the watershed along the main channel from the point of reference to the upstream boundary of the watershed in miles L the distance along the main channel from the point of reference to a point opposite the centroid in miles S Slope of the maximum flow distance path in ft mile m lag exponent Therefore 1f the equation that your state county etc uses to compute lag time is not available it can often be set up using this equation by entering your own coefficient C and ex
466. permission is active in the WMS working directory When a new data set is created through interpolation or using the data calculator a temporary binary file is created for the data set To save the data set to disk permanently the user must select the Export button from the Data Browser Active Data Set One data set is always highlighted in the scalar data set list In addition if a transient data set is highlighted the time steps for the data set are listed in the text box directly beneath the list of data sets and one of the time steps is highlighted The highlighted set is the active data set for the object The values corresponding to the active data set and time step are used whenever contour or color fringe plots are generated In addition the entire range of 16 4 WMS time steps of the active data set are used whenever animation film loops are generated Whenever a new data set is created by importing from a file interpolating or using the data calculator the data set becomes the active data set for the object 16 2 3 Elevations Whenever a grid or scatter point set is created or read from a file a scalar data set is created containing the elevations of the cells or data points Thus there is always at least one data set associated with each grid This data set cannot be deleted 16 2 4 Deleting Data Sets Data sets can be deleted by selecting the data set in the list box and selecting the Delete button in the Data B
467. point are swapped as necessary in order to satisfy the Delauney criterion If the Delauney criterion is satisfied everywhere on the TIN the minimum interior angle of all of the triangles is maximized The result is that long thin triangles are avoided as much as possible 6 6 1 TINs 6 13 a b Figure 6 3 Two Adjacent Triangles Which a Violate and b Honor the Delauney Criterion It is important to note that the triangulation described above is used as a preliminary step to creating a TIN conditioned for basin delineation and is not sufficient in most cases for actually doing the drainage delineation see section 6 6 2 Even if you begin with TIN data you will want to create another TIN using feature objects see page 3 33 Triangulation Options Three methods or algorithms are used to triangulate points e The convex hull method computes the convex hull of the data points triangulates the convex hull and then inserts the interior points non hull points e The enclosing triangle method makes one large triangle that encloses the points inserts the points into the triangulation and then deletes all triangles connected to the three extra points used to make the enclosing triangle e The enclosing triangle plus fill method is the same as the enclosing triangle method except that after the extra triangles are deleted the concave regions on the boundary are filled in so that the boundary corresponds to the convex hull
468. point is an cubic S shaped function Figure 18 6a The fact that the slope of the weight function tends to unity at its limits ensures that the slope of the interpolating surface will be continuous across triangle boundaries 2D Scatter Points 18 11 1 Normalized Distance a Figure 18 6 a S Shaped Weight Function and b Delauney Point Group for Point A The influence of the weight function extends over the limits of the Delauney point group of the scatter point The Delauney point group is the natural neighbors of the scatter point and the perimeter of the group is made up of the outer edges of the triangles that are connected to the scatter point as shown in Figure 18 6b The weight function varies from a weight of unity at the scatter point to zero at the perimeter of the group For every interpolation point in the interior of a triangle there are three nonzero weight functions the weight functions of the three vertices of the triangle For a triangle T with vertices 1 j amp k the weights for each vertex are determined as follows 2 Wi y b 3 2b 2 b bjbk lle ll lexll lle ll e lle ll lle ll llexll papa VO gt 5 18 15 bib bjbx b bx lez ll lle where lle ll is the length of the edge opposite vertex 1 and bj bj bx are the area coordinates of the point x y with respect to triangle T Area coordinates are coordinates that describe the position of a point within the interior of a triangle r
469. polation Method options in the lower right corner of the Gages dialog controls how data sets are interpolated to the gages for curve plotting If the Interp from neighboring nodes cells option is chosen the data sets are interpolated from the nodes or cells in the vicinity of the gage using a simple inverse distance weighted interpolation scheme headwaters i Color Mame i outlet Location E li 4153 0000 Y 78654 0000 Z lo 000000 Positive Direction We Ja noo000 Create New Import vy rooooon Delete Export We Ja c0o000 Display Interpolation Method x ages Size ho a Interp from neighbor nodes cell _ Vectors Length Pao Interp in layer only 3d grids IX Names Use nearest cell node values only Cancel Figure 16 5 Gages Dialog Gages are plotted in the Graphics Window as shown in Figure 16 6 The name is plotted just below the gage symbol Each component of the gage can be turned on or off or resized using the Display items in the lower left corner of the Gages dialog 16 8 2 Data Sets 16 11 Figure 16 6 A Gage Symbol Plotted in the Main Graphics Window The Gage Tools Gages can also be created and deleted using the Gage tools The gage tools appear in the dynamic portion of the Tool Palette of each of the modules which support gages The tools are as follows 2 The Create Gages Tool The Create Gages tool is used to interactively create gages in the Graphics Windo
470. polygons correspond to the centroids of the circumcircles of the triangles 18 16 WMS Thiesson Polygon Delauny Network Triangulation Figure 18 10 Delauney Triangulation and Corresponding Thiessen Polygon Network for a Set of Scatter Points Local Coordinates The weights used in natural neighbor interpolation are based on the concept of local coordinates Local coordinates define the neighborliness or amount of influence any scatter point will have on the computed value at the interpolation point This neighborliness is entirely dependent on the area of influence or Thiessen polygons of the surrounding scatter points To define the local coordinates for the interpolation point Pp the area of all Thiessen polygons in the network must be known Temporarily inserting Pp into the TIN will cause the TIN and the corresponding Thiessen network to change resulting in new Thiessen areas for the polygons in the neighborhood of Ph The concept of local coordinates is shown graphically in Figure 18 11 Points 1 10 are scatter points and Pp is a point where some value associated with points 1 10 is to be interpolated The dashed lines show the edges of the Thiessen network before Pp is temporarily inserted into the TIN and the solid lines show the edges of the Thiessen network after Pp is inserted Only those scatter points whose Thiessen polygons have been altered by the temporary insertion of Pp are included in the subset of s
471. ponent m Tulsa District Lag Time Equation The Tulsa District of the US Army Corps of Engineers has developed the following family of equations for computing Snyders lag time 39 Lx sg Trag ce sea eal a data A NEA EAEN AS etre 15 3 VS where C 1 42 for natural watersheds in rural areas of central and northeastern Oklahoma C 0 92 for the same type areas that are 50 urbanized C 0 59 for the same type areas that are 100 urbanized L watershed maximum flow distance length in miles Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 15 S Slope of the maximum flow distance path in ft mile L length to centroid The range of watershed characteristics for which these equations apply include e Sizes ranged from 5 to just over 500 square miles e Slopes ranged from 4 to 90 feet per mile e Lengths ranged from 1 to 80 miles e Length to centroid ranged from 1 to 60 miles In addition to developing an equation for lag time the Tulsa district developed the following relationship the peak flow rate which can be used in equation 15 5 to solve for Snyder s peaking coefficient O ed 15 4 E o ieee et enn 15 5 640 Denver Lag Time Equation Equation 15 6 was developed by the Denver Area Urban Drainage and Flood Control District Wright McLaughlin Engineers 1975 48 Lx Lea TLAG ce A E outa Gunes 15 6 VS where C Time to peak coefficient L length along the stream from the study point to the upstream limits of the basin
472. port DXF files command is used to read a DXF file Once a file is read all objects are visible DXF objects can be unselected hidden using the DXF Display Options dialog Deleting DXF Objects The Delete command is used to delete all DXF objects Deleting can also be done from within the Display Options dialog Converting DXF Objects to Feature Objects Many times you will want to use your DXF data to create streams watersheds or other feature objects To do this you must first convert the DXF data to feature objects This is done by choosing the DXF gt Feature Objects command and then specifying which objects in the layer you want converted from the dialog shown in Figure 3 31 When converting data you may either Map Module 3 49 add it to the currently active coverage or have a new coverage created Once the data have been converted it is a good idea to delete the DXF data DAF gt Feature Objects Create Feature points from DF point W Feature arcs from DF lines M Feature arcs from DXF polylines Add to currently active coverage Create a new coverage E Cancel Figure 3 31 DXF gt Feature Objects Dialog 3 5 5 Converting DXF Objects to TINs Sometimes digital elevation data are stored in DXF files in the form of 3D points and 3D faces These DXF objects can be converted to TINs using the DXF gt TINs command in the DXF menu After converting the data it is a good idea to delete the DXF data
473. programs like HEC 1 and TR 20 the digital terrain modeling functions of WMS can be used to create terrain models using Geographic Information Systems GIS data Triangulated Irregular Networks TINs or gridded digital elevation models DEMs These data can then be used to delineate watersheds streams and sub basins Once boundaries have been created geometric attributes such as area slope and runoff distances can be computed automatically A topological tree representation of the watershed is created and all data necessary to define an HEC 1 or other model can be entered by selecting basins and outlet points Many display options are provided to aid in modeling and understanding the drainage characteristics of terrain surfaces WMS was designed as a comprehensive hydrologic modeling system An interface to a spatially distributed model CASC2D is part of the current version of WMS However this model is still under review and is not available for public release Several of the two dimensional grid and interpolation commands can be used in support of hydrologic modeling but the CASC2D model itself is not available Introduction 1 3 1 2 Fundamental WMS Modeling Concepts 1 2 1 WMS has evolved to the point that there are many tools and different ways to accomplish the same thing For this reason it is a good idea to have an understanding of the big picture on how WMS can best be used to develop and run hydrologic models Wh
474. propriate parameters are applied to all A description of the data entry fields in this dialog is given below 10 12 WMS 10 6 1 10 6 2 HEC 1 Basin Data Basin name Bsn2 Area mi 2 km 2 ar 3 Basin descriptor optional Input hedrograph GI BI Direct input hydrograph 01 etre w PF Tape 21 input hudrograph Bl Tape 22 input hudrograph Bl _ Observed hydrograph 00 Meine 1910 Base Flow Parameters _ Enter base flow STATO QRCSN 0 0000 AMOR fo Cancel Figure 10 6 HEC 1 Basin Data Dialog Basin Name KK Each hydrograph station should be identified with a unique name This name appears as part of the KK record for that station in the input file The name should not be more than six characters long By default WMS uses the basin ID number followed by a B for the name but a descriptive name is generally more useful Basin Area BA When a terrain model is used basin areas and slopes can be computed automatically using the Compute Basin Data command from the Drainage menu of the TIN or DEM module or the Update Basin Data command in the Feature Objects menu of the Map module Otherwise areas and slopes must be entered interactively using the topological tree as a map Areas should be entered in either square miles or square kilometers HEC 1 Interface 10 13 10 6 3 Direct Input Hydrograph QI If a hydrograph is known for a given basin there is no need to compute a synth
475. pying Results to the Clipboard The Copy to Clipboard button can be used to copy the information from the TR 55 data window to the clipboard for pasting into a word processing document The data window display options see Figure 12 2 determine which things are visible and ultimately copied to the clipboard CHAPTER 13 Rational Method 13 1 Introduction WMS includes an interface to the rational method which can be used for computing peak flows on small urban and rural watersheds The interface includes the capability to combine runoff from multiple basins Two different methods for determining peak flows hydrographs at downstream confluences are available Traditionally a time of concentration is determined at a downstream confluence by determining the longest combination of time of concentration and routing travel time Given a time of concentration for the outlet a rainfall intensity can be determined from a rainfall intensity duration curve and a peak flow computed The hydrograph for the confluence is then determined in the same manner they are determined for sub basins by using the peak flow time of concentration and a dimensionless hydrograph see section 13 3 4 Alternatively hydrographs for the sub basins can be computed and then routed lagged and combined by summing at the confluence points When using this method detention basins may be defined at confluence points in order to determine the effect of storage on the c
476. r the point on the background elevation map either a DEM or a TIN The search for an elevation near the point moves in a direction perpendicular to the arc 3 28 WMS The distance criteria set in the dialog shown in Figure 3 16 determines how far the search continues looking for a lower elevation For DEM s you may specify either the number of grid cells the average length of the two adjacent arc edges or a specified distance For TINs the number of closest DEM cells is dimmed When a node or vertex is moved by the maximum amount it is highlighted and a warning message is given Find Stream Options 3 DEM cell size psw r 0 000 0 000 TIN average arc length 3289 061 Use background DEM Use background TIN Distance Criteria O Specified number of closest DEM cells ji O gt Number C Average length of adjacent edges a Specified distance 250 Distance Cancel Figure 3 16 Find Stream Ridge Options Dialog Reordering Streams The Reorder Streams is used to make sure that the direction of all stream arcs are consistently defined from a selected outlet node When creating stream arcs in WMS a check is made to ensure that points are created from downstream to upstream so that the first node in the arc is the downstream node This makes it impossible to create streams in WMS that do not follow this definition However when arcs are imported it is possible to create streams where the downstream node is secon
477. r Puerto Rico and a custom defined equation can be selected from the available choices see section 14 2 6 Total Watershed Area The total watershed area includes the area of all regions overlapped by the watershed If a terrain model is used to compute areas this value will be defaulted to the area computed for the selected basin Maximum Flood Region For comparison and evaluation the NFF program compares each extrapolated 500 year flood peak discharge with the maximum flood envelope curves given by Crippen and Bue 1977 and Crippen 1982 The map at the end of this chapter shows the different flood regions and should be used to determine the appropriate region for your watershed A default value has been determined for each region but this value may be overwritten This figure is also included on page 16 of the USGS report 94 4002 Regional Regression Equations Each state is divided up into hydrologically similar regions with separate regression equations Once the state is selected the available regions appear in the text window below the name Selecting Overlapping Regions You may select the region s the study watershed overlaps by clicking on the region name in the Regional regression equations available text window and then clicking on the arrow pointing to the right The region named will be moved to the Regions overlapped by watershed text window and any relevant parameters will be activated If a mistake is made
478. r of streams The following equation is used to describe sheet flow 0 007 nL L P2 os Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 27 where T travel time hr n Manning s roughness coefficient see Table 3 1 of the TR 55 L flow path length in feet P 2year 24 hour rainfall in S slope of the hydraulic grade line ground slope in ft ft 2 year 24 hour rainfall values can be determined from the map in appendix B 4 of the TR 55 reference manual for eastern US locations and from the NOAA Atlas 2 maps for the western US locations Generally the sheet flow equation should not be used for lengths greater than 300 feet Shallow Concentrated Flow After 300 feet sheet flow usually turns to shallow concentrated flow The following equation is used to compute travel time for shallow concentrated flow where T Travel time hr L Flow length in feet V Average velocity f s 3600 Conversion factor from seconds to hours Average velocities are determined from the slope of the flow path segment and are slightly different depending on whether the surface is paved or unpaved Equations from Appendix F of the TR 55 reference are used in WMS to convert the slope to an average velocity Pavement is a variable that must be defined if this equation type is specified for the arc Open Channel Flow Travel time for open channel flow segments is computed using equation 15 37 here the a
479. ravel Times for Sub basins or Reaches After defining equations and variables for individual flow path segments arcs the second step in computing a basin time of concentration or lag time is to sum the travel times of all arcs within a basin or between outlets Selecting the basin or outlet and choosing the Travel Time Computation option from the Calculators menu in the Hydrologic Modeling module allows you to do this This option is also available directly from within many of the Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 33 hydrologic model parameter dialogs where time of concentration lag time or routing travel time is needed When the Travel Times Computation dialog is accessed see Figure 15 8 you will see the list of time computation arcs that lie within the currently selected basin if a basin is selected or between the selected outlet and the next downstream outlet if an outlet is selected If you have already defined the equation and necessary variables the travel time for each arc will be displayed and the total travel time for all arcs will be displayed in the travel time edit field You can accept the computed value for travel time or you may edit the value override computed value as may be appropriate If you want to change the equation definitions or variable values for any all of the arcs you can select the Edit Arcs button This will bring up the Time Computation Arc Attributes dialog see Figure 15 6 which is used for editi
480. rd The default is cumulative PC so that if you wish to enter incremental or delta values you must use the XY Options to set the Y values to delta instead of absolute A maximum of 300 values are allowed for each rainfall series The XY Series Editor will not permit more values than this to be entered for a rainfall series 21 6 WMS When the OK button is selected the current series is assigned to the gage or precipitation record depending on the dialog from which the editor was invoked Therefore to assign a previously defined series to a second third etc gage or precipitation record select the desired series from the list box once the editor has been invoked and select the OK button In the same way series created from a previous session of WMS can be imported using the Import option If PI or PC cards are encountered while reading an HEC input file a series is added to the rainfall series list at the same time it is associated with the appropriate gage or precipitation record 21 6 Defining A Hypothetical Storm Series pH The XY Series Editor is used to input values for a hypothetical storm pH card If the XY Series Editor is invoked from this dialog any hypothetical storm series already defined in this session will be displayed in the list box If it 1s the first time the editor has been used in this session or if a series has not been assigned to the given hypothetical storm record an empty default series will be active
481. rder to provide an understanding of where DEMs are located in relation to one another Importing USGS DEMs Files Elevation units pinnacle dem Watts dem poizon dem Meters O Feet Thinning factor Latian bo Omi Acalculator Add Delete DEM coverage Pi boundary 4 388935e 006 Enclose All DEM s Western boundary UTM 489282 342764 Eastern boundary UTM 51 0766 802297 Southern boundary UTM 4 3581 S3e 006 Approximate total pointa Approximate clipped points 663415 Cancel Figure 2 7 Import DEMs Dialog A small black rectangle is displayed in the central graphics window Only elevation points inside this rectangular region will be read in when hitting OK from this dialog This boundary rectangle can be modified in three different ways 1 DRAGGING Using the mouse you can click near one of the four edges of the bounding rectangle and drag it to a new location If you General Tools 2 17 click near a corner both edges will be adjusted If you click in the center of the rectangle then the entire rectangle can be translated to a new location As you drag edges to new locations their corresponding values are automatically updated in the Edit Fields 2 EDIT FIELDS Any one of the western eastern northern or southern boundaries can be explicitly set by changing the values in their corresponding edit fields As new values are entered the display in the small graphics windo
482. reate a hydrologic model the area of the polygons can be determined and used in any of the supported hydrologic models If the points vertices used to create the feature arcs also have z values associated with them then WMS will make a rought estimate of the longest flow path and slope along such a path Finally if you have derived a watershed from feature objects but have a background DEM you can compute most of the basin data parameters using the following steps 1 Import Read the DEM 2 Compute the flow directions using TOPAZ see section 5 4 3 Use the Polygon Basin IDs gt DEM command found in the Drainage menu in the DEM module to assign DEM cells a basin id from the feature object polygons 4 Choose the Update Basin Data command from the Feature Objects menu Of course the results will only be approximate since the actual basin boundaries will not have been derived from the computed flow direction data but it will provide a reasonable estimate Ideally you will want to derive the basin boundaries from the DEM and flow direction data and then use the Compute Basin Data command in the DEM module see section 5 5 Creating Time Computation Arcs with TINs and DEMs The Node gt Flow Arcs command allows you to automatically develop time computation arcs by tracing the flow path across a TIN or DEM and saving an arc representing the path so that an equation can be assigned to it see pages 3 3 2 9 Map Module 3 37 18 and
483. reate a text file and allows you to either append to an existing file so that a single report Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 9 for multiple basins can be created or create a new file Copying to the clipboard places the report text on the Windows clipboard so that it is available for pasting into other documents Customizing Equations Any one of the equations can be edited in other words you can pick an equation and then modify it slightly to meet your needs or your own equation created using the Modify Equation or User Defined buttons Both of these buttons bring up the Modify Equation dialog shown in Figure 15 4 Modify Equation Instructions A Basin area CH Curve number L Maxinurn flow distance Le Masimurn channel length Lea Flow length from basin to centroid 5 Maximunn flow distance slope 5c Masimum channel length slope AMF Percent North facing 5F Percent South facing la Percent impervious area Equation Parse Variable 4breviations Definitions art m Earth type coefficiernt L Length of overland flow Ft 5 average overland slope F Inis tala Sas eee lol Definition Earth pe coefficient Urita none Cancel OK Figure 15 4 Modify Equation Dialog If you enter this dialog using the Modify Equation button the currently selected equation will appear in the Equation edit box If the current equation has more than one equation some equations have separa
484. ree By default the most downstream node of a stream arc 1s an outlet point and its attributes cannot be changed If additional points along a stream are converted to outlet points the hydrologic modeling tree is updated when these outlet points are added Furthermore if outlet points are converted back to generic points the hydrologic modeling tree is also updated When creating a TIN from feature objects outlet points on the feature objects are converted to outlet points on the TIN If points are imported but not used by any arcs they can be removed using the Delete Isolated Points command Drainage Arc Types The Arc Type dialog used for drainage coverages is shown in Figure 3 6 Generic arcs have no attributes and are used when developing drainage boundaries or when establishing the boundary polygon for creating a TIN from feature objects Map Module 3 13 Feature rc Type Type Generic C Stream C Lake C Ridge Cancel Figure 3 6 Feature Arc Type Dialog for Drainage Coverages Stream arcs should be used to define stream reaches hydrologic models The direction of a stream arc is critical and in WMS the direction of flow is opposite the direction the arc is created In other words you should create stream arcs from downstream to upstream the from node being the downstream node and the to node being the upstream node If an arc is designated as a stream then an outlet point is added at the most downstream no
485. ree dimensions Two angles bearing and dip are used to rotate the view The bearing and dip values correspond to a rotation about the z and x axes The bearing affects the horizontal angle rotating the object in the xy plane and General Tools 2 37 the dip changes the vertical angle shifting the viewing angle on the object to a higher or lower perspective The object cannot be tilted sideways Using only two viewing angles rather than three is somewhat restrictive but it can be more intuitive Rotation F The viewing angles can be manipulated interactively with the Rotate tool as described earlier View Angle The bearing and dip angles can be explicitly defined in the Viewing Angle dialog accessed by selecting the View Angle command from the View menu Plan View Selecting the Plan View command changes the viewing angles so that the image is displayed such that the user is looking down the z axis with the x axis horizontal and the y axis vertical The Plan View command has a macro in the J tool palette o Oblique View Selecting the Oblique View command restores the bearing and dip angles to their previously defined values The Oblique View command has a macro in the tool palette Es View Last Selecting the View Last command restores Graphics Window viewing parameters they were before the last viewing command was issued rotate Zoom pan etc CHAPTER 3 1 Map Module 3 1 Introduction The Map
486. rh 5 i y o NS cat AS a te Figure 1 2 Imported TIFF Image Used as a Background Map for Digitizing 3 Construct Feature Object Topology The points and lines must be assigned the right attribute types and the polygons for sub basins constructed from the lines Introduction 1 5 Sa A a os s ppe rie E a he F Tap Tg he E k ar ee ee Figure 1 3 Feature Object Representation of a Watershed If you use data already developed in a GIS then you may have to do some editing This will depend on how well the data being imported matches with the required data for watershed model development In WMS three primary layers as illustrated in Figure 1 3 1 A point layer representing the watershed outlet and any sub basin outlet or confluence points 2 a line layer representing a stream network and 3 a polygon layer representing watershed boundaries If all three layers exist then construction of the watershed model topology can proceed but if one or more of the layers are absent they must be created manually from within WMS For example if you only had a file that contained sub basin boundaries you would need to digitize the stream network and define the outlet locations of the sub basins An important point to remember in WMS is that lines used to define a stream network have direction For each line arc there is a beginning and an ending node and flow along the line is defined in this direction When
487. riangulated Irregular Network TIN Module ooooncccnnnnonnnnncnnnonononnnnnnnnononanoncnnnnnnnnrncnnnnnnnnanonos 1 23 Le DEVMEMO CEA AAA AAA darian 1 24 Y Y AA O 1 24 13 4 Hydrologic Modeling Tree Module once cidos 1 24 A GRA MON Cra 1 25 LIO ICAO OMA A iii 1 25 1 4 CONSIDERATIONS FOR READING EXISTING HEC 1 FILES coooococcnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nana 1 25 1 5 CONSIDERATIONS FOR READING EXISTING TR 20 FILES occccccnononnnonononnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnn non nnnnnnnncncncnnnnns 1 26 1 6 CONSIDERATIONS FOR READING EXISTING HSPE FILES snurre a aaisa aaa anaa aa iaoa 1 27 GENERAL TOO Sii EETA caen cine cia aaa EA casaron ias 2 1 e INTRODUCTION ta AO RISAS RAR E ASPAS 2 1 Ze VIVES SOREN iia aig as ois oa a a a on Ges oan a A E ana ena 2 1 ZO GRAPHICS WINDOW sap scale sats sears a a apenas eens peen ora E 2 2 2A JAY DROGRAPH WINDOW gcionta anaa a tn dies 2 2 oy eames PATE TTE Aa Cem neers tra tar eer acer E toh try ert creme terran cere Cer een enters eran eae 2 3 Doh MOLE O ad 2 3 D2 MO LOLA E eee la led 2 4 DDO DINA LO OL APC A O AT A 2 5 A A e as e o ld e e 2 6 20 EDIT WINDOW A wae eng ato occ ean ee emg neem 2 6 201 Coveraceaid Data Sel aa 2 6 202 Coordindted di DOMES SAS AAA OS 2 6 ZN AS O al cda das eno et ll ds e Sa Ae Ae 2 6 2 MENG DAR cas 2 7 29 IN A a O aaa 2 7 DOs WS AE DES in ab 2 7 RE A o o E A A T 2 8 ZOD id 2 8 ZOE A seas viene eta ted basa oases eases E I ies eae 2 9 ZOD DAVETE SCLIN OS AAA A Ad
488. ries where the cyclic portion of the curve begins Value is ignored if rep 0 10 name str The name of the series i y Ee y values of the points defining the curve III Repeat n times o y CHAPTER 21 The XY Series Editor 21 1 Introduction The XY Series Editor is a special dialog that is used to generate and edit curves defined by a list of x and y coordinates The curve can be created and edited by directly editing the xy coordinates using a spreadsheet like list of the coordinates The curve can also be generated and edited graphically An entire list of curves can be generated and edited with the Editor and curves can be imported from and exported to text files for future use The XY Series Editor is used in several places in WMS It was designed to be general in nature so that it could be used anywhere that a curve or function needs to be defined In some cases the x values of the curve must correspond to a pre defined set of values For example the x values may correspond to a set of time steps whose interval is established in a separate dialog In such cases the x fields cannot be edited but the y values associated with the pre defined x values can be edited In other cases there is no limit on the number of x values or on the x spacing and both the x and y values can be edited The different types of series used by WMS are listed below e Rainfall Series Have fixed X values representing time and
489. ring To register your computer with a WMS password license contact BOSS International Technical Support and provide them with the security string listed at the top of the dialog box BOSS International Technical Support will provide you with a password that will license the program for your computer 3 Enter the password into the password edit field provided 4 Click on Register to register the password license information If the password was entered correctly the enable status of the modules will be updated below in the dialog box If the status did not update correctly double check that the password was correctly entered or that the security string was properly read Once WMS has been registered a file called WMSPASS will be created in the current directory If this is the same directory from which you WMS Installation Guide S B will always be running WMS the WMSPASS file should remain there otherwise you may want to move the file to a resources directory Running WMS If you have installed WMS in the system area or added the WMS directory to the path WMS can be executed by typing WMS from any directory If you have installed WMS for a single user then you should change directories to where the WMS is located and type wms If you do not wish to change to this directory every time WMS is to be executed you may wish to create an alias use a script file or change the path in your LOGIN file Since all tutorial
490. rland flow Suggested values are given in Table 3 2 of the FHWA HEC 22 manual and are repeated in the table below L length of the overland flow segment ft S ground slope of the flow segment ft ft ___Manning s Roughness for overland sheet flow Surface Description n Smooth asphalt 0 011 Smooth concrete 0 012 Ordinary concrete lining 0 013 Good wood 0 014 Brick with cement mortar 0 014 Vitrified clay 0 015 Cast iron 0 015 Corrugated metal pipe 0 024 Cement rubble surface 0 024 Fallow no residue 0 05 Cultivated soils Residue cover lt 20 0 06 Residue cover gt 20 0 17 Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 29 Short prairie grass 0 15 l Dense grasses 0 24 Bermuda grass 0 41 Woods Light underbrush 0 40 Dense underbrush 0 80 The rainfall intensity is actually a function of the travel time for the flow segment In order to iteratively solve for the travel time you must define an IDF curve function to be used in conjunction with the equation IDF curves are defined in WMS using Hydro 35 NOAA Atlas 2 or user defined rainfall intensities for specific durations The ZDF Curves dialog used as part of the rational method is used to set up equations relating i to T See section 13 3 3 for more information on developing IDF curves Shallow Concentrated Flow After 300 feet sheet flow usually turns
491. rm rainfall over the entire watershed and the second allows gage data at specified locations to be defined 19 7 1 19 7 2 CASC2D Interface 19 9 CASC2D Precipitation Uniform rainfall Single Gage Rainfall 50 000 Rainfall Intensity Meine Event FUL semilla nel Description of Event Start Time Year 11994 Hour h 2 Start Daw 11 kK ont blinte Da Multiple Gage Rainfall untitled gag vew Sent He cos 8 Inverse distance weighted interpolation Thiessen polygon Interpolation Figure 19 3 CASC2D Precipitation Dialog Uniform Rainfall The Uniform Rainfall option requires that a single rainfall intensity curve for the entire watershed to be defined This is done by bringing up the XY Series Editor be clicking on the Define Storm button Rainfall intensity values are defined for the given intervals Time intervals can be changed by bringing up the XY Opts dialog from within the XY Series Editor Gages Rainfall intensity curves can be defined for any number of gage locations Each gage must be defined by specifying the name x y location and a time varying rainfall intensity curve Gages are created edited by selecting the Define Gages button This dialogs allows new gages to be created existing gages to be edited deleted and definition of rainfall intensity curves by the XY Series Editor in the same way it is defined for the uniform rainfall option The text window at the top of the
492. rocedure is repeated for each region of the state Gf more than one is given The file is now ready to be used by WMS Save it as customnff equ in the same directory where the regular NFF database is stored WMS will then be able to load the file automatically when Custom is selected in the State dialogs of NFF 20 23 XY Series Files The XY Series Editor described in Appendix B is used in several places in WMS The XY Series Editor is a general purpose editor for entering curves or pairs of lists of data The XY Series Editor allows a curve to be imported from a file created and edited graphically or created and edited using two columns of edit fields in a spreadsheet like interface XY series files can be used to prepare a set of curves for import to the XY Series Editor XY series files are also used to export curves generated within the Editor for future use The format of the XY series file is shown in Figure 20 49 and a sample file is shown in Figure 20 50 Curves are defined in an XY Series File using one of three types of cards XY1 XY2 or XY3 With the XY1 card both the x and y values are listed for each point on the curve There is no limit to the spacing or interval used between subsequent x values The XY2 card is identical to the XY 1 card except that the number of points and the x values are assumed to be static and cannot be altered by the user With the XY3 card the x values are defined by a beginning x value an initial
493. rograph ADDHYD records stations are generated automatically when writing a TR 20 file However routing data must be entered in order to simulate the movement of a flood wave through the river reaches or reservoirs The effects of storage and flow resistance are accounted for in the shape and timing of the flood wave Routing data is entered by selecting an outlet and then selecting the Routing Data button from the Edit TR 20 Parameters dialog Doing this will bring up the TR 20 Routing Data dialog Figure 11 4 The different routing options available in this dialog are described in the following paragraphs TH 20 Routing Data 4 Define reach routing Use defined cross section Deine Eross Section Aouting combine RED1 T f Flood plain length ft 0 00 Inflow Output Control Routing fi T020 Kinematic wave method x and m Outflow Output Control w 0 58 m 11 6 Reach length 1256 32 Red 10 4 Direct input hydrograph s Define Reach Cross Section Define Input Hydrograpril Figure 11 4 TR 20 Routing Data Dialog 11 10 WMS 11 7 1 11 7 2 11 7 3 Outlet Names Since outlets are used for both types adding and routing of hydrograph stations in the TR 20 input file a separate name for each type of hydrograph must be entered The name should be eight characters or less and is used to read hydrographs from the results file Reach Length This value should be the length in feet along the river rea
494. rom the feature objects Drainage Polygon Types The Polygon Type dialog used for drainage coverages is shown in Figure 3 7 3 14 WMS Drainage Feature Polygo 8 Generic O Drainage boundary Lake reservoir Cancel Figure 3 7 Feature Polygon Type Dialog for Drainage Coverages To link a polygon to the hydrologic modeling tree in the map module the polygon must be a Drainage boundary polygon type Also the polygon must have a stream inside the polygon Each stream has a drainage basin assigned to it This drainage basin will also be assigned to the polygon containing the stream provided the polygon is a Drainage boundary polygon Because most of the time you will be working want to use drainage polygons WMS uses the following defaults when building polygons in a drainage coverage 1 If the arcs that enclose a polygonal region contain at least one generic arc type the resulting polygon will be assigned a drainage boundary type 2 If all the arcs that enclose a polygonal region are lake arcs then the resulting polygon will be a lake polygon The generic polygon type is really only used as an intermediate polygon type when importing data from another source When creating a TIN it is only necessary to have a single bounding polygon of either Generic or Drainage boundary type to define the extent of the area that will be converted to a TIN If you have multiple sub basins WMS will ignore sub basin bounda
495. rowser This deletes the binary copy of the data set on disk If the original data set file was already in binary form the file is not deleted All data sets associated with an object are automatically deleted whenever the object is deleted or whenever the number of cells or vertices in the grid or scatter data set is changed due to an editing command 16 2 5 Data Set Info The nfo buttons in the Data Browser will bring up a dialog listing some of the main characteristics of the active scalar data set These include statistics such as maximum minimum and range as well as mean and standard deviation The name of the active data set can also be edited from the Info dialog 16 3 Data Calculator The Data Calculator can be used to perform mathematical operations with data sets Figure 16 2 The Data Calculator can be accessed by selecting the Data Calculator command from the Data menu The Data Calculator can be used to perform any of the mathematical operations shown as icons in the center of the dialog Some of the operators are binary ex and some are unary ex 1 x In x When a binary operator is selected either two data sets or a data set and a scalar must be chosen as operands When a unary operator is selected one data set is chosen as the operand In either case a name for the new data set created as a result of the operation must be entered Once the mathematical operation is Data Sets 16 5 completely def
496. rrence intervals some equations do not include all recurrence intervals The peak flow values are listed in the same text window where the steps for setting up models is given Creating Hydrographs Once peak flows have been computed a hydrograph can be generated by selecting the desired recurrence interval and clicking on the Compute Hydrograph button The NFF program contains a procedure for computing a typical hydrograph that represents average runoff for a specified peak discharge The method uses a dimensionless hydrograph method which needs as input the peak discharge the basin lagtime and the dimensionless hydrograph Once the hydrograph has been computed it can be selected for display in the Hydrograph window or saved listed using the List command in the Hydrograph menu To get back to computed discharges re select the basin in the topological tree window and click on the Compute Peak Discharges button 14 6 WMS Saving and Restoring a Simulation 14 3 The Save Simulation command in the NFF menu can be used to save topologic tree structures with any state regions and parameters which have been defined The Read Simulation command will restore the tree and parameters so that you may continue with a particular model at a later time Maximum Flood Region Boundaries 14 4 ons oe I l l i i i i CHAPTER 15 Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 1 Introduction Peak flows and or hydrographs are
497. rs for the LA County FO601 model and streams for 2 D analysis using CASC2D Within the Map module there are several other tools which can be helpful in either setting up models or presentation of results to a client Tools for reading and writing of DXF files mapping tiff images and text annotation are part of this module Hydrologic Modeling Tree Module Hydrologic analysis is typically done using lumped parameter models such as HEC 1 The Tree module provides a graphical interface to HEC TR 20 HSPF TR 55 Rational Method the National Flood Frequency NFF and other programs In the absence of terrain data topological or tree representations of a watershed can be created Then all necessary input data to run one of the supported models can be defined using a series of user friendly Introduction 1 25 dialogs This module is used for interfacing to hydrologic models and for the construction of topologic watershed models in the absence of digital terrain data 1 3 5 Grid Module The Grid module is used for surface visualization and for the development of a CASC2D rainfall runoff analytical model For example the user can discretize a watershed into a number of grid cells and then define important rainfall infiltration and channel properties at grid cells in preparation for running CASC2D Any parameter such as hydraulic conductivity or rainfall intensity may be interpolated from a set of scattered data points to the grid Resul
498. rvoir can be routed directly to the outlet The Add Outlets command is used to convert a stream node into an outlet point 7 6 1 Drainage TINS 7 9 Reservoirs and Storage Capacity Curves The Create Reservoir command in the Streams menu is used to create a new reservoir and or a storage capacity curve for a selected outlet point The dialog shown in Figure 7 2 allows you set up different options for generating reservoirs and storage capacity curves Reservoir El Current model units feet Water Surface Elevation feet meters If Create Reservoir Create Storage Capacity Number of Divisions f Ll storage Capacity Units English units acre t C Metric units cu meters men Figure 7 2 Reservoir Dialog Creating a Reservoir on a TIN If the Create Reservoir option is specified then all triangles which belong to the same basin as the selected outlet point and have an elevation less than or equal to the specified water surface elevation are converted to reservoir triangles Reservoir triangles still belong in the same drainage basin but when a flow path intersects one of these triangles it is directed to the reservoir outlet Triangles with vertices above and below the water surface elevation are split along the waters surface elevation contour of that triangle The water surface elevation being used must be entered in the correct model units The current model units setting is shown just beneath the
499. rvoirs and other types of TR 20 Interface 11 13 structures such as detention basins can be defined from the TR 20 Reservoir Data dialog Figure 11 7 The TR 20 Reservoir Routing dialog is explained below TR 20 Reservoir Routing Reservoir name EDAM M Define reservoir routing I Define start routing elevation Stark routing elevation 556 00 Define Reservoir Data Define Input Hydrographie Reservoir Output Control Figure 11 6 TR 20 Reservoir Routing Dialog TH 20 Reservoir Data Reservoir Data Series elevation discharge storage W WIER oe ee EA Import Esport 580 00 789 00 2051 00 Current Reservoir Data Seres 585 00 1026 00 3625 00 Ah 230 00 1638 00 4230 00 Delete Duplicate 235 00 2456 00 4501 00 D T y y Y O y y Figure 11 7 TR 20 Reservoir Structure Data Dialog 11 14 WMS 11 9 11 8 1 Name The reservoir name is used to associate resulting hydrographs with the appropriate reservoir when reading a hydrograph file after a TR 20 run The name should be unique and no longer than eight characters 11 8 2 Defining Routing Routing can be toggled on by selecting the Define Reservoir Routing button After selecting the Define Reservoir Routing button reservoir routing will be defined at the selected tree nodes If this option is not selected routing will not be defined at the selected tree node 11 8 3 Start Routing Elevation The start routing elevation
500. ry arcs interior to the watershed you must define the sub basins boundaries from the TIN Land Use Coverage A Land Use coverage in WMS has a different purpose depending on the model and or model parameters you wish to assign to basins using land use as an indicator The following is a list of operations that can be done using land use coverages and the parameters that must be linked to land use ID s 1 SCS NRCS Curve Numbers for hydrologic soil groups requires the use of a soil coverage as well Soil type A CN soil type B CN soil type C CN and soil type D CN 2 Green amp Ampt parameters for infiltration modeling in AEC 1 Map Module 3 15 Initial abstraction percent impervious percent vegetation cover 3 HSPF Pervious and Impervious land segments and other parameters You indicate which application s you wish to use the land use coverage for by selecting the appropriate toggle box in the upper right portion of the Land Use Mapping dialog see Figure 3 8 You may only define parameter values for the applications selected Land use mapping x his landuse ID Display SCS CN s Land ID 27 Land ID 26 Land ID 29 T Display CASC2D parameters Lang IC 30 E Display HSPF parameters Land ID 31 Land ID 32 Land ID 33 Selected land use properties Land ID 34 Froperties of Land with ID 20 Display Green Ampt parameters Land ID 35 Landuse tabular SCS HSPPYCreen Ampt attributes Land ID 36 A cype A CW typ
501. s If the specified spacing is greater than the length between adjacent arc vertices the vertices are moved to reflect this larger spacing Spline Redistribution If the Redistribute along a cubic spline option is specified vertices between arcs are redistributed by creating a series of splines from the vertices of selected arcs and then redistributing a new set of vertices at the specified distance If the flag for preserving points with an angle greater than the specified angle is checked then vertices at such locations will remain after the redistribution This method can be used to create vertices at a smaller density specify a larger target spacing as well as a higher density 3 30 WMS Figure 3 18 Figure 3 21 illustrates the difference between these different methods Figure 3 18 Figure 3 18shows a set of arcs after their initial creation Figure 3 19 shows redistribution with a constant interval of 5 5 vertices between the beginning and ending of each arc Figure 3 20 shows uniform redistribution with a constant spacing of 100 meters in this instance Figure 3 21 shows redistribution along cubic splines It can be seen that the uniform redistribution at a constant spacing and redistribution along cubic splines are very similar whereas the uniform redistribution using a number of intervals results in a much different result In all cases redistribution of vertices along the arcs was done by first selecting all arcs and then redistrib
502. s 2 11 DEM 2 15 DEM Gi Fl OULCS aosi 2 18 DP daa 2 20 feature POIS asii todas 3 35 HBCA MS cis 10 34 NAO APA ssania a 9 7 land used at As sa aan 2 19 SOL De erana aA 2 19 A eR er Cent ee ee ee 8 4 L618 00 FV A ea NON 2 19 A EN caceniucanmeasboanans 2 20 MA e O 11 16 DONT MA CORRE PE a 2 20 import grid O O lSagpieia ganas 2 18 IN21 8 inactivate DEM point ooooocccnnnncnnncncnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnss 4 6 Inactive DEM POMS herad 4 4 Incremental rainfall ais 21 5 index 21D seater POD saena 18 3 CC I PEE O EN EE T 17 3 17 5 IMEX Ol SLOMMS ion 9 8 o N 16 9 interpolate DEN tO TIN ratico 4 8 interpolation EUSTE Ee EAE 18 9 A A 18 10 A a uaewenenene 18 8 IDW A see inverse distance weighted inverse distance weighted see inverse distance weighted O o IA 18 5 A A A 18 10 18 13 NOGA COORGIN ALES lt p ti tds 18 16 natural neighbor see natural neighbor nodal Tacos oia 18 8 OPUS Grind octane atleast iaaince 18 4 GUAGE AUC ynna 18 8 rainfall to basins o oooooooooononcccccnnnnnnnnnnnnss 18 19 Shepard s method 1 Shepard see inverse distance weighted 1 inverse distance weighted Shepard s method ooooooonncccncccnnccccnnnnnnnnno 18 6 BOG E E E E A A 8 5 8 8 O S 8 3 SUD CIS oppia a todaaterdereaean 18 9 O dS esi A 18 19 UNA aei e T ade 18 4 verte xz Vale dd 6 10 inverse distance weighted 18 5 18 12 barycentric WelghtS ooooooooooncccccnnnnnnnn
503. s being mapped for example SCS curve numbers Green amp Ampt parameters etc e A user defined table relating soil IDs to the parameters being mapped for example runoff coefficients Green amp Ampt parameters etc Any combination of the different data required for computation can be used i e drainage coverage land use grid soil type coverage etc If a land use or soil coverage is used then the parameters for each polygon ID can be defined using the Attributes command in the Feature Objects menu with the proper coverage being active see page 3 14 for more information on assigning land use and other parameters to polygon IDs However if grid attributes are used for the soil or land use ID definitions then one way to define the parameters for each ID is by creating the mapping file with a text editor and then importing in the Compute Composite Runoff Coefficients CNs dialog shown in Figure 15 1 below The format for these mapping file types can be found in section 20 17 Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 3 Another way to define land use or soil type is to define a land use or soil type coverage The Attributes command in the Feature Objects menu can then be used to assign id s to the individual polygons Compute Composite Runoff Coefficients CH s Computation SCS Curve numbers O Rational method runoff coefficients O Greer 4mpt parameters O HSPF segments rts Use a Soll type coverage for determining so
504. s closest to the XY coordinates in a file are assigned stage values All other TIN vertices retain their previous stage values When stage values are defined a display option that draws a stage bar or vertical line at that node relative in length to the stage value is automatically turned on The number of pixels drawn for each increment of stage value can be set by the user in the Flood tab of the Display Options dialog box In addition the option to turn on a numerical display of the stage values when the 8 4 2 8 4 3 8 4 4 Flood Plain Analysis 8 5 stage bar display is turned off is found in the Flood tab of the Display Options dialog Edit Stage WMS allows the user to interactively change or assign a stage values to a selected vertex on a TIN with the Edit Stage command If more than one vertex is selected the stage value entered will be applied to all the vertices selected All real number values are acceptable stage values This allows the user flexibility in manually editing the resulting flood plain created by the delineation Because the delineation uses a distance weighted interpolation scheme to find the flood plain boundaries negative stage values can be used to reduce the stage values near that point This can be used to prevent the flood plain from propagating to areas of the TIN that are known to be unaffected by the flood or are outside the area of study For example by using the Edit Stage command to enter ne
505. s defined Another problem that may occur is the ordering of vertices nodes in a stream network may not be consistent with what WMS expects WMS expects that the first or from node in an arc be the downstream node while the second or to node is the most upstream node If your stream vector data is not defined Introduction 1 23 in this fashion it will have to be reordered prior to generating a correct topological watershed representation The Reorder Streams command can be used to accomplish this see page 3 28 The tutorial in chapter four of the WMS tutorials demonstrates how to import edit data coming from shapefiles A special extension for ArcView has been developed by EMRL to allow some of these editing procedures to be taken care of on the GIS side This extension also allows you to easily package your data in a superfile and then start WMS and pass the necessary data directly See the WMS home page for more information about downloading the ArcView extension with accompanying documentation Grid DEM Files All ARC INFO or ArcView grid data imported to WMS must be in the ASCII grid format Grid files can be used as DEM s in WMS Also flow direction and flow accumulation grids can be used to define their respective attributes for DEM points Once you have imported the elevation and flow direction ASCII grids all of the remaining watershed parameters can be developed directly within WMS The elevation DEM may a
506. s for calibrating purposes This can be done by creating a hydrograph file using the WMS file format The file format is given in chapter 20 Deleting Hydrograph Sets All hydrographs read into WMS can be deleted at once using the Delete All command in the Hydrographs menu The Delete Previous command can be used to remove the most recent set Deleting the previous hydrograph set when it is no longer needed for display and comparison eliminates the confusion created by displaying too many hydrographs in the Hydrograph Window List Hydrographs Hydrographs values can be listed in a tabular format using the List command in the Hydrograph menu All currently selected hydrographs will be listed in a table in this dialog You can output the hydrograph to either a WMS formatted hydrograph file or a standard spreadsheet formatted file tab comma or space delimited from within this dialog The dialog is shown in Figure 9 2 9 7 Topological Trees 9 9 Hydrograph T able Hidrograph Set LOSTBR 1 183 513 134 475 289 329 246 652 473 206 450 246 665 125 700 771 Fa v FRA 956 362 700 812 1132 05 022 222 1162 25 auian ee Ta a4 4 Tm WMS hydrograph file C Spreadsheet file comma space tab Figure 9 2 Hydrograph List Dialog WMS Tree File WMS supports several different hydrologic models Unfortunately all the tree data stored in WMS cannot be stored in any single model file For example creat
507. s hydrograph results from the TAPE22 file Many existing HEC 1 files will not specify output to this file and you may need to define it for all hydrograph stations before you will be able to read in 1 26 WMS the modeling results This can be done by selecting all basins outlets and bringing up the respective output control dialog Only the first three ID cards are read into WMS All KM cards comments are placed directly after the KK record for a hydrograph station WMS will read KM cards from any position within the HEC file but always writes them out directly following the KK card WMS writes out a few other comment cards preceded by an that are ignored by HEC These cards are not necessary but you should be aware of differences you might see from your original file and the one created by WMS 1 5 Considerations For Reading Existing TR 20 Files WMS is capable of reading TR 20 files created manually using a text editor or other program However there are a couple of problems which need to be considered and may have to be altered either before or after reading in one of these files 1 WMS reads analysis hydrograph results from the THY file Many existing TR 20 files will not specify output to this file and you may need to define it for all hydrograph stations before you will be able to read in analysis results This can be done by selecting all basins outlets and bringing up the respecting output control dialog
508. s important information which can be used to correct problems encountered when running HEC I The third file is a new name for the TAPE22 file and will contain 10 36 WMS hydrograph results for basins and outlets You can view these results by reading this file with the Open command from the Hydrographs menu HEC 1 Run Options El Inout tile cows tutorial untitled hc Pretix for all files untitled Update All Prefixes Output tile Juntitled out solution tile Juntitled sol Cancel Figure 10 17 HEC 1 Run Options Dialog Once these files have been defined and you select OK HEC will be executed A separate window will appear and information about the HEC simulation will be reported If you are running with Microsoft Windows you must close this window when HEC terminates On UNIX workstation the window closes automatically If HEC is not executed successively when issuing this command then for PC computers be sure that the path to your HECI EXE file is included in AUTOEXEC BAT and for UNIX computers be sure the symbolic link to HEC 1 as outlined in the Installation instructions has been appropriately defined If HEC 1 does not run to a successful completion you can view the ASCII output file using the View File command in the File menu 10 17 WMS and HMS The Hydrologic Engineering Center HEC has replaced the HEC 1 analysis program with the HMS program HMS includes most of the same capability as HEC 1 but h
509. s option on Land Use A separate land use ID grid with a different resolution than the elevation DEM may be used in WMS A land use id may be assigned to each DEM point This id can then later be related to a table referencing curve numbers for different soil types and is used in the calculation of a composite curve number A legend for land use may also be toggled on Soil Type A separate soil ID grid with a different resolution than the elevation DEM may be used in WMS A soil type id may be assigned to each DEM point This id can then later be related to a table referencing soil type information typically hydrologic soil group classification Soil types are used in the calculation of a composite curve number A legend for soil type may also be toggled on Display Step If a large number of grid points are imported the display can become too cluttered or the display time too lengthy The Display Step can be adjusted to DEMs 4 5 speed up and or improve the visibility of what is displayed However if the display step is larger than one contours are interpolated from fewer points and will appear less accurate Nevertheless the display step is ignored when interpolating z values to grids or TINs 4 4 Importing DEMs DEM data from USGS standard format and SDTS ARCINFO DTED and GRASS grids can be imported into WMS and used for watershed modeling The File Import command is used to specify which format and a file name for
510. s version the current printer can be changed using the Windows Print Manager Page Size Default point sizet A Page sizet MN NY Encapsulated in VW em N Portrait i Width 8 56 y Landscape la Height 11 00 Figure 2 11 Page Size Dialog UNIX only Page Layout The Page Layout dialog allows you to change the size and position of the printed image on the paper The image size is controlled in one of two ways l By specifying the model units for an inch or centimeter of the paper The scale toggle determines whether or not a scale legend is printed The text color and font of the scale legend can be selected by clicking on the colored rectangle to the left of the toggle If the Maintain Aspect Ratio toggle 1s not on then a scale legend cannot be printed 2 By using the two scroll bars just under the page display When the Maintain Aspect Ratio box is checked moving one of the scroll bars will also move the other scroll bar The current image size is displayed to the right of each scroll bar The Center button allows you to center the image on the page The Max Aspect button sets the image to a size that will just fill the paper maintaining the aspect ratio with a 0 25 inch margin on either the left and right or top and bottom borders depending on the critical direction and paper orientation 2 24 WMS At the bottom of the dialog you can change the margins of the page The margins can be referenced from the
511. s will be assigned to all currently selected basins or outlets 113 Job Control The Job Control dialog box is used to define general information about the TR 20 model This dialog Figure 11 1 is accessed by selecting the Job Control command from the TR 20 menu A list of the data entries for each item in the Job Control dialog with a short description for each follows 11 3 1 11 3 2 11 3 3 11 3 4 TR 20 Interface 11 3 TR 20 Job Control Title Recard 1 Sample TR 20 Run TileRecod2 oo Use standard SCS dimensionless unit hydroagraph Define Precipitation Define another dimensionless unit hydrograph Job Output Control Weine Unit hyoreorepn Detine Base Flow 0 10 Main time increment hours 0 00 starting time hours Cancel Figure 11 1 TR 20 Job Control Dialog Title Enter a name and or project description identifying the model Two different title records up to 72 characters each can be entered The title records will appear at the top of the TR 20 input file Main Time Increment The computational time increment defines the length in time between hydrograph ordinates The interval should be specified in hours Starting Time The starting time of the simulation is defined in this entry The time should be specified as floating point number of hours past midnight For example 7 45 am would be entered as 7 75 and 1 20 p m as 13 33 Unit Hydrograph Definition TR 20 offers two w
512. sccccsecccuecccssscusecseuecseuscseeesseusseens 10 1 10 1 4 Mode COCK oes ie ch Sintec WGI laicas 10 2 10 1 5 A A Meare ae Ree O A TE 10 2 10 1 6 ao a dc o PO E o o A waste saraeaseeeniaoe 10 2 142 TOOLPATBTTE a 10 2 IOS JOB CONTROL Kare E cotas 10 3 10 3 1 NAIME ID ni is OTE 10 3 10 3 2 Day MONTA CER ds ene ei dl o e atte at 10 4 10 3 3 Computational Time Inter va lLI lt A AAA AA ce Baas oa 10 4 viii WMS 10 3 4 Besa WMC CEL oi on easedss 10 4 10 3 5 Number OLA TES LID at 10 4 10 3 6 Output Control ODIOS LOL ias 10 4 10 3 7 CS I M oora E E E EA TEE NA EET A O 10 4 10 3 8 Iree Diagram DIAGRAM piisonite ee E N 10 5 10 3 9 LBNR OA LIS A TEN TE TE T E E E A A 10 5 TO340 DEPUVAREA STORMS JD hasene era R 10 5 TOS db MULUT LOOD STORMS TA A OE AA 10 7 10 3 12 Unit Graph and Loss Rate Optimization OU oonnccccnninicononooonannnnnnnnnnnnnnononononannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 10 8 10 313 Routine A tia 10 8 104 ENTERING EDITING HEC PARAMETER SS o 10 9 OS DUIPUE CONTROLEKO Muria orar a ada 10 10 10 5 1 Routed and Combined Hydrographs at Outlets oooncccnnccononnncnnnnnnnnnrnnonnnnnonncnnnnnnnnonanocnnnnos 10 10 10 5 2 Comment EmesiKWO 2 si oi 10 10 10 5 3 Output CON TORO logia les hele loe 10 11 10 0 DASINDATA 200 A E A AE EAS A HteR ena ctaats 10 11 10 6 1 Basn NAMERE A A A 10 12 10 6 2 PE T DA A A dio 10 12 10 6 3 Direct Input Hydrogeraph ida 10 13 10 6 4 Observed TA VATOCTODIN OO AA A Abd 10 13 10 6 5 BAOSCT IOWA BE
513. sistencies in your model so that corrections can be made prior to executing TR 20 The list of checks made is not complete and just because no errors are reported does not ensure that a successful and or accurate analysis will be completed We encourage you to report any additional checks that might be made as you work through various problems Run TR 20 The Run TR 20 command will bring up a dialog allowing you to specify 3 files which are necessary to run TR 20 The first file is the TR 20 input file The second is an ASCII output file generated by TR 20 This output file can be used to extract specific results It also contains important information which can be used to correct problems encountered when running 7R 20 The third file will contain hydrograph results for basins and outlets You can view these results by reading this file with the Open command from the Hydrographs menu Once these files have been defined and you select OK TR 20 will be executed A separate window will appear and information about the 7R 20 simulation will be reported If you are running with Microsoft Windows you must close this window when TR 20 terminates On UNIX workstations the window closes automatically If TR 20 is not executed successfully when issuing this command then be sure that the path to your 7R20 EXE file tr20 for UNIX is located in the same directory as your WMS executable file If TR 20 does not run to a successful completion you can view t
514. sistent with dates defined on IN records for precipitation and other time series data Computational Time Interval IT The computational time interval defines the length in time between hydrograph ordinates The interval should be specified in minutes with 1 being the minimum The total simulation time of the model will be the number of ordinates minus one times the computational time interval Beginning Time IT The beginning time of the simulation is defined in this entry The time should be specified as a single integer number defining the hours and minutes For example 7 45 am would be entered as 745 and 1 15 PM would be 1315 Do not place a colon between the hours and minutes Number of Ordinates IT The number of hydrograph ordinates computed during the simulation is defined in this entry The length of the simulation is determined by the number of ordinates times the computational interval If a simulation is run and a complete hydrograph is not developed then the number of ordinates can be increased to increase the length of simulation Similarly the number of ordinates can be decreased if the simulation continues long past the falling limb of the hydrograph Output Control Options IO HEC generates an ASCII output file that can be printed or read into any standard word processing program The information output is controlled by the output control options in this dialog Units IM By default HEC performs computat
515. splaying boundaries If the Display Basin patterns options is selected then a hathching pattern is displayed to distinguish adjacent basins that share the same color Basin IDs The basin ID may be displayed by toggling this option on Basin IDs are used to identify a basin with its associated values when exporting drainage data Basin Names The name assigned to the drainage basin can be displayed at the basin centroid by toggling this option on The default name for a basin is the ID number Names are only important when creating HEC analysis files They are used to identify the hydrographs of each basin 7 3 13 7 3 14 7 3 15 7 3 16 7 3 17 7 3 18 7 3 19 7 3 20 Drainage TINS 7 5 Basin CN s The curve number for each basin can be displayed by toggling this option on Drain data must have been computed for CN labels to be placed at the basin centroids Number of Triangles Flowpath This option effects how the Draw Flow Patterns command works By default a flow path for each triangle is generated when this command is run However for large TINs it is not necessary and very time consuming to draw a flow path for each triangle Therefore the number of triangles which have there flowpaths drawn can be reduced by setting this value higher Watershed Color This color box allows the specification of color used when performing the Draw Watershed command found in the Drainage menu Downhill Overland Color
516. t 20 min tc gt 20 min t Figure 13 11 Dekalb Rational Hydrograph User Defined Hydrograph With the User Defined method of hydrograph generation you specify the number of ordinates for a dimensionless unit hydrograph and then define the t t and Q Q values NOTE All t t values must be even integers User defined files may be exported or imported so that they do not need to be re entered from one run of WMS to the next 13 4 Saving and Restoring a Simulation The Save Simulation command in the Rational menu can be used to save the topologic tree structure with any rational method parameters which have been defined The Read Simulation command will restore the tree and parameters so that you may continue with a particular model Rational Method 13 17 13 5 MODRAT The Rational menu also contains several options to create and run a MODRAT simulation MODRAT is a modified rational method developed and used by the Los Angeles Department of Public Works Given the limited scope of applicability of MODRAT this reference manual does not cover the use of the MODRAT interface Information on the use of the MODRAT interface as well as the MODRAT model may be obtained by contacting your distributor of WMS or the Los Angeles County Department of Public Works 13 18 WMS 13 6 2 year 5 minute Precipitation HYDRO 35 En Y REPRESENTATIVE FOR FLORIDA KEYS gt Ll PA A x amp 2 YEAR 5 MINUTE PRECIPITATION I
517. t a basin the edit fields are filled with the values of that basin This also makes it possible to use the areas computed from a feature object DEM or TIN using the Compute Basin Data command in the TIN or DEM Drainage menu or the Update Basin Data command in the Feature Objects menu Peak flow Q for each basin should update automatically however the Update Q button may be used at any time to signify that you are finished entering the value for a given parameter alternatively you can tab to the next field or click in another edit field Peak flow values for all selected basins will be computed and displayed in the main text window of the Rational Method dialog The time of concentration which is used to determine an appropriate rainfall intensity 1 can be determined in one of four ways 1 The time of concentration can be computed outside of WMS and entered into the appropriate edit field 2 Second the Compute Tc Basin Data button can be chosen and one of the time of concentration or lag time equations specified this option is only available when you have computed basin data from either a TIN or a DEM The available equations in WMS are described in section 7 7 11 3 A series of time computation arcs may be used to define overland sheet and channel flow within a basin and then travel times for each arc are summed to compute the total travel time or time of concentration for the basin The Compute Tc Map Dat
518. t are used to control the stability and speed of channel routing during a CASC2D analysis A more in depth discussion of these parameters is provided in the CASC2D primer 19 6 6 Output Control The output control button brings up a dialog which lets the user specify which output options are active for a given project CASC2D can generate ASCH or binary data sets or GRASS grid files for distributed rainfall intensity surface depth cumulative infiltration depth surface soil moisture infiltration rate channel cell depth and channel cell discharge By turning in one of these options on a file is created with the specified output at the time step interval specified by the write step edit field For example if surface depth is turned on with a write step of 10 then values of surface depth for every cell are written to a file every tenth time step The file name is specified in the Save Project dialog and by default will contain the same prefix as the project file name CASC2D always generates as part of the output a discharge hydrograph for the outlet The hydrograph write step is used to determine how many time steps should elapse between consecutive values ordinates of the hydrograph The suppress printing toggle controls whether or not output to the screen is displayed during execution of CASC2D 19 7 Precipitation Two different options for defining precipitation for CASC2D models are available from the WMS interface The first is unifo
519. t be entered separately A default z value and other parameters governing the creation of new vertices can be set by selecting the Vertex Options command from the TINs menu 6 5 2 6 5 3 TINS 6 9 One of the easiest ways to create a TIN for a small area where a paper contour map exists 1s to use this tools and follow the steps outlined below 1 Scan the paper map and save it as a TIFF tif image 2 Register the image as described in section 3 4 you may want to mark the map with your register points prior to scanning it 3 Set the vertex options see section 6 5 4 below so that you are not prompted for a z value each time and so that no triangulation takes place as you create new vertices basically turn off all of the vertex options 4 Set the default z value to the contour value you wish to digitize first 5 Digitize or create vertices along the specified contour value the spacing of points along the contour lines should be approximately the same distance as the spacing between adjacent contours 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each contour line 7 Triangulate the vertices once you are done Of course this method is awfully tedious for larger areas but is ideally suited for smaller areas where there are not too many contours to be digitized Deleting Vertices Vertices can be deleted by selecting the vertex s to be deleted and hitting the DELETE or BACKSPACE key on the keyboard or by selecting the Delete command
520. t directory of your hard drive TAR XV Once the contents of the tape have completed being copied onto the current directory of your hard drive you should verify that a VMS Installation Guide directory named WMS now resides on your hard drive The following files and directories should be contained in this directory COLORS BYU FONT INC WMS TUTORIAL Depending on which modules you have purchased other directories also may have been copied Registering WMS The first time you bring up WMS a message telling you that you are running an Evaluation Copy will be displayed Any time WMS is run on a computer that has not been registered to run the program this message will appear WMS can be run in this mode but the printing and saving of files will be disabled To register your computer to run WMS the Register command is used l Start up WMS 2 Select the Register command from the File Menu The Register dialog box will appear The Register dialog box will list a program security string that is unique for the computer it is installed on It also contains a password edit field If this is the first time you are registering the program this field will be empty If the computer you are running on is already registered the current password will be displayed in the field In addition the enable status of each of the WMS modules will be listed in the dialog Click on Details to see detailed description of the security st
521. t flow path within the watershed in miles S Average slope along the longest flow path S Average basin slope I Percent impervious as a fraction Typical characteristics of the watersheds for which these equations were applied are e Area between 13 and 400 square miles e Length of longest flow path between 5 and 55 miles e Slope of longest flow path from 2 ft mi to 33 ft mi e Slope of basin from 3 to 80 ft m1i e Impervious area from 0 to 100 Others have simply used the simple relationship defined by equation 15 35 to compute the Clark watershed storage coefficient from the time of concentration Computing Travel Times from Map Data The Time Computation coverage see page 3 18 can be used to create arcs representing flow path segments when computing time of concentration or lag time for a basin or reach Within a basin the time of concentration or lag time is usually determined by combining the time of travel across one or more flow path segments Travel time equations are generally functions of the length and slope of the flow path segment as well as surface roughness 1 e Manning s roughness coefficient and channel shape and roughness Since length and slope providing there is a background TIN or DEM are easily determined from arcs the time computation coverage provides a simple and powerful method for computing basin time of concentration and or lag time Travel times between consecutive outlet points may also be c
522. t id atte ha onthe 5 5 A dd ed 3 5 Iv WMS See LOW DIV CCUG RU sa 5 6 Dd LOMA ADOS ccc A hee conti ASA Sass dean AA eo ana eee 5 6 Mou Color dilled Dranare BASS oO 5 6 MIO DISD BOEF OTIS LANA AAA AAA A AS 5 6 39 7 FI basa DOUNA ATY ION kitten eee he Oe 5 6 DG BASED ARTROSIS EDA eae 5 6 JA FLOW DIRECTIONS ACCUMULATION a a 5 7 0 DRAINAGE ANALYSIS A A ia ed 5 9 Set DEM STECO SF CONIC AV CS AAA AAA 5 9 Deel DIS ci 5 10 Oe AAC NU ABS aks roscoe cates A A a 5 1 30 4 DEM Basins Boundaries TO LO VEO As 5 11 J933 DEAN FIOW PACS wacko aot o OEE 5 1 IIO Compu BIS NDU a EAA OT a agas 5 1 Does WET OC SCICCIC DOSS sisisi ces coeles sehen ee a eles tec ales 5 12 DO POLYCOM DOSE TID 8 POM oc eT A ET OAPs 5 12 H O zea O Aner EP Cen maT RNa A PO E A o o E Cert rr CTE errr rear ere 5 12 TOA DEM PIO tt 5 13 DO AS AI Ch Gasser tates A A A 5 13 IOS ALOE RAI N INCSAIND IN DL A AAA A Si 5 14 6 E A A a PESO OER De eres Cen UE EEE ee 5 14 5 6 5 Analysis and Adjustment of Outlet DepressiOWS oooooonnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoos 5 14 OO OPINO DNS Si anio 5 14 O A ON 6 1 Gill INTRODUCTION io cocos O O op oO a oo 6 1 02 TOOL PALETTE atlas nities teasers ricos ls debeis 6 1 CIE CIV UCSI A is dais 6 1 A A A A ONAN oR ORE EONS A He mn eR A Ter 6 2 SLCC ULI E ase ike zeit we A A E na itetdets snd esta de N A E epee aea eo Gales eae O E E A elecee 6 2 SCLC CLV CLICK SIN OS A LA AAA E E 6 2 Cred
523. t will report any possible errors inconsistencies in your model so that corrections can be made prior to executing HEC see Figure 10 16 Two types of information are provided as a result of this command The first type 1s simply informational and provides things such as the starting time time step and total time of the simulation You should verify that these parameters are what are intended The second type of information messages are errors and must be corrected before an accurate HEC 1 analysis can be performed The list of checks made is not complete and just because no errors are reported does not insure that a successful and or accurate analysis will be completed We encourage you to report any additional checks that might be made as you work through various problems HEC 1 Model Check Errors in your HEC 1 model gt Click on an item to fis the problem Timestep Parameters Starting Daw Month ear 12 56 68 Starting Time te 715 Computational time interval is 15 Total Simulation time 14 hours 30 minutes Possible errors in your model Lose method not defined corectly for basin WES T20 Figure 10 16 HEC 1 Model Check Dialog Run HEC 1 The Run HEC 1 command will bring up a dialog Figure 10 17 allowing you to specify three files which are necessary to run HEC The first file is the HEC 1 input file The second is an ASCII output file generated by HEC and can be used to extract specific results values It also contain
524. taans 2 36 A muetuenadne 2 36 Me O 2 25 A A O 2 36 A O tankers E 2 37 A lesen E S 2 37 PA olas 2 4 A A 2 37 A RO 2 4 2 37 window IO E 2 36 zina mHC ON eE 2 36 ZOO rise Rinses E A 2 4 Wares NE d sde 7 3 calculating cumulative areaS 00000e 7 12 A 7 5 display ING rd son 7 12 watershed delineation from DEM6 05 5 1 watershed models ise DEM Sid 1 6 USING feature ODIECIS aria 1 3 sne GUS 1 0 COPPROPPAR PRO PO A 1 3 usa INS la lancia 1 15 watershed storage coefficient 15 23 Weir CalCUlAlIONS esris op ea 15 35 118 0 6 Ree ee ete n E A 10 23 window Pounds onde eta ede 2 36 E EAEN N ae ee re LSP re 2 6 3 7 5 2 6 1 PEM LOOP A E AU o 16 8 A ses E E areas O 16 12 Index 1 15 MOMS APEA EEA ET 2 2 Bel xcs eae steed O 2 6 A shina IO 2 2 O tedaaucaxoiees 2 3 WAL tame ness 2 24 A A A eerdetuse anes 16 12 WISE O 9 9 Wonder sanz 3 45 write TRIO ia 11 16 xy series interpolate DV SELICS A E 21 4 A seaman tes 21 2 COMPILES S si iaue eu siias an cacten sient eesuneaetans 21 4 CTCAUIME DOME 21 5 CLOSS SCCLIONS ANNO A 21 7 cumulative rantall id 21 5 definins tamal ies 21 5 lts acc ad ORR ener Tene TEEN 21 2 21 3 didlos dit cds 21 3 GISPIAV INS e523 ccn sd 21 4 diversion GAGA AA A eile 21 7 duplica 21 2 SDO OPA O asacactes toekeseaearinad 21 3 O A A 21 1 EX POEL iia cates shane a scenes ad eadenncunaeteaaseey 21 2 Mesa 20 32 20 41 PANIC PARAR ROO o a ina 21 5 given hydrograph
525. te a set of xyz scatter points or import a TIN from another data source it is not likely that this condition will exist Creating a new TIN from feature objects will insure that the TIN is optimal for performing drainage analysis because the new TIN will be built around the feature objects Map Module 3 35 Creating Grids A grid can be created from a feature polygon using the Create Grid command Active and inactive cells are determined from the boundary polygon A rectangular grid is created that encompasses the bounds of the boundary polygon and cells outside the polygon are assigned an inactive status Either an existing TIN or a DEM can be used as a background elevation map when interpolating z values for the elevation data set of the grid An example of a grid created from the feature objects of Figure 3 21 is shown in Figure 3 23 je le e o MK se Je O e s ee DEA e l gt r le e e le DEER je gt oe e a x 40 El pee o e ae e s lee TER e ry e d e a oboe eee d O E rn pi Pa ele Tt a e ol e e gt he le gt e ha mps
526. te equations for lag time time of concentration and peaking or storage coefficients then you will be asked to choose which equation you want to modify If you use the User 15 10 WMS Defined button to enter this dialog then the Equation edit box will be blank You can type a new or modify an existing equation from the keyboard or by using the buttons for add subtract multiply divide etc You may also enter variable names corresponding to the basin data computed by WMS or enter variables that you wish to define yourself The variable definition is displayed and edited in the Definition edit box and units associated with the variable can be set using the Units drop down combo box When you have finished typing the equation you should select the Parse button Doing so will result in any variables being identified and displayed in the Variables text window along with their definitions The rules of precedence are typical for mathematical computations and are as follows 1 Parenthetical statements 2 Functions like In log etc 3 The power function 4 Multiply and divide 5 Add and subtract 6 Left to right Repeated Use of a User Defined Equation If your local hydrology manual requires the use of an equation not currently supported by WMS and you must repeatedly use this equation for projects then you can set up the equation in a text file in the same directory as WMS and it will be read in and set up as the User Defined equat
527. ted at all times The xy values of the active series are shown in the spreadsheet on the left side of the dialog and the curve 1s shown graphically in the upper right portion of the dialog The name associated with the active series can be edited using the edit field to the right of the xy series list A new xy series can be created and added to the xy series list by selecting the New button An existing series can be copied to create a new series by selecting the Duplicate button This option is useful when two series need to be the same except for slight differences An existing series can be deleted from the list by highlighting the series and selecting the Delete button to the right of the xy series list A set of series can be read from a file by selecting the Import button Likewise the entire list of series can be saved to a file using the Export button The file format used to save xy series is described in Appendix A The XY Series Editor 21 3 21 3 XY Edit Fields 21 3 1 The two vertical columns of edit fields on the left side of the dialog are for direct editing of the xy series values A pair of application specific titles appears at the top of the columns The TAB key can be used to move the cursor through the edit fields If the number of points in the series 1s greater than the number of pairs of fields in the columns the scroll bar to the right of the columns can be used to scroll through the entire range of the xy series If
528. ted by the user using a text editor The format of this file may appear formidable at first this is because it is designed to describe all possible equations For a simplified explanation of how to create a equation file please see the end of this section The format of these files is as follows CUSTOMNFF File type identifier STATE id name State in which equations are valid REGIONS numregions Number of hydrologic regions BEGREGION name flood_num Beg of region name and max flood number for the region NUMVARIABLES nv Number of variables in equations name description minval maxval units mappingcode name description minval maxval units mappingcodeg name description minval maxval units mappingcode EQUATION Beg of equation STANDARDERROR value Standard error for equation EQUIVALENTYEARS value Equivalent years of record REGRESSIONCONSTANT value Regression constant for equation NUMCOMPONENTS nc number of variables used in equation lindex mofifier multiplier exp exp_index exp_modifier exp_exp lindex modifier multiplier exp exp_index exp_modifier exp_exp ENDREGION Le ENG OF region Figure 20 47 Custom NFF Equation File Format The following 1s a sample file for the given information State Wyoming of regions 1 Region 1 s equations RQ2 0 03A P 11 standard error 100 No data for equivalent years of record File Formats 20 35
529. ted using the active data set The Scalar Data Set button at the top of the dialog can be used to change the active scalar data set The current active data set is displayed to the right of this button Display Mode The display mode is used to control whether each frame is generated as a wire frame image or a shaded image using the current shading options Image Size By default each frame that is generated in a film loop occupies the entire Graphics Window This results in film loops composed of large images which require a significant amount of memory and which are difficult to playback at a high speed To reduce the size of the film loop the individual frames can be generated at a specified fraction of the default size The memory required for a film loop is quadratically proportional to the fractional size For example an image generated at 50 of the Graphics Window size requires 25 as much memory as an image generated at full size Transient Animation Transient animation can be used with 2D grids and a transient data set As each frame is generated a set of values corresponding to the current time is loaded into memory and the image is redrawn using the current display options Thus if the contour display option is selected the contours will vary from frame to frame 16 8 Gages 16 8 1 Data Sets 16 9 The strip on the right of the transient animation section of the Film Loop Setup dialog is used to specify what range o
530. terrain model is an accurate geometric description of the watershed parameters such as areas slopes and flow distances can automatically be computed This terrain model then serves as a map to guide entry of all data necessary to run HEC 1 TR 20 or other hydrologic analysis programs Previous chapters described the necessary tools needed to prepare a TIN for drainage analysis It should be emphasized that it is highly recommended you prepare your TIN for drainage analysis by using feature objects with a background elevation source The elevation source could be TIN or DEM but you should retriangulate using feature objects as guides in order to insure that stream edges are honored by triangle edges see page 3 33 This chapter will deal with the specifics of defining the sub basins of a watershed The first process in performing drainage analysis is to edit the TIN where necessary Flat triangles flat channel edges and flat ridge edges must all be eliminated before trying to delineate stream networks and basin boundaries Automatic editing procedures such as TIN filtering and removal of flat objects should be used In addition manual insertion of breaklines the addition of new points and edge swapping can aid in removing anomalies which are introduced into the TIN as a byproduct of the triangulation process With the TIN properly edited stream networks and drainage basins can be defined as preparation for defining a complete hydrologic an
531. th such a derivation the effects of rainfall and basin size are accounted for explicitly while most other physical characteristics of the watershed are accounted for indirectly by the time of concentration and runoff coefficient This simple equation illustrates the critical nature of t For durations less than t the entire area is not contributing For durations larger than t there is no increase in contributing area and therefore no increase in peak flow Important Limitations Due to assumptions regarding homogeneity of rainfall and equilibrium conditions at the time of peak flow the rational method should not be used on areas larger than about 1 mi without subdividing the overall watershed into subbasins including the effect of routing through any drainage channels As described in the introduction WMS includes two different methods for determining runoff from larger watersheds subdivided into smaller sub 13 4 WMS basins including the ability to account for routing and lag through drainage channels and detention basins 13 3 Computing Peak Flows with the Rational Method Equation Like the other models supported by WMS the Rational Method can be defined for a watershed catchment developed from feature objects DEMs or TINs or built using the tools provided in the hydrologic modeling module under the Tree menu Once the topologic tree has been constructed the Rational Method Figure 13 2 dialog can be accessed using the Run Sim
532. that are described in the next chapter Select DEM Points The Select DEM point tool is used to select a region of DEM points to make active or inactive Coordinates of DEM points may not be edited When selecting a group of DEM points a rectangle or polygon around the points is displayed rather than trying to identify individual DEM points To deselect a group of DEM points that have already been selected click anywhere in the graphics window Multiple groups of DEM points may be selected by holding down the SHIFT key while dragging a rectangle around the second group al Contour Labels The Contour Label tool manually places numerical contour elevation labels at points clicked on with the mouse These labels remain on the screen until the contouring options are changed until they are deleted using the Contour Label Options dialog or until the Graphics Window is refreshed Contour labels can be deleted with this tool by holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on the labels This tool can only be used when the DEM is in plan view DEM Display Options Display options control which features of the DEM are displayed Each display feature associated with DEMs is listed in the Display Options dialog Figure 4 1 under the DEM tab DEM display options are accessed by selecting the Display Options command in the Display menu The check box next to the feature name can be toggled on or off to control whether or not the feature is to be displayed
533. the Gages dialog Display of gages are described in more detail in section 16 8 17 4 WMS 17 3 6 al The Select Gages Tool The Select Gages tool is used to select previously defined gages A set of selected gages can be deleted by hitting the DELETE key or by selecting the Delete command from the Edit menu The coordinates of a selected gage can be edited using the Edit Window The location of a gage can also be edited by holding down the mouse button when a gage is selected and dragging the gage This tool is also used to control what is plotted in the Gage Plot Window Only the curves associated with selected gages are plotted 17 4 Display Options The display options control which components of the grid are displayed The display options can be set by selecting the Display Options command in the Grid menu Most of the items in the dialog box are toggle boxes If the toggle for a component of the grid is set the component is displayed when the grid is re drawn The color used to display the component can be set using the pop up color window to the left of the toggle box Display Options ki TIN Drainage Flood DEM Map Hydrologic Modeling 2D Grid Scatter Foint Po IY Nodes E _ Stream cells W Cells _ Lake celle M Grid boundary _ Fill material ID s YL w indices MB Material 1D s NN _ Inactive cells A _ Links and nodes _ Elevations _ Fringes ptione _ Contours OF Lancel Apply Figure
534. the Points item in the DEM Display Options dialog is set the DEM points will be displayed each time the Graphics Window is refreshed The Display Step can be used to control the density of points that are displayed The color of DEM points is used when performing a hill shade using the Shade command Contours If the Contours item is set the DEM will be contoured according to the options set in the Contour Options dialog accessed from the Display menu 4 4 WMS 4 3 3 4 3 4 4 3 5 4 3 6 4 3 7 4 3 8 Contouring a DEM can be valuable in determining where streams and other feature arcs should be placed Flat DEM Cells If the Flat DEM Cells item is set all flat DEM Cells will be displayed each time the Graphics Window is refreshed A DEM cell is considered flat if four adjacent DEM points all have the same elevation Adjacent DEM points are determined using the Display Step as defined below NODATA Cells A DEM point or cell is a NODATA cell if an elevation value for that point does not exist A DEM must be rectangular since elevations are accessed as a elements of a two d array If the domain of valid DEM points is not perfectly rectangular then a rectangular bounding box is placed around the valid points and points inside the bounding box but not within the valid domain take on a NODATA status Inactive Cells Inactive cells have valid elevations but are temporarily disabled Their display can be seen by toggling thi
535. the UNIX command line Printing Files PC Platforms When printing from the PC version of WMS the image is sent directly to the printer according to the current settings of the standard Microsoft Windows printer controls Most printers particularly those which support postscript allow you to save an image to a file rather than sending it directly to the printer Such an option would be accessible through the Printer Setup command Viewing Files The View File command allows you to examine any text file from within WMS This command is particularly useful if errors occur while running a simulation using one of the hydrologic models supported by WMS If a model does not run to a successful completion errors can usually be found by examining the ASCII output file On PC computers the file is placed within the MS Windows Notepad or WinWord depending on the file size application to examine the file On UNIX computers you will be prompted for the name of a UNIX editor vi is the default and then the file is brought up in the specified editor Get Info The Get Info command brings up a dialog that reports basic information concerning the data of the current module For example the number of vertices and triangles in a TIN is reported when the TIN module is active Demo Version The demo version is disabled for the professional version It is used from the basic version to toggle into a demo of the professional version 2 26 WMS 2
536. the diversion as used on the DT record It is important to assign a unique name to each diversion in a given model because this name is used by WMS and by HEC to identify the diversion Max Volume Maximum volume of diverted flow in acre feet 1000 cu m Peak Flow Peak flow that can be diverted in any computation period in cfs cms Outflow name Name used on KK record where flow is diverted Inflow name Name used on KK record where flow is retrieved The flow capacity of a stream flow diversion is specified using an inflow DI and outflow DQ tables These tables are defined with the XY Series Editor by clicking on their respective define buttons 10 32 WMS 10 14 Gages PG 10 14 1 The Gages command can be used to establish the position and rainfall accumulation for rainfall gages Gages may be entered with or without a TIN present but if a TIN is present then gage weights using the Thiessen polygon method for each basin are automatically computed when the Compute Basin Data command is chosen from the Drainage menu When a TIN is not present the gage weights for each basin must be entered manually from within the Precipitation dialog In order for gage information to be used during the simulation the basin precipitation type must be set to gage in the Precipitation dialog Defining Editing Gages The Gage dialog Figure 10 15 consists of a list of defined gages as well as the fields necessary to define a new g
537. the grid elevation of the cell is shown in red Care should be taken to see that no bed elevation is higher than the grid cell elevation Stream Bed Elevation Smoothing Profile of Selected Cells Selected Cell Elevation J area Figure 3 24 Smooth Stream Cells Dialog Renumber Links And Nodes In order to properly execute the channel routing routines of CASC2D the stream channel must have the proper order and connectivity This ordering or numbering can be done automatically using the Renumber Links and Nodes command from the CASC2D menu Links define whole channel segments and must be numbered such that any segment has no upstream segments with a link number that is greater than itself In other words all channel segments must flow into downstream segments with a higher link number Map Module 3 39 3 3 Drawing Objects 3 3 1 Drawing objects are used to enhance or provide annotation to a model For example text may be used in conjunction with an arrow identifying a key aspect of the model or rectangles and ellipses may be added to highlight some feature of the model Drawing objects are saved as part of the map file and are restored when that file is read The types of drawing objects available are text lines rectangles and ovals and are created using the tools in the dynamic palette as described in this section Drawing Object Tools The following drawing object tools are in the dynamic portion of t
538. the hydrographs you see when you run TR 55 in WMS are already lagged The upstream hydrographs are then simply added together to determine the hydrograph at the watershed outlet point No lagging is done in WMS tabulated TR 55 hydrographs are pre lagged Like time of concentration travel times between outlets may be computed using a series of feature objects with equations such as Manning s defined for each see section 15 3 12 4 Computing Hydrographs Using the TR 55 tabular hydrograph method see TR 55 reference manual for details hydrographs for a selected basin or outlet may be computed The Compute Hydrograph s button is chosen once all of the necessary input for basins and outlets have been entered and a new set of hydrographs will be computed If you have a basin selected when you compute hydrographs then a hydrograph for only the selected basin will be computed However if you have an outlet selected when you compute hydrographs then a new hydrograph for each 12 6 WMS upstream basin will be computed along with the routed hydrographs at outlet points You may notice a slight difference between hydrographs computed by WMS TR 55 implementation and those in the TR 55 reference manual This difference occurs because the la P value is rounded to the nearest hydrograph value for the standard version of TR 55 In WMS hydrographs are determined by linear interpolation between two hydrographs using the actual la P value 12 5 Co
539. then be centered around this last point Display Options The display options control which DEM point attributes are displayed Each display feature associated with drainage for DEMs is listed in the DEM Drainage Display Options dialog Figure 5 1 accessed by selecting the Display Options command in the Drainage menu The check box next to the feature name can be toggled on or off to control whether or not the feature is to be displayed In addition the color button to the left of the check box can be used to set the color and other appropriate attributes such as radius line thickness line style etc General purpose DEM display options were documented in the previous chapter and the display options relating to drainage delineation are documented here 9 3 1 9 3 2 Drainage DEMs 5 5 Display Options ki Hydrologic Modeling 2D Grid Scatter Poirt TIN Drainage Flood DEM Map wF Point display step Mo text color Min accumulation for display _ Basin ID s eo _ Basin names _ Basin CM s curve numbers IW Watershed pen M Stream M Show units T E _ Flow direction I Basin areas M Flow accumulation El Basin slopes _ Average overland flow Accumulation _ North South aspects W Color fill drainage basins _ Length _ Display basin patterns _ Perimeter i Fill basin boundary only _ Shape factor a Y Contours _ Sinuosity factor MN Points _ Mean basin elevation E L Flat DEM cells Max
540. ther If a hydrograph has been computed using one of the supported hydrologic models the peak flow for the hydrograph will be used as the default flow value if the hydrograph is selected prior to opening the Channel Calculations dialog Figure 15 9 User defined cross sections are defined from a cross section coverage and can be interpolated from a background TIN or DEM see page 3 19 in the coverage type section 3 2 6 Channel Calculations Channel type Cross section a Cross Section xsectiom y Enter flow 0 00 C Enter depth fo 00 Z scale ho Data has not been calculated orient completely entered English Units 0 00 Side slope 1 1 0 00 Side slope 2 22 00 Channel width B 0 0000 Longitudinal slope as A ee 0 0000 Manning s roughness 0 00 Pipe diameter 01 Copy Data To Clipboard Calculate Copy Picture To Clipboard z Figure 15 9 Channel Calculations Dialog All calculations except Froude Number are made using Manning s Equation where Q Flow in cfs n Manning s roughness A Cross section area of flow R Hydraulic radius S Slope 15 5 Weirs Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 35 The Froude Number is computed from where N Froude Number V Velocity g acceleration due to gravity y equivalent depth of flow for a rectangular channel The equivalent depth of flow for a rectangular channel is computed by dividing the cross sectional are
541. tic tape or transferred via the Internet to your computer s hard drive During the second step the authorization files are installed on to the hard drive such that WMS can be run Downloading WMS You may obtain WMS via the Internet either from our FTP site fto bossintl com or our World Wide Web site http www bossintl com Please contact BOSS International Technical Support for the current file name to complete this process Once the program is placed into the current directory of your hard drive you should verify that a directory named WMS now resides on your hard drive The following files and directories should be contained in this directory COLORS BYU FONT INC WMS TUTORIAL Depending on which modules you have purchased other directories also may be present Copying From the Tape If you wish to install WMS on a system area on your computer so that all users may have access to the software you should log in as the super user root If you are installing it in a particular user s area and intend only for that user to use the program you do not have to be logged in as the super user Once you are logged in change directories to where WMS is to be installed You do not need to create a new directory as the installation process will automatically create the directory WMS in which all files will be placed Insert the tape into the tape drive Type the following command to copy the contents of the tape into the curren
542. times The coefficients are shown in the following table and the resulting hydrograph is displayed in Figure 13 10 Dimensionless Time and Hydrograph Ordinates t t QQ jo Joo ES Y y pa Joso pa sw 4 Joss 5 Joss e odos zooo i doa CA doas o Joww pto Joss 11 0 00 Notice that the peak occurs at 3t and the time base is equal to 11t Rational Method 13 15 11 tc 3 tc t Figure 13 10 Universal Rational Hydrograph where t time of concentration Q Flow at time t in cfs Q Peak flow Dekalb Rational Hydrograph The Dekalb Rational Hydrograph was developed by Dekalb County Georgia and like the Universal Rational Hydrograph ordinates are computed by scaling the peak discharge by an appropriate value The time to peak occurs at 5t while the time base is 10t All coefficients occur at increments of t and are different depending on whether t is less than 20 minutes or not The following table lists the coefficients and a typical hydrograph is shown in Figure 13 11 Dimensionless Time and Hydrograph Ordinates tt Q Q for tc lt 20 min Q Q for tc gt 20 min o ooo Jo0w A oies Jo0w pa Jots Jo0wm ____ ETA Es 7 7 A Y A pa Jos Jos 5 pto tw e Jos Joso 7 0 27 0 11 13 16 WMS oft Jooas gt O 1o FO jJo0w where t time of concentration Q Flow at time t in cfs Q Peak flow 10 tc 5 tc tc l
543. tion 2 description str Land use description 3 6 curve SCS Curve Number CN for hydrologic soil groups A B C D WMS can be used to map Green amp Ampt infiltration parameters for HEC 1 using the Maricopa County methods The file format and an example are given in Figure 20 31 and Figure 20 32 ID1 Land use description 1 IAB1 RTIMP1 PCTVEG1 ID2 Land use description 2 IAB2 RTIMP2 PCTVEG2 ID3 Land use description 3 IAB3 RTIMP3 PCTVEG3 IDn Land use description n IABn RTIMPn PCTVEGn Figure 20 31 Green amp Ampt Land Use File 120 Mountalinous shurb and brush 043 15 0 50 0 119 Mountainous forest 0 25 30 0 50 0 29 Mountainous grassland 0 15 55 0 60 0 7 Roadway 0 s3 dos 500 Figure 20 32 Sample Green amp Ampt Land Use File CASC2D map parameters may also be mapped to grid cells using a coverage or grid with an accompanying mapping file The format of this file is given in Figure 20 33 The first part of the file serves as a dictionary You may select any number of the mappable attributes listed but values in the lower part of the table must appear in the same order as they are listed in the dictionary An example table file is shown in Figure 20 34 SOILSTABLE File identifier HYDRAULIC_CONDUCTIVITY First field identifier CAPILLARY Second field identifier POROSITY Third field identifier PORE_INDEX Fourth
544. tion 1 nt The number of triangles in the TIN 2 4 vir v2 v3 Vertices of triangle listed in a counter clockwise order Repeat nt times Card Type ENDT 8 f Description Marks the end of a group of cards describing a TIN There should be a corresponding BEGT card at a previous point in the file No fields Required YES 20 4 DEM Files DEM files are used for storing DEMs processed by WMS After clipping thinning or smoothing an imported DEM you may wish to save it to a WMS formatted file so that it can be recalled later without having to perform the same processing steps The DEM file format is shown in Figure 20 5 and a sample file is shown in Figure 20 6 DEM File type identifier ORIGIN xlowerleft ylowerleft Southwest coordinare of DEM DELTAX deltx X spacing of elevation points DELTAY delty Y spacing of elevation points ELEVATIONS ncol nrow Number of columns and rows in DEM 211 elevation of row 1 column 1 221 elevation of row 2 column 1 1231 elevation of row 3 column 1 IZncol nrow elevation of row nrow column ncol Figure 20 5 DEM File Format DEM ORIGIN 1000 0 1500 0 IDELTAX 30 0 DELTAY 30 0 ELEVATIONS 450 300 1250 Figure 20 6 Sample DEM File The cards used in the DEM file are as follows Card Type DEM S S Description File type identifier Must be on first li
545. tion 1 id 4 byte int 1 TINs 2 Boreholes 3 2D meshes 4 2D grids 5 2D scatter points 6 3D meshes 7 3D grids 8 3D scatter points Card Type SFLT S OO Card ID 110 Field Variable Size Vale Description Cid 1 gt sizefloat 4byteint 4 8 or16 Number of bytes sd Card Type SFL gt gt O Card ID 120 Description Identifies the number of bytes that will be used in the remainder of the file for status flags 1 2 or 4 Required YES Field Variable Size Value Description 1 sizetlag 4byteint 1 2 0r4 Numberofbytes Card Type BEGSCL 20 18 WMS Description Marks the beginning of a set of cards defining a scalar data set Required _ YES Card Type BEGVEC Card ID 140 Description Marks the beginning of a set of cards defining a vector data set Required YES Card Type VECTYPE CardiD 150 Description Identifies the type of vector data that will be read and where to apply it Required This card is only required if the vector data is associated with elements cells If this card is not present it is assumed that the data are associated with Field Variable Size Value Description 1 type 4 byte int 0 The vectors will be applied to the nodes gridnodes 1 The vectors will be applied to the elements cells Card Type OBJID Card ID Mee Description The id of the
546. tion M Automatically determine label spacing Parallel to contour Label spacing 3 Always horizontal Remove Current Labels cancel Ao Figure 2 16 Contour Label Options Dialog Labels can be added to contours one of two ways 1 If the contour label option is selected in the Contours tab labels are automatically placed on the contours corresponding to the specified contour intervals 2 In some modules contour labels can be added manually to contours by selecting the Contour Labels tool al in the Tool Palette and clicking on the contours where labels are desired By default the data set value corresponding to the point that was clicked is computed and a label corresponding to the nearest contour value is drawn centered at the point that was clicked If the mouse button is held down a box showing the outline of the label is drawn The box can then be positioned precisely with the mouse A line is drawn from the box to the point that was clicked to help the user keep track of the contour 2 34 WMS 2 10 3 2 10 4 that was selected Contour labels can be deleted by holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on a label Refresh When editing the image in the Graphics Window it occasionally becomes necessary to update the display or refresh the screen by redrawing the image Whenever possible WMS automatically updates the display However in several cases small parts may be obscured by editing procedures
547. tion and stream id In addition land use id s and soil type id s used in computing composite curve and runoff coefficient values see section 15 2 are also stored as DEM attributes also called grid cells These attributes are imported using the DEM Masks gt DEM Attributes option Figure 2 8 shows the different options for importing DEM attributes You must also specify whether the file format is ARC INFO GRASS or TOPAZ Once the attribute and file type options are chosen you must then find and open the file containing the attributes Flow direction Flow accumulation Figure 2 8 DEM Mask Dialog GIS Grids as 2D Grids The ARC INFO and GRASS Grids to 2D Grids command can be used to read either an ARC INFO or GRASS ASCII grid file The file is read and a grid created in WMS which conforms to the imported grid The ASCII values for the grid cell centers are used to create the elevation function for the grid Such grids can then be visualized using WMS s tools for grids see Chapters 16 and 17 or used to create CASC2D finite difference models see Chapter 19 General Tools 2 19 ARC INFO TIN to TIN An ARC INFO TIN can be imported if it has been exported from ARC JINFO using the UNGENERATETIN command with the NET option This particular format saves node vertex coordinates a list of edges and a list of triangles making it possible to restore the TIN topology in WMS exactly as it was in ARCIINFO Once import
548. tion associated with it at a time Therefore if there is a flood plain currently associated with the TIN it is replaced with the new flood plain created by the delineation when this command is selected However the display of any previous flood plains is not erased Thus if a flood plain is currently displayed on a TIN and stage values are altered and a new delineation selected the new flood plain will be displayed on top of the old flood plain This could be useful in determining the optimum parameters for flood plain delineation Refreshing the display will cause any old flood plains to disappear Exporting to a GIS coverage It is often the case that you would like to store your flood plain boundary in a GIS and therefore want to export from WMS in a shape file format Since the flood plain is really stored in WMS as a contour line the contour of zero stage it cannot be readily converted to feature objects where it could be exported as a shape file see section 2 8 7 One way to get around this problem is to create a generic coverage and then digitize around the flood plain boundary and export the feature objects as a shape file This will work for small flood plains but will become tedious for larger ones all things considered though using WMS in this fashion will still be more efficient than trying to do the same thing with other procedures For more complicated boundaries you may want to use the following work around 1 Turn o
549. tion is chosen then all contours will be displayed using the specified default color For either of the first two options where color ramps are used you can specify the intensity hue used for the minimum and maximum contour values The ramp shown at the top of the Color Scheme group defines the available range of intensities hues The minimum intensity hue corresponds to the location of the top slider bar and the maximum intensity hue corresponds to the bottom Slider If the Reverse button is selected the locations of the minimum and maximum intensities hues change places The larger ramp shown at the bottom of the Color Scheme group shows the currently defined range Contour Options ul Contours Color Ramp Contour Label Options Color Options Default color El Color Method Ramp of hues O Ramp of intensity Solid Color Color Scheme Figure 2 15 Color Ramp Options Dialog General Tools 2 33 Labels The Labels tab Figure 2 16 in the Contour Options dialog is used to set the label color label size etc of contour labels placed automatically or manually The default spacing value controls the placement of labels when labels are generated automatically Contour Options Ed Contours Color Ramp Contour Label Options Label Placement Label Properties Ea Color of Contour label Decimal places E Label Spacing Value of closest contour O Yalue under cursor Label Orienta
550. tion larger than the threshold As an alternative to automatically creating outlet points a set of outlet feature points can be created manually using the Create Points tool prior to using the DEM gt Stream Arcs command The Stream Feature Arcs Opts dialog shown in Figure 5 6 can then be used to specify that streams will be created from the pre defined outlets only Stream Feature Arc Opts _ Display stream feature arc creation Use feature points to create streams 250 Threshold value Cancel Figure 5 6 Stream Feature Arc Opts Dialog Outlet points can be created at any DEM point but should be in a DEM point that has a high enough flow accumulation to pass the threshold The Flow Accumulations display option can be very useful for identifying these points and for determining what an appropriate threshold value is The DEM Streams gt Feature Arcs command can also be very useful for defining stream arcs which are later used for creating a TIN surface Defining Basins Each time a feature outlet point is created a basin for each upstream feature arc 1s created for the hydrologic modeling tree This means that the stream arcs themselves are associated with a basin even before the Define Basins command is issued When the command is used the DEM points intersected by the stream arcs are assigned the basin id already given to the arcs The Define Basins procedure then continues by tracing the flow paths of the remaining
551. tion of a TIN or DEM processing for delineating watershed and sub basin boundaries and 3 soil land use rainfall or other data which can be used to define important hydrologic modeling parameters such as curve number CN or rainfall zone Creating Watershed Models Directly With an ever increasing availability of GIS and other digital data delineated stream networks and basin boundaries for a given watershed may already exist In order to take advantage of this type data when available WMS allows hydrologic models to be built directly from three different features of the map module polygons representing basin boundaries arcs representing a stream network and nodes representing watershed and sub basin outlet points This means that data imported from an ArcView shapefile can be used directly to set up the hydrologic model Further since attributes from the shapefiles can also be read in much of the hydrologic data developed with the GIS tool can be used to define input parameters of the given hydrologic model It also means that a tiff image map or other data can be used to establish the boundaries of the watershed at the proper scale so that lengths and areas 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 Map Module 3 3 determined from the feature objects are correct or simply used as a scaled schematic representation of the watershed in such cases area and length values would have to be determined by some other means and defined in appropriate dialo
552. tions If the Display Legend option is selected a vertical strip of colors with a legend of corresponding data set values is displayed in the upper left corner of the Graphics Window whenever the color ramp is used to display a TIN DEM etc The options at the upper right of the dialog control how the contours are computed Three contouring methods are available 1 The default method is Normal Linear Contours and causes the contours to be displayed as piece wise linear strings 2 If the Color fill between contours button is selected the region between adjacent contour lines is filled with a solid color 3 If the Cubic Spline Contours button is selected the contours are drawn as cubic splines Drawing the contours as splines can cause the contours to appear smoother Occasionally loops appear in the splines or the splines cross neighboring contour splines These problems can sometimes be fixed by adding tension to the splines Color Ramp The Color Ramp tab Figure 2 15 allows you to control the contouring color methods There are three different coloring options 2 32 WMS 1 If the Ramp of Intensity option is chosen the ramp can be defined as a continuous from white to through black variation of the specified default color color 2 If the Ramp of Hues option is chosen the ramp can be defined as a continuous variation of hues from blue through red using the hue saturation value color model 3 If the Solid Color op
553. titled mat Channel input untitled cip Elevation Juntitled ele section parameters untitled tb Roughness Juntitled rgh a section geometry Juntitled xy Initial depth untitled idp Links map Juntitled Ink storage capacity untitled st Nodes map untitled nod Interception coefficient Discharge profile petted Retention depth Water surface Juntitled wt Area reduction depth untitled ars Hydraulic conductivity huntitled ks surface depth Juntitled dep Capillary pressure head Infiltration depth untitled int Porosity untitled phi Surface moisture untitled sur Initial moisture content Juntitled imz Rate of infiltration funtitled fav Pore saturation mdes untitled pds Distributed raimall Juntitled din Residual saturation untitled res Channel depth untitled cdp Lakes map Juntitled km Channel discharge untitled cdq Outlet hydrograph untitled hyd Fain gage file untitled gag Aun summary file untitled sum In hydrograph tile feellhyd loc Albedo untitled alb Dut hydrograph tle feellhyd hyd wWwiilting point untitled vut untitled veg Transmission coefficient Lancel Canopy resistance Juntitled can NA i Figure 19 1 CASC2D Save Project Dialog 19 4 2 Reading a CASC2D Project The Read Project File command is used to read in all options and accompanying files for a CASC2D project 19 5 Creating A Grid The first task in defining a CASC2D model is to create a finite difference grid with accompanying e
554. tive regions of the DEM can be eliminated altogether with this command The main reason for deleting inactive cells is to reduce the size of the rectangular area of the DEM to free up memory resources for other operations Since a DEM region must always be rectangular deleted DEM points within the bounding rectangular will take on a NO DATA status 4 6 Smoothing DEMs 4 6 1 In order to conserve the amount of disk spaced required to store a DEM elevations are rounded to the nearest integer value This causes elevation changes to occur in discrete steps rather than smoothly as would be the case in nature In regions of low relief rounded elevations can cause an area to be artificially flat These flat areas and all elevations can be restored to their natural smoothness by using the smoothing options found in the DEMs menu When the Smooth DEM command is issued each elevation is smoothed according to the options specified in the Smoothing Options dialog GIS software such as ARC INFOS and GRASS contain options for DEM smoothing as well A grid file smoothed by one of these systems can be imported into WMS eliminating the need to use the DEM smoothing utilities Smoothing Options Different smoothing options can be set to specify how the smoothing process operates Figure 4 2 shows the Smoothing Options dialog and a description of the different options follows DEMs 4 7 DEM Smoothing Options Filter Size 3 3 C55 Number o
555. to shallow concentrated flow The following equation based entirely on the length and slope of the arc is used to compute the travel time for the shallow concentrated segment of flow where L Length of flow segment k intercept coefficient values are given in Table 3 3 of the FHWA HEC 22 manual and are repeated in the table below S slope of the ground surface as a percent Intercept coefficients for velocity vs slope relationships of equation 16 5 Land Cover Flow Regime K Forest with heavy ground litter hay meadow 0 076 Trash fallow or minimum tillage cultivation contour or strip cropped woodland 0 152 Short grass pasture 0 213 Cultivated straight row 0 274 Nearly bare and untilled alluvial fans in western mountain regions 0 305 Grassedwateways 87 Unpaved ooo y y OO Paved area small upland gullies 0 619 Open Channel Flow Travel time for open channel flow segments is computed using the following form of Manning s equation for open channel flow 15 30 WMS where L open channel flow length n Manning s roughness coefficient for channel flow Suggested values are given in Table 3 4 of the FHWA HEC 22 manual and are repeated in the table below K empirical coefficient equal to 1 49 for English units and 1 0 for Metric R hydraulic radius ft S channel slope ft ft Values of Manning s coefficient for channels and pipes
556. ts If the Pits option is set all pits will be displayed Pits correspond to local minima on a TIN where water would congregate They make up a subset of the default outlets since flow terminates there Soil Columns Display a soil column definition for an X Model simulation Split Flow Because of the way vertices are triangulated it is possible to have splitting flow paths from some of the TIN vertices Such vertices can create problems for the drainage delineation algorithms if the different flow paths end up in separate basins Toggling this display option will cause all such vertices to be displayed so that they can be corrected Determining which vertices are split flow vertices can be time consuming so you will want to turn this option off once split flow vertices have been corrected Soil Group If this option is set a color fill pattern for the hydrologic soil group will be used to display the triangle The Soil Type Display Options button allows you to toggle on off the display of individual soil types You may also change the color and or pattern used for a given soil 6 8 6 4 6 5 WMS 6 3 18 6 3 19 6 3 20 Land Use If the Land Use option is set all triangles of similar land use will be filled with a unique color pattern A land use table must be defined using the Import command from the File menu and selecting the Land use Soil type tables option Land use and soil types are assigned to TIN triangles whe
557. ts of the 2D analysis can then be contoured on the grid or displayed with hidden surface removal and color fringes to display the variation in the computed results 1 3 6 Scatter Point Module The Scatter Point module is used to interpolate from groups of scattered data points to grids The Scatter Point module can be used to interpolate from a set of scattered xy points representing something like rain gages to a finite difference grid or to basin centroids for establishing rainfall curves for HEC 1 A variety of interpolation schemes are supported 1 4 Considerations For Reading Existing HEC 1 Files WMS is capable of reading HEC files that have been manually created using a text editor or some other program However there are a couple of problems which need to be considered and may have to be altered either before or after reading in one of these files e There can be no blank fields in a file read in by WMS If a field is left blank HEC assumes the value of this field is O However errors will occur or data will be lost if a file with a blank field is read into WMS e Names for all KK Hydrograph Station identifying card records must be unique This problem wont surface until you run HEC with a new file created by WMS and try to read the hydrographs In such cases all hydrographs will displayed at the first hydrograph station KK record with the duplicate name This can be changed either inside or outside of WMS e WMS read
558. ts to another Model units Parameter units Basin Areas Square miles M Update model parameters l Distances Feet v Drain Data Display Opts cence Figure 7 3 Parameters Units Dialog 7 7 11 Computing Area Between Elevations The Compute Area Between Elevations command is useful for determining areas in different elevation zones as part of a snow melt analysis This operation can also be done when defining snow melt parameters for HEC see section 10 10 1 Model units are assumed to be either in feet or meters and subsequent areas are converted to square miles or square kilometers according to the metric flag set in the HEC 1 Job Control dialog This same procedure is also useful for determining storage capacity curves It is incorporated into the procedure outlined in section 7 6 1 but can also be used to manually determine an area elevation curve 7 8 Converting Drainage Data to Feature Objects GIS Data In order to provide a way to export watersheds delineated from TIN data sources to GIS they must first be converted to feature objects This can be done using the Drainage Data gt Feature Objects command When performing this operation the TIN is deleted and the drainage boundary and stream network are converted to feature polygons and feature arcs The Export command from the File menu can then be used to save the feature objects to a shapefile so that the information can easily be transferred to a GIS se
559. u are working on i e TR 55 time of concentration TR 20 lag time etc You may also compute travel times for selected basins or outlets using the Compute Travel Time command from the Calculators menu This dialog is shown in Figure 15 2 and will allow you to choose between the two methods for a selected basin only the map module method is available for a selected outlet The computed travel time can then be assigned to the relevant input parameter for the selected hydrologic model the hydrologic model corresponds to the current default model and can be changed using the drop down combo box Calculate Tc Travel time o 000 min Compute Basin Data Compute Map Data Default model Rational Method a Assign to Model Figure 15 2 Compute Travel Time Dialog Computing Travel Times from Basin Data WMS computes many geometric parameters when using the Compute Basin Data command for either a TIN or DEM These parameters form the basis of the empirical equations used to compute lag time and time of concentration The Basin Time Computation dialog shown in Figure 15 3 allows you to select from a series of pre defined equations Dodson Associates 1992 or create your own equation using any of computed basin parameters to compute time of concentration or lag time If the equation is a function of variable not Hydrologic Hydraulic Calculators 15 7 computed by WMS then you will have to enter the value in this dialog before
560. u to open all three themes by importing the super file This extension is placed in the wmshydro directory under the main wms directory when installing WMS It is also available on the WMS website and has a separate document describing its usage In order to be activated in ArcView you must move the extension file avx to the Ext32 directory found under the ArcView installation directories Streams as Feature Points The Streams to Feature Points option can be used to read in a file of xy or XyZ points defining a stream and convert them to feature points These files can be created using any digitizing software but the format of the file must be as is shown in section 20 14 DLG Files as Feature Arcs The DLG to Feature Arcs option allows a Digital Line Graph file to be imported and points connected into a series of arcs USGS DLG files like General Tools 2 15 DEMs can be downloaded via the Internet see the introduction to the DEMs module and are available for many parts of the U S In addition to streams DLG files contain points for highways canals railroads and many other linear map features When importing you may select whether to import all points or only those points which are flagged as stream points You may also decide whether or not consecutive points should be linked together as arcs DLG files often contain more data than is necessary for creating models in WMS Typically they are useful for getting a good i
561. uations exist for determining the time of concentration Two different methods exist for computing the time of concentration using computed basin data or using map data see section 15 3 The list of basin geometric attributes computed automatically when basins have been delineated from a TIN can be useful in many of these equations These attributes can be viewed and edited from within the TR 20 Basin data dialog by choosing the Basin Geometrical Attributes button Basin Geometric Attributes When drainage data is computed you can select this button to view and edit the geometric attributes of a basin including the basin area the flow length and the basin slope The different basin attributes can be viewed and edited only after computing the basin data The basin data may be computed by selecting the Compute Basin Data command from the Drainage menu TIN module the Compute Basin Data command from the Drainage menu in the DEM module or the Update Basin Data command from the Feature Objects menu in the Map module Compute TC Basin Data Pressing this button will bring up the Unit hydrograph parameter computation dialog In this dialog you can define the type of computation method to use in computing the time of concentration for TR 20 After exiting this dialog the time of concentration lag time time to peak and Snyder coefficient will be calculated Many of these coefficients and times can be used in HEC models and the time of
562. uctured hydrologic models can be created automatically from points lines and polygons Since these data are often already developed and stored in a GIS importing from ARC INFO and ArcView section 2 8 6 or DXF files section 3 5 is easily done An ArcView extension has been developed to make the transition from GIS to WMS as simple as possible The extension WMS Hydro and accompanying documentation may be downloaded from the WMS website Using this extension many of the processes outlined in the steps that follow can be done inside of ArcView prior to importing data in WMS The following are the basic steps to create watershed models from GIS data within WMS 1 4 WMS 1 Obtain a Map or Already Developed GIS or CAD Data The first step 1s to obtain a map that defines the streams and basins which will be modeled If such a map already exists digitally as a CAD drawing or as part of a GIS database then it can be imported directly and the next step skipped 2 Digitize the Map The map can then be digitized using a tablet and standard digitizing software outside of WMS and then imported as a CAD or GIS file or it can be created using heads up or on screen digitizing inside of WMS In order to do heads up digitizing you will need one of two things 1 digital elevation data that can be contoured by WMS or 2 a scanned tiff image that can be read into WMS and used as a background map a Y AE pa A Coste eA
563. ues associated with a timestep Should be repeated __ foreach time step SS Required MES OOOO Field Variable Size Value Description For the first time step this value indicates that all cells are active 1 Status flags will be listed 1 istat SFLG int 0 Use status flags from previous time step 2 time SFLT int i time step value This number is ee A ignored if there is only one time step stat SFLG int 0 Inactive 1 Active One status flag should be listed for each cell or element These flags are included val SFLT real The scalar values Card Type ENDDS Card ID 210 Description Signals the end of a set of cards defining a data set Required YES 20 20 WMS 20 10 GRASS Grid Files CASC2D Maps WMS can import GRASS ASCII grid for use as a background DEM Since it is a simple file format other digital elevation data can be formatted in the same way and then imported into WMS using the Import Grid command in the Dems menu The CASC2D model also uses GRASS ASCII grid files format for all of the map parameters The GRASS ASCII format is shown in Figure 20 16 and an example of file is shown in Figure 20 17 north n Northern boundary grid coordinate south S Southern boundary grid coordinate least e Eastern boundary grid coordinate west w Western boundary grid coordinate rows nrows Number of rows in the
564. ugh any of the given outlets They should not be deleted if further editing is to be done However once all sub basins have been properly defined they can be deleted in order to reduce the size of the model to the region of interest 7 12 WMS 7 7 8 7 7 9 7 7 10 Draw Flow Patterns This command is used to draw a flow path for each triangle in the TIN While it does not store stream networks and basin boundaries in memory it aids in the initial understanding of the terrain model and helps identify regions which need editing before the actual creation of outlets stream networks and drainage basins takes place For large TINs the number of triangles which have their flow paths drawn can be reduced by changing the number of triangle flowpath value in the Drainage tab of the Display Options dialog Overland and channel flow are represented by the downhill overland color and downhill channel color as specified in the Drainage tab of the Display Options dialog If a basin is selected prior to issuing the command then flow paths will only be drawn for the triangles that are part of the selected basin Draw Watershed The entire watershed for an outlet point i e the sum of all upstream sub basins can be displayed by first selecting the outlet point and then choosing the Draw Watershed command The Select Vertex tool must be active in order to select the desired outlets If basin data has been computed the area enclosed by the watershed bou
565. ulation command from the Rational menu Rational Method Basin name Dryerk Units 8 English Metric Bazin E IDF Curves A 26 47 Time of Concentration min 1 Compute Te Basin Data Check model Define Hydrographs Update Q Eompute lie han Data j ampute ie Map Data Esport Flow Table Copy To Clipboard Please correct the following error before computing hydrographs Outlet IDE Cumes Data Entry Completed Time of Concentration rir Routing lag time Eompute Travel Timesi Delne Resear Figure 13 2 The Rational Method Dialog The Rational Method dialog allows you to enter all of the necessary values for computing a peak flow for a selected catchment area or confluence point The values for C i and A represent the values of the currently selected basin or outlet 13 3 1 Editing Basin Data If multiple basins are selected while the dialog is opened the edit fields are grayed out not dimmed and follow the rules of multi selection For example 13 3 2 Rational Method 13 5 if you wish to set the value of 1 for all basins then you can select all basins open the Rational Method dialog click once on the edit field for 1 and specify the value C could be set in a similar fashion while A cannot be changed when multiple basins are selected All values used for computing peak flow with the rational method are stored with the basin attributes so that each time you selec
566. ulators 15 23 This equation given in 15 31 was developed for overland flow on bare earth For overland flow on grassy earth t should be multiplied by 2 0 On concrete and asphalt surface it should be multiplied by 0 4 An adjustment is made for watersheds with a CN number less than 80 using the following equation pcre LEBO CN AOA Lasso 15 31 The CN value must be defined for the given model HEC 1 TR 20 etc otherwise a default CN of 50 is used Ramser Time of Concentration Equation Ramser 1927 developed an equation for computing the time of concentration in well defined channels The equation is based on the length and slope of the channel E AS a E E E E 15 32 where tc time of concentration in minutes Le length of channel reach in feet S average channel slope in ft ft c For flow in concrete channels t should be multiplied by 0 2 Fort Bend County Equation The county of Fort Bend Texas Espey Huston amp Associates 1987 used the equation shown in equation 15 33 to compute t In addition to defining an equation for time of concentration to be used in the Clark unit hydrograph method they also defined a relationship for the Clark watershed storage coefficient that is given by equation 15 34 5 01149 M29 9 perce tae alact A AA 15 33 L 0 57 A R 128 sp log A EEA tide anette 15 34 t Clark time of concentration in hours 15 24 WMS 15 3 2 R Clark watershed storage coefficient L Length of longes
567. urth field RESIDUAL_SATURATION Residual saturation in fifth field MOSITURE_CONTENT Moisture content in sixth field SURFACE_ROUGHNESS Manning s n in seventh field INTERCEPTION_COEFFICIENT Interception coefficient in eighth field STORAGE_CAPACITY Storage capacity in ninth field INITIAL DEPTH Initial depth values in tenth field RETENTION Storage retention values in eleventh field ld Area reduction factor in twelfth Gi lid description hc ch psty pi rs mc sr ic sc id ret ar Figure 20 20 CASC2D Soils Table File Format 20 22 WMS The order of the definition cards determines the order of the property values Any property can be omitted from the definitions and it s value dropped for each soil record In other words the soils table file is self describing The card types used in the Soils table file format are self explanatory and are not listed here 20 13 Gage Files Gages are used to generate curves representing the variation of a transient data set with time at particular location in a grid Gage plots are useful in the process of calibrating a model to measured field data Gage files are used to import a set of gages and a set of measured curves at each gage This allows a set of measured curves to be compared to a set of computed curves The format of the gage file is shown in Figure 20 21 and a sample is given in F
568. urve numbers predominant soil type and other parameters required by the supported hydrologic models see section 15 2 Feature Object Types The definition of feature objects follows the paradigm used by typical GIS software that supports vector data Basic object types include points nodes vertices arcs and polygons The relationship between these objects is illustrated in Figure 3 1 By patterning the WMS data structures in this way it easy to share files with GIS databases such as ARC INFO 3 4 WMS Polygons Figure 3 1 Feature Object Types Points Points are xy locations that are not attached to an arc Points have unique id numbers and attributes Points are used in WMS when importing a set of xy or xyz values for the purpose of creating arcs or polygons Nodes Nodes define the beginning and ending xy locations of an arc They typically occur at branching points or other places where boundary conditions need to be assigned Nodes have unique ids and attributes Vertices Vertices are xy locations along arcs in between the beginning and ending nodes They are used to define the geometry of the arcs and do not have ids or attributes Arcs Lines Arcs or lines are a series of connected vertices with a beginning and ending node Arcs may have any number of vertices between nodes Whenever a point is used in the creation of an arc it 1s automatically converted to a node Arcs are used to represent streams
569. us E E a E 19 14 19615 DEFPINING CHANNBES sepais ta trusts 19 15 19 14 THE CASC2D MODEL CHECKER e 19 15 TITS RUNNINGA CASC ZD MODE cd 19 15 SLG POST PROCESSING RESULTS asado dd 19 16 20 FILE FORMATS A vente venucen een suecscvceccctoaseveatouehsacseaeeveccouctassvencecenseussiacs onc svessevenseceane 20 1 ZO INTRODUCTION ii waite iii 20 1 A hoon adeeeo an eet ea Ono A Oo eee 20 2 DOS SIAN A deer acansaesaionemaasansntuan sacs onauaneuagahensnedatiauagny sacha A E 20 3 204 DEM FILES srauni a A mes agdeoratanen E A a eesuaeniessaueate 20 5 DOD ANAE EIES nre RR 20 7 A RP AO 20 8 20 ZIP SCATIER POINT FILE St tido 20 10 ZO ASC DATA SET PIES aiii a eels 20 12 20 8 1 Using Vector and Scalar Data with Grids ui ii delata 20 15 209 DINAR DATA SE FELE S IA A ee ee 20 16 ZO NO GRASS GRID FEES CASEZDIMAPS aii ib 20 20 20IF ARCTINE ORAS CU GRID FLES A OS 20 20 20 02 CASC D SOUS TABLE PILE E endear eee ae ee 20 21 DOM CAGE PILES acetates tie vits ae toau vat c eu A hte tallies ae hate ied oa hte aad aaah eth atts 20 22 20 14 DIGKIZED STREAM PILES oan A A deed dllaiua test taveaet unas eaeaseruan 20 25 20 10 AUTOCAD STREAM HEE FORMA Tasio senusnswanatnnecsaasinadesea A A E ARETE AE 20 26 DO MGs STAGE FLES a A EA A 20 27 20T LAND USE FILES montinn a iiO 20 28 2018 SOIL TYPE RUNOFF COEFFICIENT FILES seso a a a a a 20 30 209 ELV DROGR APE FILES onein onid A A E E a 20 31 2020 TABULAR DATA PE O ae sa eee 20 32 20 20 1 Tabular
570. us one half meter This value can be increased but care should be used in doing so in order to keep from over smoothing the original data 4 8 WMS 4 6 2 4 6 3 4 6 4 Filter Ratio The filter ratio should be between O 1 and is used to specify the weight of the central cell of the filtering matrix It can be used to establish how much effect the DEM point itself has on a newly computed elevation and how much effect the neighboring cells have For example if the filter ratio is set to 75 then 75 of the newly computed elevation will be based on the point itself and 25 will be based on the neighboring elevation points Saving Current Elevations Since the smoothing process can be iterative and the best set of options for smoothing one DEM may be different than another an option for storing original elevations exists The Restore Elevations command in the DEMs menu can be used to set elevations back once they have been smoothed so that different options may be tried Since saving elevations requires a significant amount of memory 4 bytes number of DEM points 1t may be necessary to turn this option off If original elevations are not saved they can be restored by re reading the DEM file Restoring Elevations If current elevations have been saved they may be restored at any time using the Restore Elevations command This command can be used in conjunction with the different smoothing options in order to get the best poss
571. used for interpolation a scheme must be used to find the nearest N points Two methods for finding a subset are provided in the Subset Definition dialog the global method and the local method With the global method each of the scatter points in the set are searched for each interpolation point to determine which N points are nearest the interpolation point This technique is fast for small scatter point sets but may be slow for large sets With the local scheme the scatter points are triangulated to form a temporary TIN before the interpolation process begins To compute the nearest N points the triangle containing the interpolation point is found and the triangle topology is then used to sweep out from the interpolation point in a systematic fashion until the N nearest points are found The local scheme is typically much faster than the global scheme for large scatter point sets Local Weighting Method As mentioned above it is possible to localize the search for the nearest N scatter points to the interpolation point using the topology of a TIN constructed from the scatter points Yet another scheme is available for making the interpolation process a local scheme by taking advantage of TIN topology Franke amp Nielson 1980 With this technique the subset of points used for interpolation consists of the three vertices of the triangle containing the interpolation point The weight function or blending function assigned to each scatter
572. used to create a line anywhere on the model Lines can be used to identify key locations on a model or in conjunction with 3 40 WMS 3 3 2 labeling text to enhance printed images A line is created by clicking out a polyline on the screen with the mouse and double clicking to end The attributes of lines include color style width and an arrowhead at the beginning or ending of the line EN Select Drawing Objects The Select Drawing Objects tool can be used to select previously created text rectangles ovals and lines Once selected a drawing object can be moved to another location by dragging with the cursor while the select drawing object tool 1s active Attributes of an object may also be changed by first selecting the object and then choosing the Attributes command from the Drawing Objects menu The drawing objects attributes are discussed in the next section Display Attributes When a new object is created it inherits the current attributes for that object type However any object may be selected and it s attributes changed by selecting the Attributes command from the Drawing Objects menu or by double clicking on the object with the select drawing object tool active Text Attributes The text attributes include a font and a color These can be changed using the text attributes dialog shown below Map Text Attributes Font Chooser 4 Fill behind text Font color En Fill color Upper basin Upper bazin
573. uting along all arcs with a single method The uniform redistribution with a constant interval would likely work well provided it is done on an arc by arc basis Map Module 3 31 Figure 3 18 Arcs Before Redistribution Figure 3 19 Uniform Redistribution with Constant Interval of 5 3 32 WMS Figure 3 20 Uniform Redistribution with Constant Spacing of 100 Figure 3 21 Spline Redistribution with Spacing of 100 Deleting Isolated Points Many times the density of digitized points or points imported from a DLG file is much higher than is needed to create a boundary polygon or set of stream arcs The Delete Isolated Points command can be used to eliminate all points not attached to arcs Map Module 3 33 Reversing the Direction of Arcs The Reverse Directions command can be used to reverse the direction of selected arcs This is used for stream type arcs where the direction of connectivity is important Stream arcs must always be defined by connecting point from downstream to upstream If an error was made when creating the points this command can be used to correct it An arrow is drawn on all arcs from upstream to downstream and can be used to verify that directions are correct Adding Arcs to TINs A set of arcs can be inserted as breaklines into an existing TIN using the Arcs gt Breaklines command Inserting a breakline forces triangle edges to conform to the arc New TIN vertices are created for all nodes and vertices of the ar
574. vation processing including raster smoothing flow accumulation computations basin and stream delineation and ordering and development of other watershed parameters If you are interested in obtaining the latest complete version of TOPAZ you should write Dr Jurgen Garbrecht at the following address providing your name address phone fax and email address Dr Jurgen Garbrecht Grazinglands Research 7207 West Cheyenne St El Reno OK 73036 9 6 1 9 6 2 Drainage DEMs 5 13 If you have or obtain the complete TOPAZ program WMS is capable of writing an input file for DEDNM the primary TOPAZ module DEDNM requires as input a file containing the elevations must be named DEDNM INP and a control file named DNMCNT INP Figure 5 7 shows the DNMCNT options dialog and the following paragraphs outline what the different options are capable of Write DHHENT x Watershed outlet Ful DEM processing E Row O DEM pre processing only 2 Column I Raster checking for errors and inconsistencies Aggregation or resampling smoothing None I Smoothing of DEM raster C Aggregation Mo of smoothing passes Weight Level of aggregation ae O Resampling Level of resampling Cross cell Diagonal cell o ho Center cell o Analysis and adjust of depression outlets Output options None IY Specifications I Input data C One cell width E W Drainage Two cell width Y Subcatchment Figure 5 7 DNMCNT Options
575. verage velocity is determined using Manning s equation for open channel flow y 149 pho n where V Average channel velocity n Manning s roughness coefficient for open channel flow R hydraulic radius ft and is equal to A P A Cross sectional area of flow sq feet 15 28 WMS P Wetted perimeter ft S slope of the hydraulic grade line channel slope Slope values are determined from the arc when a TIN or DEM is present The channel calculator see section 15 4 can be used to determine the hydraulic radius In this case you will have to assume an approximate depth of flow or flow rate in order for the channel calculator to be able to compute the appropriate hydraulic radius Federal Highways The FHWA equations are taken from the Federal Highways Drainage manual Similar to the TR 55 equations defined above travel time within a basin is determined from three different flow conditions sheet flow shallow concentrated flow and open channel flow However the equations for the three different conditions are slightly different Sheet Flow Sheet flow generally occurs for the first 300 feet at the headwater of streams The following equation is used to describe sheet flow 0 6 K Y nL A egies ge ateeeg eects eee ae 15 39 Pals where K emprical coefficient equal to 933 for English units and 6 943 for Metric 1 rainfall intensity in hr n Mannings roughness coefficient for ove
576. ving HEC 1 Pile aiii 10 34 discharge hydrographs ccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 11 6 triangle A A 11 14 POUNda ata dit 6 17 editing paramMeterS oooooooonnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 11 4 CRC he 7 PMA Pg O deat es tsyinusatauanaseattatenets 6 3 denera parame le S wc cucesseeentascevueeurerseeviade 11 2 EE a e N EE EE E E 6 5 input hydrogtapiS eena 11 12 A e eer OT E E EE E E T 6 3 A A 11 17 E e E EPERE SA EEEE E T E 6 2 making AC AA a 9 4 in multiple basins oooooonncnccnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnno 7 11 AOLE O EN E EETA is 11 5 NETS ETAO ds 6 18 precipitato isea ot ahaancasts 11 4 A aa a 6 17 reached 11 10 A A A A 6 2 Reading Existing ccccccccssecccccsseeeeseeseees 1 26 tMangUlaO ura 6 3 6 12 reads tiles da 11 16 A a teens damon aceasta 6 14 ESCOT aana n 11 14 convex h ll method sica 6 13 TOUS MEMOS adi ccs 11 10 creating a TIN from vertices cccccccccnoncc s 6 14 routing DAMOS ia 11 10 Delauney tecate 6 6 6 16 18 15 routing parameters o oocccnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnss 11 9 MPA dicas 6 13 A uel adiestdase ag aie iaedeecsvie 11 16 enclosing triangle method 6 13 RUNOFF parameters sitiado 11 6 enclosing triangle plus fill method 6 13 Starts CLINIC dose 11 3 OPUS aaa 6 13 Steps to define a model oooooncnccccnnncn 11 1 remanculal a 6 10 time Incrementa ao aii 11 3 TINs from feature objects and DEM 3 33 time OF CONCENITANOM e 11 8 truncation Od AENA E E
577. vs plan it may be useful to generate a contour or fringe plot showing the difference between the solutions It is possible to generate a data set representing the difference between two data sets using the data calculator However the two data sets must be 17 8 WMS 17 7 2 associated with the same grid before the data calculator can be used The data sets from one of the grids can be transferred to the other grid as follows l Zi Load the first grid and its data set into memory Convert the grid to a scatter point set using the Grid gt Scatter Points command Delete the first grid by selecting the Delete All command from the Edit menu Load the second grid and its data set into memory Switch to the 2D Scatter Point module and select an interpolation scheme using the Interpolation Options command in the Interpolation menu Interpolate the data set to the second grid by selecting the to 2D Grid command from the Interpolation menu At this point both data sets will be associated with the second grid and the data calculator can be used to compute the difference between the two data sets Grid gt TIN A new TIN can be created from a 2D grid by selecting the Grid gt TIN command from the Grid menu Two triangles are created from each cell in the grid The active scalar data set becomes the z value of TIN vertices CHAPTER 18 El 2D Scatter Points 18 1 18 2 Introduction The 2D Scatter Point
578. w Base flow can be entered in TR 20 from the Job Control dialog by selecting the Define Base flow button There are two ways for defining base flow in TR 20 One way is to define a constant base flow The second way 1s to define a triangular base flow in the watershed by specifying a volume in inches a peak time in hours and a base time in hours By selecting the appropriate option you can define either a triangular or a constant base flow for your watershed 11 4 Entering Editing 7R 20 Parameters Attributes or parameters for all TR 20 hydrograph stations are defined and or later edited using the Edit TR 20 Parameters dialog This dialog is accessed by selecting the Edit TR 20 Parameters command from the TR 20 menu or when TR 20 is the active model see Figure 11 2 by double clicking on basin outlet or diversion from the Graphics Window TR 20 Interface 11 5 Edit TR 20 Parameters Basin TR 20 Record Routing TA 20 Records RUNOFF Basm Wata REACH Routing Data RESYOR Reservoir Routing Diversion TR 20 Record TR 20 Tabular Records DIVERT Diversion Data STRUCT Reservoir Data ESECTION Channel Data Previous Hydrograph Station Nest Hpdrograph Station gt Done Figure 11 2 Edit TR 20 Parameters Dialog If a basin outlet or diversion is selected before issuing the command then data for that object is loaded for editing This dialog lists the TR 20 hydrograph station parameters which can be edited by sele
579. w When this tool is active a new gage is created by clicking in the Graphics Window at the desired location of the gage the Graphics Window must be in plan view when creating gages The xy coordinates of the gage are defined by the cursor position and the user is prompted for the z coordinate The x y and z coordinates of a new gage can be edited using the Edit Window In addition once a gage has been defined with the Create Gages tool the gage can be edited using the Gages dialog 6 The Select Gages Tool The Select Gages tool is used to select previously defined gages A set of selected gages can be deleted by hitting the DELETE key or by selecting the Delete command from the Edit menu The coordinates of a selected gage can be edited using the Edit Window The location of a gage can also be edited by holding down the mouse button when a gage is selected and dragging the gage 16 12 WMS 16 8 3 This tool is also used to control what is plotted in the Gage Plot Window Only the curves associated with selected gages are plotted The Gage Plot Manager Once a set of gages has been defined one or more plots can be generated in the Hydrograph Window representing the variation vs time of any of the transient data sets associated with grids interpolated to the gages Up to five plots may be generated at once Any combination of data sets can be displayed on a single plot The curves are plotted only for gages which have been selected usi
580. w can be updated by tabbing or by clicking the cursor outside the current edit field 3 ENCLOSE ALL DEMs This button can be used to force the edges of the bounding to rectangle to correspond to the limits of the DEM files which have been added to this point By default when a new DEM file is added the bounding rectangle is adjusted to enclose all DEMs The thinning factor can be used to reduce the number of elevation points read A thinning factor of 2 means that every other row and column would be read reducing the number of total points by a factor of 4 A factor of three means that every third row and column would be read reducing the total by a factor of 9 etc The elevation units toggle can be used to specify whether imported DEM points have meter or feet for units of elevation If a DEMs base elevation units are feet and the toggle specified meters all elevations are converted when reading This is particularly important when trying to read two adjacent DEMs with different base elevation units NOTE This option does not change the base planimetric units of the DEM and you should make the elevation units consistent with the planimetric units in order to ensure that slopes are computed properly when computing basin geometric parameters At the bottom of this dialog the total number of DEM points from all DEM files which have been added and the approximate number of points inside the bounding rectangle are displayed These numbers can
581. were furnished with a License Diskette with your shipment use this method for installing the program license Note that this method only works for computers operating with Windows 3 x and Windows 95 If you are using another operating system such as Windows NT you will need to use an alternate licensing method 1 Place the License Diskette into your computer hard drive 2 Using Windows Explorer or Windows File Manager run the LICENSE EXE application contained on the License Disk 3 The LICENSE software license program will prompt you completely through the software license process If you need to uninstall the software license from the computer it is installed on the LICENSE program can again be used WMS Installation Guide Password License The password license method can be used to enable the software on a computer that the software license does not work with e g Windows NT in which a hardware lock has not been purchased The first time you bring up WMS a message telling you that you are running an Evaluation Copy will be displayed This message will appear anytime WMS is run on a computer that does not have a program license To install a password license follow these steps l Start up WMS 2 Select the Register command from the File Menu The Register dialog box will appear The Register dialog box will list a program security string that is unique for the computer it is to be installed on It also c
582. wn the stream from node to node whereas when a flow path intersects a pipe it continues overland across the pipe 7 5 3 Delete Stream Segments Deletes the segment of the stream between two selected stream nodes An outlet point is inserted at the upstream node If a single stream node is selected this command deletes the portion of the stream network from the selected stream node upward including the selected stream node 7 5 4 Delete All Streams The Delete All Streams command deletes all stream networks Outlet points will remain after the streams are deleted 7 5 5 Display Stream Profile The Display Stream Profile command is used to display elevation profile between two selected stream nodes Because of the limited resolution of most elevation data sets it is difficult to get a continuous set of stream bed elevations Within this dialog you can select and edit the elevation of individual stream nodes or you can select two different stream nodes from the profile plot and linearly interpolate the elevation of all nodes in between When using this command you must select at least two stream nodes see section 2 9 2 for multi selection of TIN vertices and the second one selected must be upstream of the first 7 6 Reservoirs A set of triangles can be grouped together to create a reservoir When creating reservoirs an outlet point must be specified for the triangles so that any flow path intersecting a triangle belonging to a rese
583. y To end a vertex string press RETURN or double click on the last vertex in the string Another vertex string can then be selected ES Create Vertices The Create Vertices tool is used to manually add vertices to a TIN It can only be used in plan view When this tool is selected clicking on a point within the Graphics Window will place a new vertex at that point What happens to the vertex after 1t is added whether and how it is triangulated into the TIN depends on the settings in the Vertex Options dialog under the TINs menu 6 2 6 6 2 7 6 2 8 6 2 9 6 2 10 TINS 6 3 These settings can easily be used to digitize elevation data from scanned images of contour data as described in section 6 5 Al create Triangles The Create Triangles tool is used to manually create new triangles Triangles are normally created by triangulating a set of points automatically However this tool 1s useful for localized editing and refining a TIN To use the Create Triangles tool you may either e Select three vertices that will form the triangle The vertices can be selected in either clockwise or counter clockwise order e Drag a box around three vertices that will form the triangle The ESC key can be used to abort the creation of a triangle once you have started selecting vertices 45 ISwap Edges The Swap Edges tool swaps the edges of two adjacent triangles and is usually used to make local adjustments to a TIN To use the tool s
584. y and p is the number of points in the neighborhood of Pp with non zero local coordinates Bounding Window As shown in Figure 18 10 the Thiessen polygons for scatter points on the perimeter of the TIN are open ended polygons Since such polygons have an infinite area they cannot be used directly for natural neighbor interpolation In order to make the area of these polygons finite a bounding box or window is superimposed on the scatter point set Figure 18 12 Polygons for points on the exterior of the scatter point set are clipped or truncated to the bounding window Thiesson Polygon Delauny Network Triangulation Bounding Window Figure 18 12 Bounding Window Used in Natural Neighbor Interpolation With finite Thiessen polygon areas on the perimeter of the scatter point set it is possible to perform extrapolation estimate values for interpolation points outside the convex hull of the scatter point set as well as interpolation However the value computed by extrapolation are somewhat influenced by the relative size of the bounding window with respect to the size of the scatter point set The larger the bounding window the greater the influence of the perimeter scatter points on the extrapolated values If the bounding window is extremely large the extrapolated values will be influenced only by the points on the convex hull of the scatter point set If the bounding window is not significantly larger than the scatter point s
585. y Ai Aa A EE LENEE EEN EEEE EIEEE SREE 15 47 where AV The volume between areas A and A A surface area i h vertical distance E E between surface areas A and A E elevation of surface area i The same equation is used to compute the volume between each adjacent set of surface areas with the bottom area assumed to be 0 A TIN can be used to automatically create and store for use in the detention basin calculator the elevation volume relationship See section 7 6 1 for details on how this can be done If the basin geometry option is chosen then an elevation vs volume relationship is computed directly from the geometry defined for the basin Elevation Discharge Relationship Discharge data for the basin reservoir can be entered either by supplying an elevation vs discharge pairs or by defining any number and combination of spillways weirs outlets orifices and standpipes weir orifice combinations The Elevation Discharge Input dialog Figure 15 14 is used 15 40 WMS to set up the discharge data If the Known Discharge option is chosen then you will need to enter a series of Elevation and Discharge values you need the same number of values in each series to define the relationship If the Discharge Structures option is chosen you can add any number of weirs outlets and standpipes along with their individual parameters WMS will then compute an elevation discharge relationship with an appropriate elevatio
586. y default this window is not displayed the Tool Palette the Edit Window the Help Strip and the Menu Bar Figure 2 1 2 2 WMS Poo me E DIe TE i i P Cane m TTT tye W ti fin 2 Fim f pl HDi Mnfele Coarant lor impeetsa nod memipa delia eden VEA rel Artai DEA Figure 2 1 WMS Screen 2 3 Graphics Window Except for hydrographs all graphically displayed data in WMS is displayed in the large graphics window in the center of the WMS application window Graphical selection and interaction with TINs DEMs feature objects hydrologic modeling trees in previous versions the tree was displayed in a separate window but in version 6 0 and higher it is displayed in conjunction with other graphical objects in the main graphics windows is done by choosing the appropriate tool and then selecting in the graphics window The action taken when performing a selection always depends on which tool is selected 2 4 Hydrograph Window The Hydrograph Window is used to display detailed two dimensional plots of computed hydrographs storage capacity curves and other data results When one of the supported hydrologic models is used computed results are read and General Tools 2 3 displayed as small icons in the Graphics Window These hydrographs can then be selected by their icons and displayed in more detail in the Hydrograph Window The Hydrograph Window is a floating window and by default is not open The Show Hydrograph Window comman
587. year 5 minute Precipitation HYDRO 35 13 9 ee gt ee AAA gt o Bae ETA E a E y ae eS n a 2 ah en os fe y N cs FEY wat Re SEEN IO SA as o y RAD UE carte gi ISA po gt a Fed VN yd a Y A AO SS EA LN Vo SaHOND Previa ASA CAL ere s NOILVLIdID3UA BLANIW S cohen E E EE EAN oe i ater RS E ARE a E O EN E EREA H PELS ENA S ie eE Cl MORAN o A cept ARS ear E OS ETIES N j eT a L APL POPS TEN EN CEELI ATETA A oan eae yi gtr St oy i OES Toe ese E Er o EN ao CAL TT Ste Ub I E Af ao gt T Y r e f F i X baa A i i L NM wt AN A yA ae cgi RARA Ste se eee NA sma RIL ILL Sa TA en ESE A A 20 gt E ES ey TE Sa Sates reer am arco Al 5 ras gy E NA oe 13 22 WMS 13 10 100 year 15 minute Precipitation HYDRO 35 N Pi via A p N ME pe e E A o p E j we i aN a zi sl NAL ea ES WRF EN a 2 2 QA yA a ape a BART PA gt 5 A gt Ce EA sey A N i ae o city i FS seman A 3 PEE y A j ESN ae i S ancl ae SS OY A E CNDA y diosa caso QUA Y Sa ay E T 4 ai eds art sae A ao 5 A ATINA AR o AO A mien Soe macs care A ZEEE AO HE iaar eran i A RAHA A een a Rt ES A AEREOS HA in eT ial TS 5 E reo ENAH ROR E PARES ES i Y A NG Rational Method 13 23 13 1

WMS Reference Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents